Grass Valley GV Orbit Client User Guide
Annonce
Annonce
GV ORBIT
DYNAMIC SYSTEM ORCHESTRATOR VERSION 2.3.0
User Guide
13-03082-170 AG
2021-08-05
2
Notices
Patent Information
This product may be protected by one or more patents.
For further information, please visit: www.grassvalley.com/patents/
Copyright and Trademark Notice
Grass Valley
®
, GV
®
and the Grass Valley logo and/or any of the Grass Valley products listed in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of GVBB Holdings SARL, Grass
Valley USA, LLC, or one of its affiliates or subsidiaries. All other intellectual property rights are owned by GVBB Holdings SARL, Grass Valley USA, LLC, or one of its affiliates or subsidiaries. All third party intellectual property rights (including logos or icons) remain the property of their respective owners.
Copyright © 2018 - 2021 GVBB Holdings SARL and Grass Valley USA, LLC. All rights reserved.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Terms and Conditions
Please read the following terms and conditions carefully. By using GV Orbit documentation, you agree to the following terms and conditions.
Grass Valley hereby grants permission and license to owners of GV Orbit to use their product manuals for their own internal business use. Manuals for Grass Valley products may not be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying and recording, for any purpose unless specifically authorized in writing by Grass Valley.
A Grass Valley manual may have been revised to reflect changes made to the product during its manufacturing life. Thus, different versions of a manual may exist for any given product. Care should be taken to ensure that one obtains the proper manual version for a specific product serial number.
Information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Grass Valley.
Warranty information is available from the Legal Terms and Conditions section of Grass
Valley’s website ( www.grassvalley.com
).
Title GV Orbit User Guide
Part Number 13-03082-170 AG
Revision 2021-08-05, 17:18
GV Orbit
User Guide
Document History
See also the Release Notes for more information about this release. See
Publication
Date
Y-M-D Document Version Notes
2020-10-15 13-03082-170 AA Formed from merging the GV Orbit Client Quick Start Guide and GV Orbit Routing Panel User Guide . This resulting GV Orbit
Client User Guide supersedes these two documents.
Added sections covering: User management, MV Cluster and
Room Editor, MV Cluster tally configuration, and Audio bars configuration. Added a glossary of terms.
2020-19-11 13-03082-170 AB GV Orbit v1.6 items added. Includes:
• IP routing IP Configuration spreadsheet import.
2020-12-22 13-03082-170 AC GV Orbit v1.7 items added. Includes:
• Clustered multiviewer UI improvements.
• Dynamic destination mode.
2021-03-16 13-03082-170 AD Merged-in the GV Orbit Control User Guide.
2021-04-15 13-03082-170 AE Added the Audio Live Usage task.
2021.06-21 13-03082-170 AF Added the Channel Manager. New audio stream shuffling method. Improved AES67 stream handling.
2021-08-05 13-03082-170 AG Added Audio Live Redundancy Support, Panel Layouts,
Northbound Control through Sony LSM (NS-BUS Router
Matrix protocol).
3
Notices
4
toc
2 Getting Started Steps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
5
Table of Contents
Step 7: Control and Monitoring Project Setup (Professional/Enterprise) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
6
GV Orbit
User Guide
4 Manage Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
7
Table of Contents
5 Getting Started With GV Orbit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
6 Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Configuring the Logical Levels for the Devices in a Topology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Setting the Logical Levels to be Displayed in the Multilevel Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
8
GV Orbit
User Guide
Creating Categories for the Sources and Destinations in Your Topology. . . . . . . . 270
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation. . . . . . . 302
Pasting IP addresses from a Microsoft Excel worksheet into the
7 Special Device Configuration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
9
Table of Contents
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix,
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix,
Direct Flow Orchestration: How To Create a Static Flow with a Cisco
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Configuring a Device that Supports Audio Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live 421
Automatically Creating AES67 Audio Channels for Sources and Destinations . . . 435
8 Monitoring Tasks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
10
GV Orbit
User Guide
10 Administration Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC NP0016 / NP0017
11 Channel Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Configuring the Channel and Saving the Channel Settings to a Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . 483
Adding Channel Manager to Projects Created before GV Orbit Control Version 2.2.0487
12 Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
11
Table of Contents
12
GV Orbit
User Guide
Can a Bulk Routing Panel be Opened from a Custom User Panel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
13 Routing Control - XY Routing Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
13
Table of Contents
14 Multiviewer Cluster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Video Wall Configuration Workflow (Clustered Multiviewers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
View/Edit Multiviewer Information about Multiviewers in the Cluster . . . . . . . . . . 655
15 MV Cluster - Room Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 659
What is Monitor Arrangement and Multiviewer Output Assignment? . . . . . . . . . . 661
14
GV Orbit
User Guide
Step 4a-1: Open Room Editor in Assign Destinations Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
Layout Change in Dynamic Destination Assignment Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737
15
Table of Contents
16 MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
17 Audio Bars Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
Audio Configuration Dialog - PCM Audio Bars Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Audio Configuration Dialog - DolbyE Audio Bars Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
18 IP Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 777
16
GV Orbit
User Guide
Appendix A Routing Behaviours/Bindings Appendix . . . . . . . 819
Appendix B IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix . . . . . . . 823
Appendix C Network Device Advance Control (NDAC)
NP0017 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 833
Appendix D Northbound Control through Sony LSM
(NS-BUS Router Matrix protocol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 839
17
Table of Contents
18
Welcome to the GV Orbit Software User Guide
In this first chapter, there is a GV Orbit Product Introduction
and GV Orbit Introduction . The
next chapter contains Getting Started Steps and subsequent chapters provide additional
information and feature descriptions.
See
In This Document , on page 23, for a document overview.
The purpose of this guide is to provide a brief introduction to GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit
Control and its features.
When you log in to GV Orbit Client you open the Stage.
The GV Orbit Client Stage presents a series of tiles, which are arranged in the order you would perform the tasks if you were to configure a GV Orbit system from start to finish.
Each task builds on the last. It all begins by defining one or more areas. Once you have area, you can add logical levels. Then, you can create a topology.
These tasks are described in the chapters that follow.
Related Documentation
Use the following related documentation to configure GV Orbit and to better understand the available features. You can obtain the latest product documentation from the
Documentation Library section of Grass Valley’s website
( www.grassvalley.com/docs/gvorbit ).
Part Number Document Title
GVB-2-0860A-EN-DS GV Orbit Datasheet
13-03082-020 GV Orbit Welcome
13-03082-010
13-03082-090
GV Orbit Release Notes
GV Orbit Admin Guide
13-03082-110
13-03082-170
Dell 09K9WX
–
GV Orbit MapView User Guide
GV Orbit Client User Guide (this document)
Dell EMC PowerEdge XR2 Getting Started Guide
Dell EMC PowerEdge XR2 Installation and Service Manual
Latest Software
You can obtain the latest GV Orbit software from Grass Valley Technical Support. See
Valley Technical Support , on page 846.
19
Introduction
GV Orbit Product Introduction
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
GV Orbit Product Introduction
GV Orbit is a single, consolidated, overarching configuration, control and monitoring package specifically designed for the dynamic orchestration of broadcast media networks, whether they be SDI, hybrid or pure IP. The underlying client-server architecture is targeted at open standards-based IP systems with many features and functions specifically crafted to make IP easy.
‘Dynamic Orchestration’ is GV Orbit’s core strength that differentiates it from competitive systems. The ability to build, configure and change systems on-the-fly is hugely powerful, whether it is the adding/removing of devices or simply changing a name. In today’s costconscious world, fast and efficient deployment and re-purposing of systems for alternative scenarios or productions is a key requirement.
GV Orbit uses one or more GV Orbit Servers running the GV Orbit services and one or more client computers running
GV Orbit Introduction application(s), which provide the user
interface(s) to a GV Orbit system.
GV Orbit Products
The product is offered in the following basic forms:
• GV Orbit Lite
• GV Orbit Professional
• GV Orbit Enterprise
The GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise products require a GV Orbit Server (GVO-HW) and are shipped with various software license options preinstalled. The options purchased determine the overall functionality and feature set available in a GV Orbit deployment.
The GV Orbit Lite product is a free-of-charge download from the Grass Valley website; it operates without a GV Orbit Server and has basic functionality.
Options Codes
The following table outlines the GV Orbit option codes and the related feature availability.
Table 1-1: GV Orbit Products - Functionality and Options Codes
Lite Professional
Uses
Functionality
GV Orbit Client
Requires GV Orbit Control
Requires min. one GV Orbit Server a
(Free of charge)
GVO-
CFG-PRO
GVO-
MON-PRO
GVO-
CTL-PRO
Enterpri se
GVO-
CTL-ENT
Functionality:
Device Configuration
Device Upgrade
20
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Introduction
GV Orbit Introduction
Table 1-1: GV Orbit Products - Functionality and Options Codes (continued)
Lite Professional
Functionality
Design MV-8 Series Video Wall
Design MV Cluster Video Walls
Client Real-Time Video Wall b
1 Seat GV Orbit Client/GV Orbit
Control
Advanced Configuration
Bulk Upgrade
Custom Screens
Custom Screens in Web View
Alarm Logging
Routing Configuration
Hardware Panel Support
Simple Routing
Advanced Routing
Third-party Device Routing Control
Channel Manager
(Free of charge)
GVO-
CFG-PRO
GVO-
MON-PRO
GVO-
CTL-PRO
Enterpri se
GVO-
CTL-ENT
a. For system redundancy, purchase two Professional or Enterprise systems.
b. Displays H.264 video streams from compatible multiviewers (for example, MV-8 series multiviewers).
Sections and/or sub-sections of this guide are marked accordingly as being applicable to
Lite , and/or Professional (Pro), and/or Enterprise (Ent) users.
GV Orbit Introduction
GV Orbit comprises two client applications:
1 GV Orbit Client .
2 GV Orbit Control , launched from within the GV Orbit Client.
Both client applications are installable on PCs running Microsoft Windows
TM
. All the steps required to download, install and get started are covered in this guide.
GV Orbit and Existing Orbit
GV Orbit Client may be installed on the same client PC as the older Orbit client application.
Legacy Orbit projects can be opened and run by GV Orbit Client. However, any new features offered by GV Orbit will not be available in legacy Orbit projects run in GV Orbit Client.
21
Introduction
GV Orbit Project Types
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: GV Orbit projects cannot be opened by a legacy Orbit client.
GV Orbit Project Types
GV Orbit uses a project-based workflow.
The Control and Monitoring project (C&M project) is the main GV Orbit project type and is used for control and monitoring, and for routing control applications in GV Orbit
Professional and Enterprise .
Table 1-2: GV Orbit Project Types
Project Type
Product
Lite Pro Ent
Multiviewer Project
Description
Defines a video wall targeted at
MV-8 series multiviewers.
Supported Devices
MV-8 Series multiviewer devices.
IQ Multiviewer Project
Connected Multiviewer
Project
Clustered Multiviewer
Control and Monitoring
Project
(C&M project)
-
-
Defines a video wall targeted at
IQ-MV multiviewers.
IQ-MV multiviewer devices, for example, IQUCP-MV.
Pulls a Multiviewer project from a multiviewer into GV Orbit
Client for video wall editing.
Defines video walls that are served by a cluster of MV-8 series multiviewer devices.
Main project type. Includes:
• Design and deployment of custom graphical operator screens.
• Device configuration, control and monitoring.
• Device routing control.
Uses services/applications running on GV Orbit Server(s).
MV-8 Series and IQ-MV multiviewers.
MV-8 Series multiviewer devices.
Densité-protocol and RollCallprotocol devices.
Routing control:
• IP end-points
(Grass Valley and NMOS).
• Traditional/SDI
(NP-0017 and SW-P-08 protocols).
Requirements
For a full list of requirements for running GV Orbit, refer to the GV Orbit Release Notes , see
Related Documentation , on page 19.
Domain IDs and IP Ports
A GV Orbit system employs ‘domains’ to segregate internal communications. Domains are specified with a Domain ID number (1 to 252) and each Domain uses separate IP ports.
(For further information about IP Ports and Domain IDs for the GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit
Server, refer to the GV Orbit Release Notes see
Related Documentation , on page 19.)
22
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Introduction
In This Document
Note:
You can change the Domain ID numbers. When using changed Domain ID numbers, recalculate the IP port numbers; refer to the GV Orbit Release Notes
in Related Documentation , on page 19.
GV Orbit Services Requirements
Lite :
There are no GV Orbit Servers in a GV Orbit Lite installation and, as a result, no GV Orbit services in a GV Orbit Lite system.
Professional and Enterprise :
GV Orbit requires at least one GV Orbit Server running configured GV Orbit Services. Refer to related GV Orbit documentation, see
Related Documentation , on page 19. Specifically,
for information on GV Orbit services, refer to the GV Orbit Admin Guide .
In This Document
This document describes some steps for getting started with GV Orbit Client and then proceeds to describe other features.
• Chapter 2, Getting Started Steps , on page 25.
• Chapter 3, Home Screen , on page 77.
• Chapter 4, Manage Users , on page 141.
• Chapter 5, Getting Started With GV Orbit Control , on page 169.
• Chapter 6, Configuration Tasks , on page 175
• Chapter 7, Special Device Configuration Tasks , on page 331
• Chapter 8, Monitoring Tasks , on page 437
• Chapter 9, Control Tasks , on page 453
• Chapter 10, Administration Tasks , on page 465
• Routing control panels:
• Chapter 12, Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel , on page 489.
• Chapter 13, Routing Control - XY Routing Panel , on page 575.
• Clustered multiviewers (applications with multiple multiviewers):
• Chapter 14, Multiviewer Cluster , on page 637.
• Chapter 15, MV Cluster - Room Editor , on page 659.
• Chapter 16, MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration , on page 741.
• Chapter 17, Audio Bars Configuration , on page 767.
• IP configuration for IP routing:
• Chapter 18, IP Configuration , on page 777.
At the end of the document there is a handy
.
23
Introduction
In This Document
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
24
Summary contents of this chapter:
Getting Started Steps
The purpose of this chapter is to provide the minimum steps required to install, configure and get started with the GV Orbit Client application.
25
Getting Started Steps
Step 1: Download, Install and Launch
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 1: Download, Install and Launch
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
This section describes how to download/install client installers and launch GV Orbit Client.
•
Step 1.1: Download Client Installers , on page 26.
•
Step 1.2: Installation of GV Orbit Client , on page 27.
•
Step 1.3: Installation of GV Orbit Control , on page 30.
•
Step 1.4: Launch GV Orbit Client , on page 32.
Step 1.1: Download Client Installers
Download Installer for GV Orbit Lite
On the client PC:
1 Go to https://community.grassvalley.com/support/s/productdownloads
The Grass Valley product downloads login web page is shown.
2 If you already have a Grass Valley support login user name and password, then click Login and login here.
3 If you require a Grass Valley support user name and password, then click Request Portal Access , fill in your details and click Send Request to request
Grass Valley portal access.
Login information will subsequently be sent to you.
The GV Orbit Lite client installer has been downloaded.
Download Installers for GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise
GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise use one or more GV Orbit Servers which are the source of client installers in GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise systems.
Note:
Downloading of the GV Orbit Client installer is separate from the downloading of the GV Orbit Control installer.
Download both the GV Orbit Client and the GV Orbit Control installer from the GV Orbit
Server’s admin page. (Thus, client versions are kept compatible.)
For full download instructions, refer to the GV Orbit Admin Guide
On the client PC:
1 Enter the GV Orbit Server‘s IP address into a browser. (Chrome recommended.)
The GV Orbit Server Admin Login
screen appears. (See Figure 2-1.)
2 Click on each of the client installer download links to download the installers.
26
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 1.2: Installation of GV Orbit Client
Client installer download links
Fig. 2-1: GV Orbit Server Admin Login Screen
Note:
Client installers on the GV Orbit Server are updated with a server update.
After a server update, download and reinstall the clients (recommended).
Step 1.2: Installation of GV Orbit Client
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
Installation of GV Orbit Client and of GV Orbit Control is done separately.
This section covers GV Orbit Client installation, including some information about any existing, legacy Orbit installs.
(For GV Orbit Control installation, see Step 1.3: Installation of GV Orbit Control , on page 30.)
Legacy Orbit Client Users
For users with the older, legacy ‘Orbit’ client already installed on the client PC, the following applies:
• GV Orbit Client may be installed on the same client PC as the legacy ‘Orbit’ client application.
• GV Orbit Client and the legacy ‘Orbit’ client must not be run together.
• At installation, GV Orbit Client inherits registry settings from any already-installed legacy ‘Orbit’ client (for example, multicast/unicast discovery setting, and ‘recent projects’ list).
Install GV Orbit Client
Note: GV Orbit Client installs into client PC’s ‘Program Files’ folder by default.
1 Run the downloaded installer file on the client PC.
27
Getting Started Steps
Step 1.2: Installation of GV Orbit Client
Allow the installer to run by responding to any Windows accordingly.
TM dialogs
The GV Orbit Client installer ‘Setup GV
Orbit’ screen is then shown.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
2 Click Next> to begin the installation.
3 Accept the License Agreement in the following dialog and click Next> .
The installer will install into the folder of an existing installation of GV Orbit
Client.
Fig. 2-2: GV Orbit Client’s Setup Screen
User Guide
Fig. 2-3: GV Orbit Client’s Setup Screen
4 If no previous GV Orbit Client is found, then an installation folder is prompted for.
(Default folder location is C:\Program Files\Grass Valley\GV Orbit .)
5 Select a new folder, if required.
Click Next .
6 At the next dialog, click Install .
GV Orbit Client installation begins and a progress bar is shown.
7 When GV Orbit Client installation is complete, the GV Orbit Client setup
‘Completing’ screen is shown.
Fig. 2-4: GV Orbit Client Setup ‘Completing’ Screen
28
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 1.2: Installation of GV Orbit Client
8 Click Finish and the GV Orbit Client application launches and shows its initial screen.
Fig. 2-5: GV Orbit Client Setup ‘Completing’ Screen
9 Close the GV Orbit Client application.GV Orbit Client is installed.
Note:
A shortcut is available from the Microsoft Windows
-> Grass Valley -> GV Orbit.
TM Start menu: Start
Fig. 2-6: GV Orbit Client Initial Screen
Firewall
1 Check that the GV Orbit Client application is not blocked by your client PC’s firewall.
29
Getting Started Steps
Step 1.3: Installation of GV Orbit Control
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: Firewall:
‘orbit.exe’ should be on a list of allowed apps (or programs) that can communicate through the client PC’s firewall.
These PC settings may be controlled by your network administrator.
Step 1.3: Installation of GV Orbit Control
Lite Professional
Enterprise
This sub-section is applicable to GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise product versions.
Note:
The GV Orbit Control installs into a user folder on the client PC. Thus it is normally only available to the person installing the software on that PC.
1 Log into the client PC under the username / password of the person who will be operating the GV Orbit clients.
2 Run the downloaded GV Orbit Control installer file.
Allow the file to run on the client PC by responding to any dialogs accordingly.
A splash screen is shown during installation:
3 When the installation is complete, the GV Orbit Control login screen appears.
30
Fig. 2-7: GV Orbit Control Login Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 1.3: Installation of GV Orbit Control
4 Enter ‘admin’ for both the User name and the Password .
5 Enter the IP address of the GV Orbit Server in the Server text box.
6 Click Log in .
A blank GV Orbit Control screen appears.
Fig. 2-8: GV Orbit Control Screen Example
7 Close GV Orbit Control.
GV Orbit Control installation is complete.
The installation folder is in the user folder, for example:
C:\Users\A_User\AppData\Roaming\JWrapper-GVOrbitControlClient\
Note:
The GV Orbit Control installs into a user folder on the client PC. Thus it is normally only available to the person installing the software on that PC.
Note:
You can launch GV Orbit Control manually from Microsoft Windows Start menu or through GV Orbit Client application.
A shortcut is available on the client PC desktop and from the Windows TM
Start menu: Start -> Grass Valley -> GV Orbit Control.
Firewall
1 Check that the installed application is not blocked by your client PC’s firewall.
Note: Firewall :
‘GVOrbitControlClient.exe’ should be on a list of allowed apps (or programs) that can communicate through the client PC’s firewall.
These PC settings may be controlled by your network administrator.
31
Getting Started Steps
Step 1.4: Launch GV Orbit Client
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 1.4: Launch GV Orbit Client
1 GV Orbit Client may be launched from the Windows TM ‘Start’ button. (“GV Orbit”)
A splash screen is shown during start up:
And then the GV Orbit Client initial
screen is shown. See Figure 2-9.
Create New Project
Access a RollCall device control screen
Open a Network
Tree View
Information about the GV Orbit Client
Fig. 2-9: GV Orbit Client Initial Screen
Open existing Project
Open a Project recently-opened by
GV Orbit Client
(Initially grayed-out)
Options
To GV Orbit documentation
To Grass Valley web site
32
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 2: GV Orbit Projects
Step 2: GV Orbit Projects
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
PC but it needs to be deployed for use by saving it (pushing it) to either:
• a multiviewer device (multiviewer projects; GV Orbit Lite , Enterprise and
Professional ); or to
• a GV Orbit Server (C&M projects; GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise only).
Multiviewer project types are used to define a compatible multiviewer’s video wall. These are applicable to GV Orbit Lite , Enterprise and Professional .
The main project type for GV Orbit is a ‘Control and Monitoring’ project (C&M project) which is used for control and monitoring applications, and for routing control. This project type uses services running on a GV Orbit Server and is applicable to GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise only.
•
Step 2.1: New Project , on page 33.
•
Project Home Screens in GV Orbit Client , on page 38.
•
Step 2.2: Save, Push, and Close a Project , on page 40.
•
Open and Pull a Project , on page 41.
Step 2.1: New Project
To Open a Project from the Initial Screen
1 Click New Project .
The New Project dialog is shown.
2 Select a project type.
33
Getting Started Steps
Step 2.1: New Project
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Entered project name. Path to chosen folder. a) C&M project type selected b) Multiviewer project type selected
Fig. 2-10: New Project Dialogs
3 Click Browse and browse to a local folder on the client PC (or to a network folder accessible from the client PC) where the new project files will be placed.
Click Choose .
Note: The chosen folder is not on a GV Orbit Server.
4 Enter a name for the new project.
5 Click OK / Next .
A sub-folder is created with the name of the project. It contains the new project files.
6 If prompted, answer Yes to create a directory (sub-folder).
• For a Multiviewer project, see
For a Multiviewer Project (GV Orbit Lite, Enterprise and Professional) , on page 34.
• For a C&M project, see
For a C&M Project (GV Orbit Enterprise and Professional) , on page 35.
For a Multiviewer Project
( GV Orbit Lite , Enterprise and Professional )
A dialog is shown for setting up the resolution of the multiviewer head display outputs.
1 Select the Output Size (1920x1080 or 1280x720).
2 Click OK .
The new multiviewer project is created and its GV Orbit Client project Home Screen is
shown. See Project Home Screens in GV Orbit Client , on page 38.
34
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 2.1: New Project
For a C&M Project
( GV Orbit Enterprise and Professional )
For a Control and Monitoring (C&M) project, a Setup dialog is shown.
(For more information about setting up a C&M project, see Step 7: Control and
Monitoring Project Setup (Professional/Enterprise) , on page 64.)
Server 1 IP
Fig. 2-11: C&M Project Setup Dialog
For the C&M project, in the Setup dialog:
1 Set Server 1 IP to the IP address of the GV Orbit Server. For a GV Orbit Server Cluster, still just enter the IP address of one server. The second server will be discovered automatically in the steps below.
After the IP address is entered, GV Orbit Client carries out some basic system tests; it uses the current Setup dialog settings. System connectivity is checked and some basic system information is discovered from the GV Orbit Server.
2 After these system tests are done, the results are listed in the dialog in a console pane.
35
Getting Started Steps
Step 2.1: New Project
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Green indicating GV Orbit Client’s server connection is OK.
Server 1 IP
Repository setting
Results of basic system tests in console pane.
(For more information, see
Step 7: Control and Monitoring Project Setup (Professional/Enterprise) , on page 64.)
Fig. 2-12: Example Basic System Test Results (Single Server Shown)
Note:
Some system test console items may be shown in ‘ red ’, indicating where discovered information disagrees with settings in the Setup dialog. In this case, settings in the dialog are then filled out automatically to be consistent with discovered settings.
A subsequent system re-test (performed below) will clear these red items.
Repository in Setup Dialog
For deployment, a C&M project is saved to the GV Orbit Server in a Repository , one project per Repository . This setting selects which Repository is used by the project.
1 For the Repository setting, click New .
The Create Repository dialog is shown:
2 Enter a name for the new repository and click OK .
System Re-Test
A system re-test will now remove any red items in the console pane. In the Setup dialog:
1 Click System Test .
This forces the GV Orbit Client to redo its basic system tests. The results are shown in the console. Any ‘red’ items from before should now be cleared.
36
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 2.1: New Project
Single GV Orbit Server GV Orbit Server Cluster and Virtual IP Address
System Test clear output a) Single GV Orbit Server
Fig. 2-13: System Test Console Output: a) Single GV Orbit Server. b) GV Orbit Server Cluster.
b) GV Orbit Server Cluster
2 Click Apply .
The settings are applied to the project and a progress bar appears in the dialog.
3 A pop-up dialog may appear, asking if the local project should be updated from the chosen repository.
• Click Yes to update the local project (and lose any local changes made).
• Click No to keep the local project changes
(and not pull the project from the repository on the server).
The applying of settings continues and progress is shown in the progress bar:
4 A pop-up dialog box confirms when the ‘Applying’ is all done.
Click OK in the pop-up to proceed.
37
Getting Started Steps
Project Home Screens in GV Orbit Client
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
5 In the Setup dialog, click Close .
The new C&M project is created in GV Orbit Client and its Home Screen is shown.
(See Project Home Screens in GV Orbit Client , on page 38.)
Note:
The Setup dialog can also be viewed when a C&M project is open by clicking
Connections -> GV Server in the main menu of GV Orbit Client.
Note:
Setting up and applying the GV Orbit Server IP address for a project will automatically set up other comms settings for the project.
Project Home Screens in GV Orbit Client
The project’s Home Screen is shown and a new GV Orbit project has been created.
Note:
The Home Screen appearance varies according to project type and which
GV Orbit Client windows are enabled and being shown.
38
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Project Home Screens in GV Orbit Client a) Example New Multiviewer Project Home Screen
Click icons to hide/show windows of project Home
Screen Project Window
Workflow Window
Network Window b) Example New C&M Project Home Screen (See
for Information)
Fig. 2-14: GV Orbit Client Home Screen Examples: a) Multiviewer Project; b) C&M Project.
Note: A GV Orbit ‘Multiviewer’ project type is typically for singlemultiviewer designs.
For video walls designs that are served by a cluster of multiviewers
(MV Cluster), then use the GV Orbit ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ project
type (described in Chapter 14, Multiviewer Cluster , on page 637).
Note: A C&M project type is for GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise only.
A C&M project can be created in GV Orbit Lite , but may not be used.
39
Getting Started Steps
Step 2.2: Save, Push, and Close a Project
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 2.2: Save, Push, and Close a Project
Step 2.2.1: Save a Project Locally
To locally save a project from GV Orbit Client:
1 Click Project -> Save Project in the main menu to save the project into the local folder on the client PC.
Step 2.2.2: Push Project (Save to Server)
To push an open project back into a repository (on the GV Orbit Server, or on a multiviewer device):
1 Click Project -> Push in the main menu.
A Choose Projects dialog is shown. Projects are listed that have been opened by the
GV Orbit Client before. These appear in the Project window on the client.
40
Fig. 2-15: Choose Projects Dialog
2 Select the project to be pushed. More than one may be selected. Click OK .
The project is pushed to the repository.
Once a project is in a repository, it is deployed for use:
• Multiviewer project - A project is pushed to a multiviewer which can then adopt the project’s video wall design.
• C&M project - A project is pushed to the GV Orbit Server. Applications/services etc. on the server can then access the project. For example, the Web Renderer service can read the project and render its custom operator screens for viewing in a web browser.
Step 2.2.3: Close a Project
To close a project in GV Orbit Client:
• Click Project -> Close Project to close the project.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Open and Pull a Project
Open and Pull a Project
Open Existing Local Project
To open an existing local project from the GV Orbit Initial Screen :
1 Click the Open Project icon.
The Open dialog is shown:
2 Browse into the local project folder required and select the
‘configuration.prj’ file within it.
3 Click Open .
A login screen is shown.
4 For a new project, enter
User name ‘admin’ and
Password ‘admin’ and click Login .
The project’s Home Screen is shown.
Note: New GV Orbit projects have User name ‘admin’ , Password ‘admin.
Pull a Project (Load from Server)
To pull a project from a repository (on the GV Orbit Server, or on a compatible multiviewer):
1 Click Project -> Pull in the main menu.
A Choose Projects
dialog is shown. (See Figure 2-15.)
2 Select the project to pull.
3 Click OK .
The project is pulled from the repository, stored locally on the client PC, and is opened by the GV Orbit Client.
Note: Pull and Push :
When connecting to a repository, you may be prompted to Pull a project from a Repository . Pull a project in order to either:
• edit the project locally (any local project is overwritten); or
• run the project locally (for example, to run operator screens).
Do not Pull :
• if a local project has all been created or changed and which needs to be put into a Repository . (This requires a Push .)
Exit GV Orbit Client
Save the project locally and push it to be deployed, as required, before exiting GV Orbit
Client.
To exit and close the GV Orbit Client application:
1 Click Project -> Exit .
41
Getting Started Steps
Step 3: Device Configuration
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The application shuts down and exits.
Step 3: Device Configuration
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
This section describes how to access device control screens with GV Orbit Client. Devices can then be configured as required. RollCall- and Densité-protocol devices are covered.
•
Step 3.1: Direct Configuration of RollCall-protocol Devices , on page 42.
•
Step 3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices , on page 43.
To configure a device (or unit), you must have the Device control permission assigned to
your user profile otherwise you will not see this menu option. See Manage Users , on page 141.
Step 3.1: Direct Configuration of RollCall-protocol Devices
RollCall-protocol devices can be configured directly from GV Orbit Client with the device’s
IP address from the GV Orbit Client Initial Screen :
1 Click the RollCall Control Screen icon, (or, with a project open, in the main menu click Connections -> RollCall -> RollCall Control Screen ).
The Open Template dialog is shown:
2 Enter the IP address of the target device.
3 Click OK .
The control screen is shown in a tab. Click on x on tab to close device control screen.
42
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices
Fig. 2-16: Example Device Control Screen (RollCall-protocol Device shown)
4 When all device configuration changes are complete, close the control screen tab.
Step 3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices
With a GV Orbit project open in GV Orbit Client, GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise can show RollCall-protocol and Densité-protocol devices with full status indication listed in a
Network window.
However, GV Orbit Lite can only list RollCall-protocol device items in the Network window and without any status indication.
Network Window Views
The Network window can show devices either in a tree-view or in a list-view. Toggle
between these views with the tool bar controls shown in Figure 2-17.
See
Network Window , on page 84 for a description of the Network window.
43
Getting Started Steps
Step 3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices
Click to show List-View
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Click to show Tree-View
44 a) Tree-View
Fig. 2-17: Network Window Views b) List-View
Note: The Network window may already be showing system devices etc. for a C&M project open in GV Orbit Client if the GV Orbit services have been set up on the GV Orbit Server, so no set up may be required here.
Initial set up of the Network window can be done in a project; this is done differently for
RollCall-protocol devices than for Densité-protocol devices and each is described below:
•
Step 3.2.1: Network Window Setup For RollCall-protocol Devices
•
Step 3.2.2: View a Device Control Screen - RollCall Devices
•
Step 3.2.3: Network Window Setup For Densité Devices
•
Step 3.2.4: View a Device Control Screen - Densité Devices
Step 3.2.1: Network Window Setup For RollCall-protocol Devices
RollCall device control screens can be viewed with GV Orbit Client via a GV Orbit Server
(which runs a GV Orbit IP Proxy service).
To set up the Network window:
1 For GV Orbit:
• Lite From the GV Orbit Client Initial Screen , click the Network Map icon.
• Professional and Enterprise and with a C&M project open -
Click Connections -> RollCall -> Network Map in the main menu.
An Open Network
dialog is shown. (See Figure 2-18.)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices a) Open Network Dialog
(after clicking on
Network Map in the GV Orbit
Client Initial Screen).
c) Redundant server case.
b) Open Network dialog
(after clicking on RollCall -> Network Map in GV Orbit Client’s main menu).
Fig. 2-18: Open Network Dialogs: a) After clicking Network Map icon in GV Orbit Client Initial Screen.
b) After clicking RollCall -> Network Map in GV Orbit Client main menu.
c) Redundant server case.
2 Select Enable Network Map Connection , if available in the dialog.
3 Enter an IP address for the Primary Address :
• GV Orbit Lite :
Enter the address of an IQ frame controller to be able to access all devices in the frame.
• GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise:
Enter the IP address of a GV Orbit Server.
This will connect to the IP Proxy service running on the server and allow access to all devices connected to the IP Proxy service.
Note:
The IP address entered in the Open Network dialog may be for either:
• a GV Orbit Server, which runs a IP Proxy service; or for
• a single device.
4 For redundant GV Orbit systems, select Enable Redundancy and enter the IP address of a second GV Orbit Server.
45
Getting Started Steps
Step 3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices
5 Click OK .
A Network window appears in the GV Orbit
Client:
This can be re-sized. It can show an expandable tree-view of all devices attached to the IP Proxy service.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 3.2.2: View a Device Control Screen - RollCall Devices
To view a RollCall device control screen from the Network window:
1 Locate the target device in the Network window ( tree-view or list-view).
Right-click on the item and select ‘Control’.
The control screen and its sub-menus are loaded and are then shown in a tab.
Click to close the device control screen tab
46
Fig. 2-19: Example Device Control Screen (RollCall-protocol Device Shown)
2 When all required user device configuration changes are done, close the control screen tab.
Right-click on any other device in the Network window to display/edit its control screen, as required.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices
Step 3.2.3: Network Window Setup For Densité Devices
Densité device control screens (card control panels) can be viewed with GV Orbit Client from the Network window via a GV Orbit Server (which runs a GV Orbit Densité service).
GV Orbit Client must be configured to connect to the Densité server/service.
In a C&M project open in GV Orbit Client:
1 Click Connections -> Densité in the main menu.
The Densité Configuration dialog is shown:
2 Enter the GV Orbit Server IP address.
3 Select:
• ‘Lookup Service’; and
• ‘Densité REST’.
4 Enter the Username and Password (if not already set up) to access the
GV Orbit Server (and hence the Densité service).
Note: These are not the same login credentials as those used when opening a GV Orbit project with GV Orbit Client.
Note: Densité service credentials are set up automatically if the Setup dialog ( Connections -> GV Server in main menu) was used when creating the C&M project.
5 Click OK .
GV Orbit Client connects to the Densité service on the GV Orbit Server.
6 Add all Densité frames to the Densité service. Refer to the Densité Manager Service in the GV Orbit Admin Guide
in the Related Documentation , on page 19.
Added Densité frames become visible in the Network window.
This has set up the Network window in GV Orbit Client to show Densité frames and to show fitted cards supported by the GV Orbit Server.
Note: Densité cards can appear in the Network window if the card is:
• present in a Densité frame that has been added into the GV Orbit
Densité Manager service on the GV Orbit Server; and is
• supported by the GV Orbit Server; and is
• accessible by the GV Orbit Server over the network.
If a Densité card is still not shown in the window, support for it may need to be added to the
GV Orbit Server. To add support for other Densité cards, if required, see
Support for Further Densité Cards
.
47
Getting Started Steps
Step 3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise ship with native support for some Densité cards. Refer to the GV Orbit release notes for a list of natively-supported Densité cards.
See Related Documentation , on page 19 .
Step 3.2.4: View a Device Control Screen - Densité Devices
You must have the Device control permission assigned to your user profile otherwise you will not see this option. See
This step assumes that the Densité card is shown in the Network
Network Window Setup For Densité Devices
).
Note: Densité cards can appear in the GV Orbit Client Network window if the card is:
• present in a Densité frame that has been added into the GV Orbit
Densité Manager service;
• supported by the GV Orbit Server; and is
• accessible by the GV Orbit Server over the network.
To add support for a card, see Step 5: Adding Support for Further
To access a Densité device control screen (device control panel) from the Network window:
1 Locate the target device in the Network window.
2 Right-click on the device and select ‘Control’.
Note: An informative message appears (bottom left of
GV Orbit Client) while the control screen is being accessed.
The Densité-protocol device’s control screen opens in a separate window (that is, not in the GV Orbit Client’s overall window) and may be obscured on your client PC’s screen. Check that this window is not behind the
GV Orbit Client window or other windows.
48
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 3.3: Configuration of Other Devices
Click to close the
Densité device control panel.
Fig. 2-20: Example Densité Device Control Panel
3 When all the required user device configuration is complete, close the control panel.
Right-click on any other device in the Network window to open its control screen, as required.
Step 3.3: Configuration of Other Devices
Devices in a GV Orbit system which may be configured via GV Orbit appear in the GV Orbit
Client Network window and present a ‘Control’ drop-down menu option:
• Right-click on such a device and select ‘Control’ to open their web page in GV Orbit.
49
Getting Started Steps
Step 4: Device Upgrade
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Right-click on device and select ‘Control’
Fig. 2-21: Example GV Fabric Device Control Panel
Step 4: Device Upgrade
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
This section describes how to upgrade software/firmware on a device using GV Orbit Client.
Upgrade packages for RollCall or Densité cards comprise a version of software and a version of firmware bundled together in a .zip file.
To upgrade a device (or unit):
• You must have the Device upgrade permission assigned to your user profile otherwise you will not see this menu option. See
• The Network window must be open and showing the system device to be upgraded.
(See Network Window Views , on page 43.)
50
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 4.1: Upgrade RollCall-protocol Devices
Note:
Before starting, ensure that the upgrade package file is:
• accessible;
• for the correct RollCall or Densité card model; and is
• the correct version required.
Contact Grass Valley customer support for advice about upgrade packages.
•
Step 4.1: Upgrade RollCall-protocol Devices , on page 51.
•
Step 4.2: Upgrade Densité-protocol Devices , on page 53.
Also see
Change Functionality of a ‘Software-Defined Core’ Card , on page 57.
Step 4.1: Upgrade RollCall-protocol Devices
• Lite - Simple device upgrade is possible directly from GV Orbit Client.
• Professional and Enterprise - Simple device upgrade and advanced device upgrades are possible with the GVO-CFG-PRO option.
Simple Upgrade
Check the Current Software/Firmware Version
1 Open the Network window.
2 Locate the device to be upgraded, right-click on it and select Info .
A Details window is shown for the unit, displaying unit information which includes the device’s current version of software/firmware.
Fig. 2-22: Unit Information in Details Window
3 Close the Details window.
Import Upgrade Packages
4 Right-click on the tree-view device item and select ‘Upgrade’.
The RollCall Upgrade window is shown. Any software/firmware upgrade packages
51
Getting Started Steps
Step 4.1: Upgrade RollCall-protocol Devices
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide that have been previously uploaded to the GV Orbit Client are shown listed on the left hand side. For a fresh install of GV Orbit Client, no packages are listed.
Fig. 2-23: RollCall Upgrade Window
5 Click Import Upgrade Package(s) and browse to the upgrade package to be uploaded. Select the package and click Open .
The package is imported into the GV Orbit Client.
After the package has been imported, it is listed under ‘Available Packages’ in the
RollCall Upgrade window.
Upgrade the Device
6 Select a package in the ‘Available Packages’ list of the RollCall Upgrade window.
7 Select Upgrade All Files in the ‘Options’ pane to upgrade all files on the device, regardless of whether a file is the same on the device and in the upgrade package.
(Deselect Upgrade All Files for a quicker upgrade.)
52
Fig. 2-24: RollCall Upgrade Window
8 Click the Upgrade button to start the upgrade of the device.
A message box appears informing you that the upgrade has started and will proceed in the background.
Click OK .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 4.2: Upgrade Densité-protocol Devices
Note:
You can continue using the GV Orbit Client project while the upgrade proceeds.
However, only one RollCall upgrade can be running at any one time .
The progress of the upgrade is reported bottom left in the GV Orbit Client window.
Bottom left
Messages as upgrade progresses
Final message
Fig. 2-25: Upgrade Progress Messages (Bottom left in GV Orbit Client window)
9 When the device has been upgraded, this is indicated by:
• a final message at the bottom of the GV Orbit Client window; and also by
• a pop-up notification message in the Windows TM system tray.
Check the Upgraded Software/Firmware Version
1 Right-click on the Network window upgraded-device item and select Info .
A Details window is shown displaying unit information.
2 Check that the device’s current (upgraded) version of software/firmware is correct.
Note:
If the Network window is being presented through an IP Proxy then a
GV Orbit Server fail-over (in a GV Orbit Server cluster system) during an upgrade will cause a failed upgrade.
Step 4.2: Upgrade Densité-protocol Devices
• Lite - Simple device upgrade of Densité devices is not possible via the GV Orbit Client.
53
Getting Started Steps
Step 4.2: Upgrade Densité-protocol Devices
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note:
Densité modular devices may still be upgraded independently of GV Orbit
Client using Grass Valley’s iControl Solo product.
• Professional and Enterprise - Densité device upgrade is possible via GV Orbit Client with the GVO-CFG-PRO option, including upgrade of single and multiple Densité devices.
Device Upgrade ( GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise only)
This sub-section assumes that the Densité card is shown in the Network window (see
3.2.3: Network Window Setup For Densité Devices ).
Note: Densité cards can appear in the GV Orbit Client Network window if the card is:
• present in a Densité frame that has been added into the GV Orbit
Densité Manager service;
• supported by the GV Orbit Server; and is
• accessible by the GV Orbit Server over the network.
To add support for a card, see Step 5: Adding Support for Further
Densité Cards to be able to see the card to upgrade.
Check Current Device Software/Firmware Version
1 Open the Network window and locate the device to be upgraded.
2 Right-click on the device item to be upgraded and select Info .
A Details window is shown for the unit, displaying unit information which includes the device’s current version of software/firmware.
54
Fig. 2-26: Unit Information in Details Window
3 Close the Details window.
Import Upgrade Packages
4 Right-click on the tree-view device item and select ‘Upgrade’.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The Densité Upgrade Manager window is shown.
Getting Started Steps
Step 4.2: Upgrade Densité-protocol Devices
Fig. 2-27: Densité Upgrade Manager
5 Click Upload Files...
and browse to the upgrade package to be uploaded.
Select the package and click Open .
A message window appears prompting you to start the upload.
6 Click Upload in the Progress window.
Progress of the upload is shown in the window and the package is uploaded to the
Densité Upgrade Manager .
7 When complete, the Progress window shows 100% done,
‘Operation finished’:
Click Close .
8 Verify the uploaded package is present in the Densité
Fig. 2-28: Progress Window - Upgrade Package 100%
Upgrade Manager window by clicking in the ‘Available package’ column and looking in the drop-down list.
Note: After an upgrade package has been uploaded, it is available in a dropdown box in the ‘Available Package’ column, in all rows for Densité devices compatible with the newly-uploaded package.
For example, for an IPG-3901 package, check in any IPG-3901 device row.
Upgrade the Device
In the Densité Upgrade Manager window, in the row for the device to be upgraded:
55
Getting Started Steps
Step 4.2: Upgrade Densité-protocol Devices
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
9 Select an upgrade package in the ‘Available Package’ column’s drop-down list.
Fig. 2-29: Upgrade Window with Selected Upgrade Package
10 Click the Upgrade button to start the upgrade of the device.
An Upgrade Confirmation message box appears.
11 Click Yes to start the upgrade.
Progress is reported in the ‘Install
Progress’ column as a progress bar and a percentage (%):
When done, a ‘Finished 100%’ message appears in the ‘Install progress’ column.
56
Upgraded software/firmware version on device is shown
Fig. 2-30: Upgrade ‘Finished 100%’
12 Close the Densité Upgrade Manager window.
Check Software/Firmware Version on Upgraded Device
13 In the Network window, right-click on the upgraded-device item and select Info .
A Details window is shown for the device/unit.
14 Check that the newly-upgraded device software/firmware version is correct.
Note: The Densité Upgrade Manager can upgrade multiple devices.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Change Functionality of a ‘Software-Defined Core’ Card
Change Functionality of a ‘Software-Defined Core’ Card
Grass Valley offer a range of cards which have a software-defined core, enabling a user to change the functionality of a card with core packages and licenses. GV Orbit Client enables a user to change such a ‘software-defined core’ card’s functionality.
Note: Supported software-defined core cards include:
• UCP-3901 and IQ-UCP cards, with various core packages, including Essence Processing (EP) cores and Multiviewer
(MV) cores.
See the documentation on the respective cards for further information and instructions on how to add licenses etc.
Note: License a card first before loading a core package into the card.
If a core package is loaded but a card is not licensed, then default,
‘base’ functionality results. See the documentation on the respective card for information.
To change a card’s functionality, use the ‘upgrade’ mechanism in GV Orbit Client:
1 Locate the software-defined core card in the Network window.
Fig. 2-31: Software-Defined Core Device in Network Window
2 Right-click on the card item in the tree-view and select ‘Upgrade’.
The RollCall Upgrade window is shown for the card. The window shows:
• the core package currently in use by the card; and
• all available (imported) core packages.
57
Getting Started Steps
Step 5: Adding Support for Further Densité Cards
Available core packages
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Current software-defined core being used by the card.
Fig. 2-32: RollCall Upgrade Window - Available Cores
To import further core packages:
3 Import the core package in a similar way to an upgrade package (see Step 4.1: Upgrade
RollCall-protocol Devices , on page 51).
To load an available (already-imported) core package into the card and change card functionality:
4 Select an available core package and click Upgrade . The procedure is similar to upgrading a card (see
Step 4.1: Upgrade RollCall-protocol Devices , on page 51).
The new core package is placed on the card; the card reboots and then adopts the functionality of the new core package if the card is licensed.
Step 5: Adding Support for Further Densité Cards
Lite Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
GV Orbit fully supports all Densité cards. GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise shi p with native support for many Densité cards; for other cards, support needs to be added to your
GV Orbit Server. This section describes how to add support for Densité cards to your
GV Orbit Server.
58
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Add or Update Densité Card Support
Support is added by uploading the requisite Densité card software package. Once uploaded, the GV Orbit Server can recognize the cards and they may be integrated into the
Network window.
Carry out this procedure to add or to update support of a Densité card.
Add or Update Densité Card Support
Many Densité cards are automatically recognized by GV Orbit. However, some Densité cards may not show in the Network window, even though they are physically installed in a
Densité frame. For example, a frame’s controller card may be shown but one or more cards in the same frame are not shown (in the tree-view nor list-view). To make such cards available, the corresponding card software packages must be uploaded through the
Densité Upgrade Manager tool.
Note: Refer to GV Orbit release notes documentation for a list of natively supported Densité cards. See
Related Documentation , on page 19.
Prerequisite:
• All Densité frames are added to the Densité Manager service on the GV Orbit Server.
Refer to the Densité Manager service in the GV Orbit Admin Guide
• Software package are available for each Densité card type to be added/updated.
(See each separate card documentation for how to obtain each software package.)
The procedure is similar to upgrading Densité cards (see
Step 4.2: Upgrade Densitéprotocol Devices ):
1 Locate a Densité frame item in the Network window tree-view and expand it to show all available cards.
2 If one or more cards are not shown in the Network window tree-view, right-click on a fitted card item (for example, on the frame controller card item) and select ‘Upgrade’.
The Densité Upgrade Manager tool is opened showing all the cards in the Densité frame. Some cards may be grayed-out.
For each Densité card type for which support is to be added/updated:
3 Import the card’s software package.
(See Import Upgrade Packages for how to do this.)
4 Upgrade each card.
(See Upgrade the Device for how to do this).
After a card type has been upgraded, it should appear in the Densité Upgrade Manager tool and not be grayed-out.
Support for the card has now been added to the GV Orbit Server.
When the support for all cards has been added:
5 Close the Densité Upgrade Manager window.
Support for the Densité cards has now been added to the GV Orbit Server and the cards are displayed in the GV Orbit Client’s Network window.
59
Getting Started Steps
Step 6: Multiviewer Project
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 6: Multiviewer Project
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
This section is applicable to GV Orbit Client and multiviewer applications with single multiviewers that use the GV Orbit ‘Multiviewer’ project type.
Note: A GV Orbit ‘Multiviewer’ project type is typically for singlemultiviewer designs.
For video walls designs that are served by a cluster of multiviewers
(MV Cluster), then use the GV Orbit ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ project
type (described in Chapter 14, Multiviewer Cluster , on page 637
onwards).
This section describes a simple edit to a GV Orbit (single-multiviewer) ‘Multiviewer’ project pulled from a multiviewer (MV-8 series or IQ-MV series multiviewer). The simple edit changes the appearance of the video wall and the project is pushed back to the device.
Note: GV Orbit ‘Multiviewer’ projects are pushed/pulled to/from a compatible (single) multiviewer device rather than to/from a GV Orbit
Server.
Simple Multiviewer Project Editing Example
Pull Project and Open
1 Open GV Orbit Client at the initial screen and click New Project .
The New Project dialog is shown.
2 Select Connected
Multiviewer Project type.
3 Browse into a new, empty folder (into which project information will be placed).
4 Click Choose .
5 Click Next .
A list of available multiviewers is shown.
60
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Simple Multiviewer Project Editing Example
Fig. 2-33: Select Multiviewer to Connect To
Note: The IP network used needs to support multicast for automatic discovery of devices to occur (for example, for listing available multiviewers).
6 Select the multiviewer to connect to and click OK .
GV Orbit Client connects to the multiviewer, pulls the GV Orbit project from it, attempts to open the project, and shows the login screen.
7 Enter the correct User name and Password for the accessing the GV Orbit project.
Note: The default login for new projects is ‘admin’ ‘admin’.
8 Click Login .
The project is opened and the multiviewer project Home Screen is shown.
Folder path where project is stored on the client PC.
Name of GV Orbit project (pulled from multiviewer)
Fig. 2-34: Multiviewer Project Home Screen
61
Getting Started Steps
Simple Multiviewer Project Editing Example
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The GV Orbit multiviewer project has been pulled from the target multiviewer device, locally stored on the client PC, and opened in GV Orbit Client.
The multiviewer video wall design may now be edited in GV Orbit Client.
Edit the Multiviewer Project
1 Click on the large Walls icon, and select one of the wall items that is shown listed.
The multiviewer video wall design is opened in a tab in the overall GV Orbit Client
Run Mode / Design Mode icon (GV Orbit Client is shown in Design Mode )
Wall tab
Video Wall design
Video tiles
Properties Box
Fig. 2-35: Example Video Wall Tab in Wall Editor
The Wall tab is the stage on which a Wall is:
• designed and edited (in GV Orbit Client Design mode); and
• may be run and viewed (in GV Orbit Client Run mode).
Although a video wall is fully deployed when running on a compatible multiviewer device.
2 Click the Run Mode / Design Mode tool bar icon to select ‘Design Mode’.
Note:
Clicking the Run Mode / Design Mode tool bar icon toggles between ‘Run’ and ‘Design’ modes of GV Orbit Client.
62
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Simple Multiviewer Project Editing Example
Click to exit Run Mode a) Icon appearance when in
Click to enter Run Mode
Run Mode
Note:
• In Design Mode , a project may be edited (for example, a video wall may be modified).
• In Run Mode , a project monitors log and alarm data and generates display screens in real-time.
b) Icon appearance when in Design Mode
Fig. 2-36: Run Mode / Design Mode Tool Bar Icon
This example edit will do a simple change to the video wall:
3 Click on one of the video tiles on the wall to select it. For example, the top-left video tile.
4 In the Properties Box , change the Preferences -> Type property value to ‘Analogue
Clock’ via the drop-down menu.
The selected tile changes to a round-faced clock within the Wall tab.
Selected video tile Round-faced, analogue clock tile Analogue clock type
Fig. 2-37: Edited Wall Design
5 Click Project -> Save Project to save the whole project locally, including the video wall design.
Push Project Back to Multiviewer
1 Click Project -> Push in the main menu.
The Choose Projects dialog is shown.
63
Getting Started Steps
Step 7: Control and Monitoring Project Setup (Professional/Enterprise)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Project selected
Hint:
Hover on a Project item to see local folder path
Fig. 2-38: Choose Projects Dialog
2 Select just the project to push to the multiviewer.
3 Click OK .
The selected project is pushed back to the multiviewer.
The edited video wall is then used and shown by the multiviewer device.
Step 7: Control and Monitoring Project Setup
(Professional/Enterprise)
Lite Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
This section is applicable to GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise only. It describes setting up a new ‘Control and Monitoring’ project (C&M project), which is the main project type applicable to GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise . Following its setting up, a C&M project is ready for use. For example, custom graphical operator screens etc. can be designed, created and used.
All C&M projects are centrally stored in and used from repositories on the GV Orbit Server
(one project per repository). The GV Orbit Client application needs to be configured to
communicate with the GV Orbit Server(s) (see Step 7.2: C&M Setup Dialog , on page 65). A
project is loaded by GV Orbit Client from a server repository and stored locally on the client
PC.
Note:
GV Orbit Client requires network access to one or more GV Orbit
Servers running configured GV Orbit services.
•
Step 7.1: New C&M Project , on page 65.
64
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
•
Step 7.2: C&M Setup Dialog , on page 65.
•
Step 7.3: Further Setup , on page 70.
•
Step 7.4: Saving and Pushing a Project , on page 74.
Step 7.1: New C&M Project
From the GV Orbit Client Initial Screen :
1 Click New Project.
The New Project dialog is shown.
2 Select the C&M project type.
3 Click Browse and browse to a folder where the project will be placed.
Click Choose .
4 Enter a name for the new project.
5 Click OK .
And, if prompted, answer Yes to create a directory.
The Setup
7.2: C&M Setup Dialog , on page 65.
Step 7.2: C&M Setup Dialog
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.1: New C&M Project
Fig. 2-39: C&M Project Setup Dialog
The C&M Setup dialog provides a quick way to enter key project parameters for a project.
The dialog is shown automatically when creating a new C&M project. And it can be accessed when an existing C&M project is open by clicking Connections -> GV Server in the main menu.
65
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.2: C&M Setup Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note:
Some key project parameters are entered in the Setup dialog and used for the project settings. Some settings may be subsequently edited by you if
required. Refer to Step 7.3.1: Project Variables (Project -> Edit Variables) , on page 70.
Server IP Address(es)
1 Enter the IP address of the GV Orbit Server into the Server 1 IP text box.
For a GV Orbit Server Cluster, enter the IP address of one server. The second server’s address will be discovered automatically in the steps below.
Check the address is correct.
The GV Orbit Client attempts to connect to the server and performs some basic system tests.
Note: Basic System Tests :
1. Connect to the GV Orbit Server.
A good connection status is shown with a green light indicator.
2. Find out other GV Orbit system information from the server.
3. Fill out settings in the Setup dialog.
For example:
• Client Domain number being used (default is 100).
• Available Repositories on the server.
• IP address of any second GV Orbit Server; and any IP address being commonly used by the servers (‘Virtual IP’).
The resulting connection status from the basic system tests is indicated in a console
pane showing any system messages issued. See Figure 2-40a.
66
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.2: C&M Setup Dialog
Green indicates
GV Orbit Client successfully connected to the
GV Orbit Server.
Console pane
System messages from basic system tests.
a) Single GV Orbit Server
IP addresses automatically added b) GV Orbit Server Cluster
Fig. 2-40: C&M Project Setup Dialog: a) Single GV Orbit Server; b) GV Orbit Server Cluster
Green indicates
GV Orbit Client successfully connected to the
GV Orbit Servers and virtual IP address detected.
67
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.2: C&M Setup Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select a Repository
Note: Repository :
Projects may be locally stored on the client PC but, for deployment, a C&M project must be saved to the GV Orbit Server (Pushed) into a Repository , one project per Repository . Multiple clients can access the same project.
Note:
The Repository Manager service, running on the GV Orbit Server, can be configured on the server and each repository may be set up from there.
Alternatively, a New repository may be created from the C&M Project’s Setup dialog.
Available Repositories are listed in a drop-down box in the Setup dialog.
Note:
Pull a project from a Repository to load the project from a server.
Push a project to a Repository to save it back to the GV Orbit Server.
1 In the Setup dialog, click New .
The Create Repository dialog is shown:
2 Enter a name for the new repository and click OK .
Alternatively, to select an existing repository:
3 Select a Repository in the ‘Repository’ drop-down list in the Setup dialog.
The C&M project will use the project from this Repository .
Click New to create a new
Repository
68
Fig. 2-41: Select a Repository in Setup Dialog
System Re-Test
1 Click System Test to redo the basic system tests.
For the basic system test, GV Orbit Client performs a:
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.2: C&M Setup Dialog
• ping to each server;
• client-server communication check;
• services check on the server; and
• check of service Domain configurations (Monitoring and Log Server services).
The console pane in the Setup dialog may have shown some red messages which highlight differences between entered dialog settings and those of the GV Orbit system connected to. (For example, a Client Domain number difference.)
Re-do the basic system tests and the red messages should clear.
Single GV Orbit Server GV Orbit Servers and Virtual IP Address
System Test clear console output a) Single GV Orbit Server b) GV Orbit Server Cluster
Fig. 2-42: System Test Re-done and Console Output OK: a) Single GV Orbit Server. b) GV Orbit Server Cluster.
Apply Settings
1 In the Setup dialog, click Apply to apply these settings to the project.
Click OK to any pop-up message.
2 Click Close to close the dialog.
The GV Orbit pulls the project etc. from the repository and shows the Home Screen .
Note:
When connecting to a Repository , you may be prompted to Pull a project from a Repository , so as to retrieve a project from the server.
Pull a project in order to either:
• edit the project locally (any existing local project is overwritten); or
• run the project locally (for example, to run operator screens).
Do not Pull if a local project has been created/changed and it needs to be put into a Repository . This requires a Push to a repository.
69
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.3: Further Setup
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 7.3: Further Setup
Following initial set up, a C&M project is ready for use. Project settings and variables are set up from the settings in a C&M Project’s Setup window.
This sub-section describes how to adjust the project settings (including project variables) further, if any parameters need changing for some reason.
Step 7.3.1: Project Variables (Project -> Edit Variables)
C&M projects have a set of project variables that are set up when using the C&M Project
Setup window to establish connection to a GV Orbit Server. This done as part of creating a new C&M Project. (The Setup window is also accessed by selecting Connections -> GV
Server in the main menu.)
The Project Variables enable GV Orbit Client workflows, and other user graphical screens, to communicate with GV Orbit services and Server(s).
Note:
Most Project Variables hold default values consistent with the default
GV Orbit Server and GV Orbit services settings. Do not change the values of these variables unless the items have been changed from their default.
To access the project variables from the project Home Screen :
1 Click Project -> Edit Variables...
in the main menu.
A Variables window is shown for the C&M project.
70
Fig. 2-43: C&M Project Variables Window
Parameter
GVOC IP
GVOC Launcher
Description
Virtual IP address of the GV Orbit Server cluster.
Path to launcher for GV Orbit Control Client.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.3: Further Setup
Parameter
IP Network
Routing Address
Server IP 1
Server IP 2
Show External IDs
XEdit Launcher
Description
Network file name for IP endpoint configuration.
RollCall ‘Control’ address of Routing Service on GV Orbit Server(s).
GV Orbit Server 1 IP address.
GV Orbit Server 2 IP address.
The GV Orbit Client uses the External IDs set in GV Orbit Control for router control. Certain control protocols require that the numbering of external IDs must be contiguous.
False: GV Orbit Client remaps the External ID's used by GV Orbit
Control into its own list of contiguous internal ID's. GV Orbit Client follows name changes to existing External ID's, however adding devices to GV Orbit or removing devices from GV Orbit may cause a shift in the internal ID numbering which can result in incorrect routing.
When this occurs, the ID shown in GV Orbit Client Routing Behaviors will no longer match those used in GV Orbit Client as there are two separate ID lists which are no longer coherent.
This is the default for a project migrated to GV Orbit version 2.0.0 and above, for backwards compatibility.
True: GV Orbit Client uses the GV Orbit Control External ID's. You can insert or remove devices without any impact on existing IDs. The
GV Orbit Client will follow name changes associated with External IDs.
See also
About External IDs and Northbound Control Interfaces , on page 455.
When you have added one or more Kaleido multiviewers to GV Orbit, you can launch XEdit for those multiviewers from the Network
Window, in order to configure them.
In this variables window, you can specify which version of XEdit to open.
Auto: GV Orbit auto selects an installed XEdit version.
[path]: Define the path to the required version of XEdit to use that specific version.
See also
Step 7.3.3: Configure Network Window for Kaleido
Note: For a multiviewer project there are fewer variables.
2 Click OK when project-variable value changes have been done.
3 Click Project -> Save Project in the main menu to save the project locally to disk.
4 Push the project to the repository when all changes are done.
Custom Project Variables
The Variables window also allows a user to create custom project variables for their own use. For example, the RollCall addresses of system devices, a company name, the TV channel/studio name, etc. These may each be set up as custom project variables and used in custom control and monitoring screens. Custom project variables can be created and deleted.
71
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.3: Further Setup
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
CAUTION
Do not delete any of the C&M project variables presented here.
Step 7.3.2: Client Domain Number (Connections -> GVOP)
To configure the Client Domain for the GV Orbit Client to use for the project:
1 Click Connections -> GVOP in the main menu.
The GV Orchestration Protocol dialog is shown.
Set the Client Domain number for the project to use. (Default is100.)
Select for multicast discovery of server IP addresses.
(Default is unicast discovery.)
Click to add a new IP address (for unicast discovery).
Select/deselect IP interfaces of the client PC to be used by GV Orbit
Client.
Set multicast packet ‘Time to Live’
(TTL) - defines the number of “hops” that a network multicast message is allowed to do between IP network routers. The TTL value can limit the distance these messages travel within a network.
Fig. 2-44: GV Orchestration Protocol Dialog
2 Set the Domain number of the Client Domain that the C&M project will use. (Default is
100.)
3 Other project parameters can be changed in the dialog, see Figure 2-44.
4 Click OK to finish and close the dialog.
Step 7.3.3: Configure Network Window for Densité-protocol Devices
1 Click Connections -> Densité in the main menu.
The iControl/Densité Configuration dialog is shown.
72
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.3: Further Setup
IP address(es) of a server running a
Densité Manager service, typically, a
GV Orbit Server.
Click Add to add a new IP address.
Fig. 2-45: iControl/Densité Configuration Dialog
2 Click Add and enter the IP address(es) of GV Orbit Server(s) (which run a Densité
Manager service), or add the IP address of a server.
3 Select ‘Lookup Service’ and ‘Densité REST’.
4 Enter the Username and Password to access the Densité Manager service.
5 Click OK to finish and close the dialog.
Finally:
6 Click Project -> Save Project in the main menu to save the project locally.
7 Push the project to the repository when all changes are done. See
Pushing a Project , on page 74.
Step 7.3.3: Configure Network Window for Kaleido Multiviewers
By adding one or more Kaleido multiviewers to GV Orbit, you can launch XEdit for those
multiviewers from the Network Window, in order to configure them. See also Network
You can specify which version of XEdit to open through the Project > Edit variables >
XEdit Launcher. See
Step 7.3.1: Project Variables (Project -> Edit Variables) , on page 70
PREREQUISITE: XEdit needs to be pre-installed on the same PC as GV Orbit. Either use the online installer by connecting to a Kaleido multiviewer in a web browser or obtain an offline installer from Grass Valley Support.
1 Click Connections -> Kaleido in the main menu.
The Kaleido Configuration dialog is shown.
73
Getting Started Steps
Step 7.4: Saving and Pushing a Project
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
2. Set the IP address(es) of one or more Kaleido Multiviewers.
1. Click Add to add a new IP address.
2 Click Add and enter the IP address(es) of one or more Kaleido Multiviewers.
3 Click OK to finish and close the dialog.
The Kaliedo Multiviewer(s) are added to the the Network Window from which you can launch XEdit for those multiviewers.
4 Click Project -> Save Project in the main menu to save the project locally.
5 Push the project to the repository when all changes are done. See
Pushing a Project , on page 74.
6 Right-click the multiviewer’s IP address in the Network Window to launch XEdit for that
multiviewer in order to configure it. See also Network Window , on page 84.
Connecting to another Kaleido will switch the running instance of XEdit to the newlyrequested Kaleido.
Step 7.4: Saving and Pushing a Project
Save Project (Locally)
To save a project locally to the folder on the client PC:
• Click Project -> Save Project in the main menu.
Push Project (Save to Server)
To push a project back into a repository (on the GV Orbit Server):
• Click Project -> Push
. (See Step 2.2.2: Push Project (Save to Server) , on page 40.)
In the Choose Project dialog, select the project to be pushed and click OK .
74
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started Steps
IP Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import
Pull Project (Load from Server)
To pull a project from a repository (on the GV Orbit Server):
• Click Project -> Pull in the main menu.
Close Project
To close a project that is open in GV Orbit Client:
• Click Project -> Close Project in the main menu.
IP Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import
Access the IP Routing endpoint configuration editing tool and a new, default GV Orbit C&M project (see
Graphical Routing Workflow , on page 100 for more information).
1 In the Graphical Routing Workflow screen, click IP Configuration and Spreadsheet Import.
See
Graphical Routing Workflow , on page 100 for more information.
2 Click the Comms Setup button:
IP Endpoint Editor tab
Device tab Export Import Comms Setup Button
Discovered devices are listed
3 Select Routing System controller type to be ‘GVOC’.
75
Getting Started Steps
IP Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 Leave the GVOC domain number at its default (105).
5 Select the client PC network IP interfaces to use.
6 Click OK.
GV Orbit Client will discover IP End-points and list them.
7 Click on the Devices tab to see the listed devices.
8 Click Export to export the discovered IP end-point devices and their current settings.
(A spreadsheet file, .xlsx file, is exported and this shows the spreadsheet file format.
Settings include: device names, router port numbers, source/destination IP flows, and multi-cast IP addresses etc.)
9 Edit the spreadsheet file to change settings and/or add more IP end-point devices.
10 Click Import to import IP End-point device settings via a spreadsheet.
11 Select Project -> Save Project from the main menu. Close the IP Endpoint Editor tab.
Fig. 2-46: IP Endpoint Configuration Editor tab in GV Orbit Client (Device sub-tab shown)
This screen also allows:
• Manual configuration of end-points, if required.
• Review IP End-point settings, edit settings, validate settings, make engineering routes, if required.
• Monitor bandwidths at device interfaces, if required.
Note: SDI ‘end-point’ configuration etc. is set up via GV Orbit Control in the remaining controls on the routing workflow.
76
Summary contents of this chapter:
Home Screen
77
Home Screen
Project Home Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Project Home Screen
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
Home Screen Windows
The appearance of the GV Orbit Client project Home Screen varies according to project type and according to which GV Orbit Client windows are enabled and being shown. Use tool bar icons to show/hide windows.
78
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Workflow tab
Home Screen
Home Screen Windows
tab
C&M Screen tab
Graphical Routing Workflow tab selected and a graphical routing
workflow stage is shown.
Fig. 3-1: GV Orbit Client Project Home Screen Windows
Table 3-1: Home Screen Windows
Window
Project
Description
A tree view of projects opened by the GV Orbit Client.
Allows users to access aspects of the current project, or to load another project.
Network A view of devices/frames/services etc. in a GV Orbit system, presented in a tree-view or a list-view. A user can access device information and alarms.
Alarm History A list of alarms that have occurred across the system over time.
Properties Shows the properties of the selected graphical widget when designing a graphical C&M project.
Workflow A graphical presentation of all the tasks and functions available in GV Orbit.
Click on an icon to access a task or a function.
See
Alarm History Window , on page 99.
Properties Window , on page 81.
Graphical Routing Workflow , on page 100.
Click the following tool bar icons to show/hide windows in the Home Screen :
79
Home Screen
Project Window
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Toolbar Icon Description
Alarm History
window icon. See View Alarm History for Systemwide Alarms , on page 100.
Project window icon. See
Network
window. See Network Window , on page 84.
Properties window (shown when a C&M screen tab is selected).
See Properties Window , on page 81.
Workflow
window. See Workflow Window , on page 83.
Close All Windows
To close all windows and just see a default workflow:
• Click Window -> Close All in the main menu.
Project Window
The Project window lists the project currently open and any projects previously opened by the GV Orbit Client on the client PC.
The currently-open project is expandable in a tree view to show the various project items.
You can access and manage different aspects/functions of the project from this tree view item.
Currently-open project
Project is expanded
Project Tree-Items
Project items seen when a project is expanded include: Fig. 3-2: Project Window
• Components - Graphical custom components that appear on GV Orbit Client graphical control and monitoring screens.
• Networks - IP End-point configuration files, used in IP routing control set up.
• Panels - Soft XY Router control panels, created with a wizard and user-customizable.
• Resources - Imported resource items used in the project (for example, logo images etc.).
• Screens - C&M project user-defined graphical control/monitoring screens.
• Themes - The appearance of each graphical element on a GV Orbit custom graphical screen (multiviewer video wall screen, or C&M project control and monitoring screen) can have a style applied to it. A theme is a set of styles that can be applied to a project.
• Workflows - Workflow screen.
• configuration.prj
- The GV Orbit project file. Select this file when opening an existing project in GV Orbit Client. Do not edit this file.
80
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Properties Window
• db.users
- Project users, user roles and their associated permissions can be managed.
New user names and logins etc. can be set up.
• Grids - Imported tile-grid layouts for all multiviewer projects.
• Tiles - Video wall tile designs for all multiviewer projects.
• Rooms - Video wall designs for ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ projects.
• Walls - Video wall designs for ‘Multiviewer’ projects.
Note:
Some project items are also accessible via icons in the routing workflow window (see
Graphical Routing Workflow , on page 100
).
Note:
Some project items may be specific to certain project types.
Project Window Actions
Right-click on a Project window tree-view item to open, import, or create a new item.
For example, right click on:
• Screens - Select New Screen to create a new user screen in a C&M project.
• Walls - Select New to create a new video wall in a single-multiviewer project.
• Resources - Select Import File(s) to import an image file into a project.
• db.users
• Select Open to open the User Management window in a tab to set up users and roles.
• Select Import user database to import users from another project.
• < Project Name > - Select Rename project to rename the project.
Properties Window
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
The Properties window shows the properties of a selected graphical widget or on-screen item when designing/editing a C&M screen in GV Orbit Client in ‘Design’ mode. The window may be shown when a C&M screen tab, or a multiviewer video wall, or other graphical GV Orbit project item is selected.
81
Home Screen
Properties Window
Run/Design Mode icon indicates GV Orbit Client is in ‘Design’ mode for graphical editing and design.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Properties Window
82
Selected (Alarm List) widget and its corresponding properties shown in Properties window a) Example C&M Screen Running in ‘Design’ mode in GV Orbit Client b) Example C&M Screen Running in GV Orbit Client
Alarm List widget showing live alarms in a system
Fig. 3-3: Properties Window Example: a) In Design Mode; b) In Run Mode.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Workflow Window
Lite
Home Screen
Workflow Window
Professional
Enterprise
Note:
A Workflow window may be visible in GV Orbit Lite but it is not applicable to the GV Orbit Lite product version.
A workflow window shows a graphical representation of all the tasks and functions available in GV Orbit Professional and Enterprise systems. The Workflow window is the stage which presents all the tasks and functions the system has to offer to the GV Orbit user.
Click on a workflow icon for direct access to a task or a function.
View WorkFlow Stage
To view the Workflow stage:
1 Click the icon in the tool bar.
Workflow stage is then shown in a tab.
2 Select the workflow tab (if it is not already selected) to view it.
The workflow in Figure 3-4 is available to all new projects.
Workflow window icon workflow.wfl tab Workflow stage
Click on an icon to access a task item, see
Graphical Routing Workflow , on page 100.
Click on a server icon to access a GV Orbit Server.
Click on an icon to access GV Orbit project functions in
GV Orbit Client, see
Fig. 3-4: Graphical Routing Workflow Stage
83
Home Screen
Network Window
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The graphical Workflow stage makes it easy to understand how tasks and functions are related and each icon provides direct access to the task/function it represents.
The workflow is optimized for carrying out the system configuration required:
• when re-purposing an existing routing infrastructure; or
• for the steps to set up a fresh, new routing environment.
Routing configuration and control is done through the GV Orbit Control application running on a GV Orbit Server, which supports Grass Valley NP0017 and SW-P-08 protocols.
Both IP and SDI routing etc. may be controlled. The GV Orbit Control uses the GV Orbit
Control service running on the GV Orbit Server.
Network Window
About the Network Window
The Network window shows a tree-view or a list-view of devices/frames/services etc. in a
GV Orbit system. A user can access control screens, information and alarms about these items from the window.
Note:
To set up the Network
window for a project, see Network Window Views , on page 43 onwards.
See Step 3.2.1: Network Window Setup For RollCall-protocol Devices , on
page 44; Step 3.2.2: View a Device Control Screen - RollCall Devices , on
page 46; Step 3.2.3: Network Window Setup For Densité Devices , on page 47;
and
Step 3.2.4: View a Device Control Screen - Densité Devices , on page 48.
Note: Automatically discovered devices:
For devices that are automatically discoverable by a GV Orbit system, these are shown in the Network window. For example, GV Fabric IP switch.
Show/Hide Network Window
In the Network window’s main tool bar, click to show / hide the Network window.
Tree-View and List-View
The Network window shows a tree-view or a list-view of devices/frames/services etc. in a
GV Orbit system. A user can access control screens, information and alarms about these
items from the window. For more information, see Network Window for more information.
Note:
To set up the Network
window for a project, see Network Window Views , on page 43 onwards.
The tree-view and list-view forms of the Network
window are shown in Figure 3-5.
The tree-view presents a hierarchical view of system devices/units/frames/services. See
Figure 3-5a. The tree-view’s expand/collapse controls are presented in Figure 3-5a.
84
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
About the Network Window
The list-view is a flattened view, listing all system devices/units/frames/services. See
Figure 3-5b. The list may be filtered, see Network Window List-View Filter
for a description of the list-view filter controls.
Click to expand all of the tree-view.
Click to expand the selected part of the tree-view.
Click to collapse all of the tree-view.
Click to collapse the selected part of the tree-view.
Click to show List-View
Click to show Tree-View
List-view filter controls, see
Network Window List-View Filter
a) Tree-View b) List-View
Fig. 3-5: Network Window: a) Tree-View; b) List-View.
Network Window Actions
Locate a device in the Network window and right-click on the item. The following actions are possible in GV Orbit:
• Lite , Professional and Enterprise :
•
Device Information - View information about a device.
•
- View Densité-protocol device parameters.
•
Device Control - View and change device configuration settings. (
Lite : RollCall devices only.)
•
- Upgrade (or downgrade) device software/firmware.
• And for Professional and Enterprise only:
•
Alarm List - Live Alarms/Status - View a list of a device’s live status and alarms.
•
Alarm History for a Device - View the alarm history of a device.
85
Home Screen
Network Window List-View Filter
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
•
Alarm Masking (Professional and Enterprise) - Mask device alarms.
Network Window List-View Filter
In the Network window, the displaying of items in the list-view can be filtered. Filtering can be done:
• with a text string; and/or
• by card type; and/or
• by alarm state.
The filter controls are shown in Figure 3-6.
Filter text box
Filter icon
Filter drop-down menu
Filter on Device Type
Filter on Alarm State
Clear Filter text box filtering
Clear All Filtering
Fig. 3-6: List-View Filter Controls
Filter Example 1: Filter List Item Name
To filter the Network window list-view for a particular device by its name:
1 Enter a fragment of text in the Filter text box. For example, “UCP or “XIO”.
The displayed names are those containing the entered text. See Figure 3-7b or c.
86
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Network Window List-View Filter a) Unfiltered.
b) Filtered on “UCP” c) Filtered on “XIO”
Fig. 3-7: List-View Filtered Names on Text
2 Click on the Filter icon and select ‘Clear Filter’.
The text box is cleared and the text--box filtering is cleared.
Filter Example 2: Filter Device Type and then Alarm State
With all filters cleared, to filter on a device type and then their alarm states:
1 Click on the Filter icon and select ‘RollCall’.
RollCall-protocol devices are shown. See Figure 3-8a.
2 Click on the Filter icon and select ‘Minor.
‘Minor Warning’ RollCall-protocol devices are shown. See Figure 3-8c.
87
Home Screen
Network Window Actions
Filter icon indicates some filtering is active
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide a) Filter RollCall-protocol devices b) Select to Show Minor Warning
Alarm States
Fig. 3-8: Filter on Device Type and then Alarm State
To clear the alarms:
3 Click on the Filter icon and select ‘Clear All Filters’.
All filters are cleared and all devices are shown.
c) Minor Warning RollCallprotocol devices shown
Network Window Actions
Locate a device in the Network window and right-click on the item.
The following actions are possible in GV Orbit:
• Lite , Professional and Enterprise :
•
Device Information - View information about a device.
•
- View Densité-protocol device parameters.
•
Device Control - View and change device configuration settings. (
Lite : RollCall devices only.)
•
- Upgrade (or downgrade) device software/firmware.
• And for Professional and Enterprise only:
•
Alarm List - Live Alarms/Status - View a list of a devices’ live status and alarms.
88
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Network Window Actions
•
Alarm History for a Device - View the alarm history of a device.
•
Alarm Masking (Professional and Enterprise) - Mask device alarms.
Device Information
To inspect device information from the Network window (tree-view or list-view):
1 Right-click on a device and select ‘Info’.
Device information is shown in a Details pop-up window.
a) RollCall-protocol Device - Details window b) Densité-protocol Device - Details window
Fig. 3-9: Device Info - Details Pop-up Windows
Card Parameters
To view a Densité-protocol device’s parameter settings from the Network window:
1 Right-click on a Densité-protocol device and select ‘Card Parameters ’ .
A summary of the device’s parameter settings is shown in a tab. See Figure 3-10.
89
Home Screen
Network Window Actions
Right-click and select ‘Card Parameters’, a summary of card parameters is shown in a tab
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 3-10: Card Parameters Tab
2 Click on a column heading to sort the listed parameters on a column.
3 Use the filter controls to restrict the shown listed items. See Figure 3-11.
Example: Filtering on parameter name containing ‘Resp’
90
Fig. 3-11: Example Filtered Card Parameters
4 Read/Write card parameters can be entered via the ‘Current Value’ column.
Device Control
To inspect a device’s configuration settings from the Network window:
1 Right-click on a device and select ‘Control ’
to view the device’s control screen. (See Step
3.2: Configuration of Densité and RollCall Devices , on page 43.)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Alarms
Note: For GV Fabric IP Switch devices, the control screen that is opened in the GV Orbit Client window is the device’s web page.
Upgrade Device
To upgrade a device from the Network window:
1 Right-click on a device and select ‘Upgrade’ to open the device’s upgrade screen. (See
Step 4: Device Upgrade , on page 50.)
Alarms
See
section for more information.
Alarms
Note: Alarms in GV Orbit v1.2 onwards:
In GV Orbit systems, alarms are handled ‘behind the scenes’ with internal addresses. These addresses have changed for GV Orbit v1.2.0 onwards:
• v1.2.0 onwards : Alarm-addresses for Densité-protocol devices are now aligned with the respective device/card address.
• Earlier than v1.2.0
: Densité-protocol device alarm-addresses are separate and are not aligned to device addresses.
CAUTION
As a result of this alarm addressing change, when upgrading to GV Orbit v1.2.0 onwards, addresses specified for alarms must be changed. This applies to custom operator panels of C&M projects and to Alarm Behaviours.
Alarm List - Live Alarms/Status
Professional and Enterprise only.
Alarm List Window
To inspect live alarms and status of a device/frame/service from the Network window:
1 Right-click on a device item in the Network window and select ‘ Alarm List’ .
The live status and alarms reported by the device/frame/service are listed in an Alarm
List
window. See examples shown in Figure 3-12a and b, and Figure 3-13a and b.
91
Home Screen
Alarm List - Live Alarms/Status
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Click to select sorting of listed alarms from drop-down menu.
Clear filters on all columns.
Filter on a column (Name or
Value or State).
a) Alarm List example for a system device, XIP device
92 b) Alarm List for an Auto-discovered GV Fabric IP Switch
Fig. 3-12: Example Alarm List Windows for: a) System Device (XIP shown); b) GV Fabric IP Switch.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Alarm List - Live Alarms/Status a) Alarm List for a GV Orbit Server b) Alarm List for a GV Orbit Service
Fig. 3-13: Example Alarm List Windows for: a) GV Orbit Server; b) GV Orbit Service.
93
Home Screen
Alarm History for a Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Alarm List Window Masking
In the Alarm List window, alarms can be masked:
• at a device-level; or
• individual alarms for a device can be masked ( alarm-level ).
Right-click on an item in the Alarm List
window to see masking options. See Alarm
Masking (Professional and Enterprise) , on page 96 for further information on masking.
Right-click options
Right-click options Alarm-level masking options
Device-level masking options
Fig. 3-14: Alarm List Window Right-Click Options
Alarm History for a Device
Professional and Enterprise only.
Note:
The Alarm History window uses the following GV Orbit services:
IP Proxy, Log Server, Monitoring, Event Logging, and Densité Manager.
These services are all required for Alarm History .
To inspect the history of device status and alarms from the Network window:
1 Right-click on a device in the Network window and select ‘ Alarm History ’.
The status messages and alarms etc. reported by the device are listed in a new History window tab. The address of the device is shown in the window tab. See
94
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Alarm History for a Device
2 Click the search icon (
History window.
) in the
The Search Parameters dialog is shown.
3 Select a Log Data Source from the drop-down menu.
Note:
The Log Data Source dropdown menu lists the Event
Logging filters that are set up on the GV Orbit Server’s Event
Logging service.
This selects an alarm data source to view in the window.
Note:
See
Alarm History Window , on page 99 for further information on data
sources and the controls in this tab window.
4 To close the Search Parameters dialog,
(re-)click on the search icon (or click somewhere else in the History window).
The selected data source is shown in the History window.
(See Alarm History Window , on page 99 for further information.)
95
Home Screen
Alarm Masking (Professional and Enterprise)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Address of device shown in tab Click to filter on a column (Name or Value or State)
(See Alarm History Window , on page 99 for further information on the
History window.)
Fig. 3-15: Example History Window
Note: Masked alarms are shown “grayed-out” in the History window.
Alarm Masking (Professional and Enterprise)
Alarm masking may be done on a device ( device-level masking), or it may be done on a an individual alarm from a device ( alarm-level masking):
• Device-level masking/unmasking can be done from the Network window, or from the
Alarm List window for a device.
• Alarm-level masking/unmasking may be done from a device’s the Alarm List window.
Device-level masking is applied separately and additionally to any alarm-level masking.
For example, if an alarm-level mask is applied to alarm A for a device and then a devicelevel mask is applied to the device, when the device-level mask is removed, the alarm-levelmask will still apply.
Apply a Device-Level Mask
To mask alarms associated with a device, from the Network window:
1 Right-click on a device, select ‘Alarm Masking’. See Figure 3-19.
96
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Alarm Masking (Professional and Enterprise)
‘Mask device until normal’ is grayed-out for devices with OK status.
Fig. 3-16: ‘Alarm Masking’ Menu Options
2 Select one masking option from:
• Mask Device - Mask all alarms from a device/unit/frame/service.
• Mask Device Until Normal - Mask alarms from a device/unit until alarm state is OK
(‘green’). For example, mask a device/unit until any fault/error is corrected.
Note: This menu item is grayed-out for devices with an OK Alarm state.
• Mask Device with Tag - Mask a device with a Masking Tag. See
• Snooze Device - Mask alarms from a device/unit for a period of time. See
.
• Unmask - Unmask a device or a set of tagged devices.
Note: Masking or unmasking menu options may be grayed-out in the menu.
Apply an Alarm-Level Mask
Mask an alarm from a device, from the device’s Alarm List
window. See Figure 3-14 on page
Alarm Masking Tags
A set of device(s) can be masked with a Masking Tag .
Fig. 3-17: Mask a Device with a Masking Tag
Masking Tags are created in the ‘Tools > Options > Monitoring’ dialog from the main menu and provide a flexible, multiple and layered masking facility.
97
Home Screen
Alarm Masking (Professional and Enterprise)
Masking Snooze Times defined
Masking Tags defined
Fig. 3-18: Tools > Options > Monitoring Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
98
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Alarm History Window
Alarm Masking Snooze Times
Alarms for a device/unit/frame/service may be masked for a period of time.
Masking ‘Snooze’ times
Fig. 3-19: Masking Snooze Times
The selectable masking snooze times are configurable, see ‘Tools > Options > Monitoring’ in main menu in
Alarm History Window
Lite Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
The GV Orbit Client Alarm History window can show the history of system-wide alarms and status messages which are read from the Event Logging service on the GV Orbit Server.
Note:
The History window is similar to the window shown for
Alarm History for a Device , on page 94
.
Note:
By default, the History window sources event log data from the event log store which is set up as default in the Event Logging service. For example, the event log for which the Default Index setting is selected.
A user can change the event log data source for an History window . For example, change Log Data Source in the Search Parameter dialog.
A GV Orbit Professional or Enterprise user can:
• Select an event log data-set to use from the event log store.
• Search for messages from a particular time period.
99
Home Screen
View Alarm History for System-wide Alarms
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• Filter what is shown in the pages (for example, to just display minor alarms).
Note: Log Data Sources:
A History window sources log data from the GV Orbit system event log store.
All events are logged by an Event Logging service running on the GV Orbit
Server (see
Simple Custom Monitoring Screen Example , on page 117).
Depending on a log data-set’s configuration, some and/or all events and alarms are logged. A store may be selected as the log data source for display in the History window.
View Alarm History for System-wide Alarms
To view the Alarm History for GV Orbit system-wide alarms:
1 Click the Alarm History icon in the main tool bar.
The History window appears in a tab.
Note: The tab shows no specific device address when showing system-wide alarms.
Select the History tab to view it.
For further information about the Alarm History, refer to Event Log Viewer (Alarm
History) in the GV Orbit Admin Guide
. See Related Documentation , on page 19.
Graphical Routing Workflow
Lite Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
The factory-set Workflow stage shows a graphical workflow for routing system configuration and control with clickable icons to access tools through GV Orbit Control.
100
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
(1) IP Configuration and Spreadsheet Import
(1)
(4)
(10)
(8) (9)
(11)
(2) (3) (12) (13)
(5)
(14) (15)
(7)
(6)
Click on icons (1) to (13) to access routing tools
Click on server icons to access landing pages for each GV Orbit Server.
Each icon (1) to (15) is described in the
Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons table, on page 101
.
Fig. 3-20: Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to (13)
Table 3-2: Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons
Steps relating to icons in Figure 3-20 Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to
(1) IP Configuration and Spreadsheet Import
Access the IP Routing endpoint configuration editing tool or create a new default GV Orbit C&M project. See
IP Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import , on page 75 for more
information. See also IP Configuration , on page 777.
101
Home Screen
(2) Logical Level Editor
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 3-2: Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons (continued)
Steps relating to icons in Figure 3-20 Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to
(13) , on page 101
(2) Logical Level Editor
Access logical route editor tool in GV Orbit Control. For the target router:
• Define, review, edit logical routing levels. For example, levels for audio channel(s), video channels, SDI video, ancillary data etc.
See Logical Level Editor Tasks , on page 190
.
(3) Topology Configurator
Access router topology configurator tool in GV Orbit Control:
• Define router topology with the logical levels. For example, how physical and logical devices are arranged in the broadcast facility.
• Select topology to use.
See Topology Configurator Tasks , on page 199 .
102
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
(4) Logical Device Table
Table 3-2: Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons (continued)
Steps relating to icons in Figure 3-20 Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to
(13) , on page 101
(4) Logical Device Table
Access the logical devices editor tool in GV Orbit Control:
• Define logical devices in a table.
• Configure levels and IP streams.
• Configure audio shuffled streams and break-away streams.
• Create virtual crosspoints and logical destinations devices.
See Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241
.
(5) Category
Access the Category Configurator tool in GV Orbit Control:
• Manage sources and destinations with groups (or categories) based on type or usage. This is useful when there are multiple resources. Categories allow sources/destinations to be accessed quickly on a routing control panel.
See Category Configurator Tasks , on page 268 .
103
Home Screen
(6) Panel Configurator
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 3-2: Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons (continued)
Steps relating to icons in Figure 3-20 Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to
(13) , on page 101
(6) Panel Configurator
Access the Panel Configurator tool in GV Orbit Control:
• Create soft router control panel designs.
• Add buttons and behaviors to a routing control panel.
• Push the design to soft or hard panels.
See Panel Configurator Tasks , on page 275 .
(7) GPIO Configurator
Access the GPIO Configurator tool for GPIs and GPOs on supported panels (for example, GPI-1501) with GV Orbit Control:
• Add rules for GPIs to trigger events such as a salvo or routing a source to a destination.
• Add rules for GPOs to activate on combinations of conditions.
See GPIO Configurator Tasks , on page 312
.
104
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
(8) Bulk Routing
Table 3-2: Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons (continued)
Steps relating to icons in Figure 3-20 Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to
(13) , on page 101
(8) Bulk Routing
Access the Bulk Routing Control Panel tool in GV Orbit Control:
• Make routes between sources and destinations.
• Form break-away routes and shuffled routes.
• Execute salvos.
For an introduction to the Bulk Routing Control panel, see Bulk Routing Control Panel , on page 109.
(9) Snapshots
Access the Snapshots tab of the GV Orbit Routing Service that runs on the GV Orbit Server.
• Recall routing snapshots.
• Create and save new snapshots.
Refer to Routing Service in the GV Orbit Admin Guide , specifically the Snapshots Screen . See
Related Documentation , on page 19.
105
Home Screen
(10) Router Control
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 3-2: Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons (continued)
Steps relating to icons in Figure 3-20 Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to
(13) , on page 101
(10) Router Control
Access the Router Control Panel tool in GV Orbit Control:
• Make routes between sources and destinations.
• Create and execute salvos.
See Router Control Tasks , on page 458.
(11) Alias Editor
Access the Alias editor tool in GV Orbit Control:
• Assign aliases to sources and destinations
(to support shorter length names, other languages, or different production staff needs).
See Alias Editor Tasks , on page 454.
106
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
(12) System Status
Table 3-2: Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons (continued)
Steps relating to icons in Figure 3-20 Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to
(13) , on page 101
(12) System Status
Access the System Status screen of the GV Orbit Control router controllers:
• Monitor the health of GV Orbit Control router controller(s).
• View device health for a selected topology.
• Manual fail-over, if required.
See System Status Task , on page 445 .
(13) Path Manager
Access the Path Manager screen of GV Orbit Control:
• View source-destination paths of routed streams.
• View Tie-Line usage information, including % bandwidth used.
See Path Manager Tasks , on page 438
.
107
Home Screen
(14) Device Manager
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 3-2: Steps for Graphical Routing Workflow Stage Icons (continued)
Steps relating to icons in Figure 3-20 Graphical Routing Workflow Stage - with Icons (1) to
(13) , on page 101
(14) Device Manager
The GV Orbit Device Manager service lists and manages the connections to supported devices from a GV Orbit system to provide device operating status and information for the purpose of device health monitoring.
See Device Manager in the GV Orbit Admin Guide
. See Related Documentation , on page 19.
(15) Channel Manager
The Channel Manager service supports Densité cards such as the XIP-3901-UDC-IF that have two independent processing channels. It allows you to easily visualize, manage, and operate
XIP processing channels as individual devices without you having to know what physical device the channel is on.
108
See Channel Manager , on page 479. The Channel Manager is available by default in projects
created in GV Orbit Control version 2.2.0 and above. To add it to projects created before this, see
Adding Channel Manager to Projects Created before GV Orbit Control Version 2.2.0
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Bulk Routing Control Panel
Bulk Routing Control Panel
Lite Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
The Bulk Routing Control Panel is a built-in router control panel accessible from GV Orbit
Client. It requires the GV Orbit Routing service to be running on GV Orbit Server(s). IP routing or traditional (for example, SDI) routing may be controlled.
More Information on Bulk Routing Panel
For more information, see Chapter 13, Routing Control - XY Routing Panel , on page 575.
Open Bulk Routing Panel
1 Open an existing C&M project and set the GV Orbit Client window size to 1920x1080.
2 Click on the Bulk Routing icon in the
Graphical Routing Workflow stage.
A Bulk Routing Panel is shown in a window tab in the GV Orbit Client.
109
Home Screen
Open Bulk Routing Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Filtering boxes to limit items shown,
110
Router Control Pane
Source Grid Destination Grid
Salvos Pane
Source Levels Grid Destination Levels Grid
Fig. 3-21: Example Bulk Routing Panel
Troubleshooting
If problems are encountered when opening a Bulk Routing Panel, carry out the following checks:
1 Check that the project’s Client Domain is set for the GV Orbit system.
(Click Connections -> GVOP in the main menu.
Set Client Domain to be the system’s ‘Client Domain’ number.)
2 The project’s Routing Address project variable (a RollCall address) should be set to the
Routing service’s Logging Address . To verify this:
• To see the project variables, click Project -> Edit Variables in the main menu.
• To see the Routing service’s Logging Address :
Log into the GV Orbit Server and access the Routing service’s ‘System’
configuration screen. (See GV Orbit Server Login , on page 115, and
Services Configuration Screens , on page 117.)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Bulk Routing Panel - List View
To save any changes made to the project settings:
3 Click Project -> Save Project in the main menu to save the project locally.
4 Click Project -> Push to push and save the project to the GV Orbit Server.
Alternative Open Bulk Routing Panel (Network Window)
The Bulk Routing Panel may also be opened from the Network window in GV Orbit Client:
1 Display the Network window tree-view (click in the main tool bar to toggle displaying the window) and expand the tree-view.
2 In the Network window, locate the ‘ Routing service’ item.
(The item’s name is the Routing service’s
“Logging Name”.)
3 Right-click on the Routing service item and select Open Panel .
A Bulk Routing Panel is shown in a window tab
in the GV Orbit Client. See Figure 3-21 on page
Note: A ‘ Routing service’ item appears in the GV Orbit Network window when a Routing service is running on the connected GV Orbit Server and is configured to talk to a router controller.
Bulk Routing Panel ‘Source’ and ‘Destination’ buttons are annotated with router port names obtained through the Routing service.
Bulk Routing Panel - List View
List View is a level-centric view of a Bulk Routing Panel, allowing a user to focus on routing to Destination Levels. List View presents all of the destinations in a ‘list’ format; each list item is a Destination with all of its Levels.
To access List View mode:
1 Open the Bulk Routing Panel and set the GV Orbit Client window size to 1920x1080.
2 In the Destination Grid’s tool bar, click on the List View icon.
This toggles between the normal Bulk
Routing Panel view and the List View mode.
The List View is shown.
List View
Destination Grid
icon
111
Home Screen
Bulk Routing Panel Information
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Click icon to toggle between List View and the normal view
Destination Levels Grid
Scrollable list of destinations
Fig. 3-22: Bulk Routing Panel - List View
Bulk Routing Panel Information
For further Bulk Routing Panel information, including about List View and about general
operation, refer to Chapter 13, Routing Control - XY Routing Panel , on page 575.
Routing Snapshots
Snapshots of all routes and crosspoints in a GV Orbit system can be taken and restored from the GV Orbit Client with the Routing service configuration screen.
Access Routing Service Screen
1 Go to the GV Orbit Client workflow.wfl Workflow window.
2 Click on the Snapshots icon.
The GV Orbit Server window is shown in a tab.
112
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Scroll down the server window on the left and locate the ‘Services’ section and select ‘Routing’.
The Routing service configuration screen is shown.
4 Select the ‘Snapshots’ side-tab on the left.
The Routing service’s Snapshots
screen is shown. See Figure 3-23.
Home Screen
To Take a Routing Snapshot
Fig. 3-23: Routing Service Snapshots Configuration Screen
To Take a Routing Snapshot
In the Routing service Snapshots screen:
1 Enter a name for the new snapshot.
2 Click Create Snapshot .
113
Home Screen
To Recall a Snapshot
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 3-24: Routing Service Snapshots Configuration Screen
A snapshot of all routes and crosspoints is taken. And the new snapshot appears in the list.
Fig. 3-25: New Snapshot Item in List
3 Click Save Changes .
To Recall a Snapshot
In the Routing service Snapshots screen:
1 Find a snapshot in the list and click Recall .
The signal routing and crosspoint settings present when the snapshot was taken are
114
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide restored.
Home Screen
GV Orbit Server Login
Fig. 3-26: Recall Snapshot
GV Orbit Server Login
Lite
Professional
Enterprise
This section describes how to log into a GV Orbit Server from either the GV Orbit Client or with a web browser. When logged in, various configurations can be viewed, including settings for the GV Orbit services.
Refer to the Launching and Logging in to GV Orbit Admin Interface in the GV Orbit Admin
Guide .
See Related Documentation , on page 19.
Login From GV Orbit Client
With a GV Orbit C&M project open in GV Orbit Client, to open a GV Orbit Server’s Home stage:
1 Either:
• click Project -> URLs in the main menu and select the GV Orbit Server item; or
• click on a server icon in the Workflow stage (for example, Server 1 ).
115
Home Screen
Login from a Browser
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 3-27: Click on Server Icon in Workflow Stage
The GV Orbit Server Admin Login screen is then shown. See
Login from a Browser
To log into a GV Orbit Server from a browser:
1 Enter the IP address of a GV Orbit Client into a web browser (Chrome recommended).
The GV Orbit Server Admin Login
screen is shown. See Figure 3-28.
Server Admin Login Screen
For more details about the GV Orbit Server and logging in, refer to the GV Orbit Admin Guide in
Related Documentation , on page 19.
Fig. 3-28: GV Orbit Server Admin Login Screen
116
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Accessing Services Configuration Screens
Note:
The GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit Control Client installers may also be downloaded from the GV Orbit Server Admin Login screen.
1 Click Log in .
A login screen is shown.
2 Enter the User ID and Password (the default user ID is ‘admin’ with password ‘admin’).
Click Login .
The GV Orbit Server Home
stage is shown. See Figure 3-1 on page 79.
Accessing Services Configuration Screens
Services should be set up by the GV Orbit system administrator. Services running on the
GV Orbit Server are configured via their configuration screens accessible from the GV Orbit
Server Home stage.
For information about the server and services, refer to the GV Orbit Admin Guide . See
Related Documentation , on page 19.
Logs
Lite Professional
Enterprise
Introduction
Logs are kept for system device status/alarm messages (events) and also for applications/services running on the GV Orbit Server.
•
Simple Custom Monitoring Screen Example - In an operating GV Orbit system, GV Orbit
device/service status, alarm messages and events are logged by a GV Orbit service running on a GV Orbit Server. Events etc. are logged to an event log data set. This is set up when configuring the Event Logging service on the server.
• Server Application and Service Log Files - Each application/service running on the
GV Orbit Server also has a set of log files.
For further information about the log files, refer to Event Log Setup Screen in the GV Orbit
Admin Guide
. See Related Documentation , on page 19.
Simple Custom Monitoring Screen Example
Lite Professional
Enterprise
117
Home Screen
Introduction
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Introduction
A simple custom graphical operator screen is presented here. The example describes a monitoring screen using a C&M project; device status is monitored by the screen.
This requires:
• a configured C&M project;
• a configured GV Orbit Server; and
• the following minimum GV Orbit services to be running:
• IP Proxy
• Log Server
• Monitoring
• Densité.
Steps:
•
Step 1: Create a New Monitoring Screen Schematic , on page 118.
•
Step 2: Add Monitoring , on page 120.
•
Step 3: Save and Push Project , on page 125.
•
Step 4: Run Custom Monitoring Screen , on page 125.
Step 1: Create a New Monitoring Screen Schematic
1 Open the C&M Project and show the Project window and the
Workflow window with the
Workflow stage.
2 On the workflow stage, click on the Screens icon.
The Screens dialog is shown.
118
Fig. 3-29: Screens Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Step 1: Create a New Monitoring Screen Schematic
3 Click New Screen .
The New Screen dialog is shown.
4 Enter a name for the new screen schematic and click OK .
A new, blank custom screen schematic is created. The new, blank schematic is shown in
a window tab in GV Orbit Client. See Figure 3-30.
Note:
A custom screen schematic is shown in GV Orbit Client; this is the ‘stage’ on which the schematic is:
• designed when GV Orbit Client is in Design Mode ; and
• run and operated when GV Orbit Client is in Run Mode .
Run Mode icon (Showing project is in Design Mode )
Schematic stage
Note: Drag ‘handle’ to the right to reveal more tool bar icons
Fig. 3-30: New, Blank Custom Schematic
5 Click the Run Mode tool bar icon to select GV Orbit Client Design Mode
119
Home Screen
Step 2: Add Monitoring
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: A project’s ‘mode’ toggles between Run Mode and Design Mode .
Click to exit Run Mode
Click to enter a) Icon appearance when in
Run Mode
Run Mode b) Icon appearance when in Design Mode
Fig. 3-31: Run Mode / Design Mode Tool Bar Icon
Note:
In Design Mode , a project may be edited
(for example, a video wall may be modified).
In Run Mode , a project monitors log and alarm data and displays updated custom operator screens in real-time.
Step 2: Add Monitoring
A control and monitoring (C&M) screen will monitor items in a system with individual or aggregate alarms for a device (or collection of devices), or an individual alarm (or collection of alarms). This is quick and easy to achieve with GV Orbit Client.
Items to be monitored can be dragged onto a C&M screen either from the Network window or from an Alarm List window. One or more devices or device alarms can be monitored.
Add Monitoring of Devices
For a C&M screen schematic open in GV Orbit Client in Design Mode :
1 Expand the Network window to find a RollCall- or Densité-protocol device to monitor.
2 Drag a device onto the C&M screen schematic, and release.
At release, GV Orbit Client pops up a list of options. These control what will be created
from the drag. See Figure 3-32a.
(Figure 3-32b shows the resulting Run Mode screen appearance, see later steps.)
120
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Step 2: Add Monitoring
Project is in Design Mode
Pop-up Options
Selected device a) Drag on Devices
Drag on-screen
Project is in Run Mode b) Monitoring Example when in Run Mode
Fig. 3-32: Drag Device Monitoring onto the Schematic: a) Drag on Devices; b) Monitoring Shown when in Run Mode
3 Click ‘Create Single Tally’ in the pop-up options list.
GV Orbit Client then infers a default, graphical Tally widget on the schematic which is automatically set up to graphically indicate the overall status of the device when in Run
Mode.
4 Drag on more devices, as required.
(Figure 3-32b shows what the graphical items may look like in
Run Mode .)
This has quickly added simple device alarm state monitoring to the C&M project.
Note: Add Device:
Dragging a device onto the schematic and releasing it on top of an existing monitoring Tally widget will add the device to the screen widget, thus creating an aggregate alarm.
121
Home Screen
Step 2: Add Monitoring
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Add Monitoring of Alarms
Device alarm monitoring can also be added:
1 Expand the Network window to find a device to monitor.
Then right-click on the device item and select ‘Alarm List’.
The device’s alarms are all shown in a pop-up Alarm List window.
2 Select one or more alarms in the Alarm List window and drag them onto the C&M screen schematic, and release.
(To select more than one alarm item, click on an item to select it, and select more with
CTRL-click.)
At release, a list of options pops up which will control what will be created from the
Note: Pop-up Options:
These pop-up options are described in
‘Drag-On’ Options , on page 123.
Pop-up options:
Alarm List window
Selected alarms
Drag on screen
122
C&M project is in Design Mode
Fig. 3-33: Drag Alarm Monitoring onto the C&M Screen Schematic
3 Select the pop-up option required.
GV Orbit Client then infers graphical monitoring widget(s) on the schematic which are automatically set up to indicate the alarm status.
This has quickly added simple device alarm monitoring to the C&M project.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Step 2: Add Monitoring
Note: Add an Alarm:
Dragging an alarm (from the same or from a different device) onto an existing monitoring widget will add the alarm to the screen widget.
Note: Right-click Drag:
Right-click dragging will use the last pop-up option selected and will avoid you having to select the same pop-up option each time.
Note: Label Style Change:
A text label is difficult to see against a black background. In this case, change the label’s appearance by selecting it and changing its ‘Style’ property value, see
Text Label Style Change , on page 124.
When all monitoring widgets have been added, proceed to Step 3: Save and Push Project , on page 125.
‘Drag-On’ Options
The pop-up options for creating graphical, on-screen from the ‘drag-on’ item(s) are shown
in Table 3-3. Figure 3-34b and Figure 3-34c show the result of each option
Design Mode and in Run Mode respectively.
Table 3-3: ‘Drag-On Options
Option
A) Create multiple labels
B) Create multiple tallies
C) Create multiple ‘stateful’ labels
D) Create single aggregate tally
Creates a text label per item.
Description
Creates a graphical Tally widget per item, to show the individual alarm state of each item.
Creates a colorful text label per item, where the text color indicates each individual alarm state.
Creates one graphical Tally widget to show a combined, aggregate alarm state of all the dragged-on items.
123
Home Screen
Step 2: Add Monitoring
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
These graphical items show alarm state.
A) A)
B) B)
C) C)
D) D) a) Result of options A), B), C), and D) in Design Mode b) Result of options A), B), C), and D) in Run Mode
Fig. 3-34: Dragged-on Monitoring Options A), B), C), and D) in: a) Design Mode; b) Run Mode.
Text Label Style Change
When creating a text label with this ‘drag-on’ method, the resulting default label may be difficult to see (for example, if against a black background). In this case, change the
appearance of the text label by changing its ‘Style’ property value, see Figure 3-35a and
• Select the label(s) on the schematic.
In the Properties box, click on the Style’-
property’s value (see Figure 3-35a).
A drop-down menu is shown.
• Select a Style value from the drop-down menu, for example ‘Solid Caption’.
• Click ‘Yes’ in the dialog that is shown.
The label appearance has been changed (see
124
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Step 3: Save and Push Project a) Selected Labels b) New Text Label Style
Fig. 3-35: Changing Text Label Style Property
Step 3: Save and Push Project
When all the required device/alarm monitoring is added to the C&M project screen:
1 Click Project -> Save Project in the main menu to save the project locally.
2 Click Project -> Push to push the project to the GV Orbit Server repository.
Step 4: Run Custom Monitoring Screen
1 Click the Design/Run Mode tool bar icon to take GV Orbit
Client out of ‘Design Mode’ and into ‘Run Mode’:
GV Orbit Client runs the C&M project and gets device status information to display on the custom monitoring screen’s
Lamp widgets, which illuminate red/yellow/green to show
device status. See Figure 3-36.
Icon when in Run Mode
125
Home Screen
Step 4: Run Custom Monitoring Screen
Project in Run Mode
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Device status shown in Network window is reflected in the custom monitoring screen
Fig. 3-36: Simple Custom Monitor Example Running in GV Orbit Client
Note: Tally Widget graphics:
The graphics shown by these Tally widgets are:
Shape
Green circle
Alarm Status
OK
Yellow/amber triangle Minor Warning
Orange inverted triangle Major Warning
Red square
Blue diamond
Failure/Error
Unknown
126
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Main Menu and Tool Bar Items
2 To go back to ‘Design Mode’, click the Design/Run Mode icon again.
3 To save the project locally, click Project -> Save Project from the main menu.
4 To push the project back to the GV Orbit Server:
• click Project -> Push from the main menu;
• select the project name in the list (it may already be selected/highlighted); and
• click OK .
5 To close the project, click Project -> Close Project .
6 To close the GV Orbit Client application, click Project -> Exit .
Main Menu and Tool Bar Items
This section describes the Home Screen ’s main menu items and main tool bar items:
•
•
And:
•
Common Operations in Graphic Editors
Main Menu Items
Note: The main menu items shown depend on the type of GV Orbit project open in GV Orbit Client.
•
•
Connections Menu , on page 128
•
•
•
Multiviewer Menu Items , on page 130
•
Project Menu
Table 3-4: Project Menu Items
Menu Item
New Project Click to create a new project.
Description
Open Project
Recent Projects
Save Project
Rename Project
Click to open an existing, locally-stored project.
Click to see a list of recently opened projects.
Click to locally save the current project with all recent changes.
Click to rename the open project.
127
Home Screen
Main Menu Items
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 3-4: Project Menu Items (continued)
Menu Item
Close Project
Pull
Description
Click to close the open project.
Click to pull a project from a repository (on a GV Orbit Server).
Push
Recent Files
Save File
Save File As
Click to push a project to a repository (on a GV Orbit Server).
Click to see a list of recently opened files.
Click to locally save the open file.
Click to locally save the open file as a new file.
Close
Set Home
Edit Variables
URLs
Exit
Click to close the open file.
Click to set the currently open schematic to be the home schematic.
Click to see and edit project variables.
Click to see and access URLs defined in the project.
Click to close any project and exit GV Orbit Client.
Connections Menu
Note: Setting up GV Orbit server IP address:
When the GV Orbit server IP address is set up (either at the start of a project, or in the ‘Connections > GV Server ‘menu), then the ‘RollCall-, ‘Densité-, and
‘GVOP-Connections’ > menu item settings are automatically filled out and applied.
Table 3-5: Connections Menu Items
Menu Item
GV Server
Description
Click to set up project connection to GV Orbit Server.
Note: Setting this up will automatically cause the other settings in the
‘Connections’ menu to be set up and applied.
Kaleido
RollCall
Densité
Click to set up a connection to a Kaleido multiviewer by entering its IP
Address and the multiviewer is then added to the Network View. See
Step 7.3.3: Configure Network Window for Kaleido Multiviewers , on page 73.
Click to set up RollCall connection settings and options.
Network Map:
See Step 3.2.1: Network Window Setup For RollCallprotocol Devices , on page 44.
Connect To:
See Step 3.1: Direct Configuration of RollCall-protocol
RollCall Control Screen: See
Step 3.2.2: View a Device Control Screen -
RollCall Devices , on page 46.
Click to configure Densité connection settings. See
Configure Network Window for Densité-protocol Devices , on page 72.
GVOP
Click to set up GV Orchestration Protocol settings. See
Domain Number (Connections -> GVOP) , on page 72.
128
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Main Menu Items
Tools Menu
Table 3-6: Tools Menu Items
Menu Item
Options
Description
Click to set up options in GV Orbit Client, including:
• App lication - Graphical grid settings and font settings.
• Video - Real time video rendering options.
• Launch - Project launch options.
• Remotes - Remote access options.
• Links - Set URLs in project
• Pop-ups - Name, size and position of any pop-up windows in project.
• Monitoring - Alarm Masking options.
• Map View - Options for C&M project MapView screens, including built-in links and alarm state colors.
Fig. 3-37: Tools > Options Dialog from Main Menu
Window Menu
These menu items apply when more than one window (tab) is open in GV Orbit Client.
Menu options may be grayed-out if they do not apply.
Table 3-7: Window Menu Items
Menu Item
Next Tab
Description
Click to go to the next open window tab.
Alternatively, press CTRL-Tab.
Previous Tab Click to go to the previous open window tab.
Alternatively, press CTRL-SHIFT-Tab.
Close All Click to close all window tabs.
List of open tabs Radio-button list:
Click on a list item to go to that windows tab.
129
Home Screen
Main Menu Items
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Multiviewer Menu Items
Multiviewer Menu (Single-Multiviewer Project)
This menu appear for non -clustered, single multiviewer cases.
Table 3-8: Multiviewer Menu Items
Menu Item
Properties
Description
Click to see multiviewer device information.
Input Alarms Click to enable and configure alarms on each multiviewer input. Alarms include video alarms and audio alarms.
Unit Alarms
Input Audio
Click to enable and configure specific alarms for the multiviewer device. For example, ‘genlock state’.
Set up input audio related settings, including: ‘audio metering type’, digital audio reference level, audio loudness and phase engines.
Note: The ‘audio metering type’ setting defines:
• the ballistics of all audio metering data generated by the device; and
• the default audio meter scale for graphical Audio Bars widgets on the multiviewer’s video wall.
Output Audio
Units
Download Logs
CAUTION The audio metering data ballistics set up here applies globally for the multiviewer device. All audio metering data generated by the device will have the same ballistics.
A GV Orbit multiviewer project may change an audio meter type locally on a video wall tile/schematic which locally changes the meter scale only; the audio metering data used will still have the global ballistics type.
Set up the audio sources for each of the audio channels in each of the multiviewer outputs. Up to eight stereo channels are embedded in each output.
Select the units published by a Grass Valley Log Server that a multiviewer may view.
Obtain logs from a multiviewer unit.
Note: The Alarm items are described in the user manual for the MV-8 Series multiviewer devices.
See the MV-8 Series Core Multiviewer User Manual .
Multiviewer Menu (Clustered Multiviewer Project)
This menu appears for clustered multiviewer cases.
130
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 3-9: Multiviewer Menu Items
Menu Item
Multiviewer
Cluster
Description
Click to see multiviewer cluster information.
See Chapter 14 Multiviewer Cluster , on page 637.
Help Menu
Table 3-10: Help Menu Items
Menu Item Description
About GV Orbit
Client
Grass Valley Home
Page
Click to see information about GV Orbit Client software.
Click to go to the Grass Valley web page.
GV Orbit Manual Click to go to the GV Orbit documentation web page.
Main Tool Bar Items
Tool bar icons implement some main menu functions.
• Pull
• Push
Home Screen
Main Tool Bar Items
• New Project
• Open Project
• Save Project
• Save File
• Save File As
•
•
•
Alarm History
Project Window
Network
Fig. 3-38: Main Tool Bar Items
Window
Window
(Toggle the display of windows in the GV Orbit Client)
• Tools > Options
• Lock/Unlock the client window
• URL
URLs
- Go to project
• Home - Go to schematic
Home
The tool icons shown depend on the type of project open in GV Orbit Client and on the editing function being carried out. For example, further Tool Bar items are shown when a
multiviewer video wall is open. See Main Tool Bar with a Graphic Editor Open
.
131
Home Screen
Main Tool Bar Items
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Main Tool Bar with a Graphic Editor Open
Additional tool bar icons are shown here. See
for the other icons.
Display drawing grid
DeSelect All
Select All
Properties window
Set the active window to full-screen mode
Dock/Undock the active window
Go back/forward a step
Options
(Tools > Options in main menu)
Cut Copy Paste Delete
Graphic Object Alignment Controls
Graphic object layer
(shown in Design mode)
Zoom stage screen in/out
Fig. 3-39: Main Tool Bar with a Graphic Editor Screen Open
Note: Object selection/deselection operations used in graphic editors in GV
Orbit Client are described
Selection/De-Selection of Objects in
Graphic Editors , on page 137.
Design Mode / Run Mode
Clicking on the Run Mode / Design Mode tool bar icon toggles between ‘Run’ and ‘Design’ modes of GV Orbit Client.
Click to exit Run Mode
Click to enter a) Icon appearance when
Run Mode in Run Mode b) Icon appearance when in Design Mode
Fig. 3-40: Run Mode / Design Mode Tool Bar Icon
Note:
• In Design Mode , a project may be edited (for example, a video wall may be modified).
• In Run Mode , a project monitors log and alarm data and generates display screens in real-time.
132
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Main Tool Bar Items
Note: The Design Mode / Run Mode tool bar icon may not be shown if changing between these modes is not applicable in the screen mode of the GV Orbit project shown.
Full-Screen View
The graphical stage area can be viewed in full-screen mode. There are two ways to do this,
To Enter/Leave Full Screen Mode - Short Cut
To enter or to leave the full screen mode, when in a graphical screen:
• Press ALT-Enter.
This toggles full-screen mode on/off.
To View Full-screen
1 Click the Full Screen button ( ).
Set the active window to full-screen mode
Fig. 3-41: Main Tool Bar with a Graphic Editor Screen Open
To Exit Full-Screen Mode
1 Right-click on the (full) screen and select ‘Full screen’ in the pop-up menu to exit full screen mode.
Fig. 3-42: Main Tool Bar with a Graphic Editor Screen Open
133
Home Screen
Main Tool Bar Items
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Graphic Object Alignment Controls
The graphic object controls are used in most graphical editing screens in GV Orbit Client.
The controls are grayed out where they are not used.
Layer controls: Send selected object(s):
• to the front; or
• to the back.
Align on a Grid
Place selected object(s) in a central position of the stage area.
Fig. 3-43: Graphic Object Alignment Tool Bar Controls
Align Controls
Note: Object selection/deselection operations used in graphic editors in GV
Orbit Client are described
Selection/De-Selection of Objects in
Graphic Editors , on page 137.
To use an align control in one of the GV Orbit Client’s graphical editor tools:
1 Select a graphical object. (See Figure 3-44a.)
This will be the object that will be aligned to.
2 SHIFT-select one or more further graphical objects. (See Figure 3-44b.)
3 Click on an align control in the main tool bar.
The alignment is done to the first object selected. (See Figure 3-44c.)
134 a) Select an object to align to.
b) SHIFT-Select further objects. c) Objects aligned.
Fig. 3-44: Alignment Example
Align on a Grid
Use this control to arrange selected objects (see Figure 3-45a) in a grid arrangement.
In one of the GV Orbit Client’s graphical editor tools:
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Main Tool Bar Items
1 Select all of the graphical objects to be arranged in a grid. (See Figure 3-45b.)
2 Click on the Align to Grid
tool icon. (See Figure 3-45b.)
‘Align to Grid’ controls are shown in the Properties
3 Set the following ‘Align to Grid’ control values:
• Num Rows - number of rows required in the resulting grid of objects.
(For example, = 3.)
• Row Spacing - number of pixels between rows of the resulting grid.
(For example, = 50.)
• Col Spacing - number of pixels between columns of objects in the resulting grid.
(For example, =20.)
4 Click Apply
The object alignment is done to the specified grid. (See Figure 3-44d and Figure 3-44e.)
135
Home Screen
Main Tool Bar Items
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide a) Objects
Click Align to Grid
Selected objects b) Select objects. Click Align to Grid icon.
c) Align to Grid settings in Properties box d) Objects aligned to a grid.
Fig. 3-45: Align to Grid Example
136 e) Objects (deselected) aligned to a grid.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Home Screen
Common Operations in Graphic Editors
Common Operations in Graphic Editors
•
Selection/De-Selection of Objects in Graphic Editors
•
Selection Etc. in Groups of Objects
•
Selection/De-Selection of Objects in Graphic Editors
Selection/De-Selection of Objects in Graphic Editors
This section outlines actions to select and de-select objects in general in any of the graphic editors in GV Orbit Client. For example, in the Wall, Room, Tile, or Screen Editor tools.
Table 3-11: Object Selection / De-selection in a Graphic Editor
Action
Click outside the schematic stage area.
Deselect All
Description
ESC
Click ‘ Deselect All ’ in main tool bar.
CTRL-A
Click ‘ Select All ’ in the main tool bar
Click on an item.
ALT-Click on an item.
Select All
Select
SHIFT-Click on an item.
CTRL-Click on an item.
SHIFT-ALT-Click on an item.
Select an alternative item from a layer-stack of items.
Or:
Select the group of objects that an item belongs to.
(For information on groups of objects, see
Selection Etc. in Groups of Objects , on page 138.)
Add an item to the current selection.
Note: When in a router control panel,
SHIFT-click selects a contiguous range of sources are destination. For example, in the
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel , in the
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel , or in the
XY Routing Sources screen of the
Add an item to the current selection when in a Room Editor XY Routing Sources screen.
Add another item to the current selection from a layer-stack of items.
137
Home Screen
Select All
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 3-11: Object Selection / De-selection in a Graphic Editor
Action
SHIFT-Click on an already-selected item.
Description
Remove an item from the current selection
SHIFT-drag-cursor on screen to describe a rectangular area.
Select objects within a rectangular area.
All objects wholly or partly within the area are selected.
Select All
Select All is accomplished via CTRL-A or by clicking a Select All button when in a graphic editor in GV Orbit Client.
General Select All
The Select All operation generally selects all objects on a wall or tile etc.
Select All in Some Screens of the Room Editor
However, in the Room Editor there is some flexibility built into Select All when in either the:
• Design Layout mode; or
• X/Y Routing mode.
In these Room Editor modes, then Select All is slightly modified:
• if nothing is selected, then
Select All will select all multiviewer outputs of the video wall.
• if a video tile is selected in a multiviewer output, then
Select All will select all tiles just belonging to that multiviewer output.
Selection Etc. in Groups of Objects
Grouping Objects Together
Graphical objects can be grouped together:
1 Select the objects. (‘Select’, and ‘SHIFT-select’ to add objects to selection.)
2 Right-click on the selected objects and select ‘Group’. (See Figure 3-46a.)
The objects are grouped together. (See Figure 3-46b.)
138
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Selected objects Right-click and select ‘Group’
Home Screen
Selection Etc. in Groups of Objects a) Selected objects
Fig. 3-46: Grouping Objects
Un-Grouping Objects
Graphical objects can be un-grouped:
1 Select the group of objects.
2 Right-click and select ‘Un-Group’.
Operations on Groups
Table 3-12: Operations on Groups of Objects
Action
Select an object.
Hold down Left-click and start to drag, and then additionally hold down SHIFT to drag into a Group.
ALT-click to select an object in a group, and then hold Left-click and drag out of group.
b) Grouped objects
Description
Add an object to a Group.
(Drag into a group.)
Remove an object from a group.
(Drag out of a group.)
139
Home Screen
Selection Etc. in Groups of Objects
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
140
Introduction
GV Orbit Client provides user access control to GV Orbit projects. This controls who can open a GV Orbit project in GV Orbit Client and what editing or operational actions they may perform. Users of a project will require different access to aspects of a project depending on their role.
The GV Orbit Client Manage Users screen enables project user roles and levels of user access to be set up and managed.
When opening a project, a user is prompted for a user name and a password when accessing a GV Orbit project.
Default Admin Username and Password
By default, only an ‘admin’ user is initially configured in a new project. The ‘admin’ user has full permissions.
Default username = admin
Default password = admin
Note: The ‘admin’ user has administrator role permissions which enable all operations within GV Orbit Client to be carried out.
The default ‘admin’ user password should be changed as soon as you
log in for the first time, How to Change a User Password , on page 158.
Note: Administrator user passwords should be recorded and kept secure.
Note: The ‘Users’ described here in this chapter are GV Orbit Client users.
These are not users for the GV Orbit Control application in GV Orbit,
which utilizes a separate users and user setup. See User Management
Accessing the Manage Users Tab
The Manage Users tab is accessible in several ways:
•
.
•
.
•
141
Manage Users
From the Workflow Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
From the Workflow Screen
To access the Manage Users screen from the GV Orbit Dynamic System Orchestrator workflow screen:
1 Click on the ‘User Management’ icon. See Figure 4-1.
The Manage Users
tab is opened. See Figure 4-2 on page 143.
Click User Management icon
Fig. 4-1: Workflow User Management Icon
From the Project Home Page
The Manage Users tab is accessible from a GV Orbit Project Home screen (for example, in a multiviewer project):
1 Start the GV Orbit Client application.
2 Open a (multiviewer) project and log in as an ‘admin’ user.
The GV Orbit Project Home screen is displayed.
3 Click on the large Manage Users
The Manage Users
tab is shown. See Figure 4-4 on page 144.
142
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users Icon
Manage Users
From the Project Window
Fig. 4-2: Manage Users icon on Home Screen
From the Project Window
The Manage Users tab is accessible from the GV Orbit Client Project window:
1 Start the GV Orbit Client application.
2 Open a (multiviewer) project and log in as an ‘admin’ user.
3 Clicking on the icon in the main tool bar ( ) toggles showing the Project window.
In the Project window:
4 Locate the name of the current project and expand the item.
5 Right-click on the ‘db.users’ item and select ‘Open’. See Figure 4-3.
The Manage Users
tab is shown. See Figure 4-4 on page 144.
Click to expand/collapse current project item
Project window icon selected.
Right-click on
‘db.users’ item and select ‘Open’.
Current project item, expanded in Project window.
Fig. 4-3: Open Manage Users Tab from Project Window
Manage Users Tab
Note: Managing users:
Ensure that you are logged into the GV Orbit project with administrator permissions when managing users.
Note: The logged-in User name is shown in the main tool bar of each GV
Orbit Client screen.
143
Manage Users
Changes to User Information
Manage Users tab
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide db.users tab name, click x to close tab
Click to log out of project and change user
User name shown
Fig. 4-4: Manage Users Tab (‘Roles’ Tab shown)
The Manage Users tab is labeled ‘db.users’ and contains the following ‘sub-tabs’:
• Roles .
• Users .
• Permissions .
A file with the name “db.users” appears in the Project
This file contains encrypted project information, including user name and password details.
Changes to User Information
If a change has been made to settings in any of the Manage Users tabs, an asterisk (*) is appended to the “ db.users
” label.
Save changes by:
1 Clicking the Save File icon in the GV Orbit Client main tool bar.
144
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Change Logged-in User
When logged into a project as a user, it is possible to quickly log out and log back in as another user.
1 Start the GV Orbit Client application, open a project and log in.
The project opens in GV Orbit Client and the currently logged-in User name is shown in the main tool bar.
In the main tool bar:
2 Click the Change User icon ( ).
A Change User
dialog is shown. See Figure 4-5.
3 Click Yes to log out and log in (as another user).
Click Change User icon to log out and change user
Current logged-in User name
Manage Users
Change Logged-in User
Fig. 4-5: User Name and Change Users Icon in Main Tool Bar
Roles Tab
To display the Roles tab in the Manage Users tab:
1 Click on the Roles tab.
The Roles tab lists the defined user roles for the GV Orbit project with a brief description of each,
Select a listed Role for full role details.
145
Manage Users
Pre-defined User Roles
List of defined User roles Full details for selected Role
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Permissions pane
Membership pane
Fig. 4-6: Roles Tab
The Roles tab allows the roles to be viewed, created and edited; it is used to:
• Add and delete roles - New roles can be created and roles can also be deleted.
See
• Edit permissions for each role - This defines which operations may be carried out in a role with the Permissions pane.
See
Edit Role Permissions , on page 151.
• Edit user roles - This assigns a role to each user name.
See
Pre-defined User Roles
The following user Roles are configured by default in a new GV Orbit project:
• Administrator - role with all default permissions.
• Supervisor - role as administrator, but no user management role.
• Operator - role limited to read-only access to projects.
146
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The permissions for each of these roles are listed in Figure 4-7.
Manage Users
Role Permissions (Permissions Pane) a) Administrator b) Supervisor c) Operator
Fig. 4-7: Predefined User Role Permissions (Multiviewer project shown): a) Administrator; b) Supervisor; c) Operator.
Role Permissions (Permissions Pane)
A role’s permissions are set up in the Permissions pane.
Permissions are operations that can be carried out on a GV Orbit project in the GV Orbit
Client application. When applied to a user, they form the user’s privileges, that is, what each user is allowed to do.
147
Manage Users
Role Permissions (Permissions Pane)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: A default new project’s ‘administrator’ role has permissions to add/edit users.
1 Select the Role in the list in the Roles tab.
Permissions information for the selected Role is shown in the Permissions pane.
Permissions that are ‘allowed’ for the role and others that are ‘available’ are listed in the
Permissions
Note: The list of all permissions varies between GV Orbit project types.
Fig. 4-8: Permissions (Supervisor Role in a Multiviewer Project Shown)
Purge ALL
Table 4-1: Permissions - GV Orbit project types Multiviewer (MV)/ IP Routing (IP))
Permission
Change multicast options
Export ALL
Change flow options
Assign device ports
Assign ALL ports
The ability to...
Purge all off-line devices.
Change automatic multicast assignment options.
Export settings for all devices.
Change the options used for automatic flow enabling.
Assign ports for a device.
Assign ports for all devices.
Project
Type
MV IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
148
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
Role Permissions (Permissions Pane)
Edit source multicast
Enable flows for source device
Edit port number
Edit screens
Table 4-1: Permissions - GV Orbit project types Multiviewer (MV)/ IP Routing (IP))
Permission The ability to...
Edit individual multicast settings for a source flow.
Enable flows for a source device.
Edit a port number for a spigot.
Edit an X/Y Routing screen. Without this permission, when you open a MV Cluster Room File, you will be taken directly to the X/Y Routing Screen and GV Orbit
Client will be put into full screen mode. You will only be able to switch Rooms, switch Room Layout and switch
Monitor Layouts.
MV
Project
Type
MV IP
IP
IP
IP
Edit/create custom screens.
Edit device name
Import ALL
Disable flows for source device
Edit port name
Enable source flow
Edit a device name.
Import settings for all devices.
Disable flows for a source device.
Edit a port name for a spigot.
Enable/disable individual source flows.
Export device
Enable flows for all source devices
Import device
Device control
Export settings for a device.
Enable flows for all source devices.
Import settings for a device.
Enable access to a device’s configuration panel.
Device upgrade
Clear multicast for source device
Enable access to upgrade a device’s firmware.
Clear multicast settings for a device.
Clear multicast for all source devices Clear multicast settings for all source devices.
Assign multicast for source device Assign multicast settings for a source device.
Assign multicast for all dest devices Set 1:1 or 1:All routes for all destination devices.
Clear multicast for all dest devices Clear multicast settings for all destination devices.
Transfer device
Edit schematics
Transfer settings from one device to another.
Modify video wall and tile designs.
MV
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
149
Manage Users
Role Permissions (Permissions Pane)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 4-1: Permissions - GV Orbit project types Multiviewer (MV)/ IP Routing (IP))
Permission
Import user database
Clear device ports
Disable flows for all source device
Clear multicast for dest device
Edit destination multicast
The ability to...
Import a user database
Clear ports for a device.
Disable flows for all source devices.
Clear multicast settings for a destination device.
Edit individual multicast settings for a destination flow.
Assign multicast for dest device
Assign multicast for all source devices
Change comms settings
Purge device
Pull from repository
Set 1:1 or 1:All routes for a destination device.
Assign multicast settings for all source devices.
Change network domain and change IP interfaces.
Purge an off-line device.
Push to repository
Move a project from a product unit to GV Orbit Client.
For example, pulling a project from a multiviewer.
MV
Move a project from GV Orbit Client to a product unit.
For example, pushing a project to a multiviewer.
MV
Add/rename/delete files or folders Manage project files and folders.
Edit multiviewer properties Edit properties for video wall themes, tiles and walls.
MV
MV
Create and delete alarms.
MV Edit multiviewer alarms
Add/edit users
Import themes
Manage users and roles.
MV
MV
Import walls
Import themes into a project from another GV Orbit
Client project.
Import walls into a project from another GV Orbit
Client project.
MV
Import layouts MV
Import settings
Import wall layouts into a project from an GV Orbit
Client project.
Import project settings from another GV Orbit Client project.
MV
Project
Type
MV IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
IP
150
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
Assign Users to Roles (Membership Pane)
Import tiles
Import grids
Table 4-1: Permissions - GV Orbit project types Multiviewer (MV)/ IP Routing (IP))
Permission The ability to...
Project
Type
MV IP
MV Import tiles into a project from another GV Orbit
Client project.
Import grids into a project from another GV Orbit
Client project.
MV
Edit Role Permissions
To edit the permissions for a Role :
1 Select a permission on the Permissions
2 Click > or < in the pane to move the selected Permission to/from the set of
‘allowed’/’available’ permissions for the role.
3 Add/remove permissions as required.
When done:
4 Click Save File icon in the main menu to save changes.
Fig. 4-9: Edit Role Permissions
Assign Users to Roles (Membership Pane)
The Membership pane displays the following for the selected Role :
• User names assigned in the role - These are listed in the “ Users in Role ” list.
151
Manage Users
How to Delete Roles
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• User names not assigned in the role - These are listed in the “ Users not in Role ” list.
To assign a role to a user, in the Roles tab,
1 Select a Role in the list.
This selects a role to be edited. (See Figure 4-10.)
Selected Role and corresponding Membership pane
Fig. 4-10: Selected Role and Membership Pane
To assign a user into a role:
2 Click on the user name item in the “ Users not in Role” list to select an user.
(More than one user may be selected. To deselect an item, click on the selected item.)
3 Click on the
<
button to add the selected user name(s) to the “ Users in Role” list.
The selected user(s) move from the “ Users not in Role” list to the “ Users in Role” list.
To remove a user from a role:
4 Select the user name item in the “ Users in Role” list.
5 Click on the
>
button to remove it from the “ Users in Role” list.
The selected user name moves to the “ Users not in Role” list.
Lastly:
6 Save any changes by clicking on the Save File icon in the main menu.
How to Delete Roles
Note: A user will lose permissions if they are assigned to a role when the role is deleted. Ensure that no users are assigned in any role to be deleted.
To delete a Role , in the Roles tab:
1 Select the Role to be deleted.
152
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
How to Delete Roles
Fig. 4-11: Select a Role for Deletion
2 Review the Role ’s user details in the Membership Pane .
Before deleting a Role , there should be no users assigned to that Role .
3 Remove any users from the role using the Membership Pane .
153
Manage Users
How to Delete Roles
Fig. 4-12: Remove All Users from the Role
4 Click on the Delete Role
A confirmation Delete Role dialog box will appear.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
154
Fig. 4-13: Delete Role
5 Read the message in the dialog.
If you wish to proceed, click “ Yes ” to confirm that the role should be deleted, otherwise, click “ No ”.
The Role is deleted from the Roles tab.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
How to Add a Role
Fig. 4-14: Deleted Role
6 Save any changes by clicking Save File icon in the main tool bar.
How to Add a Role
New roles can be added. In the Roles tab:
1 Click Add New Role .
A new blank role item is added to the bottom of the roles list in the Roles tab.
155
Manage Users
How to Add a Role
New blank role item
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
156
Fig. 4-15: Adding Role
On the right-hand side of the screen:
2 Enter a name for the new role in the Role name text box. Use a short, descriptive name.
(Use characters ‘a’ to ‘z’, ‘A’ to ‘Z’, ‘space’ and ‘0’ to ‘9’.)
3 Enter a brief description of the role in the Description text box.
The new role’s name and description are shown in the list of roles.
4 With the new role highlighted, add the permissions required
- see Role Permissions (Permissions Pane) , on page 147.
5 With the new role still highlighted, assign any users
- see Assign Users to Roles (Membership Pane) , on page 151.
6 Save any changes by clicking Save File icon in the main tool bar.
A finished new role screen is shown in Figure 4-16.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
Users Tab
Fig. 4-16: New Role Added
Users Tab
Click on the Users tab at the top of the Manager Users tab to display the Users Tab tab,
see Figure 4-17. The users of a GV Orbit project can be viewed, edited and created.
Users are listed in the main screen area in a graphical Users List - a list of icons.
The Users tab is used to:
• Change the password of an existing user, see
How to Change a User Password .
• Add a new user, see
• Delete an existing user, see
157
Manage Users
Pre-defined Users
Users tab Users List (Icons)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
User Name Change Password button
User Roles list
Fig. 4-17: Users Tab
Pre-defined Users
Initially, in a new GV Orbit project, a user named ‘admin’ is already defined with full administrator role permissions. This enables all operations within GV Orbit Client to be carried out.
Default username - admin
Default password - admin
The default password for user ‘admin’ should be changed as soon as you log into a new
Record the user names and passwords somewhere safe and secure.
Note: Keep a record of the administrator user name and password used.
How to Change a User Password
In the Users tab:
1 Click on a user icon in the Users List .
This selects the user to be edited.
2 Click on the Change button, located below the User name text box.
The change password dialog is displayed. See Figure 4-18.
158
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
How to Add a User a) Add Password for a new user b) Change Password for a user
Fig. 4-18: Change Password Dialogs
3 Enter the original password in the Old password text box, if this is shown.
Enter the new password in both the New password text box and also in the Confirm password text box.
4 Click OK to change the password or click Cancel to abandon the change.
If a new password has been set, a “Password changed successfully” message is displayed; click OK
Fig. 4-19: Password Changed Successfully Message
5 Save any changes by clicking Save File icon in the main tool bar.
How to Add a User
In the Users tab:
1 Click Add User .
A new User Icon appears in the graphical Users List
159
Manage Users
How to Add a User
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
User name text box
New User Icon
Set/change password button
160
Fig. 4-20: Adding a New User
Control External Id
2 Enter a name for the new user in the User name text box.
(Use characters ‘a’ to ‘z’, ‘A’ to ‘Z’, ‘space’ and ‘0’ to ‘9’.)
3 Click on the Change button below the User name text box.
The Set New Password dialog is displayed.
4 Enter a new password in the New password text box and re-enter it in the Confirm password text box.
5 Click OK to set the password, or click Cancel to abandon the change.
If a new password has been set, a “Password changed successfully” message is displayed; click OK .
6 Set the Control External Id :
• If this user is to have a User ID when using the GV Orbit Routing service, set the
Control External Id that they are to use in their NP0017 router control protocol communications with GV Orbit Control.
• So that users with different Control External Id s cannot release a destination locked by another user or panel user; in GV Orbit Client, each user can be assigned a Control External Id . Users with a different Control External Id cannot release a destination locked by another with a different Control External Id . The admin user or a user with an Control External Id set to 0 can override locks set by any other user.
In all cases, you must ensure that the User IDs are coherent between GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit Control. To do this, see
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
How to Delete a User
7 Save any changes by clicking Save File icon in the main tool bar.
A new, empty user has been created.
To assign the user to Role
(s), see Assign Users to Roles (Membership Pane) , on page 151.
How to Delete a User
In the Users tab:
1 Click on a User Icon in the Users List to select the user to be deleted.
2 Click on the Delete user button.
A confirmation message dialog box appears.
3 Click Yes to confirm user deletion, or click No to abandon deleting the user.
If the user is deleted, the corresponding user icon disappears from the Users List .
4 Save any changes by clicking Save File icon in the main tool bar.
Permissions Tab
The Permissions tab lists the available Permissions with a brief description of each.
Permission types:
• Built-in - By default, a project has built-in Permissions, which are project-typedependent.
• User - Additionally, a user can create custom Permissions for use.
To see the Permissions tab:
1 Click on the Permissions tab in the Manage Users tab to display the Permissions tab.
161
Manage Users
Custom User Permissions
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 4-21: Permissions Tab
Custom User Permissions
Custom ‘user’ permissions can be created alongside the existing ‘built-in’ permissions and they can be assigned to roles. These allow user access/privileges to be tailored to operational needs.
A custom user Permission is automatically given to the ‘administrator’ Role .
Access-control to GV Orbit Client project screens or to on-screen graphical widgets can be designed into an GV Orbit Client project using custom ‘user’ permissions.
Add Custom User Permission
In the Permissions tab:
1 Click Add Permission .
A new item is added to the list.
2 Enter a name and enter a brief description for the new custom Permission . See
3 Save any changes by clicking Save File icon in the main tool bar.
162
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
Using a Custom User Permission
Fig. 4-22: New Custom User Permission
See
Using a Custom User Permission
.
Using a Custom User Permission
Permission Properties
In a GV Orbit Client project, a GV Orbit control and monitoring screen can be designed to implement access control for:
• GV Orbit Client project screens; or for
• on-screen graphical widgets (for example, buttons).
This is accomplished by utilizing a screen’s or a widget’s ‘Permission’ properties. See
163
Manage Users
Access Control Example - MapView C&M Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Button Widget and its ‘Permissions’ properties
Fig. 4-23: Permission Properties (Widget shown)
Table 4-2: Widget Permissions Properties
Property
General > Permission
Description
Specify the Permission required by the widget user. Select from:
• <none> - no Permission required. No access control.
• <inherit> - use the Permission of the parent MapView screen/component/widget.
• built-in permissions - list of all built-in Permissions .
• user permissions - list of all custom user Permissions .
General > Permission Type Set how the on-screen widget is affected if logged-in user does not have specified Permission :
• Disable - Widget on-screen control is disabled.
• Hidden - Widget is hidden from view.
A user’s ‘ Role ’, which will include or exclude various permissions, can determine whether a logged-in user:
• may use a widget or access screens in a running GV Orbit Client project; and
• how a widget appears on-screen (disabled or hidden).
This facility could, for example, control access to a MapView screen with certain operationally-sensitive controls and limit them to logged-in users whose role includes a certain (custom) permission.
Access Control Example - MapView C&M Screen
This is a simple, contrived example on a C&M ‘MapView’ screen to demonstrate controlled access to a Button widget.
164
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
Access Control Example - MapView C&M Screen
In our example:
1 A custom ‘user’ Permission has been defined (‘My Custom Permission’).
2 Four Button widgets have been configured to turn a Lamp
• Two (green-colored) Buttons control the Lamp widget on/off green.
The Button widgets do not have any specific Permissions properties set.
• Two (red-colored) Buttons control the same Lamp widget on/off red.
These Button widgets require a logged-in user to have a specific, ‘user’ Permission set up.
3 There are two Users
set up for this example (see Figure 4-25):
• User ‘admin’ has an administrator Role , which includes all Permissions , ‘built-in’ and ‘user’.
• User ‘supervisor 1’ has a supervisor Role which does not include a custom user
Permission.
When this C&M project is run, the resulting on-screen behavior is shown in Figure 4-26. A
user without the custom ‘user’ Permission only sees some grayed-out buttons and is unable to access them.
165
Manage Users
Access Control Example - MapView C&M Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Button widgets without any specific Permission set.
Button widgets with a specific, custom ‘user’ Permission set up.
Fig. 4-24: C&M Screen Widget Access Control Example - Buttons
166
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manage Users
Access Control Example - MapView C&M Screen a) supervisor Role , without custom Permission b) administrator Role , with custom ‘user’ Permission
Fig. 4-25: C&M Screen Widget Access Control Example - Users: a) Supervisor; b) Administrator.
167
Manage Users
Access Control Example - MapView C&M Screen
All Buttons are accessible to the user.
a) Project run when logged in with ‘administrator’ role b) Project run when logged in with ‘supervisor’ role
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
168
Buttons ‘grayed-out’, user ‘supervisor 1’ has no access to these Buttons .
Fig. 4-26: C&M Screen Widget Access Control Example - Running: a) Logged in as ‘administrator’ role; b) logged in as ‘supervisor’ role.
This chapter describes the following tasks:
•
Launching GV Orbit Control , on page 169
•
Logging in to GV Orbit Control , on page 169
•
Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170
•
Switching User Profiles , on page 171
•
Viewing Notifications , on page 173
Launching GV Orbit Control
Once GV Orbit Control is installed on your computer, the shortcut icon appears on your desktop.
For details on installing GV Orbit Control for the first time, refer to the GV Orbit Admin Guide .
See Related Documentation , on page 7.
Logging in to GV Orbit Control
Tip: Before logging in to GV Orbit Control ensure that you have a valid user name and password , as well as the Management IP address of GV Orbit Admin.
To log in to GV Orbit Control
1 Click the GV Orbit Control icon on your PC.
The GV Orbit Control login screen appears.
2 Enter your user name and password in the User name and password text boxes.
169
Getting Started With GV Orbit Control
Client Server Version Check Warning
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Enter the Management IP address of the GV Orbit Admin in the Server text box.
4 Click Log in .
Client Server Version Check Warning
A warning is displayed if the GV Orbit Control’s software version is different from the software version currently running on the connected server. In this case, it is strongly recommended that you download and reinstall the GV Orbit Control’s software from the server so that the client and server software versions will match: for details on installing
GV Orbit Control, refer to the GV Orbit Admin Guide .
If both client and server software versions are the same, no warning will be displayed and the GV Orbit Control opens normally.
Click OK to continue to run the client application regardlessly: this can result in software crashes, database corruption, or other unexpected behavior. Running mismatched software versions is untested and unsupported. Click Cancel to go back to the login screen and then close and upgrade your GV Orbit Control.
Navigating Back to Stage
The Stage is the main entry point to configure GV Orbit Control. At any time, you can return to the Stage view.
To navigate back to Stage
1 Open GV Orbit Control to any task.
2 Do one of the following:
• Click the Stage tab at the bottom or the UI.
• Click the plus button at the bottom of the UI.
Tip : The second option is useful, if you have a lot of tasks open.
170
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started With GV Orbit Control
Switching User Profiles
The home or Stage view appears.
Switching User Profiles
From the Stage or any open task, you can change to another user profile.
Note: Before switching to another user profile, ensure that you have the required user name, password, and Management IP address.
To switch to another user profile
1 Click on the user profile name at the top right of GV Orbit Control.
171
Getting Started With GV Orbit Control
Switching User Profiles
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
A confirmation message appears.
2 Click Log out to continue.
The Log in screen appears.
172
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started With GV Orbit Control
Viewing Notifications
3 Enter your login credentials in the User name and Password text boxes.
4 Enter the Management IP address of the GV Orbit server you are connecting to in the
Server field.
5 Click Log in .
GV Orbit Control opens to the view applicable to the user.
Note : Access permissions vary according to the permissions granted to the user’s role. For further information, see
Administration Tasks , on page 465.
Viewing Notifications
A notification is an indicator that an event has occurred.
To view your notifications
1 Log in to GV Orbit Control.
173
Getting Started With GV Orbit Control
Viewing Notifications
2 Click on the up arrow in the top right corner of the UI.
The Notification window appears.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Expand the System list. The list of new events appears.
4 Click on a listed event on the right to view it in the UI.
174
6
The Configuration tasks in GV Orbit Control are used for creating and maintaining areas, topologies, categories, and panels.
The Configuration Tasks are described under the following headings:
•
Area Configurator Tasks , on page 177
•
Logical Level Editor Tasks , on page 190
•
Topology Configurator Tasks , on page 199
•
Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241
•
Category Configurator Tasks , on page 268
•
Panel Configurator Tasks , on page 275
•
GPIO Configurator Tasks , on page 312
•
Stream Configurator Tasks , on page 322
175
Configuration Tasks
Required Permissions
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Required Permissions
Only users who are assigned to the Administrators role have View, Edit, and Delete permissions in the Area task. All other configuration tasks are accessible to users with either
Administrator or Engineer rights only. For more information, see Viewing Permissions by
176
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Area Configurator Tasks
Area Configurator Tasks
The Area Configurator task is used for configuring the Areas and controllers in GV Orbit
Control.
An Area is container that is used for grouping together a subset of resources within a system. Typically, these resources are closely related, by physical location, functionality, ownership, and/or logical organization. An area is managed by a single controller group, which is made up of:
• a single controller
• or optionally, two redundant controllers to provide 1:1 fail-over protection
This section describes the following:
•
Accessing Areas in the GV Orbit Control , on page 177
•
•
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179
•
Selecting an Area , on page 183
•
Deleting an Area , on page 184
Accessing Areas in the GV Orbit Control
All configuration in GV Orbit Control begins by creating one or more areas. Once you have the areas defined, you can add the logical levels, the topologies, and so on.
To configure the area in GV Orbit Control
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Area Configurator .
177
Configuration Tasks
Adding an Area
The Area Graph appears.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
By default, there is one area, called Area. Use the Property Editor on the right to rename it and make it easy to identify within your system.
3 Select the Area to access the Property Editor .
You are automatically in Edit mode. Edit is highlighted in the bar at the top.
4 Enter the required information in the Name , Short Name , Description , and External
ID fields to identify the area.
5 Repeat the procedure for each area in your system.
Adding an Area
You can create multiple areas for your system. This can facilitate configuration and control tasks. Smaller subsets are easier to bring into focus and manage.
To add an area
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Area Configurator . See
Accessing Areas in the GV Orbit
178
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
This opens the Area Graph.
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Controller Group
3 Select the area tile on the left.
4 Drag it to the Area Graph.
5 Repeat the procedure as many times as required to add all the areas you require.
Note: Currently, GV Orbit Control supports one Area. Area inter-connectivity and multiple areas (Incoming Feeds, Master Control, Remote Site, Studio, and
Transmission) are not supported.
Configuring a Controller Group
By default, there is one area and one System Controller group on the Area Configurator
Device Graph.
A controller group can have one or more areas. The controller is a physical or virtual server that runs the GV Orbit software.
A Controller group can be made up of either one or two controllers. You need two controllers to implement redundancy or failover protection. In the redundant configuration, one controller is active and the other is on standby. If there is a problem, such as a network connection loss, the standby controller becomes the active controller, automatically. In addition, you can force the standby controller to become the active controller by performing a manual failover operation, at any time.
To configure a controller group
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Area Configurator . See
Accessing Areas in the GV Orbit
179
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Controller Group
By default, there is one controller and one area on the graph.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Select the bubble for the System Controller you are configuring.
4 Select the System Controller Group Properties .
180
The following properties can be configured for the panel. See also
Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Name
# Controllers
Description
Description
The name or identifier for this system controller group.
Enter 2 in the field if you are setting up redundancy. Otherwise, enter
1 . You can only have one or two system controllers in a group.
An optional description for this system controller group.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Controller Group
Parameter
Virtual IP Address
Description
This is the virtual IP address to communicate with the active server in a
GV Orbit Server cluster (when a redundant configuration is used). If a
GV Orbit Server cluster is not being used, use the GV Orbit Server administration IP address for devices instead of this IP Address.
For example, in a cluster configuration, a soft panel can be configured to point to this virtual IP address. When a failover happens, control is maintained through the panel using this virtual IP address.
See also
System Status Task , on page 445 for more information about
server clusters and failover.
Reference IP
NMOS Discovery DNS GV Orbit Control can automatically discover an NMOS registry through
NMOS Discovery
Search Domain
DNS-SD when the NMOS Discovery DNS and NMOS Discovery Search
Domain parameters are set.
For more information about how to configure and use GV Orbit
Control’s NMOS registry, see To configure GV Orbit Control for use with
NMOS Registry
Set the IP of a machine that is always on. After a failover the server that can connect first to this IP will become the master.
This shows the current NMOS Registry Query API URL (hostname / IP address and port number).
For more information about how to configure and use GV Orbit
Control’s NMOS registry, see To configure GV Orbit Control for use with
Domain IDs for IP
Routing
Only applications / devices that use the same Domain IDs can communicate with each other on the network. For a list of such devices, see
This is a comma separated list of domain IDs on which you want to discover devices and communicate with them. The default value for
Grass Valley equipment is 101 .
Valid range: 0 to 232 .
Domain IDs for Data
Import
This is for future use.
5 Select the Properties tab.
6 Select 1 under System Controller to configure the first controller.
181
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Controller Group
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The following properties can be configured for the individual system controller that form
the system controller group. See also Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Name
Description
Short Name
IP Address
Description
The name or identifier for this system controller instance.
An optional description for this system controller instance.
A nickname used wherever the controller is specified. This name should be limited to 8 characters or less in length. This requirement is important if you are using NVISION panels as they use the Short Name to display device names and NVISION hardware can display a maximum of 8 characters for a device name. Otherwise, a longer nickname can be used.
The network IP address for this system controller instance.
This field for S ystem Controller 1 is populated automatically with this system controller’s Management IP address. This cannot be changed.
When system controller redundancy is used ( System Controller 2 is available), set the network IP address for System Controller 2.
7 Select tab 2 under System Controller to configure the second controller.
8 Update the identification fields for the second controller and set the network IP address for System Controller 2: see the table above.
A confirmation message is displayed:
182
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Selecting an Area
9 Click OK to continue.
Notes
When redundancy has been configured, System Controller 2 joins the Controller group automatically as the standby controller. It becomes the active controller in the event of an automatic or manual failover.
When you click OK, the database from Controller 1 is copied to Controller 2
You can view the health of both controllers on the System Status task. The System Status
Task page will show the status of the controllers at all times, and the right hand section shows the health of devices specific to a topology. However, you must create your areas and topologies first. See
System Status Task , on page 445.
Selecting an Area
You must select an area before you can create or maintain a topology within it. Only one area can be selected at a time.
To switch from one selected area to another
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
The currently selected Area is displayed at the top of the interface.
Note: You can perform this procedure from Stage or from any open task. You can always select an area.
2 Click on this area.
A secondary window appears.
3 Click on the area that you to select.
183
Configuration Tasks
Deleting an Area
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
In the screen shot above, this is Studio A.
4 Click Select Area at the top of the window.
Deleting an Area
Note: You cannot delete the currently selected Area. If necessary, make another
Area active first. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
To delete an area
1 Select another Area other than the one you are going to delete. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
3 Select Configuration > Area Configurator . See
Accessing Areas in the GV Orbit
4 Click on the Area you want to delete.
5 Click Delete at the top of the logical level editor.
6 A confirmation message appears. It lists the topologies created in the Area.
7 Click OK to continue.
Selecting a Graph
In the Area Configurator, you define the various Areas in your system. Within each Area, you can create multiple Graphs, and each Graph contains a Topology . Each topology shows a part of how the various physical and logical devices are arranged and interconnected within the broadcast facility.
To work on a topology, you first need to select the Graph in which the Topology is held. You can work on only one topology at a time.
To select a Graph
Note: A Graph must be created in an area. Then, it is available only in the area where it was created.
184
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Selecting a Graph
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Click the Graph icon that holds the currently active topology at the top left of
GV Orbit Control.
This opens the graphs window. It shows the currently-available graphs for the selected
Area. Each Graph contains a Topology.
3 Double-click the Graph you want to update or select the Graph you want to update and then click Load .
Now, any configuration work you carry out will be on this selected Graph.
If the topology is new, the Graph is blank. The next step is to begin adding devices. See
Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204.
185
Configuration Tasks
Creating a new Graph for a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Creating a new Graph for a Topology
To create a new topology
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Click the Graph icon that holds the currently active topology at the top left of
GV Orbit Control.
This opens a secondary window.
186
4 Click Add .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The Create New Graph window appears.
Configuration Tasks
Creating a new Graph for a Topology
5 Enter a name for the new topology and enter meaningful text in the Summary and
Description fields for easy identification.
6 Click Add on the Create New Graph window.
The new topology appears in the list box with the existing topologies.
7 Select the new topology and click Load . Or double-click the topology.
187
Configuration Tasks
Deleting a Graph
The selected topology is opened.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
If the topology is new, the Topology is blank. The next step is to begin adding devices.
See
Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204.
Deleting a Graph
always be present.
To delete a Graph
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 If you are deleting the active topology, you must first make it inactive. See
Active Topology Inactive , on page 236.
3 Click the Graph icon that holds the currently active topology at the top left of
GV Orbit Control.
This opens the graphs window. It shows the currently-available graphs for the selected
Area.
188
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 Select the Graph you want to delete and then click Delete .
Configuration Tasks
Deleting a Graph
Deleting the last Graph
You cannot delete all graphs from GV Orbit Control; at least one graph must always be present. To delete the last graph, proceed as follows.
1 Create a new graph (see
Creating a new Graph for a Topology , on page 186)
2 Make the new graph active (
Activating a Topology , on page 235).
3 Delete the previous graph.
189
Configuration Tasks
Logical Level Editor Tasks
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Logical Level Editor Tasks
Logical levels allow for the definition of compatibility and shuffling rules. This gives you complete control of the path definition to prevent routing of incompatible levels. For example, Logical levels are used to identify a stream’s video resolution, the number of audio channels, ancillary data, and so on.
Every unique type of stream format in your facility should have a unique Logical Level.
These levels are then assigned to sources and destinations (in the Logical Device Table; see
Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241). This allows GV Orbit Control’ s routing system to
make takes between sources and destinations with signal types that are compatible with each other, and with the underlying hardware, so that takes can be successfully made in the real world.
This section describes the following:
•
Accessing the Logical Level Editor , on page 190
•
Viewing the Default Logical Levels , on page 192
•
Duplicating a Logical Level , on page 193
•
Editing a Logical Level , on page 195
•
Deleting a Logical Level , on page 196
•
Configuring a New Logical Level , on page 196
•
Configuring the Logical Levels for the Devices in a Topology , on page 197
Accessing the Logical Level Editor
Use the Logical Level Editor to define new logical levels and to view the compatibility of the default levels.
To access the Logical Level Editor Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area.
3 Select Configuration > Logical Level Editor .
190
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Logical Level Editor
The Logical Level Editor appears.
Note: Only users who are assigned to the Administrators or Engineers role in the selected area have View, Edit, and Delete permissions in the Logical Level Editor task.
See
Viewing Permissions by Role , on page 472.
Note: Before you can open the Logical Level Editor, you must open an Area and a
Topology. Logical levels are defined specifically for each topology.
The Logical Level Editor has two columns:
• The first column contains tiles for all default logical levels along with the logical levels you have added.
• The second column has three tabs: compatible with , contains and shuffle with . The shuffle with allows a user to configure which audio levels can be shuffled with
which. See Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs) , on page 257.
Logical Level Editor Menu
The Logical Level Editor menu has the following menu options.
Icon
Edit
Duplicate
Delete
Description
Edit a logical level’s properties. See
Editing a Logical Level , on page 195.
Make a copy of the currently-selected logical level. See
Remove the currently-selected logical level. See Deleting a Logical
191
Configuration Tasks
Viewing the Default Logical Levels
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Viewing the Default Logical Levels
The default logical levels are represented by the first tiles displayed in the Logical Level
Editor column, beginning with video, then audio, ancillary, and finally AES67. When you create new logical levels, they are added after these ones.
You can change the Short Label and Level ID of a default Logical Level, but not the Name.
Click Edit to do so. Also, you cannot delete a default level.
The Audio Live device uses AES67 audio levels. See AES Logical Levels that are used for IP
Audio Streams , on page 424 for more information.
Verifying the Compatibility of the Default Logical Levels
Compatibility defines which Logical Levels are compatible when making a take. This is shown in the Compatible with tab shown below. When a source and destination use the same Logical Level, or the two Logical Levels are compatible with each other, then a take is possible between the source and destination.
Certain default Logical Levels are compatible with other Logical Levels. For example,
AES67 16 is compatible with SDI audio . That is to say, a take between an AES67 16 source and an SDI audio destination is allowed by the router system. See also
AES Logical Levels that are used for IP Audio Streams , on page 424.
When you create a Logical Level, you always modify the compatibility between these
Logical Levels according to the required source / destination signal types.
To verify the compatibility of Logical Levels
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Logical Level Editor
. See Accessing the Logical Level Editor , on page 190.
The Logical Level Editor appears.
192
3 Select a logical level tile on the left.
The tiles for the logical levels it is compatible with are highlighted in the right column.
Note: A logical level is always compatible with itself.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Duplicating a Logical Level
Verifying the Component Signal Types of the Default Logical Levels
Like the compatibility, the signal types of the default logical levels is predefined and cannot be changed. When you create a Logical Level, you always modify the signal type components.
To verify the signal types of the default logical levels
1 Follow the procedure under
Verifying the Component Signal Types of the Default
2 When you select a tile for a logical level in Logical Level Editor , the compatibility is highlighted in the Contains tab.
Duplicating a Logical Level
A pre-existing logical level can be copied to reuse that logical level’s configuration properties and then you only need to modify the necessary logical level properties as required for the new application.
Notes
Logical levels are specific to topologies. In another topology, you won’t see the logical levels you create in the currently selected topology.
Only SDI and TICO levels can be duplicated.
To duplicate a logical level
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Logical Level Editor
. See Accessing the Logical Level Editor , on page 190.
3 Select a pre-existing level on the left-hand panel that you want to duplicate.
4 Click Duplicate at the top of the interface.
193
Configuration Tasks
Creating the Logical Levels for a UHD 4K Routing Setup
The Logical Level configuration window opens.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
5 Enter meaningful names to identify the level in the Name Prefix , Name Suffix , Short
Label Prefix , and Short Label Suffix text boxes.
6 Enter a unique identifier in the Starting Level ID text box.
7 Click OK .
A tile for your new logical level is displayed in the left hand column.
See
Configuring the Logical Levels for the Devices in a Topology , on page 197.
Creating the Logical Levels for a UHD 4K Routing Setup
For an example of how to create the logical levels for UHD routing when a quad-link signal path is used, see:
•
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix,
IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device , on page 354.
•
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or
194
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Editing a Logical Level
Editing a Logical Level
Use the following procedure to modify a logical level’s identification information. The
Audio setting marks that the level is an audio level.
To edit a logical level
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Logical Level Editor
. See Accessing the Logical Level Editor , on page 190.
3 Select a level on the left-hand panel that you want to edit.
Note: For the default logical levels, you can modify the Short Label and Level ID. You cannot modify the Name.
4 Click Edit at the top of the logical level editor.
5 Modify the properties as required.
Parameter
Name
Short Label
Level ID
Audio
# Channels
Description
The level’s name.
A shortened name for the level.
A unique identifier for this level.
When set, this level will appear in the Shuffle with tab of the right
pane for shuffling rules. See Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs) , on page 257.
When available, this shows the number of audio channels supported by this level. The Audio Live device uses a range of levels, each one supporting a different number of audio channels.
Levels that are used for IP Audio Streams , on page 424 for more
information. See also
Configuring a Device that Supports Audio
Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live , on page 421.
6 Click OK .
195
Configuration Tasks
Deleting a Logical Level
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Deleting a Logical Level
Use the following procedure to delete a logical level you have created that is no longer required in the selected topology.
Note: You cannot delete the default logical levels. The Delete button is disabled when you click on these levels.
To delete a logical level
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Logical Level Editor
. See Accessing the Logical Level Editor , on page 190.
3 Select the tile for the logical level you want to delete.
4 Click Delete at the top of the logical level editor.
Note: There is no confirmation for the deletion.
Configuring a New Logical Level
Use the following procedure to configure a new logical level. This determines which signal types are compatible with this level.
To configure a new logical level
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Logical Level Editor
. See Accessing the Logical Level Editor , on page 190.
196
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Select the tile for the logical level you want to configure.
Configuration Tasks
Configuring the Logical Levels for the Devices in a Topology
The tile for your new logical level is automatically highlighted in the right hand column.
4 Select the tiles for the signal types in the right hand column that are compatible. Click a tile a second time to deselect it.
Configuring the Logical Levels for the Devices in a Topology
Use the following procedure to set the logical levels for the device’s sources and destinations in your topology. Logical levels can be used to define the type of signal carried on a physical connection between physical devices. If compatibility is not an issue, the default logical levels may be utilized.
To configuring an area in GV Orbit Control
1 Select the required topology in the area. See Accessing the Topology Configurator , on page 199.
2 Select the device for which you want to configure its logical level.
In the above example, the camera bubble is selected. SDI is the default logical level for cameras.
197
Configuration Tasks
Configuring the Logical Levels for the Devices in a Topology
3 Select Device Group Properties.
4 Select the Logical Level parameter in the Property Editor .
This opens the Logical Level list.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
5 Select the required logical level for the device group.
198
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Topology Configurator Tasks
Topology Configurator Tasks
In the Area Configurator, you define the various Areas in your system. Within each Area, you can create multiple Graphs, and each Graph contains a Topology . The topologies show how the various physical and logical devices are arranged and interconnected within the broadcasting facility. See
Area Configurator Tasks , on page 177 and
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
These sections describes the following:
•
Accessing the Topology Configurator , on page 199
•
Selecting a Graph , on page 184
•
Refreshing the Topology , on page 202
•
Creating a new Graph for a Topology , on page 186
•
Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204
•
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222
•
Defining Device Properties , on page 229
•
Deleting a Device From a Topology , on page 234
•
Activating a Topology , on page 235
•
Making an Active Topology Inactive , on page 236
•
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology , on page 238
•
Locking an Unlocked Topology , on page 239
Certain devices require a detailed procedure to configure them; see Special Device
Configuration Tasks , on page 331 for more information about these devices.
Accessing the Topology Configurator
You can access the Topology Configurator from Stage or from any open task. Access permissions are required. See also
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
To access the Topology Configurator from Stage
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select Configuration > Topology Configurator .
199
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Topology Configurator
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The Topology Configurator appears. The Topology Configurator comprises three sections. The left hand column has a list of bubbles, representing the device groups, such as cameras, routers, and monitors. You drag these onto to the Topology (middle column) and create connections between them. Then, you can configure the properties for the Device Groups in the Property Editor (right-hand column).
200
If an Area is open, the Topology Configurator opens in that area. You can switch areas from anywhere in GV Orbit Control. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
Access Permissions
Access permissions to the Topology Configurator vary according to role. Only users who are assigned to the Administrators or Engineers role can View, Edit, and Delete topologies and device properties. Operators have the right to view topologies and device properties.
Maintenance staff and Guests have no access. See
Viewing Permissions by Role , on page 472.
Topology Configurator Menu
The Topology Configurator has the following menu options.
Icon
Edit
Select
Description
Use this editing mode to select a device on the topology to edit its
properties. See Defining Device Properties , on page 229.
Use this editing mode to select one or more devices on the topology
(by drawing a square with your mouse cursor) to move the selected devices around on the topology as a group, or to delete them. Press the <Ctrl> key to temporarily enable this option.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Topology Configurator
Icon
Link
Refresh
Description
Use this editing mode to connect a device’s sources to the destinations
of another device. See Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
This editing mode is also used to break the connection between two
devices. See Deleting the Connection Between Device Groups , on page 228.
Reloads the Topology’s contents. See
Refreshing the Topology , on page 202.
Delete
Quick Connect This automatically connects the unconnected ports of devices on the
topology. See Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222 and
Using Quick Connect to Link all Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
Quick Config
Deactivate / Active Activating a topology makes GV Orbit Control connect to and activate all drivers to devices in the topology. This is important for GV Orbit
Control to learn a device’s current configuration.
See
Activating a Topology , on page 235 and
Topology Inactive , on page 236.
Lock / Unlock
This sets the configuration of the selected devices on the topology.
See
Using Quick Config , on page 219.
Lock a Topology to prevent you from inadvertently making edits on an active topology. See
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology , on page 238
and
Locking an Unlocked Topology , on page 239.
How to Identify if a Device Bubble is Selected or Not
A device bubble has the following selection states.
Description Device Bubble State
Gray, no white circle Not selected
Gray with white circle Selected
Blue with white circle Selected
Device properties are shown in the
Property Editor
201
Configuration Tasks
Refreshing the Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Refreshing the Topology
If you have added a lot of devices to a topology or made many modifications to it, you may need to refresh the Topology. You can refresh topology regardless of whether it is active or inactive.
To refresh the Topology
1 Open a topology in the Topology Configurator.
2 Click the Refresh button at the top of the interface.
The topology is inaccessible during the brief time it takes to refresh the window.
Viewing the Topology in Full Screen Mode
By default, the selected topology is displayed in the center of the Topology Configurator task. The devices are displayed on the left and the Property Editor is displayed on the right.
To view the topology in fullscreen mode
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
202
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
Configuration Tasks
Viewing the Topology in Full Screen Mode
4 Click the Fullscreen toggle button at the top of the interface.
The Topology expands across all three columns in the Topology Configurator.
TIP
To zoom and center the topology view:
• click the Refresh button.
• double-click an empty space.
To return to default mode
1 When the Topology is in fullscreen mode, click Fullscreen to toggle the display back to the default mode.
203
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Adding Devices to a Topology
By adding devices to a topology, you are making a representation in GV Orbit Control of the real world equipment you are using, and the physical interconnections made between this equipment.
There are two types of devices in GV Orbit Control.
• Virtual Devices: These are devices that GV Orbit Control does not need to know any of the device’s configuration parameters in order to use the device. Therefore, the device
procedures; see
Special Device Configuration Tasks , on page 331.
• Discovered: These are devices that GV Orbit Control needs to know the device’s configuration parameters in order to know which of the device’s spigots have been configured as sources or destinations, the levels, and so on. These devices must be online when configuring them in GV Orbit Control. For more information about discovered devices, see
About Discovered Devices , on page 205.
To add a Virtual Device to a topology
Certain Virtual Devices require advanced configuration procedures; see
Configuration Tasks , on page 331 for more information about the specific device you are
adding to the Graph, if necessary.
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
3 The topology must be currently:
• Activated (see
Activating a Topology , on page 235).
• Unlocked (see
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology , on page 238).
4 From the Device Library , Virtual Device on the left, select Virtual Devices from the drop-down list.
204
5 From the Device Library , Virtual Device , find the device that represents a piece of equipment you want to control: select the device bubble and drag it into position on the Topology and release the mouse button.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
Initially, the device bubble represents a single device, such as a single camera. However,
6 Repeat step 5 to and the following procedure (
topology.
To name a device and set the number of devices in the group
A device group is a collection of devices of the same type that can be configured together.
All bubbles in a Topology are automatically device groups with the exception of the following devices: IPVU, IPG-3901, IPG-4901, IQMIX, IQUCP, UCP-3901, MV-820-IP, Kahuna-IP,
NMOS devices, Audio Live, IQAMD, Network Switch, Router, and GV Node.
1 Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to create a device group.
The Device Group configuration window appears.
2 Enter meaningful names to identify the device group in the Name and Short Name fields.
In this case, the Camera device group is named CAM1 to identify the cameras controlled by Controller 1. These parameters can also be set in the Property Editor .
3 Use the plus and minus buttons to enter the number of device instances are in the device group.
4 Click OK .
Each device instance is shown and can be individually configured in the Property
Editor , under Devices , by clicking an instance.
In the above example, five monitors, two IPGs, two network switches, and five cameras have been added to the Topology.
About Discovered Devices
There are two different types of discovered devices:
• NMOS devices discovered with IS-04, that can be senders, receivers or both. For more
information, see Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology , on page 377.
• Grass Valley devices discovered with GVOP; see below for a list of these devices.
205
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
GVOP Devices
In order to use discovered GVOP devices in GV Orbit Control, the discovered devices must first be configured through the GV Orbit Client. GV Orbit Control needs to know the device’s configuration parameters in order to know which of the device’s spigots have been configured as sources or destinations, the levels, and so on. These devices must be online when configuring them in GV Orbit Control.
The following Devices Use GVOP to be discovered by GV Orbit Control.
Discovered Device
Type For more information, see
IPG-3901 / IPG-4901
Configuring an IPG 3901 / IPG 4901 Device , on page 343
IPVU
IQMIX
IQUCP
Configuring an IPVU Device , on page 349
Configuring an IQMix, IQUCP, or UCP-3901 Device , on page 352
UCP-3901
MV-820-IP
Kahuna-IP
Audio Live
IQAMD
Other devices that use
GVOP for
Configuration
Configuring an MV-820-IP Multiviewer Device , on page 363
Configuring a Kahuna IP Production Switcher Device , on page 367
Configuring a Device that Supports Audio Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live , on page 421
Configuring an IQAMD40 Device , on page 434
These are devices that can be configured through GV Orbit Client.
When the IP Friendly Name service is running on the GV Orbit Server, and the device uses
GVOP for Configuration:
• In GV Orbit Control, GVOP device properties are automatically filled in from when the devices were configured through GV Orbit Client. Changes to those devices’ properties
in GV Orbit Client are updated in GV Orbit Control in real time. See Synchronization of
Discovered GVOP Devices, Source, Destination, and Spigot Names made in GV Orbit
Client , on page 211 for more information.
• The device’s current source and destination configuration is read in real time and is updated in the Logical Device Table’s Multilevel Table when the Automatic Sources and Destinations
parameter is set in the device’s properties. See Logical Device Table
About Automatic Sources or Destinations , on page 246,
, on page 232, and Synchronization of Discovered GVOP Devices,
Source, Destination, and Spigot Names made in GV Orbit Client , on page 211.
• There is no need to use Camera and Monitor devices to create the logical sources/destinations for these devices. Furthermore, Camera and Monitor devices are not created anymore when using the Quick Connect tool. See
Link all Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
• Logical sources/destinations are created using the device spigot streams (Video, Audio,
ANC). There is a logical source for each sender spigot and a logical destination for each receiver spigot.
206
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
Logical sources/destinations for GVOP devices are created using the audio channels from the spigot streams. The device’s spigot configuration must have the Num Audio
Flows configuration parameter that allow the use of 1, 2 or 4 audio streams.
The device’s Num Audio Flows configuration parameter is configured on the device’s
Spigot page by connecting to the card’s configuration with GV Orbit Client. See the device’s documentation to see if this parameter is supported and how to set it.
This spigot configuration allows the use of 1, 2 or 4 audio flows where the audio channels count in GV Orbit Control is accordingly adjusted. The 16 audio channels from the automatic logical sources / destinations are accordingly created using the multi audio streams / flows set in the card’s configuration.
Num Audio Flows set in the GVOP card’s Spigot
1
2
Effect in GV Orbit Control
There is 1 audio stream for the spigot with 16 audio channels which are represented in GV Orbit Control by the AES67-16 logical level. In the
GV Orbit Control GVOP device Properties, the following streams are available:
1: SDI, SMPTE ST 2022. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the SDI column.
2: Video, SMPTE ST 2110-20. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the V column.
3: Audio AES67-16, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A1 to A16 columns.
7: Ancillary, SMPTE ST 2110-40. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the ANC column.
There are 2 audio streams for the spigot; each stream has 8 audio channels which are represented in GV Orbit Control by the AES67-8 logical level. In the GV Orbit Control GVOP device Properties, the following streams are available:
1: SDI, SMPTE ST 2022. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the SDI column.
2: Video, SMPTE ST 2110-20. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the V column.
3: Audio AES67-8, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A1 to A8 columns.
4: Audio AES67-8, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A9 to A16 columns.
7: Ancillary, SMPTE ST 2110-40. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the ANC column.
207
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Num Audio Flows set in the GVOP card’s Spigot
4
Effect in GV Orbit Control
There are 4 audio streams for the spigot; each stream has 4 audio channels which are represented in GV Orbit Control by the AES67-4 logical level. In the GV Orbit Control GVOP device Properties, the following streams are available:
1: SDI, SMPTE ST 2022. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the SDI column.
2: Video, SMPTE ST 2110-20. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the V column.
3: Audio AES67-4, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A1 to A4 columns.
4: Audio AES67-4, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A5 to A8 columns.
5: Audio AES67-4, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A9 to A12 columns.
6: Audio AES67-4, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A13 to A16 columns.
7: Ancillary, SMPTE ST 2110-40. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the ANC column.
In the GV Orbit Control GVOP device Properties, the number, type of streams, and AES67
Logical Level are updated in real time according to the card’s settings made in GV Orbit
Client. For example, this screen shows the Properties for a card where the card’s Num
Audion Flows parameter configured to 1 and as a consequence, the level for the audio stream is shown as AES67-16.
In the Logical Device Table, the GVOP device reflects the configuration settings, where there is only one audio stream.
208
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
To add a Discovered Device to a Topology
Discovered devices typically require advanced configuration procedures; see Special
Device Configuration Tasks , on page 331 for more configuration information about the
specific device you are adding to the Graph.
Adding a discovered device to a topology
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
3 The topology must be currently:
• Activated (see
Activating a Topology , on page 235).
• Unlocked (see
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology , on page 238).
4 From the Device Library , on the left, select Discovered from the drop-down list. In the example below, an IQMix was discovered on the network.
5 From the Device Library , Discovered find the device that you want to control: select the device bubble and drag it into position on the Topology and release the mouse button.
The device pulled from the Device Library , Discovered becomes grayed out and another instance of the same device instance cannot be added again to the Topology.
However, multiple device instances found in the Device Library can be used to create a device group.
209
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
6 To create a device group: a From the Device Library , Discovered , find the device that you want to control: select the device bubble and drag it into position on the Topology and release the mouse button. b From the Device Library , Discovered , find another identical device that you want to control: select the device bubble and drag it on top of the first device instance already on the Topology and release the mouse button.
The two device instances are shown and can be individually configured in the Property
Editor , under Devices , by clicking an instance.
7 Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device or device group.
These parameters can also be set in the Property Editor when the device bubble is selected.
210
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
Using GVOP Devices
As of GV Orbit Control version 2.8.0 or higher, the way devices that use GVOP are
• Tighter integration with GV Orbit Client to:
• Automatically synchronize certain configuration parameters in GV Orbit Control.
• Allow a spreadsheet import to set many GVOP device parameters in bulk in both
GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit Control.
See
Synchronization of Discovered GVOP Devices, Source, Destination, and Spigot
Names made in GV Orbit Client , on page 211.
• Devices that Use GVOP for Configuration no longer use the SDI camera/monitor bubble.
• Logical sources/destinations related to those GVOP devices will be automatically created using the spigot name (Port Name), once the configured device is added to the topology, even before making the appropriate connections. Those logical sources/destinations are created using the appropriate streams. For gateway devices, the SDI streams will be used and for IP devices, the IP streams will be used.
• The operating method of any GVOP device configured in GV Orbit Control version 2.7.X or earlier will remain unchanged after project migration to version 2.8.0 or higher.
However, GVOP devices can be migrated to use this new function model of operation.
See
To migrate GVOP Devices for IP routing , on page 218.
Synchronization of Discovered GVOP Devices, Source, Destination, and Spigot
Names made in GV Orbit Client
When the IP Friendly Name service is running on the GV Orbit Server, this service pushes certain configuration parameters made in GV Orbit Client to the same discovered GVOP device in GV Orbit Control. Changes to configuration parameters can result from having
used the spreadsheet import feature in GV Orbit Client. See also GVOP Devices , on page 206.
This service uses a common device identifier, the device’s GUID. A device’s GUID is like a serial number that uniquely identifies individual GVOP devices. Through a device’s GUID, the IP Friendly Name service:
• Provides persistence to the GV Orbit system for the naming of discovered GVOP devices. If the IP Friendly Name service is not running, Device and Spigot values from the configuration will not be available to GV Orbit Control and in such a case, GV Orbit
Control will use the default values for device, spigot and logical source/destination labels. See
Troubleshooting , on page 218.
• Updates made to GVOP devices in GV Orbit Client are dynamically reflected to those same devices in GV Orbit Control topology.
For example, by setting the device name in GV Orbit Client, the device name of the same
GVOP device in GV Orbit Control will be updated in real time.
The intended workflow is to first configure the device in GV Orbit Client and then integrate the device for routing in GV Orbit Control.
211
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
When a discovered GVOP device is added to a Topology in GV Orbit Control, and the device’s name is subsequently updated in GV Orbit Client, the device name and the Device
Group name will also be automatically updated. However, once a second or more discovered devices have been added to this Device Group, then the name of the Device
Group will no longer be updated due to changes made in GV Orbit Client to the name of any device found in the Device Group. The names of the individual devices, regardless of how many of them are in a device group, will always be updated.
Likewise, the device’s current source and destination configuration is read in real time and is automatically updated in the Logical Device Table’s Multilevel Table when the Automatic
Sources and Destinations parameter is set in the device’s properties. For more information,
see About Automatic Sources or Destinations
, on page 246 and Device Properties Definitions , on page 232.
Logical sources and destinations are created using the appropriate streams. For gateway devices, the SDI streams will be used and for IP devices, the IP streams will be used.
You can still manually create custom logical sources / destinations using the streams of your choice; see
Configuring Streams for New Sources / Destinations , on page 249.
212
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
For gateway devices, the Stream Configurator allows you to expose any stream of your choice, including the device’s IP streams. In such a case, the logical sources / destinations created using the SDI streams from the same spigot as the exposed IP streams will not be reachable anymore by GV Orbit Control’s pathfinding, since the newly exposed IP streams
become the device’s edge. See Stream Configurator Tasks , on page 322. The following
diagram shows that when IP streams are exposed, the SDI streams are no longer reachable.
Camera Gateway
2022-6
2110-20
2110-30
2110-40
2022-6
2110-20
2110-30
2110-40
Gateway Monitor
SDI SDI IP IP SDI SDI
Note: When replacing a failed GVOP device, you will have to replace the device with the new one in the Topology of GV Orbit Control. The swapping of a GVOP device for a replacement one is not supported.
GV Orbit Control
Device Property
(read only)
Name
GV Orbit Client
Parameter
Device Name
Network Host Name Host Name
Description
To Configure Device Information in GV Orbit Client
The following device parameter values are pushed from GV Orbit Client to GV Orbit Control.
As a result, in GV Orbit Control, these parameters are read only. The IP Friendly Name service
Device Properties Definitions , on page 232.
Description
Comment
This is the device’s Friendly Name . If no friendly name has been set, the device type
(product's model number) is shown.
This is also the Friendly Name value. If the
Description value is set in GV Orbit Client, then this value is used as the description in
GV Orbit Control. Otherwise, if no friendly description has been set in GV Orbit Client, the device's product model number is shown.
See
213
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
GV Orbit Control
Device Property
(read only)
Short Name
GV Orbit Client
Parameter
Short Name
Source and
Destination
For example, found in the Sources /
Destinations tab of the Multilevel Table in the Logical
Device Table . See
The Logical Source /
Destination gets its name as follows:
• The spigot port name (if this value has been set in
GV Orbit Client), OR
• The device’s short name plus “ . “ plus spigot number.
Comment
If a friendly short name is set in the GV Orbit
Client, then this is the value set as the short name in GV Orbit Control. If no friendly short name is set, then the value for this
GV Orbit Control will be derived from the
Name parameter.
When the Automatic Sources and
Destinations property is set for a GVOP device (this is the default setting, see
Devices , on page 206), the name of the
spigot’s source or destination set in GV Orbit
Client is applied, when the topology is
activated (see Activating a Topology , on page 235).
See
—
To Configure Source and Destination
Proceed as follows.
1 In GV Orbit Client, open the Devices
tab. See also IP Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import , on page 75.
2 Identify the device you want to configure.
3 Set the Device Name , Short Name , Host name , and Description parameters for the device.
214
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Control
Spigot Property
(read only)
Name
Short name
Port Number
This information is immediately updated for the same device in GV Orbit Control.
To Configure Source and Destination Information in GV Orbit Client
The following source and destination spigot parameter values are pushed from GV Orbit
Client to GV Orbit Control. As a result, in GV Orbit Control, these parameters are read only.
The IP Friendly Name service persists this data in the GV Orbit Server. For more information,
see About Automatic Sources or Destinations
, on page 246 and Device Properties Definitions , on page 232.
GV Orbit
Client
Parameter
Port Name
Comment
The name or identifier for this input or output port.
The Port Name in GV Orbit Client is used as the label to generate sources and destinations. If no value is specified in GV Orbit Client, GV Orbit
Control will use a combination of device name plus spigot number for the sources and destinations.
Short Name This is the spigot name commonly used in the
GV Orbit Control interface.
Port Number Uniquely identifies any source or destination across all devices. A source and a destination can have the same port number. However, two sources
/ destinations cannot have the same port number.
See
These values can be assigned automatically; see To Automatically Assign Port Numbers,
Short Names, and Port names in GV Orbit Client , on page 216. Proceed as follows.
1 In GV Orbit Client, open the Devices
tab. See also IP Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import , on page 75.
2 Select the device you want to configure.
3 Select the Spigots tab.
4 Identify the device’s source ( Src ) and destination ( Dst ) spigots in Mode . This reflects the device’s current configuration.
5 Set the Port Number , Short Name , and Port Name parameter for the spigot.
215
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Enter the Port Number FIRST before entering other values. If you try to set a Short
Name or Port Name parameter for a spigot that doesn't have a Port Number , then the value you enter is not saved.
This information is immediately updated for the same device in GV Orbit Control.
To Automatically Assign Port Numbers, Short Names, and Port names in GV Orbit Client
1 Select the Spigots tab.
2 Right-click the device’s name and select Assign Ports . Or click Assign Ports above the table to assign ports to all devices.
216
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Set the following parameters in the Assign Port Mappings screen.
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
Parameter
Spigot Selection
Source Ports / Base port number
Destination Ports /
Base port number
Description
Select the scope of this screen.
Sources and Destinations: Apply automatic assignment changes to both sources and destinations.
Sources: Apply automatic assignment changes to sources only.
Destinations: Apply automatic assignment changes to destinations only.
This tool uses a counter to assign a number to a port. This setting allows you to individually set the starting number for the first source and destination port from which the count will start.
217
Configuration Tasks
Adding Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
Assignment Mode
Options
Description
Select the way port numbers are assigned:
Synchronize source and dest assignments in discrete blocks: Assign port numbers such that the next highest available number is used to start numbering the first source and destination ports together in unison.
Ad hoc - use next free source or destination port: Separately assign port numbers, individually to sources and destinations, in sequence such that the next available port number is always used.
Automatically generate the parameter values for port and short names.
Create default port names: Set to automatically generate the value in the Port Name column as follows: [device name] + [S = source, D = destination] + [Port Number]
Create default short names: Set to automatically generate the value in the Short Name column as follows: [Port Number] + [S = source, D = destination] + [Port Number]
4 Click OK .
This information is immediately updated for the same device in GV Orbit Control.
To migrate GVOP Devices for IP routing
As of GV Orbit Control version 2.8.0 or higher:
• GVOP devices newly added to a Topology will no longer need to be connected to
Camera and Monitor devices and the logical sources/destinations will be automatically created when: the device is added to the topology, the topology is activated, and the status of the device’s control port is Online.
• The spigots of these devices can be re-named in GV Orbit Client. See
Synchronization of Discovered GVOP Devices, Source, Destination, and Spigot Names made in GV Orbit
GVOP devices configured in GV Orbit Control version 2.7.X or earlier are not automatically updated to use this new routing method when a project is migrated to GV Orbit Control version 2.8.0 or higher. If you want to use the new behavior available to GV Orbit Control version 2.8.0 or higher, then you must manually migrate the devices.
To migrate GVOP for IP routing, choose one of the following methods.
• Delete The Camera and Monitor linked to the GVOP device and then set the Automatic
Sources and Destinations parameter in the device’s properties. See
• Delete the GVOP device, the associated Camera and Monitor devices and then add only the GVOP device back to the Topology.
Troubleshooting
Verify that the IP Friendly Name service is running; if:
• A device’s friendly name disappears from the GV Orbit Client.
• The device Name, Short Name and Network Host Name show the device’s primary IP address.
218
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Using Quick Config
Ensure the IP Friendly Name service is installed and running on the GV Orbit Server. Refer to
Application Maintenance in the GV Orbit Admin Guide. See Related Documentation , on page 7.
Using Quick Config
• Change a device’s logical level.
• Expose or un-expose the device’s streams.
Switches allow the changes to apply only to IP streams, SDI streams, inputs, or outputs. For example, Quick Config can be used multiple times: the first time to set the logical level for the device’s inputs, and then a second time to set another logical level for the device’s outputs.
To set the Quick Config options for the selected devices
1 Select the devices on the Topology you want to configure.
2 Click in the Topology Configurator’s toolbar.
3 Set the following options.
Parameter
Logical level family
Expose streams un-expose streams
Description
Select the logical level to assign to the device’s source and destination streams. See also
Duplicating a Logical Level , on page 193.
Keep current level : leaves the device’s currently-assigned source and destination logical levels untouched.
Only certain devices support this property. When Expose Stream is set, it displays the streams for this device in the Logical Device Table. See
Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241.
Set port redundancy Certain third-party devices that support port redundancy are not automatically recognized by GV Orbit Control to support redundancy.
When devices have been configured with two or more ports, set this
option to make the ports redundant in GV Orbit Control. See Setting
Port Redundancy for Many Devices at Once , on page 220.
Apply to IP streams Set to apply the above settings to IP network connections between devices.
Apply to SDI Set to apply the above settings to SDI connections between devices.
219
Configuration Tasks
Using Quick Config
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
Apply to Inputs/Rx
Description
Set to apply the above settings to device destinations.
Apply to Outputs/Tx Set to apply the above settings to device sources.
4 Click OK .
Setting Port Redundancy for Many Devices at Once
Redundancy associates a port with another port to create a redundant network traffic flow path for failover protection. The associated port will not be available to carry other traffic.
For example, this is a requirement of a SMPTE ST 2022-7 network topology. See also
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7 , on page 399.
Note: This feature is to only be used with third-party devices.
Certain third-party devices that support port redundancy are not automatically recognized by GV Orbit Control to support redundancy. For such devices, once they have been configured with two or more input / output connectors, use the Set port redundancy option in Quick Config (see
Using Quick Config , on page 219) to make the ports redundant
in GV Orbit Control. When completed, the Redundancy Port parameter in the Device
Properties for in / out 1 is in / out 2 and the Redundancy Port parameter for in / out 2 is in / out 1 . If there are 4 ports, then the Redundancy Port parameter for in / out 3 is in / out 4 and the Redundancy Port parameter for in / out 4 is in / out 3 and so on.
For more information about Device Properties, see
Defining Device Properties , on page 229.
Use other Quick Config options to focus the redundancy on the required ports and port direction. For example, to make the selected device’s output IP streams redundant, set the
Quick Config as shown below.
220
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Using Quick Config
Once these devices have been configured, use the Stream Configurator to set the IP
Example of how to set port redundancy for many devices at once
This procedure is an example for the following scenario:
• 100 IP analog-to-digital audio devices have been connected to the network switches with redundant connections.
• Each audio device supplies IP outputs for 16 channels of AES67 audio.
This example makes the IP output connections 1 and 2 redundant for each audio device in a device group of 100 generic IP Devices.
1 Open the Topology Configurator. See
Accessing the Topology Configurator , on page 199.
2 From the Device Library, drag an IP Device
onto the Topology Configurator. See To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
3 Select the IP Device
. See How to Identify if a Device Bubble is Selected or Not , on page 201.
4 Set the device group’s properties as follows (see
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 and
Device Properties Definitions , on page 232):
• Set the number of output connections in # Output Connections to 2 .
• Set the logical levels for the device in Logical Level to AES67-16 .
• For a SMPTE ST 2110 device with three output streams, set the number of streams in # Streams Per Output to 3 .
• Set the logical levels for each of these streams to video, audio, and ancillary found under the individual stream properties.
• Set the IP address for each stream (video, audio, and ancillary) found under the individual stream properties.
5 Set the number of IP Device instances to 100 and set a name for the devices. See
To name a device and set the number of devices in the group , on page 205.
6 Click in the Topology Configurator’s toolbar while the device group is selected. See
To set the Quick Config options for the selected devices , on page 219.
7 Set the following Quick Config options:
• Set port redundancy
• Apply to IP streams
• Apply to outputs / Tx
8 Click OK .
When complete, the Redundancy Port parameter in the Device Properties for out 1 is out 2 and the Redundancy Port parameter for out 2 is out 1 for all device instances. The IP
address for these devices can be efficiently set with the Stream Configurator. See Stream
Configurator Tasks , on page 322.
221
Configuration Tasks
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology
Once two or more devices have been added to the Topology Configurator (see Adding
Devices to a Topology , on page 204), devices can be linked together using the following
methods. Using one method does not prevent you from using another method in the future.
Linking Method Description
Quick Connect Automatically connects all unconnected ports of devices currently in the Topology
Configurator. Quick Connect options can limit automatic connections by stream, source, or destination type.
Manual Linking Create the links between devices manually. Manual linking allows precise control over link parameters.
You must also set the link’s physical connection parameters (sources and destinations) for each link.
See Procedure
Using Quick Connect to Link all
Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
1
Manually Linking the Devices in a Topology , on page 224.
2
Using Quick Connect to Link all Devices in a Topology
Quick Connect automatically connects all unconnected ports of:
• All devices currently in the Topology Configurator when no devices are selected.
• The currently selected devices in the Topology Configurator.
See
How to Identify if a Device Bubble is Selected or Not , on page 201.
When necessary, it reads the device’s configuration to learn:
• Which ports / spigots have been configured as sources or destinations.
• The available IP ports, including control and management ports.
If a NMOS node has been added to the topology and has been configured and is working
(see
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology , on page 377), Quick Connect will connect the
NMOS node’s management ports.
Quick connect also automatically connects the link’s physical connection parameters
(sources and destinations) for each link.
Once more devices have been added to the topology, or if a link has been cut, Quick
Connect can be run again to automatically connect those devices. Quick Connect will ignore pre-existing connections between devices.
Quick Connect has an option to automatically create sources and destinations for SDI inputs and outputs. SDI inputs are connected to Camera device groups, and outputs are connected to Monitor device groups. As a result, these SDI Camera and Monitor devices become available in the Logical Device Table as the device’s inputs and outputs. See
Device Table Tasks , on page 241.
222
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology
However, as of GV Orbit Control version 2.8.0 or higher, for devices that use GVOP (see
GVOP Devices , on page 206), the sources and destinations of such a device newly added to
a Topology will no longer be connected to Camera and Monitor devices by Quick Connect.
The sources and destinations of the GVOP device become immediately available in the
Logical Device Table when it is added to the Topology and the topology is activated. See
Synchronization of Discovered GVOP Devices, Source, Destination, and Spigot Names made in
GV Orbit Client , on page 211 for more information.
Quick Connect is found in the Topology Configurator’s toolbar.
PREREQUISITES: The following must have been configured:
• If the system requires physical IP connections to be made, make sure you have at least one network switch device in your topology. If your network uses a second network switch to support redundancy (for example, to support SMPTE ST 2022-7), then you must have at least two network switch devices in your topology. See also
Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7 , on page 399.
• Ensure that core devices such as those listed in
Discovered devices libraries and have been configured before using this tool. For example, GV Nodes, IPG-X901, IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901 cards, Audio Live, and Routers.
See
Special Device Configuration Tasks , on page 331 for specific configuration
information about these devices.
• Add the remaining devices to the topology. See Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204.
• The topology must be currently:
• Activated (see
Activating a Topology , on page 235).
• Unlocked (see
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology , on page 238).
• All devices must be currently online. That is, no device should be shown in red in the
System Status. See
System Status Task , on page 445.
Using Quick Connect
Set the Quick Connect options before using Quick Connect. See Using Quick Config , on page 219.
1 Click in the Topology Configurator’s toolbar.
223
Configuration Tasks
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
2 Set the following options.
Parameter
Do IP connections
Main network
Backup network
Description
Set to automatically create IP network connections between devices.
Select the name of the primary switch in your network.
If your network uses two network switches to support redundancy (for example, to support SMPTE ST 2022-7), then select the name of the
secondary switch in your network. See also Configuring Network
Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7 , on page 399.
Do SDI connections Set to automatically create SDI connections between devices.
As of GV Orbit Control version 2.8.0 or higher, this option no longer
applies to devices that use GVOP (see GVOP Devices , on page 206).
information. Topologies created in a previous GV Orbit Control version will not be changed to reflect this new behavior, unless the device is added again to the Topology.
3 Click OK .
Manually Linking the Devices in a Topology
Once the device groups are added to the Topology, the next step is to create links between them using the Link mode which allows you to link bubbles with a touch-based device.
Otherwise, if you are using a mouse and keyboard interface, you can link devices together using the following procedure while in the Edit mode as well.
To link devices or device groups in a topology
Open the required topology.
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
224
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology
3 Click the Link button at the top of the interface.
4 Select the first bubble in the pair you want to connect.
When the bubble is selected, the device is highlighted in blue and both the bubble’s input and outputs ports become available. Input ports are on the left side of the bubble. Output ports are on the right side of the bubble.
5 Select an input or output port on the bubble.
If the input port was selected, the output ports of all the available devices appear. If the output port was selected, the input ports of all the available devices appear.
6 Draw a line, with your mouse, between the ports of the two devices to make the connection between them. Or if you are using a touch-based device, the Link mode allows you to link bubbles together by dragging a bubble over others so that the connectors touch each other and then pull them apart to their final position.
Manually Setting the Link’s Physical Connection Parameters (Sources and
Destinations)
When a link is selected, the Physical Connection Table appears. It is in this table where you create the connections between device ports. When you add devices to a Topology and you then link two devices, you are indicating that the two devices in two groups are virtually connected. Therefore, you need a place to specify how these devices are actually
(physically) connected. This is achieved through the Physical Connections Table. It is in this table where you will actually specify that port1 of device1 that is part of group1 is connected physically with port1 of device1 of group2, for example.
To make a connection, you must start in the Builder tab, and then complete the action in the Candidate tab.
The Physical Connection Table uses connection icons as follows.
Icon State (status)
The stream is ready to be connected as it has been selected in the Builder tab.
Action
—
225
Configuration Tasks
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Icon State (status)
The stream is connected.
—
Action
Connect: make the connection between the source and destination devices.
Disconnect: break the connection between the source and destination devices.
The Physical Connection Table uses port type icons as follows. A source’s output port type must be linked to the same input port type at the destination.
Port Type
Icon Description
The connection type is SDI.
The connection type is IP.
The connection type is MADI.
In the Physical Connection Table , more than one table row can be selected at a time; to add to a selection, use Shift or Ctrl to select a range of table rows or to add another row to the selection.
Builder Tab
The Builder tab shows all the outputs and the inputs available for connections. The output streams are shown on the left and the inputs are shown on the right for the selected link. By selecting streams in the Builder tab makes them available in the Candidate tab where they are then linked. For extra information about an input or output, set Router external labels .
The Router external labels are only available for router ports and not all device ports.
226
To associate a device’s output stream to another device’s input
1 Select one or more source output stream table rows that you want to link to destination’s input.
2 Drag the source output stream table rows onto the destination input(s).
The selected items become available in the Candidate tab.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology
You can bypass the Candidate tab as follows: you select all your destination, and all your sources and then with your right mouse button held down you drag the destinations over the sources. With this method, the only way to review your connections is by going into the
Connected tab and disconnecting the wrong/unwanted ones.
Candidate Tab
Once a device’s output stream has been associated to another device’s input in the Builder tab, you can review these associations to then select the ones you want to link together.
To link a device’s output stream to another device’s input
1 Select one or more table rows that you want to link the source’s output stream to the destination’s input.
2 When satisfied with your selection, click Connect at the top of the table.
Connected Tab
This tab shows the currently linked streams between the source’s output and the destination's input. Links can be disconnected in this tab.
To disconnect a device’s output stream from another device’s input
1 Select one or more table rows that you want to disconnect the source’s output stream to the destination’s input.
2 When satisfied with your selection, click Disconnect at the top of the table.
227
Configuration Tasks
Deleting the Connection Between Device Groups
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Other Tab
This tab will show you all the other connections that a device's ports has on another links.
For example, you have device1 with 20 ports, 10 are connected to device2 and 10 to device3. You select the first link and you connect the 10 ports. You select the second link on the Other tab you will see the first 10 ports that you connected.
Deleting the Connection Between Device Groups
To delete the connection between devices
Open the required topology.
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204.
228
3 Select the Link button at the top of the interface.
4 Draw a line across the connection.
The scissor icon appears on the line and the link turns red.
5 Release the mouse.
The connection link is removed.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Defining Device Properties
Defining Device Properties
You set the parameters for the selected device in the Property Editor .
• The configuration parameters for most devices is intuitive and no further explanation is
required. See Device Properties Definitions , on page 232 for a primer.
• The configuration of certain devices requires advanced knowledge; see
Configuration Tasks , on page 331 for more information about these devices.
Inheritance of Property Values from the Device Group Properties Tab
Certain parameter values in the Device Properties tab inherit their values from the corresponding parameter values in the Device Group Properties tab. This allows you to configure common parameters for a large number of devices at once with a default value.
Device Group Properties Tab
Parameter Values (Default)
Parameter Value
Inheritance
Device Properties Tab
Parameter Values
Device Properties Tab
Parameter Values
When you change the value of a parameter in the Device Properties tab such that it is now different from the corresponding value set in the Device Group Properties tab, the parameter will be displayed with an orange background. This is shown below.
The parameter’s value is a non-default value
(indicated by the orange highlight)
Click to reset the parameter’s value back to the default value set in the Device Group
Properties
To define properties for a device
1 Open the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
2 Select the device you want to configure.
229
Configuration Tasks
Defining Device Properties
The Property Editor is displayed on the right.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
In this case, the IPG2 bubble is selected and the Device Group Properties tab is selected in the Property Editor .
3 Select the Device Properties tab to view the properties for the individual device. See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
230
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Defining Device Properties
For example, for the Cameras, there is a Device Group Properties tab for the camera group and a Device Properties tab for each of the five cameras.
Camera Device Group Properties
The Device Group Properties tab sets the default parameter values to be passed down to each individual device in the Device Properties tab to save time. These default values can be overridden in the at the device level in the Device Properties tab.
Camera Device Properties
Note: All devices, device groups, and connections have properties.
231
Configuration Tasks
Defining Device Properties
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Device Properties Definitions
This is a non-exhaustive overview of the device properties parameters.
Parameter
Name a
Description
Short Name
# Devices
Logical Level
Description
The name or identifier for this device instance.
The name or identifier for this input or output port.
For devices that use GVOP to configure them, see Synchronization of
An optional description for the related input, output, or device. For
devices that use GVOP to configure them, see Synchronization of
The nickname by which the input, output, or device is referred to everywhere in the system. For devices that use GVOP to configure them, see
Synchronization of Discovered GVOP Devices, Source,
Destination, and Spigot Names made in GV Orbit Client , on page 211.
The number of device instances in this device group.
The hostname is the unique name by which the device is known on the network. For devices that use GVOP to configure them, see
Synchronization of Discovered GVOP Devices, Source, Destination, and
Spigot Names made in GV Orbit Client , on page 211.
The logical level for this input or output. Click to change the logical level through the Logical Level Selector.
232
Select a logical level and click OK to change the level.
For more information about logical levels, to create, or modify logical levels, see
Logical Level Editor Tasks , on page 190.
The number of physical input port connections made to the device. # Input Connectors
# Output Connectors The number of physical output port connections made to the device.
# Streams Per Input The typical number of streams available on each physical input connection.
# Streams Per Output The typical number of streams available on each physical output connection.
# Streams The actual number of streams available on the selected physical input
/ output connection.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Defining Device Properties
Parameter
Port Identifier
IP Address
Automatic Sources and Destinations
Description
This is the generic identifier of the port within GV Orbit Control.
The port’s IP Address.
This parameter is for GVOP devices (see
only: set to automatically use the names and the flow type configured for sources and destinations for this same device in GV Orbit Client in
real time when the Topology is activated (see Activating a Topology , on page 235).
This can be set for the device as a whole, or for individual spigots.
When a GVOP device is newly added to the topology, this parameter is now set by default.
For more information, see
Synchronization of Discovered GVOP
Devices, Source, Destination, and Spigot Names made in GV Orbit
About Automatic Sources or Destinations , on page 246.
For topologies created prior to GV Orbit Control version 2.8.0 or higher, this parameter is deselected for all pre-existing GVOP devices.
If you set this parameter, then connected camera / monitor groups will
no longer work. See also To migrate GVOP Devices for IP routing , on page 218.
When deselected, the streams will be unexposed for the device. You can create custom logical sources/destinations by exposing the
required streams first, using the Stream Configurator. See Stream
Configurator Tasks , on page 322.
Set to automatically create a destination by the system for the
specified streams. See also About Automatic Sources or Destinations , on page 246.
Automatic
Destination
Automatic
Destinations on
Inputs
Automatic
Destinations on
Outputs
Automatic Source
Automatic Sources on
Outputs
Automatic Sources on
Inputs
Set to automatically create a source by the system for the specified streams. See also
About Automatic Sources or Destinations , on
Expose Streams When set, it displays the streams for this device in the Logical Device
Table. See Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241.
The following methosa are available to set or clear this parameter at once:
• Quick Config; see Using Quick Config , on page 219.
• The Stream Configurator; see Stream Configurator Tasks , on page 322
SSM Address Enabled Shows if the source specific multicast address is enabled.
233
Configuration Tasks
Deleting a Device From a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
SDP
Redundancy Port
Description
See
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device , on page 385.
Associates a port with another port to create a redundant network traffic flow path for failover protection. The associated port will not be available to carry other traffic. This is usually a requirement of a SMPTE
ST 2022-7 network topology.
See also
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE
See also
Setting Port Redundancy for Many Devices at Once , on page 220.
a.
When an asterisk (*) is shown, parameter cannot be edited in GV Orbit Control . To edit this value, it must be done GV Orbit Client
. For more information about this, see Synchronization of
Discovered GVOP Devices, Source, Destination, and Spigot Names made in GV Orbit Client , on
page 211.
Deleting a Device From a Topology
You must open a topology in the Topology Configurator before you can delete it.
To delete a topology
1 Select the Area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
3 Select the device you want to remove.
The device is highlighted on the Topology.
4 Click Delete .
234
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Activating a Topology
Activating a Topology
By activating a topology makes GV Orbit Control connect to and activate all drivers to devices in the topology. For example, for a GV Node it means initiating the Densité and
NP0016 connections and being able to control them. By activating a topology, panels will become active and light up.
You must select a topology and open it in the Topology Configurator before you can make it active.
Note: Only one topology can be active at a time for each area.
To make a topology active
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
3 Click Active at the top of the Topology Configurator.
A confirmation message appears.
4 Click OK to continue.
235
Configuration Tasks
Making an Active Topology Inactive
The following changes occur.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• The topology name is displayed in red at the top of the Topology Configurator.
• A red lightbulb is displayed beside the topology name.
• A red box appears around the topology.
• Active is written on the bar.
• The topology is locked.
• The red Active bar is displayed on the thumbnail for the active topology.
Making an Active Topology Inactive
Only one topology can be active at a time for each area. You must open the active topology in the Topology Configurator before you can make it inactive.
To make an active topology inactive
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
236
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Making an Active Topology Inactive
2 Select the required topology. See Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204.
3 Click the Active button at the top of the Topology Configurator.
A confirmation message appears.
4 Click OK to continue.
The following changes occur.
• The topology name no longer appears in red at the top of the Topology
Configurator.
• The red bar no longer appears at the base of the Topology.
• The topology is unlocked.
• The red Active bar is no longer displayed on the thumbnail for the active topology in the secondary window.
237
Configuration Tasks
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology
A topology is locked automatically when you make it active. The lock only affects the current GV Orbit Control application. If multiple users have the same topology open, then each user can lock/unlock their client to do edits; this setting is not global to all open clients.
To unlock an active topology
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
This opens the topology in the Topology Configurator.
3 Click the Lock button.
A confirmation message appears.
238
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 Click OK to continue.
Configuration Tasks
Locking an Unlocked Topology
When a topology is unlocked
• The lock icon is unlocked.
• If you have Edit permissions to the Topology Configurator for the selected area, you can modify the active topology.
Locking an Unlocked Topology
It is recommended to relock an unlocked topology, when you have finished your edits. This prevents you from inadvertently making edits on an active topology, such as selecting an object and pressing delete by accident.
Note: You can only lock an unlocked active topology. Inactive topologies cannot be locked or unlocked.
To lock a unlocked active topology
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
239
Configuration Tasks
Locking an Unlocked Topology
This opens the topology in the Topology Configurator.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Click the unlocked Lock button at the top of the Topology Configurator.
No confirmation message appears.
The Lock icon switches to the locked state.
No one can edit the topology.
240
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Logical Device Table Tasks
Logical Device Table Tasks
Use the Logical Device Table task to view and configure the streams for the logical levels.
Audio shuffling and breakaway can also be configured to create multiple streams with different audio channels (for example, for multi-language support).
The Logical Device Table task is also where you create virtual crosspoints (XPTs) and to configure logical destination devices that are related to these virtual XPTs. See
Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs) , on page 257.
Megasource is a logical source device that is defined with multiple streams, under multiple logical levels, that can be routed to a logical destination with at least one matching logical level. This allows the definition of a source device with multiple locations in the topology, where the destination devices’ logical levels will determine which streams to route. For example, you may connect Bars to two different routers, the destination logical level will determine which of these two source streams are to be used. This is usually the source stream that is local to the destination. Megasource also allows for UHD quad-link sources to share a single stream of 16 channel audio and ancillary data with the 4 video streams. See
Using Megasource , on page 254 for more information.
Accessing the Logical Device Table task
To access the Logical Device Table Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select a topology. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Configuration > Logical Device Table .
241
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Logical Device Table task
The Logical Device Table task appears.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
242
The default streams for your topology, are displayed in the left hand column under
Stream Browser .
The following tabs are found in the right hand column under Multilevel Table .
Tab
Sources
Destinations
Virtual XPTS
Description
Show the currently configured sources. Sources are the available outputs for all the devices on your topology. See
Destination to the Logical Level Table , on page 248.
Show the currently configured destinations. Destinations are the available inputs for all the devices on your topology. See
Configuring a Destination , on page 254.
Show the currently configured virtual crosspoints. See
Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs) , on page 257.
Items in the Multilevel Table may be shown as grayed out and they cannot be edited.
These devices’ configuration properties come from GV Orbit Client. See
5 Select the Sources tab to view the streams from the sources.
The Logical Level associated with the source are displayed. For information on the logical levels, see
Logical Level Editor Tasks , on page 190.
6 Scroll down in the Sources view to see all the levels for the selected source.
Stream Browser / Channel Browser
The Stream Browser shows all currently available steams. When a stream has two or more channels, the Channel Browser gives you access to the individual audio channels in a stream thereby allowing you to implement audio breakaway and audio shuffle for independent audio routing. See
Configuring Streams for New Sources / Destinations , on page 249.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Logical Device Table task
To make use of this feature, streams will need to pass through a device that supports audio breakaway/shuffling, such as a hybrid router, GV Node, or Audio Live. See
, on page 333 and Configuring a Device that Supports Audio
Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live , on page 421.
The selected stream
Shows detailed information about this stream
The Channel Browser shows the available audio channels for the selected stream
Note: if more than one stream is selected in the
Stream Browser, then the
Channel Browser shows all channels derived from the selected streams
Each audio channel can be dragged onto a different level in the Multilevel table to shuffle the source’s audio
The Stream Browser and Channel Browser menu have the following menu options.
Icon
Select All
Description
Selects all items in the Stream Browser.
Clear All Deselects all items in the Stream Browser.
Channel Browser Shows the Channel Browser (found in the Stream Browser only).
Show Long
Names
Automated
Sources
Automated
Destinations
Toggles between the display of the long name or short name of the stream and device names.
Creates all the audio levels in the Multilevel Table for the selected
streams. See also Configuring an IQAMD40 Device , on page 434 for an
example of how to use this feature.
Channels per Device
Set how many channels are assigned per logical device when you have enabled the Automated Sources or Automated Destinations options.
For example, if you select 64 streams in the channel browser, and you set Channels per Device to 16, and then you click the Automatic
Sources option, it will automatically create 4 logical sources for you.
The first 16 streams are assigned to A1-16 of the first source, the next
16 are assigned to A1-A16 of the second source, and so on.
Likewise, if you select 64 streams in the channel browser, and you set
Channels per Device to 8, and then you click the Automated Sources option, it will automatically create 8 logical sources for you. The first 8 streams assigned to A1-A8 of the first source, the next 8 assigned to
A1-A8 of the second source, and so on.
Similarly, if you select 64 streams, and set Channels per Device to 2, it will create 32 sources.
243
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Logical Device Table task
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Icon
Filter
Information
Description
Filters the list. Note that the filter operates on the currently shown list items according to the Show Long Names setting.
See
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations , on page 266.
Shows detailed information about the stream / channel.
Multilevel Table Menu
The Multilevel Table menu has the following menu options.
Icon
New
Delete
Description
Creates a new Source / Destination / Virtual XPTS in the Logical Device
Table. See Adding a Source or Destination to the Logical Level Table , on page 248,
Adding and Configuring a Destination , on page 254, and
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs) , on page 257.
Removes the currently-selected Source / Destination / Virtual XPTS in
the Logical Device Table. See Deleting a Source, Destination, or Virtual
Select All
Clear All
Levels
Selects all rows in the Multilevel table.
Deselects all rows in the Multilevel table.
Hide automatic sources
Hide automatic destinations
Shows the Logical Level Selector. This allows you to set the logical levels that are to be shown in the Multilevel Table.
See
Setting the Logical Levels to be Displayed in the Multilevel Table , on page 247.
Shows or hides automatic sources / destinations in the Logical Device
Table.
Virtual
Destinations
Reset all filters The columns of the Logical Device Table have filters. These buttons
Reload all filters clear all filters and restores the previous filters.
See
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations , on page 266.
Export
Shows the available destinations available from previously-configured virtual XPTS.
Exports the Logical Device Table to a CSV file. See
Device Table , on page 257 or Selecting all Devices in the Logical
Device Table for Export , on page 257.
label
Restore default
Show Long
Names
When a source or destination has been renamed, this resets the name to its original label.
Toggles between the display of the long name or short name of the stream and device names.
244
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
About the Multilevel Table and GVOP Devices
Icon
Show Redundant
Streams
Refresh
Description
For each stream in the Multilevel Table:
• When a source or destination has redundant IP streams (as may be the case with an SMPTE ST 2022-7 network for example), for each stream in the Multilevel Table, this toggles between the display of the
IP address for the primary stream and the display of the IP address for the secondary stream.
• When this option is selected, and the stream has a secondary IP address to be shown, the stream’s secondary IP address is shown with a blue background to identify that the secondary stream’s IP address is currently being shown.
Streams that have no redundancy (no secondary IP address) are unaffected by this option.
Reloads the Logical Device Table’s contents.
About the Multilevel Table and GVOP Devices
When the following conditions are met, the device's configuration is read from the GVOP device in real time and GV Orbit Client automatically creates / updates sources and destinations for these GVOP devices in the Logical Device Table's Multilevel Table:
• The device uses GVOP (see GVOP Devices , on page 206), and the
Automatic Sources and Destinations parameter is enabled in the device’s properties (this is the default setting; see
Device Properties Definitions , on page 232).
• The device is online.
For example, if the Flow Type for a video flow is assigned to SMPTE2022 in a GVOP device, then in the Multilevel Table, this flow appears as an SDI flow for this device and the SMPTE
ST 2110-20, 2110-30, and 2110-40 flows are not used. Likewise, if an SMPTE ST 2110-30 audio flow is set to None, then in the Multilevel Table, this flow is no longer applied to the audio level for the given source or destination.
In addition, if the IP Friendly Name service is running on the GV Orbit Client Server, the custom naming configuration for the device and its spigots
Table's Multilevel Table.
1 is read in real time and it updates the names and descriptions of the sources and destinations in the Logical Device
See also
About Automatic Sources or Destinations , on page 246 and
1.Custom naming for the device and its spigots is carried out in GV Orbit Client.
245
Configuration Tasks
About Automatic Sources or Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
About Automatic Sources or Destinations
Certain sources and destinations are created automatically by GV Orbit Control, such as edge devices: cameras, monitors, and so on. Automatic sources or destinations are created when the following properties (as applicable) have been set in the device’s property editor:
• Automatic Sources and Destinations
• Automatic Destination
• Automatic Destinations on Inputs
• Automatic Destinations on Outputs
• Automatic Source
• Automatic Sources on Outputs
• Automatic Sources on Inputs
See also
Device Properties Definitions , on page 232.
The A icon is shown next to the name for the row in the Multilevel Table to indicate that the source or destination was automatically created by GV Orbit Control.
Source or destination was automatically created by GV Orbit
Control
This yellow bar indicates that the name is no longer the automaticallygenerated name
Note: You cannot delete a default source from the Logical Level Table. However, you can modify the levels associated with the source. Also, you can modify or delete the sources that you create.
Automatically created sources’ and destinations’ name can be re-named by double-clicking the name field. A yellow bar indicates that the name of the source or destination is no longer the automatically-generated name. Click Restore default label to revert back to the automatically-generated name.
Such automatically generated sources and destinations have icons to represent the source or destination type when shown, for example, in the Panel Configurator, Category Configurator, or elsewhere. A key to a few source and destination icons is shown below. These icons are derived from the icon used to represent the device in the Device Library and on the Topology
Configurator. See
Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204 .
Icon Description
Camera source
Logical device source
Encoder source
Monitor destination
Default destination for a panel. See
Creating a Single-Destination Work Flow
246
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Setting the Logical Levels to be Displayed in the Multilevel Table
If you try to delete an automatic source or destination from the Logical Device Table, the following message is displayed at the bottom of the task.
To remove an automatic source or destination, you must deselect the following properties
(as applicable) in the device’s Property Editor:
• Automatic Sources and Destinations
• Automatic Destination
• Automatic Destinations on Inputs
• Automatic Destinations on Outputs
• Automatic Source
• Automatic Sources on Outputs
• Automatic Sources on Inputs
Setting the Logical Levels to be Displayed in the Multilevel Table
You can show or hide the Logical Level shown in the Multilevel Table. For example, once you have created custom levels in the Logical Table Editor, you might want to show those levels while hiding others that are not of interest for the moment. Showing or hiding
Logical Levels in the Multilevel Table is used to facilitate bulk assignment of sources and destinations in the Multilevel Table. See
Bulk Assigning Logical Levels in the Multilevel
To modify the logical levels associated with a source / destination
1 Select a Source / destination in the Logical Device Table. See
Device Table task , on page 241.
2 Click the Logical Levels icon at the top of the table.
A secondary window opens displaying the levels for the selected source / destination.
247
Configuration Tasks
Adding a Source or Destination to the Logical Level Table
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Select one or more levels you want to use for the selected source / destination.
4 Click OK .
The columns in the Multilevel Table adjust to show the ones you have selected.
Adding a Source or Destination to the Logical Level Table
By default, the logical device table displays the sources and destinations in the selected topology in the Sources and Destinations tabs. You can add a logical device to the table that is not on the topology. You would then have the option of switching to the new logical device in place of the existing device.
To add a source or destination to the logical level table
1 Open the logical level table for the required topology.
2 Select the Sources or Destinations tab.
3 Click New at the top of the Multilevel Table .
A secondary window appears.
4 Enter the required information in the Base Name , Start Index , and Count fields .
5 Click OK .
248
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Streams for New Sources / Destinations
New sources / destinations are created. The Base Name is displayed under the Name and Description fields. The number of new sources / destinations created corresponds to the number you enter in the Count field.
In the example, five new sources are created. The name for each device begins with the base name CAM100. A number is appended to the base name. This begins with the starting index and increases by one for every number in the count.
Configuring Streams for New Sources / Destinations
After creating new sources / destinations, the next step is to configure the streams for them. Different streams can be assigned to different levels, so that a source / destinations is composed of streams from different devices (to do an implicit breakaway).
249
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Streams for New Sources / Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
For example, the column you drop a stream on in the Multilevel table selects the part of the stream to use to create the logical device. This is shown below for a stream from the Stream
Browser.
SDI Video
Video
Component
Audio
Components
Audio
Channel 1
Audio
Channel 2
V
A
A1 to A16
ANC
V-ANC
Select the row before dropping a source / destination onto it
Stream Drop onto
Multilevel Table
Column
SDI
Description
This fills all levels (video, 16 audio channels (A1 to A16), ANC, and
V ANC) with the equivalent levels from the SDI video stream.
This takes the video level only from the SDI stream.
This takes the audio levels only from the SDI or audio stream for all 16 audio channels (A1 to A16).
This takes the first audio channel from the SDI or audio stream.
This takes the ANC level only from the SDI stream.
This takes the V ANC level only from the SDI stream.
For instance, you could create a source with Video from a GV Node and the audio from an
IPG-3901, or IPG-4901. You do this by assigning the GV Node stream under the SDI column, and the IPG-3901, or IPG 4901 stream under the Audio ( A ) column. If audio breakaway/shuffling is required to complete the path, GV Orbit Control will automatically choose a route through Audio Live for example.
250
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Streams for New Sources / Destinations
LIMITATIONS
• Any shuffling done internally in a card through iControl or RollCall is not taken into account by GV Orbit Control and is not controlled by GV Orbit Control. Such shuffling is local to the card and this can result in unexpected shuffling should the card’s processing path be dynamically assigned by GV Orbit Control to another use or destination, where such internal shuffling would be detrimental.
• You cannot shuffle audio to the same destination more than once. For example, the same Destination channel is added to a destination from the Channel Browser three times. This will not work and must be avoided, as multiple sources cannot be routed to the same destination. A destination can only resolve to a single source.
To configure streams for the new sources
1 Open the Logical Device Table for the required topology.
In the left hand column under Stream Browser , the default streams for your topology are displayed.
2 Add sources to the Logical Level Table. See
Adding a Source or Destination to the
Logical Level Table , on page 248.
3 Select a source’s row to which you want to add a stream.
Select the row before dropping a source / destination onto it
251
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Streams for New Sources / Destinations
4 Drag a stream onto the source.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Video
Component
Audio
Components
In the above image, a stream is added to a source for its video component. Optionally drag the same stream or another stream from the Stream Browser to a source to add its audio components.
5 To create an audio or video breakaway with this new source or destination, once the stream has been assigned to the SDI column, drag another stream from the Stream
Browser onto the Video ( V ), Audio ( A , A1 to A16 ), or ANC column to use that specific flow component from that second stream.
To indicate that the source / destination is composed of streams from more than one device
(this includes a video or audio breakaway), the following symbol is shown with the name of the new source / destination.
252
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Bulk Assigning Logical Levels in the Multilevel Table
Configuring Streams for Audio Live Audio Channels
When using Audio Live in your topology or a similar device (see
Supports Audio Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live , on page 421), you can:
• From the Stream Browser, drop the main audio stream (never the redundant audio stream) onto the audio ( A ) column.
• From the Channel Browser, drop one or more audio channels from the stream onto the
A1 to A16 column(s). To open the Channel Browser, click . See also
Channel Browser , on page 242.
SDI Video
Video
Component
Audio
Components
Audio
Channel 1
Audio
Channel 2
Bulk Assigning Logical Levels in the Multilevel Table
The Stream Browser and Channel Browser have filters that allow you to refine the stream selection shown. See
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations , on page 266. It
is often possible that by using filtering, streams can be grouped together so that they can be dropped in bulk onto the Multilevel Table, on a row or a column.
• To bulk drop streams on to a row, select one row first and then select two or more streams to drop onto the row.
Select the row before dropping a destination onto it
• To bulk drop streams on to a column, select two or more rows first and then select two or more streams to drop onto the column.
253
Configuration Tasks
Adding and Configuring a Destination
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Adding and Configuring a Destination
The procedures for adding and configuring destinations are the same as for adding and
configuring sources. For details, see Setting the Logical Levels to be Displayed in the
Multilevel Table , on page 247,
Adding a Source or Destination to the Logical Level Table , on
page 248, Configuring Streams for New Sources / Destinations
Assigning Logical Levels in the Multilevel Table , on page 253.
Destinations have the IP Clean Switch option which enables the routing of an IP source to a local GV Node destination for a vertically accurate switch.
Using Megasource
Megasource changes GV Orbit Control’s pathfinding rules to match exact logical levels before applying best match logic. This allows you to create logical sources where the same or different streams can be added to the logical level columns that share the different custom logical levels. Megasource only applies to sources with multiple stream/level pairings and the filtering happens when a normal destination is used in a route.
When doing a take, the GV Orbit Control’s pathfinding algorithm will attempt to find an exact level match between the logical source and the logical destination. Failing to find an exact match, it attempts to find a compatible level match as it currently does. If there is more than one possible compatible match (ambiguous take), it will fail the take because we don't know which stream should be used on the logical destination.
Note that a UHD 4K take is a subset of this feature where there are four SDI levels per logical source and logical destination (one SDI level for each quad-link or two-sample interleave division substream component). See
Creating the Logical Levels for a UHD 4K Routing
Setup , on page 194 for more information.
For example, you have three SDI signals from the same source. One signal is full resolution
1080p video, the second signal is 720p video, and the third is 480p video. One destination is for the full resolution 1080p video, the second destination is for the 720p video, the second destination is for the 480p video, where the destination devices’ logical levels will determine which streams to route.
254
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Using Megasource
The following is an example of how to do this.
Using Megasource
1 Create the following Topology to use for this example. See Adding Devices to a
2 Create three copies of the SDI Logical Level called SDI-A , SDI-B , and SDI-C in the
Logical Level Editor . See
Duplicating a Logical Level , on page 193.
3 Click in the Multilevel Table , Sources tab, of the Logical Device Table to hide the
automatically-generated sources. See Multilevel Table Menu , on page 244.
4 Click in the Multilevel Table , Sources tab, of the Logical Device Table to create a new source (shown in this example as Megasource ). See
Adding a Source or Destination to the Logical Level Table , on page 248.
5 In the Logical Device Table, select a source’s row to which you want to add the streams.
See
To configure streams for the new sources , on page 251.
6 From the Stream Browser of the Logical Device Table , drag the three source streams onto the Multilevel Table. The first stream represents 1080p video, the second stream represents is 720p video, and the third stream represents 480p video.
Select a row before dropping the streams onto it
7 Click in the Multilevel Table , Destinations tab, of the Logical Device Table to hide the automatically-generated destinations. See
Multilevel Table Menu , on page 244.
255
Configuration Tasks
Deleting a Source, Destination, or Virtual XPTS
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
8 Click in the Multilevel Table , Destinations tab, of the Logical Device Table to
create new destinations, one for each level (1080p, 720p, and 480p video). See Adding a
Source or Destination to the Logical Level Table , on page 248.
9 In the Logical Device Table, select the first source’s row to which you want to add the streams.
10 From the Stream Browser of the Logical Device Table , drag the first destination stream onto the Multilevel Table.
11 In the Logical Device Table, select the second source’s row to which you want to add the streams.
12 From the Stream Browser of the Logical Device Table , drag the second destination stream onto the Multilevel Table.
13 In the Logical Device Table, select the third source’s row to which you want to add the streams.
14 From the Stream Browser of the Logical Device Table , drag the third destination stream onto the Multilevel Table.
Select the row before dropping a destination onto it
15 Test the configuration by making takes between a logical source and destination that use the Megasource
source. See Performing a Take in Router Control , on page 459. See
in Pathfinder that the correct source resolution is received by each destination. See
Viewing Information about the Destinations , on page 442.
Deleting a Source, Destination, or Virtual XPTS
You can delete any source, destination, or virtual XPTS that you have created.
To delete a source, destination, or virtual XPTS
1 Open the Logical Device Table task for the required topology.
2 Select the Sources tab, the Destination tab, or virtual XPTS tab according to what you are deleting.
3 Select the sources, destinations, or virtual XPTS in the table.
Note: You can delete one or more sources or destinations at the same time.
4 Click the Delete icon .
256
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Exporting a Logical Device Table
Exporting a Logical Device Table
You can export the data in your logical device table in a csv file.
To export a logical device table
1 Open the Logical Device Table task for the required topology.
2 Select the rows you want to export.
3 Click the Export icon .
4 Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file.
5 Click Save .
Selecting all Devices in the Logical Device Table for Export
You can select all devices in the logical device table, for example, to export the Device
Table’s configuration data to a csv file.
To select all the devices and save their configuration data
1 Open the Logical Device Table task for the required topology.
2 Click the Select All icon .
3 Click the Export icon .
4 Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file.
5 Click Save .
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
Without virtual XPTs, only one route can be made for each task. Virtual XPTs are used when multiple outputs are required to be switched to the same source in a single take .
Destination 1 Destination 2 Destination 1 Destination n
Virtual XPT
Source Source
Virtual XPTs can be used to:
• Show user-friendly device names on the operators’ control panels. For example, the name of the virtual XPT is shown on control panels when used.
• Hide implementation details from the operator(s). For example, in a transparent fashion, an output signal is also sent to a monitor.
257
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Virtual XPTs are used for the following two primary applications:
• Monitoring: to follow the source routed to a given destination and to route that same source to other destinations as needed.
• Utility DA (distribution and amplifier): to allow for a configurable virtual destination/source that can be routed to other real destinations.
The following virtual XPT functional behaviors are by design:
• A take with a virtual XPT will fail if the path to the source does not exist and as a consequence the virtual source will fail. The status (Tally) will not reflect this.
• A take with a virtual XPT’s destination will be ignored if the take fails.
• A logical destination can only be added to one virtual XPT destination at a time. Once a real destination has been added to a virtual XPT, it is no longer available to be used with other virtual destinations. A pop-up message is shown if you try to add a logical destination that has already been added to another virtual XPT. Click OK to remove the logical destination from the previous virtual XPT and add to it the new virtual XPT.
• You can only route virtual sources to unrelated virtual destinations that are not associated with the same virtual XPT. This allows you to increase the number of logical destinations devices that can be switched with a single route. Routing a logical source device to the virtual destination of another virtual XPT will route said source to all logical destination devices that the virtual source is routed to. Routing that virtual source to another virtual destination, will mean routing the original logical source device to all destination devices that the corresponding virtual source was routed to, as well.
Destination 2-1 Destination 2n
Destination 1-1 Destination 1n Virtual XPT 2
Virtual XPT 1
Source
Routing a logical source device to the virtual destination of another virtual XPT
• A virtual XPT can have up to 100 real logical destinations.
• The status of a virtual XPT is shown in the Path Manager. See
• Adding a logical destination device to a virtual XPT changes the status of the destination to the virtual source - with the logical source device content being routed to the logical destination device(s). Removing the logical destination device from a virtual XPT, will change the status of that destination to the logical source device.
258
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
C
D
A
B
E
F
Virtual XPT Use Scenario 1
In this scenario, the physical level is set up so that any source routed to destination Z will be taken to the following destinations: R, S, and T.
R
S
P
Q
T
U
C
D
A
B
E
F
R
S
P
Q
T
U
C
D
A
B
E
F
R
S
P
Q
T
U
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Virtual XPT Setup Operator “takes” A to Z Result: Operator still sees A as taken to Z
If the operator takes A to Z, the software “discovers” that source Z is virtually routed to R, S, and T. Therefore, it routes A to R, S, and T as real routes.
Here, a source was taken to multiple destinations with a single take, and that fact was concealed from the operator. The operator’s control panel reports that A was taken to Z.
The Path Manager can be used to know the actual path that was internally used by the router; see the
Path Manager Tasks , on page 438.
Other inputs can be taken to Z with a similar result: that source will be taken to destinations
R, S, and T.
Virtual XPT Use Scenario 2
In this scenario, the virtual XPT setup is the same as for scenario 2.
C
D
A
B
E
F
R
S
P
Q
T
U
C
D
A
B
E
F
R
S
P
Q
T
U
C
D
A
B
E
F
R
S
P
Q
T
U
Z
Y
X
Virtual XPT Setup
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Operator “takes” A to Z
Z
Y
X
Z
Y
X
Result: Operator still sees A as taken to Z
Z
Y
X
If the operator takes B to Z, the software “discovers” that source Z is virtually routed to R, S, and T. Therefore, it routes B to R, S, and T as real routes.
The operator’s control panel reports that A was taken to Z. The operator executed a single take.
259
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
This scenario illustrates that any time an operator takes a source to virtual XPT destination n , the router actually takes the source to the real destinations “connected” to virtual XPT source n .
To create Virtual XPTs
Virtual XPTs are created in the Logical Device Table task.
1 In the Topology Configurator, activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
2 Open the Logical Device Table task. See
Accessing the Logical Device Table task , on page 241.
3 Select the Virtual XPTs tab.
4 Click New
5 Enter a name for the new virtual XPT and click OK .
Optionally, a range of virtual XPTs can be created: The Name parameter is the prefix for the generated virtual XPTs. The Start Index is the index starting value, and the End
Index is the last index value for the virtual XPT range.
260
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
The new virtual XPT is added to the Multilevel Table under the Virtual XPTS tab.
A new logical source and a new logical destination are created automatically in the system with the name of the virtual XPT.
Virtual source and destination filters are available for you to filter on virtual XPTs when
configuring the panel, categories, and router control user interfaces. See Filtering Lists,
Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations , on page 266
6 Add the default destinations for the virtual XPT. Select the virtual XPT and then click
Destinations .
A list of all currently available destinations appears.
7 Select the default destinations the virtual XPT will use and click OK .
C
D
A
B
E
F
Mon3
Mon4
Mon5
Mon6
Mon7
Mon8
VXPT
Y
X
VXPT
Y
X
In this scenario, the physical level is set up so that any source routed to destination
VXPT will be taken to the following destinations: Mon5 , Mon6 , and Mon7 .
261
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Once you have created one or more Virtual XPTs, you can start using them in Router
Control.
To perform a take with a Virtual XPT
You must first create and activate the topology in the Topology Configurator. You perform
1 In the Topology Configurator, activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
VXPT .
3 Open Router Control. See
Accessing the Router Control Task , on page 458.
Virtual XPT Source Virtual XPT Destination
The Current Virtual XPT Destinations
The default virtual XPT destinations that were configured in the Logical Device Table
are shown by selecting the virtual XPT destination. See To create Virtual XPTs , on page 260.
4 To route Cam1 to Mon5, Mon6, and Mon7 using the virtual XPT VXPT , perform a take
Cam1 to destination VXPT .
Cam1
Cam2
Cam3
Cam4
Cam5
Cam6
Mon3
Mon4
Mon5
Mon6
Mon7
Mon8
VXPT
Y
X
VXPT
Y
X
262
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
First click the destination virtual XPT VXPT and then click Cam1 and finally click Take .
S: Current source
P: Pending source
D: Destination
The destination virtual XPT VXPT button shows the current source.
Virtual XPT Source
The Path Manager can be used to know the actual path that was internally used by the router; see the
Path Manager Tasks , on page 438.
To dynamically add a Virtual XPT destination
Destinations can dynamically be added to a virtual XPT. In this example, Mon8 , and Mon9 are added to the virtual XPT VXPT ’s destination.
1 In the Topology Configurator, activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
2 First click the source virtual XPT and then click Mon8 and finally click Take .
3 First click the source virtual XPT and then click Mon9 and finally click Take .
The current destinations for the selected virtual XPT are updated.
Click to revert to the default virtual XPT destinations configured in the Logical Device Table
263
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
See also
Performing a Take in Router Control , on page 459 for more information about
how to use the controls available in this window. The Path Manager can be used to know the actual path that was internally used by the router; see the
To dynamically remove a Virtual XPT destination
Destinations can dynamically be removed from a virtual XPT. In this example, Mon9 is removed from the virtual XPT VXPT ’s destinations. This is done by assigning the destination to be removed to another source.
1 In the Topology Configurator, activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
2 First click the destination Mon9 then click Cam9 and finally click Take .
Minimize and Expand Virtual XPT Destinations
In the Router Control Task, when a virtual XPT is routed to another virtual XPT, the second virtual source is nested in the first virtual XPT. See
Routing a logical source device to the virtual destination of another virtual XPT , on page 258.
As shown below, when Minimize Virtual XPT is selected, the VXPT2 virtual XPT is shown minimized.
264
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring Virtual Crosspoints (XPTs)
As shown below, when Expand Virtual XPT is selected, all destinations are shown, including the nested destinations of all other virtual XPTs.
These are the now-visible destinations of VXPT2
See also Performing a Take in Router Control , on page 459 for more information about how
to use the other controls available in this window.
265
Configuration Tasks
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations
Virtual source and destination filters are available for you to filter on virtual XPTs when configuring the panel and category configurator user interfaces. To show virtual XPT sources or destinations only, enable the Show virtual setting in the filters dialog only.
Click to open filter tool
Deselect these filters
Select this filter
The functions available in a filter adapt to the screen in which the filter is found. For example, the Stream Browser has filters to allow you to filter streams that come from either input or output ports.
Click to open filter tool
Filter text
266
Select this filter only
Filter Parameter
Reload filter []
Reset filter
Filter by Stream
Description
Reloads the previously-used filter.
Clears the text in the filter function.
Filter by the stream’s name.
Filter by Device Group Filter by the device group’s name.
Filter by Device Filter by the device’s name.
Filter by Port Filter by the port’s name.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations
Filter Parameter Description
Filter by Logical Level Filter by the Logical Level’s name.
Show SDI
Show IP
Show MADI
Show Inputs
Show results where the connection type is SDI.
Show results where the connection type is IP.
Show results where the connection type is MADI.
Show results where the connection direction is an input.
Show Outputs
Show automatic
Show custom
Show virtual
Show results where the connection direction is an output.
Show automatically-created sources and destinations.
Show user-created sources and destinations.
Show virtual XPTS.
267
Configuration Tasks
Category Configurator Tasks
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Category Configurator Tasks
Use the Category Configurator to make it easier to manage the sources in your topologies.
Creating groups of categories, based on type or use, is useful when you have multiple resources.
Categories are used to group sources and destinations together thereby allowing them to be accessed quickly on a panel, either by adding a category button or by using keyboard
Accessing the Category Configurator
To access the Category Configurator Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select a topology. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Configuration > Category Configurator .
268
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The Category Configurator task opens:
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Category Configurator
See the following Category Configurator procedures:
•
Creating Categories for the Sources and Destinations in Your Topology , on page 270
•
Assigning a Keystroke Label to a Source or Destination , on page 273
•
Creating a Keystroke Label , on page 274
Sources & Destinations Menu
The Sources & Destinations menu has the following menu options.
Icon
Select All
Select Alias
Description
Select / deselect all source or destination items.
Select the Alias you want to use to identify Source and Destination streams in GV Orbit Control’s interface.
Aliases are created in the Alias Editor. See Adding Aliases , on page 455.
269
Configuration Tasks
Creating Categories for the Sources and Destinations in Your Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Creating Categories for the Sources and Destinations in Your Topology
When you first open the Category Configurator, the Home tab appears in the Sources and
Destinations tab.
To create a category for your sources
1 Open the Category Configurator task for the required topology. See
Category Configurator , on page 268.
2 Click Add .
270
3 The Enter a name for the new category window appears:
4 Enter a name for the new category and click OK .
The new category is added to the top of the Category Configurator column.
5 Click Sources or Destinations to view the available sources / destinations.
All the sources / destinations in the selected topology are displayed. This includes the logical sources you created in the Logical Device Table task. See
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
6 Select the newly created category.
Configuration Tasks
Creating Categories for the Sources and Destinations in Your Topology
The category is added to the lower part of the center column under Category Content.
7 Drag the sources / destinations from the Sources & Destinations column to the
Category Content area.
OR
Alternatively, you can drag a source/destination to the created Category button.
When a Category contains only Sources or it contains only Destinations, the Category’s symbol will change accordingly to show the type of content. For example, this allows
271
Configuration Tasks
Re-ordering Category Content
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide you to have two Categories with the same name where one only has Sources and the other Category only has Destinations and you can still distinguish them.
Table 1: Meaning of Category Icons
Icon Description
The category:
• Is empty (contains no Sources or Destinations).
• Contains a mix of Sources and Destinations.
The category only contains Sources.
The category only contains Destinations.
8 Click Home to toggle between Sources (Green) or Destinations (Orange) as necessary.
Re-ordering Category Content
The sequence of category content (Sources and Destinations) can be re-ordered so that when a category is used on a panel, the Sources and Destinations will be shown in the order that you want it to be.
2 Re-order the Sources and Destinations in a Category: in the Category Content, drag the
Source and Destination tiles into the oder you want them to be.
272
4 Add the Category to a panel button. See Adding Resources to the Panel , on page 287.
5 For each panel button you have added a Category to, select the panel button individually and set the Sort Mode property to Manual it in the button’s Property
Editor. See
Setting the Properties for Panel Resources , on page 292.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Assigning a Keystroke Label to a Source or Destination
Assigning a Keystroke Label to a Source or Destination
A keystroke label can be added to sources and destinations once they have been added to a category. Assigning a keystroke label to a source or destination allows a user to bring up categories by using a keypad on a panel. For example, if you have 100 categories in your system, a panel can bring up category 37 by pressing 3 then 7 instead of browsing through dozens of panel pages. This also applies to selecting sources or destinations. For instance,
Cam17 can be directly accessed by pressing 1 then 7 on the panel instead of searching for the Cam17 button.
To add a keystroke label to a source or destination
1 Open the Category Configurator task for the required topology. See
Category Configurator , on page 268.
2 Click a Category to show sources and destinations that have been configured for that category, shown in Category Content .
3 From the Keystroke Label Editor drag one or more labels onto a source or destination to create a unique sequence for that source or destination.
The Keystroke Editor shows the current keystroke label for the selected source or destination.
Edit a Source or Destination Keystroke Sequence
The Keystroke Editor allows you to change the selected source or destination’s keystroke label. Setting for automatically assigning keystroke labels to a source or destination can also be set.
273
Configuration Tasks
Creating a Keystroke Label
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Set Auto Add to automatically assign a keystroke to a source or destination as it is added to a category. Click Options to configure this feature.
Proceed as follows to delete a keystroke.
1 Select a source or destination shown in Category Content .
2 Select a keystroke in the Keystroke Editor and click Delete.
Proceed as follows to delete all keystrokes.
1 Select a source or destination shown in Category Content .
2 Click Clear All in the Keystroke Editor .
Creating a Keystroke Label
You can assign custom keystrokes to a source or destination. Create a keystroke label to do so.
To creating a keystroke label
1 Open the Category Configurator task for the required topology. See
Category Configurator , on page 268.
2 In the Keystroke Label Editor, click New .
The Create a new keystroke label window opens.
3 Set the keystroke label as required and click OK .
274
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configurator Tasks
Panel Configurator Tasks
This allows you to add buttons and behaviors to a panel. Those buttons represent sources, destinations, levels, groups and various operations that can be saved under specific configurations and then pushed to a software or hardware panel.
For an example of how to setup and use a panel, see Panel Configuration Example Using
Categories with Custom Navigation , on page 302.
Accessing the Panel Configurator
To access the Panel Configurator Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select a topology. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Configuration > Panel Configurator .
The Panel Configurator task appears:
275
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Panel Configurator
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Page Editor Menu
The Page Editor menu has the following menu options.
Icon
Manage
Add Page
Previous Page
Next Page
Home Page
Delete Page
Cut
Copy
Paste
Copy Category
Properties
Refresh
Select All
Clear All
Clear
Description
Creates multiple templates for hardware or software panels for various panel models. Then, you can add the template to a panel that you have added to the topology. A pre-existing panel can be duplicated;
see Creating a New Panel , on page 277 or
Viewing another Panel , on page 280. Using Layouts, panel layouts can be nested when used with
the same panel model type. See Layouts
Adds a page to the panel’s layout. See
Adding Panel Pages , on page 283.
Returns to the panel’s previous page, when the panel configuration has two or more pages.
Goes forward to the panel’s next page, when the panel configuration has two or more pages.
Make the currently shown page the panel’s Home page. This is available when the panel’s configuration has two or more pages and you currently are not on the Home page. To add panel pages, see
Adding Panel Pages , on page 283. To set a page to be a panel’s home
page, see
Removes the currently-selected page from the panel’s configuration.
This is unavailable for the panel page currently designated as the
Home page.
Cuts the contents from the panel’s currently selected button(s).
Copies the contents from the panel’s currently selected button(s).
Pastes the clipboard contents to the panel’s currently selected button.
See
About the Copy / Cut / Paste Buttons , on page 277.
Copies the properties of another category to the panel’s currently selected category. First configure a category’s properties according to your needs, and then copy the properties to other categories using thislo feature as needed. See
Copying the Properties from one
Category to Another , on page 295.
Reloads the Panel’s contents.
Selects all the panel’s contents.
Deselects all the panel’s contents.
Removes all the selected panel’s contents.
276
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Creating a New Panel
About the Copy / Cut / Paste Buttons
Copy / cut / paste buttons can be used from one panel page to another and from one panel to another. Copy / cut / paste can be done using either the icons in the toolbar or through keyboard shortcuts: <ctrl>+X, <ctrl>+C, and <ctrl>+V.
You can multi-select using the <Shift> / <Ctrl> key:
• By holding the <Shift> key and selecting the first and the last button/cell on the panel, all buttons/cells in between are selected. If the first and the last selected buttons/cells are in different lines, the entirety of the lines will be selected between the two buttons/cells.
• By holding the <Ctrl> key, you can toggle the selection by clicking individual buttons/cells on the panel.
Creating a New Panel
You can create multiple templates for hardware or software panels of various models. Then, you can add the template to a panel that you have added to the topology. A pre-existing
panel can be duplicated; see Viewing another Panel , on page 280.
To create a new panel
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select a topology. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Configuration > Panel Configurator
. See Accessing the Panel Configurator , on page 275.
5 Click Manage .
277
Configuration Tasks
Creating a New Panel
A secondary window opens.
6 Click New .
The New window appears.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
7 Enter meaningful text in the Name , Summary , and Description fields to identify the panel.
8 Select the required model from the list.
9 Click Create .
The new panel is added to GV Orbit Control.
Panels can have more than one page. When the panel is shown with a red outline, this indicates that the Home Page is being shown.
A Red outline indicates that the Home Page is currently being shown
278
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Duplicating a Pre-Existing Panel
10 Configure the panel’s properties; see Configuring a Panel’s Properties , on page 281.
Duplicating a Pre-Existing Panel
A pre-existing panel can be copied to reuse that panel’s configuration properties and then you only need to modify the necessary panel properties as required for the new application. The new panel configuration will have a new name and any changes to that configuration will not affect the original panel configuration that you chose to base its configuration on.
To duplicate a Pre-Existing Panel
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select a topology. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Configuration > Panel Configurator
. See Accessing the Panel Configurator , on page 275.
5 Click Manage .
A secondary window opens.
6 Click on a pre-existing panel that you want to duplicate and then click Duplicate .
279
Configuration Tasks
Viewing another Panel
The New Name window appears.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
7 Enter a name to identify the panel.
8 Click Ok .
9 Configure the panel’s properties; see Configuring a Panel’s Properties , on page 281.
Viewing another Panel
When you have configured two or more panels, you can change between configuring them as follows.
To view a Pre-Existing Panel
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select a topology. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Configuration > Panel Configurator
. See Accessing the Panel Configurator , on page 275.
280
5 Click Manage .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
A secondary window opens.
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Panel’s Properties
6 Click on a pre-existing panel that you want to view.
The configuration for the selected panel appears.
Configuring a Panel’s Properties
Set the basic parameters to configure the panel.
To Configure a Panel’s Properties
1 Click 1 next to Zones [1] .
281
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Panel’s Properties
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The following properties can be configured for the panel. See also
Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Name
# Zones
Description
The name or identifier for this panel
Alias group
(Destinations)
Alias group (Sources)
Sets the number of zones available for the selected panel. The default is 1, however you can add more as needed.
Buttons can be assigned to any zone. Each zone can then act as an separate panel. For example, you can have two zones on a panel, and each zone has its own sources, destinations, and take button.
Selection and take in one zone will not affect the other zone. Zones can be assigned to the button in the Property Editor when the button is selected in the Resources for Topology .
Shows the currently selected destination / source alias to use on the panel button’s / interface to use in place of the short labels. See
Source and Destination Aliases with a Panel , on page 291.
Comment An optional comment about this panel.
Default Destination Shows the currently selected default destination for this panel. See
Creating a Single-Destination Work Flow Panel , on page 297.
Description An optional description for this panel.
Display 24 characters When deselected, panel button labels are limited to a maximum length of 8 characters.
When selected, panel button labels are limited to a maximum length of 24 characters. This option is useful when using source / destination aliases that usually are longer than 8 characters. This will disable the destination status on the destination buttons. The display will only show the system names. The level buttons will only show the system names. To create source / destination aliases, see
Alias Editor Tasks , on page 454. See also
Using Source and Destination Aliases with a Panel , on page 291.
Multi-select
Panel Model
When deselected, the panel will allow multiple selection of destination buttons. This enables an operator to take a single source to multiple destinations at once.
When selected, only one destination can be selected at a time.
The current panel’s model number that was added in
Select Persist When deselected, the source and destination selections are cleared when a take is complete.
When selected, the source and destination selections are maintained when a take is complete.
This is parameter is selected by default. This parameter is not zonespecific.
See also
Setting the Properties for Panel Resources , on page 292.
282
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Panel Pages
Adding Panel Pages
A panel can have one or more pages. Each page can be tailored to a function or purpose.
Navigation buttons can be added to the page so the panel user can go page to page. There
is more than one way for a panel user to navigate to another page; for example, see Panel
Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation , on page 302.
To add a panel page
1 View a panel. See Viewing another Panel , on page 280.
2 Configure the panel. See
Configuring a Panel’s Properties , on page 281.
3 In Tool , navigate to Home > Pages and click Add Page .
OR
A new page is added to the Pages list in the Tool pane.
4 To make a panel page the Home page, select the page in Tools and click Home .
A Red outline indicates that the Home Page is currently being shown
283
Configuration Tasks
Adding Actions to a Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
In the Tool list of panel pages, the Home icon is shown for current Home page. A red outline around the panel image indicates when the Home page is currently being shown.
Tool Page Icon Description
The panel page is currently not a home page.
The panel page is currently a home page.
Adding Actions to a Panel
A panel can support a number of actions that must be added to it before the action becomes available to the panel user. For example, add a Take button to a panel as follows.
1 Open the Panel Configurator task for the required topology. See
Creating a New Panel , on page 277.
2 Select the required Panel.
3 Drag the Take tool from the Tools column onto a panel button.
4 If the panel has a display, drag the Page Up and Page Down tools from the Tools column onto panel buttons (some panels have two dedicated buttons set apart for this purpose next to the display).
284
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Actions to a Panel
See the panel’s documentation for more specific details about the behavior of panel buttons. The following table provides summary information.
Built-in Panel
Actions
Back
Description
Allows the panel user to go back to a previously visited page.
The Back button stacks all visited pages or layout pages and will be highlighted until the panel user reaches the first page visited where the button becomes low tally. The stack of visited pages:
• Is persisted against restart, reboot and failover actions.
• Is cleared when a panel user clicks a Load home Page button on the panel.
Blank
Cancel
Some buttons can span multiple pages. This is used to force a button to appear on a higher-level page only.
Cancels a Keystroke. Removes all keystrokes in the selection.
Category This either (1) displays a category’s device list or (2) displays a “suffix page.” A category button is associated with either a source category or destination category. The button text is normally the category name and is short as space is limited.
Clears the Keystroke. Removes the last key stroke.
Clear
Default Destination Provide the tally for the default destination when the Show Tally parameter is set in the button’s property.
Set a destination to which all takes made on a panel will be made. See
Creating a Single-Destination Work Flow Panel , on page 297.
Destination Select a destination.
Destination Item This is used to do an indexed take. Use Multiple destination items to preset a multiple take. Each destination item will have a different index.
Destination Status Provide the tally for the selected destination. See also
Destination Work Flow Panel , on page 297.
Indexed Take Make a take on the Destination item.
Keystroke
Level
Create a Keypad to select Source or Destination by their numbers.
• Used to display the level of the destinations.
• Used to display the preset of a selected level.
• Used for audio Break away and audio shuffling.
Level Map
List Item
This cross-connects levels. The function is typically used to shuffle audio channels, for example, to connect AES1/2 to AES3/4.
Used in conjunction with the Category list button to create an area where the source or destination will be displayed in a list.
Load Home Page Takes the panel user to the Home page. To set a page to be a panel’s home page, see
Load Layout This is shown when a layout is dropped on a panel button. See
Adding Resources to the Panel , on page 287.
Layouts in
285
Configuration Tasks
Adding Actions to a Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Built-in Panel
Actions
Load Page
Lock
Multi-Select
Next
Next Page
Page Down
Page Up
Panel Lock
Previous
Previous Page
Protect
Description
Loads any panel page. To add a panel page, see
Adding Panel Pages , on page 283
This prevents changes to the panel settings, especially router crosspoints.
When the panel is locked, the button array becomes blank except for the
Panel Lock button which becomes high-tally red. The button is a toggle: press the ‘Lock’ button to lock the panel. Press it again to unlock the panel.The button text is either “Lock” or “Unlock.”
See also
About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460 for more
information about the use and limitations of this feature.
Allows the selection of multiple destinations.
Continue forward to browse down a category list (this does not change the page). Normally you would not use this button directly but let the category list place it automatically, unless you need to map to a special button on a panel.
When there are two or more pages that have been configured in the panel’s layout, this cycles forward to the next panel page when available.
When the panel user is at the last page, the button becomes low tally and the panel user can go no further.
This scrolls the alphanumeric display down.
This scrolls the alphanumeric display up.
This locks the panel. When set, the panel button turns red and all other panel buttons are unavailable. Press the button again to release the lock.
Browse backwards to move up a category list (this does not change the page). Normally you would not use this button directly but let the category list place it automatically, unless you need to map to a special button on a panel.
When there are two or more pages that have been configured in the panel’s layout, this cycles backwards to the previous panel page. When the panel user is at the first page, the button becomes low tally and the panel user can go no further.
This is a toggle that sets or clears a protect on the current destination device. The protect can be removed at the panel that originally set the protect, at any panel that has the same user ID, or by a forced release at any panel.
• Note: a protect prevents others from routing to a destination; a lock prevents anyone—even the panel user who issued the lock—from routing to the destination.
• You may lock a protected destination, but you cannot change a locked destination to a protected destination directly.
You must first unlock it. The ‘Destination Protect’ button text is normally
Dest Protect and when a selected MD destination is protected, the button legend becomes Dest Unprotect .
See also
About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460 for more
information about the use and limitations of this feature.
286
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
Built-in Panel
Actions
Reset Panel
Salvo
Select
Select Persist
Source
Quick Source
Take
Description
Reset the panel to its initial state and go to the home page.
This executes a system salvo. A salvo is a pre-defined set of commands.
The button text is the salvo’s mnemonic. Pressing the salvo button puts the panel in “salvo” mode. To confirm that you want to execute the salvo, press a ‘Take’ button. When you press the take button, the salvo begins executing immediately. Salvos are typically short in duration. If you want to cancel the salvo before it executes, press the salvo button again. If you press an ‘Information’ button while the panel is in salvo mode, the panel presents the salvo commands on the display. You may scroll the display to view the entire salvo.
See
Creating Salvos , on page 462.
After selecting Source or Destination from a Keypad, the panel user presses Select. This confirms the choice.
The destination stays selected after a Take.
This selects a source. Note that the quick source button selects a source and also performs an immediate take. Quick Source and Source buttons are similar, except that the Quick Source performs a take. Be aware of which buttons are quick sources so you do not perform an accidental take.
In X-Y mode, a take button routes the preset source device(s) on selected levels to the selected destination device. In MD mode, a take button routes the preset source device(s) to the selected destination device(s) on all levels.
Adding Resources to the Panel
The Resources for Topology menu has the following menu options.
Icon
Quick Source
Default
Destination
Select All
Description
This is shown only when Sources is selected. When enabled, the sources that are dragged onto the panel are quick sources, meaning the operator does not need to press the take button to do the take.
The take is done as soon as the source is selected on the panel.
This is shown only when Destinations is selected. This makes the selected destination the default destination for the panel. When set:
• The panel’s properties shows the currently selected destination, found under Default Destination .
• The icon on the destination changes to thus indicating its default destination status.
To remove the Default Destination, select the destination set as the
Default Destination and click .
See
Configuring a Panel’s Properties , on page 281.
See
Creating a Single-Destination Work Flow Panel , on page 297.
Selects all the available resources.
287
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
Icon
Clear All
Select Alias
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Description
Deselects all the available resources.
Select the Alias you want to use to identify Source and Destination streams in GV Orbit Control’s interface.
Aliases are created in the Alias Editor. See Adding Aliases , on page 455.
In the Tool list of panel pages, the Home icon is shown for current Home page. A red outline around the panel image indicates when the Home page is currently being
288
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel shown. From the Resources for Topology, the following resources can be dropped onto panel buttons.
Tool Page Icon Description
The currently configured sources. Sources are the available outputs for
Sources may be identified by an icon that represents the source type when it was automatically created as a virtual device. See
Automatic Sources or Destinations , on page 246 for more information.
The currently configured destinations. Destinations are the available
inputs for all the devices on your topology. See Adding and
Configuring a Destination , on page 254.
Destinations may be identified by an icon that represents the destination type when it was automatically created as a virtual device.
See
About Automatic Sources or Destinations , on page 246 for more
information.
When a destination has been set to be the default destination for a panel, it is designated by the Default Destination icon . See
Creating a Single-Destination Work Flow Panel , on page 297.
Logical levels allow for the creation of shuffling and breakaways.
For more information about logical levels, see Logical Level Editor
Shows the available categories. See:
• Table Category Configurator Tasks on page 268.
•
Table 1 Meaning of Category Icons on page 272 .
•
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom
A keystroke label can be added to sources and destinations once
they have been added to a category. See Assigning a Keystroke
Label to a Source or Destination , on page 273.
Click a zone to see which panel buttons are assigned to that specific zone. The number of zones is set in the # Zones parameter in the panel
properties. See Configuring a Panel’s Properties , on page 281.
Some panel buttons support the display of more than one color. For buttons that support colors, the button’s color is used to show the current operating state. The color used for a button to represent any
one of the given states can be changed. See Changing a Button’s Color used to Represent a State
, on page 295 and Changing a Button’s
Default Color used to Represent a State , on page 297.
289
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Tool Page Icon Description
When a salvo is triggered, it executes a list of pre-configured actions. See
.
Allows a panel to be used as a template to then be used in another panel. Making changes to the template panel will be seen everywhere the template is used. When:
1 You have created two or more panels with the same model type (for example, you have added three NV6954 panels in the
Panel Configurator),
2 And you are viewing a panel with the same model type (for example, one of the three NV6954 panels in the Panel
Configurator).
Then:
• These model types become available in this list (excluding the
current panel). To create a panel, see Creating a New Panel , on page 277.
• A panel from the Layouts can be drag and dropped onto the current panel layout to be reused. This creates a Load Layout button on the panel.
Select the Load Layout button to configure its properties in the
Property Editor
. See Setting the Properties for Panel Resources , on page 292.
To add panel resources
1 Open the Panel Configurator task for the required topology. See
Creating a New Panel , on page 277.
2 Select the required Panel. See
Viewing another Panel , on page 280.
290
The resources that can be added to the panel are displayed in the lower section of the center column under Resources for Topology .
3 Click on resource type to begin adding individual resources to the panel such as
Sources , Destinations , or Levels .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
For example, click Sources to add cameras and other types of sources.
All the sources available in the topology are listed. This includes the logical sources you
created in the Logical Device Table task. See Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241.
4 Select a resource and drag it to one of the panel buttons at the top of the column. More than one resource can be added at a time; to add to a selection, use Shift or Ctrl to select a range of resources or to add another resource to the selection.
5 For each panel button you have added a resource to, select it individually and set the properties for it in the Property Editor. For a Category, see
Panel Resources , on page 292.
6 Add resources from Destinations , Levels , and Keystrokes to the panel as required.
Note:
Only use the video+ancillary (V-ANC) logical level button unless you are routing in
SMPTE ST 2110 mode. For SMPTE ST 2110 mode, you can individually use the Video or the Ancillary logical level buttons.
To directly control a GV Node’s internal matrix, you must use the video + ancillary logical level button for video breakaway.
Using Source and Destination Aliases with a Panel
Aliases can be used for a panel to change the name of sources and destinations from short labels to the labels of the corresponding alias. First you must create one or more source and destination aliases; to create an alias, see
Alias Editor Tasks , on page 454.
291
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
1 Under Resources for Topology , click Sources or Destinations .
2 Select from the Select Alias drop-down list the alias to use for this panel instance.
3 If the aliases are longer than 8 characters, consider setting the Display 24 characters option for the panel in the Panel’s Property Editor
. See Creating a New Panel , on page 277.
Setting the Properties for Panel Resources
When a resource has been added to a panel’s button, you can select the button to then configure the properties for it.
292
Parameter
Category
Category filter
Display Mode
Description
Selects the category instance for the selected button.
Typically this should be the category that was dragged onto the panel in Resources for Topology. It can be changed here for another category.
A category can contain sources and/or destinations. Select the ones you want to be displayed.
Both : display sources and destinations.
Destinations : display destinations only.
Sources : display sources only.
Keystroke : if the category item has keystrokes assigned to it, you can select this option.
List : if not select List; this will list all sources/destinations in the category.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
Parameter
Exit Mode (for Load
Layout, when a panel is used as a template)
Exit Mode (for category item selection)
Description
Select how the panel user will be returned from a panel layout once they have made a category item selection or Take. The category item selection is displayed once the panel user has pressed the category selection button.
Never : The panel user will remain in the same page where the category item selection is made. Other navigation buttons must be added to the page so that the panel user can navigate from the page
(such as the Back button and / or the Previous Page and Next Page buttons).
Preset : Once the panel user has made a selection in the category items, the panel user is immediately returned to the previous page
(where the category selection button is located).
Take : When the category items page has a Take button, the panel user is returned to the previous page (where the category selection button is located) once they select a category and then click Take.
See
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom
Navigation , on page 302 for an example of how to use this parameter.
Select how the panel user will be returned once they have made a category item selection or Take. The category item selection is displayed once the panel user has pressed the category selection button.
Never : The panel user will remain in the same page where the category item selection is made. Other navigation buttons must be added to the page so that the panel user can navigate from the page
(such as the Back button). With this option, the Exit Page parameter below is not applicable.
Preset : Once the panel user has made a selection in the category items, the panel user is immediately returned to the previous page
(where the category selection button is located). This is the default.
With this option, the Exit Page parameter can send the panel user to any other page (see below).
Take : When the category items page has a Take button, the panel user is returned to the previous page (where the category selection button is located) once they select a category and then click Take. With this option, the Exit Page parameter can send the panel user to any other page (see below).
See
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom
Navigation , on page 302 for an example of how to use this parameter.
293
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
Exit Page (for category item selection)
Layout
Name
Page
Sort Mode
Next
Previous
Keystroke
Zone
Description
In conjunction with the Exit Mode parameter, this parameter changes the Preset and Take return navigation to any other panel page. This can be used to save the panel user from making extra panel presses to navigate back to the Home page, for example.
In order to use this feature the Exit Mode must be set to Preset or
Take . See above.
When the value for this parameter is blank (empty), the Exit Page parameter has no effect. This is the default.
When the value for this parameter is a panel’s page, the panel behavior is to take the panel user to the selected panel page once they have pressed the category item selection or Take button. See
Set the panel to be associated to the Load Page button.
Set the name that will appear in the category button instead of the category name.
Sets the page to display when the category button is pressed. It should typically contain either List Item buttons or Keystroke buttons.
If the list display mode is selected, this will:
A-Z: show the sources/destinations in alphabetical order.
Manual: show the sources/destinations in the order you have set for the Category. see
Re-ordering Category Content , on page 272.
Z-A: show the sources/destinations in reverse alphabetical order.
These options are present for the List Item buttons. If the list of sources/destinations in the category is greater than the number of list item buttons added to the page, some buttons will be used as next or previous buttons. This is determined automatically by GV Orbit
Control, but you can override the default by specifying that a button can be used as a next or previous button if need be.
This parameter is available with the Keystroke button. It specifies the keystroke associated with the button.
Select the zone for the category button.
Buttons can be assigned to any zone. Each zone can then act as an separate panel. For example, you can have two zones on a panel, and each zone has its own sources, destinations, and take button.
Selection and take in one zone will not affect the other zone. Zones can be assigned to the button in the Property Editor when the button is selected in the Resources for Topology .
294
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
Copying the Properties from one Category to Another
Copies the properties of the panel’s currently selected category to one or more other categories used on the panel. The scope (the type of parameters) of the copy can be controlled.
To copy the Properties from one Category to Another
1 Add two or more categories to the panel. See Adding Resources to the Panel , on page 287.
2 Configure the properties of one of the categories according to your needs. See
Setting the Properties for Panel Resources , on page 292.
3 Select the category from which you want to copy the properties from.
4 Click Copy Category Properties to copy the properties of the selected category to other categories.
Icon
Select All
Description
Selects all the available categories.
Clear All Deselects all the available categories.
Property to copy Select from the dropdown list the property parameter field you want to copy.
• All Properties: Copy all the following properties to the selected categories: Display Mode , Exit Mode , Page , Category Filter , Zone , and Sort Mode .
• Display Mode , Exit Mode , Page , Category Filter , Zone , and Sort
Mode : This allows you to copy only a specific property parameter while leaving the remaining property parameters for the categories untouched.
For more information about these category property parameters, see
Setting the Properties for Panel Resources , on page 292.
5 Select one or more categories to which you want to copy the properties to. Click OK .
Changing a Button’s Color used to Represent a State
Some panel buttons support the display of more than one color. For buttons that support colors, the button’s color is used to show the current operating state. The color used for a button to represent any one of the given states can be changed as follows.
295
Configuration Tasks
Adding Resources to the Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
1 Click a button that has a behavior previously associated to it (a blank button will not work). See
Adding Actions to a Panel , on page 284 and
Adding Resources to the Panel , on page 287.
2 Click on the Colors resource type.
296
All available state colors for the selected button are shown on the lower half.
3 Drag a color from the color pallet (shown on the upper half) onto any one the state colors on the lower half.
A Def bar appears on the state color which indicates the default color. Double-click the state color to revert to this default color.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Creating a Single-Destination Work Flow Panel
Changing a Button’s Default Color used to Represent a State
The default color used by all buttons for a behavior state can be changed when an across the system change is necessary.
1 Click the Custom Color Settings icon .
2 Click a behavior that you want to configure, for example, Destination .
3 Drag a color from the color pallet (shown on the upper half) onto any one the state colors on the lower half.
Certain panel buttons support fewer colors. The 7, 3, and 2 Color Buttons columns will show how your color choice will be implemented for these reduced color-range buttons.
Creating a Single-Destination Work Flow Panel
A panel can be configured as an input selector: the panel shows a range of sources, from which the panel operator can choose from, and the selected source will always be routed to a single specific, pre-defined static destination for monitoring. Note that in this example, there are no destination buttons defined on the panel.
To create a single-destination work flow panel
This example shows how to create a single-destination work flow panel.
1 Create a new panel. See
Creating a New Panel , on page 277.
2 Add the sources and a Lock and Take buttons to the panel. See Adding Resources to the
Adding Actions to a Panel , on page 284.
297
Configuration Tasks
Creating a Single-Destination Work Flow Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Select the destination to which all sources will be routed for this panel: In Resources for
Topology , Destinations , select a destination to which any selected source will be sent.
4 Set this destination as the default destination: click Default Destination . The icon on the destination changes to .
In the panel properties, the Default Destination parameter shows the selected destination as its value.
5 On the Home page, add a Destination Status from the Built-In Tool to a panel button.
This panel button provides the tally of the default destination to the panel operator.
See
Adding Actions to a Panel , on page 284.
The panel operator can now select a source that will be routed to the Router-Out 1 In 1 destination. The Destination Status button updates with the current tally for the destination.
298
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding the New Panel to the Topology
Adding the New Panel to the Topology
After you have configured one or more templates for your software or hardware panels, you can add a panel to your topology.
To add a panel to the topology
1 Add the Panel to the Topology: from the Device Library , Virtual Device , find the Panel bubble. See
To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
2 Select the bubble for the panel device to configure the panel’s Device Group Properties in the Property Editor
. See also Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Name
Description
The name or identifier for this panel instance.
# Devices The number of panel instances in this device group.
Network Host Name When one or more panels are managed by DCNM through the media network, set a unique network identifier for these panels so as to be able to push policies to them.
An optional description for this panel’s control port.
Advanced >
Description
Advanced > Logical
Level
Advanced > Default
Connector Type
The logical level for this panel. See page 190.
The panel’s connector type.
Logical Level Editor Tasks , on
3 Select Device Properties and click New next to Control Port at the top of the
Property Editor and select NV96XX Panel Control from the list.
299
Configuration Tasks
Adding the New Panel to the Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The Panel Control Port
tab appears. See also Description of Common Device
Parameter
Name
Description
Logical Level
Panel Layout
Panel Model
Panel User
Reset Device
Required a
Description
The name or identifier for this panel instance.
An optional description for this panel instance.
The logical level for this panel. See
Select the name of the panel you used when you created
the panel (see Creating a New Panel , on page 277) from
the drop-down list.
When you have selected the Panel Layout parameter, this is the panel’s model number that was selected when you created the panel. It is read-only.
Select the panel’s user name from the drop-down list. For further information, see
Administration Tasks , on page 465.
A panel Admin or Operator user has the ability to release locks made by another user. Whereas non-Admin or non-
Operator users can only release locks they made themselves.
Destinations Lock/Protect is performed through the panel and if a destination is currently locked by another user, any take to this same destination will fail.
If a specific router port is locked/protected but not linked to any destination within the Control System, the
Lock/Protect status won't be exposed in the Control
System and in fact is not releasable.
See also About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460 for
more information.
When the topology is inactive (see
Topology Inactive , on page 236), click to reset the device.
a.This parameter must be configured in order for the panel to become functional.
4 Select Panel Control Port tab to make the following properties visible. See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Panel Control Port >
Name
Panel Control Port >
Description
Required a Description
The panel’s control port name.
An optional description for this panel’s control port.
300
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Adding the New Panel to the Topology
Parameter
Panel Control Port >
Connection State 1 / 2
Panel Control Port >
PanelID
Required a
Description
Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the panel with the primary server of a server group.
Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the panel with the secondary server of a server group. See
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
unknown:
the topology is inactive (see Activating a
Topology , on page 235) or the panel does not have
network connectivity to the GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: the panel does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit Server(s).
online: the panel is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
Each control panel must have been configured with a unique Panel ID number.
Enter the Panel ID that corresponds with the physical panel that is to be used with this panel instance.
a.This parameter must be configured in order for the panel to become functional.
5 In the hardware or software panel, ensure you have configured the Panel ID number and the Controller 1 IP address. For a software panel, set Connect .
When the panel is online, you can control GV Orbit Control from the panel.
You can view the health of the panel in the System Status task. See
System Status Task , on page 445.
The green bar indicates the health of the panel is good.
301
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
6 Click the Panel ID at the top of Panel Communication Status column to view data on the panel. This appears at the bottom of the interface.
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
This panel configuration example shows how to:
• Set panel navigation when using categories.
• Generally configure a panel.
For this example, the following panel page structure is used. The goal of this example is to teach you how to configure the panel so that the panel user has a work flow with the least number of panel navigation button presses (that is, the need to use exit , return , or home button presses has been minimized).
Home
Category
(test signal selection)
Dest Items
Take
Source Items (test signals)
Panel Page Structure and Panel User Navigation Steps for this Example
302
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
The following steps outline panel navigation button presses used for this example. See the circled numbers in the above diagram.
Step
1
2
3
4
5
6
Panel User Button
Press
Category
Dest Items
Description
On the panel’s Home page is:
• Is a range of sources and destinations, plus a Take button for normal routing activities.
• A Category button (test signal selection) that allows the panel user to route a test signal to a destination using categories.
On the panel’s Category page (test signal selection) are Dest
Items and Source Signals buttons (test signals).
The panel user presses Dest Items .
Select a destination A selection of five destination category items are shown in the
Dest Items page. The panel user presses a button to select a destination to which a test signal will be sent.
The panel user is returned to the panel’s Category page.
Source Items
Select a source and then Take
On the panel’s Category page (test signal selection) are Dest
Items and Source Signals buttons (test signals).
The panel user presses Source Items .
A selection of five source category items (test signals) are shown in the Source Items page. The panel user presses a button to select a source (test signal)and then presses TAKE .
– Once the Take is made in the Source Items page, the panel’s configuration navigates the panel user to the Home page where the panel user is ready to continue with other operations.
About panel user navigation in this example
Note that no up , home , or return navigation buttons are used in this example. In practice, a panel’s configuration should include navigation buttons as an answer to when a panel user changes their mind and no longer wants to commit to an action. In this example, a panel user must complete the action once started; there is no escape function to exit the above procedure part way through. This is solved by adding a Load Page action to a panel button and configuring the action to take the panel user to the Home Page for example. See
Adding Actions to a Panel , on page 284.
To configure this example
Proceed as follows.
1 Create the following topology that is used for this example.
303
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Add to the Topology Configurator the following device groups: 5 Test Signal
Generators, 5 cameras, 5 monitors. Then add a router with 10 inputs and 5 outputs to the Topology Configurator. See
Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204 and
To name a device and set the number of devices in the group , on page 205.
2 Click Quick Connect to link the devices together. See
Using Quick Connect to Link all
Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
3 In the Category Configurator, Create the categories you will use with the panel. See
Creating Categories for the Sources and Destinations in Your Topology , on page 270.
For this example, five test signal sources have been added to the Source Category
(shown) and five destinations have been added to the Destination Category (not shown).
304
4 Create a panel if you have not already done so. See Creating a New Panel , on page 277.
5 Configure the panel’s properties. See
Configuring a Panel’s Properties , on page 281.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
6 Add the following pages to the panel: Category , Source Items , and Dest Items . See
Adding Panel Pages , on page 283.
These are the pages between which the panel user will navigate according to the configuration parameters you set in the Panel’s configuration, shown in later steps in this procedure.
305
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
7 On the Home page, add a Load Page from the Built-In Tool to a panel button. See
Adding Actions to a Panel , on page 284.
8 On the Home page, select the Load Page panel button and set the Page property parameter to Category . With this setting, when the panel user presses this button, they will be shown the Category page.
306
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
9 On the Category page, add the Destination
Category to a panel button. See Adding
Resources to the Panel , on page 287.
10 On the Category page, add the Source Category to a panel button. See
Resources to the Panel , on page 287.
307
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
11 On the Category page, select the Destination Category panel button and set the Exit
Mode , Exit Page , and Page property parameters.
The following configuration parameter explanation should be interpreted within the context of this example procedure.
Parameter Description
Category This should show Destination for this step.
Exit Mode
Exit Page
Select how the panel user will be returned once they have made a category item selection or Take.
In this example, set this to Preset . With this option, the panel behavior is to take the panel user to the Category page immediately once they have pressed a destination category in the Dest Items page.
In this example, this is set to [blank]. The Exit Page feature is unused.
Page For the Destination category, set to Dest Items .
With this setting, when the panel user presses this panel button on the
Category page, they will be shown the Dest Items page where the panel user is able to select a destination item.
See also
Adding Resources to the Panel , on page 287 and
Panel Resources , on page 292 for more information about the remaining properties.
308
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
12 On the Category page, select the Source Category panel button and set the Exit Mode ,
Exit Page , and Page property parameters.
The following configuration parameter explanation should be interpreted within the context of this example procedure.
Parameter Description
Category This should show Source for this step.
Exit Mode
Exit Page
Select how the panel user will be returned once they have made a category item selection or Take.
In this example, set this to Take . With this option, the panel user has to select a source category and then press the Take button.
In conjunction with the Exit Mode parameter, this parameter changes the Take return navigation to any other panel page.
In this example, set this to Home ; the panel behavior is to take the panel user to the Home page immediately once they have pressed the category item selection and then the Take button in the Source Items page.
Page For the Source category, set to Source Items .
With this setting, when the panel user presses this panel button on the
Category page, they will be shown the Source Items page where the panel user is then able to select a source item and then clicks Take.
309
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
13 On the Dest Items page, add five List Item from Built-In to five panel buttons. This corresponds to one List Item for each of the five sources.
Note: You can use copy and paste a block of List Item on the panel to quickly create a large number of sources or destinations.
14 On the Source Items page, add five List Item from Built-In to five panel buttons. This corresponds to one List Item
for each of the five sources. See Adding Resources to the
310
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
15 On the Source Items page, add a Take button.
Configuration Tasks
Panel Configuration Example Using Categories with Custom Navigation
16 Add a panel device to the topology and configure the panel and its control port properties. See
Adding the New Panel to the Topology , on page 299.
Note: The panel device bubble on the Topology Configurator does not need to be linked to any other bubble.
17 In the Topology Configurator, activate the topology. See
Activating a Topology , on page 235.
18 Test the panel’s behavior. Change the Exit Page and Exit Mode property parameters for the Source and Destination buttons on the Category page to see how the navigation behavior changes.
19 Add load page buttons that will allow the panel user to return to the Home page, to each of the following pages: Category , Source Items , and Dest Items
, on page 287 and Setting the Properties for Panel Resources , on page 292 for more information.
This step is necessary because when the changing the Exit Page and Exit Mode property parameters for the Source and Destination buttons on the Category page, the panel user might wind up in a page without a way to exit out of it. Once testing is complete, and navigation is perfected, these buttons can be removed.
311
Configuration Tasks
GPIO Configurator Tasks
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
GPIO Configurator Tasks
Tally devices you connect to the panel’s inputs can trigger events in the router control system such as a salvo or it can route a source to a destination.
In reaction to pressing a panel button, to a GPI input, or to a XPT status, the router control system can trigger events through the panel’s relay outputs to switch your tally devices.
SUPPORTED PANELS: the following panels that support GPIO; NV9605, NV9606, NV9607,
NV9609, NV9646, NV9649 (configured as a NV9609 panel model), NV9640, and NV9642.
Soft panels are available with GPIO controls that allow you to test and debug your GPIO configuration before putting a panel into production.
PREREQUISITES: The following must have been configured:
• a Topology (
Topology Configurator Tasks , on page 199) including:
• Panel Configuration: see Panel Configurator Tasks , on page 275
• Sources and destinations: see
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
• a router: see
Configuring Router Devices , on page 410
Accessing the GPIO Configurator
To access the GPIO Configurator Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select a topology. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Create and configure a Panel. See
Creating a New Panel , on page 277,
Panel’s Properties , on page 281,
Resources to the Panel , on page 287.
5 If a salvo is to be triggered by a GPI, create one or more salvos. See
Creating Salvos , on page 462.
6 If aliases are to be used, create them. See
7 Add a panel to the topology. See
Adding the New Panel to the Topology , on page 299.
312
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
8 Select Configuration > GPIO Configurator .
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the GPIO Configurator
The GPIO Configurator task appears:
GPIO Rules
Errors log and Script Help
GPI Rules and GPO Rule Editor
The GPIO Configurator has the following main sections shown above:
• GPIO Rules
• GPI Rules and GPO Rule Editor
• Errors log and Script Help
GPIO Rules Menu
The GPIO rules menu has the following menu options.
Icon
New
Duplicate
Description
Create a new rule in the rules list. See
Adding a GPIO Rule , on page 314.
Make a copy of the currently-selected rule. See
Duplicating a Rule , on page 320.
313
Configuration Tasks
Adding a GPIO Rule
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Icon
Delete
Alias
Description
Remove the currently-selected rule. See
Deleting a Rule , on page 321.
Select the Alias to use for all rules. See
Choosing an Alias for all Rules , on page 321.
GPI / GPO Rule Editor Menu
The GPIO rule editor has the following menu options.
Icon
Delete
Select GPI
Select GPO
Validate
Description
Remove the configuration for this rule.
Select the GPI input to be configured. See
Configuring a GPI to Trigger an Event , on page 315.
Select the GPO output to be configured. See Configuring a Script to
Verifies if the rule is valid
Adding a GPIO Rule
Create one or more rules to control your tallies. Rules can be enabled and disabled as needed.
Note:
It is possible to create two or more rules can that act upon the same GPO, thereby creating a conflict. No error or warning will be flagged in this case. When two or more rules conflict, you must deactivate rule(s) such that only one rule controls a
GPO at a time. See
Activating / Deactivating a Rule , on page 320.
To add a rule
1 Click New .
2 Enter meaningful text in the Name and Description fields to identify the rule.
3 For the new row, click the cell for the Panel ID column.
314
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GPI to Trigger an Event
The Panel Selector window appears showing the panels that have been previously
configured. See Panel Configurator Tasks , on page 275.
4 Select the panel which has GPIO connections made to it that you want to configure.
5 Click OK .
The Panel Id is shown for the GPIO rule and the Status is green.
Configuring a GPI to Trigger an Event
Tally inputs (called GPIs) can be configured to trigger an event when the input transitions from OFF to ON and to trigger another event on a transition from ON to OFF. Events include:
• Execute a salvo. The salvo must have been previously created. See
Creating Salvos , on page 462.
• Route a source to a destination. The source and destination must have been previously created. See
Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241.
Input Transition from
ON to OFF
Input Transition from
OFF to ON
GPI Contact
Closed (ON)
GPI Contact
Open (OFF)
GPI Contact
Closed (ON)
Time
315
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GPI to Trigger an Event
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Separate actions are triggered depending on whether the transition is from ON to OFF or the transition is OFF to ON as shown above.
To configure a GPI state transition to route a source to a destination or trigger a salvo
1 Add a Rule if necessary. See
To add a rule , on page 314. Select the rule you want to
configure. Ensure the rule is de-activated.
2 Click the GPI tab.
3 Select the panel’s GPI input to be used as a trigger.
4 Select the action to execute when this input transitions from ON to OFF:
• Execute a salvo: select the salvo to be executed from the list.
• Route a source to a destination: select a source and a destination from the lists.
5 Select the action to execute when this input transitions from OFF to ON:
• Execute a salvo: select the salvo to be executed from the list.
• Route a source to a destination: select a source and a destination from the lists.
6 Repeat for the remaining GPI inputs to be used as a trigger for an action.
7 Click Validate to check the syntax and semantics with respect to the current configuration and it then saves the script.
8 Activate the rule. See
To activate a rule , on page 320.
316
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Script to Trigger a GPO
Configuring a Script to Trigger a GPO
Relay outputs can be configured to activate on a number of Boolean true or false conditions that form a script:
• One or more routes occurring on specific levels.
• Conditions involving output ports (destination, level).
• A transition on one or more of the panel’s tally inputs.
Term
Operator
Term Term
Operator
In this dialog, you create a Boolean script involving sources, destinations, port status, and
GPI (input) status. When the conditions of the entire Boolean script evaluates as true, the relay output closes. When the conditions are not met, the relay output opens. Names of sources, destinations, levels and so on are case sensitive.
Boolean expressions comprise terms and operators. The operators include those shown under the Script Help tab. Expressions can be parenthesized to control the order of evaluation. Operator precedence is normally NOT > AND > OR. All parenthesized expressions are evaluated first; expressions in nested parentheses are evaluated before those in outer parentheses.
Function
AND,OR, NOT,()
Tally(SRC,DST)
Description
Logical AND, OR, NOT, and precedence. Note that && (AND), || (OR), !
(NOT) are also supported.
Returns true when the specified source is tallied on the specified destination for the SDI level.
Tally(SRC,DST,Level) Returns true when the specified source is tallied on the specified destination for the specified level.
Tally(SRC,DST,Levels...) Returns true when the specified source is tallied on the specified destination for the specified level shuffles. Level shuffle arguments are in pairs.
Locked(DST)
LockReleased(DST)
Returns true when the specified destination is locked.
Returns true when the specified destination is unlocked.
Protected(DST) Returns true when the specified destination is protected.
ProtectReleased(DST) Returns true when the specified destination is unprotected.
GPI(GPI#, STATUS) Returns true when the GPI status is equal to the specified STATUS.
STATUS value could be ON or OFF.
317
Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Script to Trigger a GPO
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
For example, the following script is true when Cam1 is tallied on Mon1 for the SDSDI level and GPI1 input is on or GPI8 input is on:
Tally(Cam1, Mon1, SDSDI) AND (GPI(1, ON) OR GPI(8, ON))
Click a function to see an example script of how to use the function under Example .
To configure a script to control GPOs
1 Add a Rule if necessary. See
To add a rule , on page 314. Select the rule you want to
configure. Ensure the rule is de-activated.
2 Click the GPO tab.
3 Select the panel’s GPO output to be used as a trigger.
318
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 Create a script that when true will close the output relay’s contact.
Configuration Tasks
Deleting a GPI or GPO Action Configuration
5 Click Validate to check the script’s syntax.
Any errors are shown in the Errors tab. Correct the script as necessary. Click the Script
Help tab for how to use script arguments.
6 Activate the rule. See
To activate a rule , on page 320.
Deleting a GPI or GPO Action Configuration
To delete a GPI or GPO action configuration
1 Click the GPI or GPO tab.
2 Select an Input or Output to be deleted.
3 Click Delete .
319
Configuration Tasks
Activating / Deactivating a Rule
Activating / Deactivating a Rule
To activate a rule
1 Set Active in the rule’s row.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The rule’s configuration becomes read only and cannot be modified. The rule’s status becomes a green circle to indicate that the rule is valid.
To deactivate a rule
1 Deselect Active in the rule’s row.
Duplicating a Rule
To duplicate a rule
1 Select the rule to be duplicated.
2 Click Duplicate .
3 Set the name and description of the new rule.
4 Click OK .
320
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Deleting a Rule
To delete a rule
1 Select the GPIO rule to be deleted.
Configuration Tasks
Deleting a Rule
2 Click Delete .
Choosing an Alias for all Rules
The source and destination aliases must have been previously created. See
Adding Aliases , on page 455. The alias selection applies to all current rules.
To set an alias
1 Click Alias .
2 Set the Source and Destination aliases to use for all rules.
3 Click OK .
321
Configuration Tasks
Stream Configurator Tasks
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Stream Configurator Tasks
The Stream Configurator task displays all streams in the current topology and allows you to configure on a large scale the following stream parameters:
• Set the stream’s Unicast and multicast IP addresses
• Change the stream’s SDP template
• Change the stream’s logical levels
• Expose or hide streams
This can be done in bulk by selecting multiple rows and using the paste functionality, to set the IP addresses of hundreds of streams in one action. Filters allow you to narrow down the list in order to only show the devices you want to change their IP addresses / port numbers.
The list has multiple sort, so you can put the devices in the right order (from top to bottom), thereby allowing you to paste an incremental range of IP addresses. Content can be pasted from a vertical column of Microsoft Excel worksheet cells, or from a text editor where there is one IP address per line.
The Stream Configurator is also useful for troubleshooting: for example, you discover an unexpected IP address is being routed and you want to find the device associated with that
IP address. Use the IP address in the filtering at the top of the Unicast IP or Multicast IP columns in the Stream Configurator to find the device.
PREREQUISITES: The following must have been configured:
• a Topology (
Topology Configurator Tasks , on page 199).
• a number of devices on the topology such as a GV Node which has a variety of streams
(see
Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204).
Setting the IP address in GV Orbit Control for third-party IP devices are an ideal application for the stream configurator; see
Using Quick Config , on page 219 and the example in
Setting Port Redundancy for Many Devices at Once , on page 220 to create such devices.
Accessing the Stream Configurator
To access the Stream Configurator Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select an area. See
Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select a topology. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 The topology must be currently:
• Activated (see
Activating a Topology , on page 235).
• Unlocked (see
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology , on page 238).
322
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
5 Select Configuration > Stream Configurator .
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Stream Configurator
The Stream Configurator task appears:
Stream Configurator Menu
The Stream Configurator menu has the following menu options.
Icon
Refresh
Select All
Clear All
Filters
Description
Reloads the Stream Configurator’s contents. The Stream Configurator’s content is static. If you make a configuration change in another task, it will not automatically be reflected in the Stream Configurator.
Selects all rows in the Stream Configurator.
Deselects all rows in the Stream Configurator.
Filters the list by signal type and direction. See
323
Configuration Tasks
Accessing the Stream Configurator
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Icon Description
Paste IP addresses Pastes the clipboard contents to the selected Stream Configurator’s column from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet column or a text editor, where there is one IP address per line.
See
Pasting Unicast and Multicast IP Addresses from a Microsoft Excel
Spreadsheet / Text Editor , on page 326.
Certain IP addresses are reserved by GV Orbit Control and cannot be used. Refer to the Release Notes for more information. See Related
Documentation , on page 7.
Set stream SDP file Set the SDP pattern for streams. See
Setting SDP Templates for one or more Streams , on page 327.
Set stream level Sets the logical level of one or more selected streams. This shows the
Logical Level Selector.
Expose or hide streams
Filter
Select a logical level and click OK to change the level of all selected streams to the new logical level.
For more information about logical levels, see Logical Level Editor
Sets to expose or hide streams of one or more selected streams. Only certain devices support this property. When Expose Stream is set, it displays the streams for this device in the Logical Device Table. See
Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241.
Row filters can be applied to each column by typing text in the filter boxes to filter the list according to a column’s content. The combination of all applied filters means that a row must match all filter
values in order to be displayed. See Filtering the Stream Configurator
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and
324
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Stream Configurator Filters Tool
Stream Configurator Filters Tool
A filter button is available in the toolbar for you to show or hide signal types (SDI, IP, MADI) or signal direction (Input/Rx and Output/Tx streams).
Click to open filter tool
Set the required filters
Icon
Show SDI
Show IP
Show MADI
Show inputs / rx
Show outputs / tx
Description
Show results where the connection type is SDI.
Show results where the connection type is IP.
Show results where the connection type is MADI.
Show results where the connection direction is an input.
Show results where the connection direction is an output.
Pasting IP addresses from a Microsoft Excel worksheet into the
Stream Configurator
In order to paste a vertical column of worksheet cells of an ordered list of IP addresses you have created in Microsoft Excel, you must first prepare the Stream Configurator by:
1 Filtering the table to only show the devices, inputs / outputs, signal type, logical levels, for which you are going to update their IP addresses. Filters allow you to narrow down the Stream Configurator list in order to only show the devices of interest.
2 Sorting the filtered list such that the devices are in the same order as the vertical column of worksheet cells you have created in Microsoft Excel.
3 Paste a vertical column of worksheet cells you have created in Microsoft Excel into either the Unicast IP or Multicast IP columns of the Stream Configurator.
Certain IP addresses are reserved by GV Orbit Control and cannot be used. Refer to the
Release Notes for more information. See Related Documentation , on page 7.
Filtering the Stream Configurator List
First, filter the Stream Configurator’s contents to create a list of only the devices that are of interest; those devices you want to update their IP addresses.
325
Configuration Tasks
Pasting IP addresses from a Microsoft Excel worksheet into the Stream Configurator
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Filtering can be done by combining the following methods:
• Use the Filters tool to show or hide signal types (SDI, IP, MADI) or signal direction
(Input/Rx and Output/Tx streams). See Stream Configurator Filters Tool , on page 325.
• Enter text into the row filters found at the top of each column by typing text in the filter boxes to filter the list according to a column’s content. The combination of all applied filters means that a row must match all filter values in order to be displayed. See
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations , on page 266.
Sorting the Stream Configurator List
Once the Stream Configurator’s contents have been filtered, then sort the filtered list.
The list has multiple sort, so you can put the devices in the right order (from top to bottom), thereby allowing you to paste an incremental range of IP addresses. Content can be pasted from a vertical column of Microsoft Excel worksheet cells, or from a text editor where there is one IP address per line.
Each column can be sorted by clicking the header text. Multiple sort can be applied by
<Shift> + clicking the headers. Bullets and numbers will appear next to the sort arrow indicating the column’s sort priority. An up arrow is ascending sort, and a down arrow is a descending sort.
First sort priority (one bullet)
Second sort priority (two bullets)
Third sort priority
(three bullets)
Fourth sort priority
Fifth sort priority
Eighth sort priority
Pasting Unicast and Multicast IP Addresses from a Microsoft Excel
Spreadsheet / Text Editor
Unicast and Multicast IP address values can be bulk pasted into the Stream Configurator from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet column by using copy/paste.
• Multicast IPs are formed with the following semi-colon separated concatenated format:
[IPv4 Address]:[Port Number] . For example, the text to be pasted for a multicast address should look like 231.102.30.13:5004
If you paste an IPv4 address without a port number into the Multicast IP column, only the IP address will be updated and the current port number will be left intact.
• Unicast IPs are a basic IP address without a port number.
To paste Unicast or Multicast IP Addresses
1 Select a column with IP addresses from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet and copy them.
2 Select the rows in the Stream Configurator that contain the streams to be changed. See
Selecting Stream Configurator Rows , on page 329.
326
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Editing Unicast and Multicast IP Addresses
3 Click the paste button in the Stream Configurator toolbar. Choose whether to apply the paste to Unicast or Multicast IP addresses. The paste is made starting from top-tobottom of the selected rows.
Note: All pasted IP addresses are validated and if any one address is invalid, the entire paste is canceled and nothing happens.
Certain IP addresses are reserved by GV Orbit Control and cannot be used. Refer to the Release Notes for more information. See
Related Documentation , on page 19.
Editing Unicast and Multicast IP Addresses
Cells in the Unicast IP column can be double-clicked in oder to edit their contents. These cells will only accept valid IPv4 addresses.
Cells in the Multicast IP column can also be double-clicked in oder to edit their contents.
These cells only accept valid IPv4 addresses and a port number separated by a colon (:). For example 231.102.30.13:1080 .
Setting SDP Templates for one or more Streams
Not all devices are NMOS compliant, however with the use of SDP parameters, GV Orbit
Control may be able to make a take of a stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS
Device. GV Orbit Control can intuit some SDP parameters while other parameters will have
to be provided by you. For more information about how to form an SDP template, see Using
SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device , on page 385.
You can set the SDP templates for one or more streams as follows.
1 If necessary, filter and sort the Stream Configurator list to only show the devices, inputs
/ outputs, signal type, logical levels, for which you are going to update their SDP templates. Filters allow you to narrow down the Stream Configurator list in order to only show the devices of interest. See
Filtering the Stream Configurator List , on page 325 and
Sorting the Stream Configurator List , on page 326.
2 Select the rows in the Stream Configurator that contain the streams to be changed. See
Selecting Stream Configurator Rows , on page 329.
3 Click the cogwheel icon. The SDP template text for the last selected stream in the table is shown in a pop-up.
If the last selected stream type is SDI or a receiver, the SDP template text area will be blank.
4 Type in or paste the SDP template text into the pop-up text area and click OK . See
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device , on page 385.
Note: The SDP text you enter is not validated by GV Orbit Control. The SDP is directly applied to IP streams only. All other stream types are ignored.
327
Configuration Tasks
Setting SDP Templates for one or more Streams
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
All selected streams will be updated with the new SDP template.
GV Orbit Control SDP Variables that can be used with Third-Party Devices
The following table lists whether the GV Orbit Control SDP variables are supported when used with third-party devices. Any unsupported SDP variable must be replaced by a hard coded value that represents the third-party device’s static property value.
GV Orbit Control SDP
Variable
${audioBits}
${channelCount}
${clockSetting}
${sequence}
${packetTime}
${portIpAddress}
${streamIpAddress}
${streamPortNumber}
${redundantIpAddress}
${redundantPortNumber}
Supported with thirdparty-devices
Description
The audio stream’s bit depth.
The number of (audio) channels.
The PTP master clock setting.
This SDP file’s ID.
The length of time in milliseconds represented by the (audio) media in a packet.
The sending port’s IP address.
The source for this variable comes from the Port’s IP Address parameter for this stream.
The transmit (sending) stream’s multicast IP address.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Address parameter.
The transmit (sending) stream’s IP port number.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Port parameter.
The transmit (sending) stream’s redundant multicast IP address.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Address parameter used for the redundancy port. See the
Redundancy Port parameter to identify the current redundancy port.
The transmit (sending) stream’s redundant IP port number.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Port parameter used for the redundancy port. See the
Redundancy Port parameter to identify the current redundancy port.
328
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuration Tasks
Selecting Stream Configurator Rows
GV Orbit Control SDP
Variable
${redundantPortIpAddre ss}
Supported with thirdparty-devices
${rtpPayloadType}
${samplingRate}
Description
The transmit (sending) stream’s redundant IP port number.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Address parameter used for the redundancy port. See the
Redundancy Port parameter to identify the current redundancy port.
The RTP payload type as defined by the SDP specification.
The audio stream’s sampling rate.
Selecting Stream Configurator Rows
Stream Configurator rows can be selected as follows:
• All current rows can be selected by clicking Select All from the Stream Configurator’s menu. See
Stream Configurator Menu , on page 323.
• Select one or more streams in the Stream Browser using <Ctrl> + click.
• Select a range of streams in the Stream Browser by selecting the first stream and then
<Shift> + click the last stream in the range.
329
Configuration Tasks
Selecting Stream Configurator Rows
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
330
7
The configuration of certain features for a specific device require an in depth explanation which is provided here.
Special Devices
These special device are described under the following headings:
•
Configuring a GV Node Device , on page 333
•
Configuring an IPG 3901 / IPG 4901 Device , on page 343
•
Configuring an IPVU Device , on page 349
•
Configuring an IQMix, IQUCP, or UCP-3901 Device , on page 352
•
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix,
IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device , on page 354
•
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or
•
Configuring an MV-820-IP Multiviewer Device , on page 363
•
Configuring a Kahuna IP Production Switcher Device , on page 367
•
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher , on page 370
•
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology , on page 377
•
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device , on page 385
•
Configuring Cisco DCNM Network Switch Devices , on page 389
•
Direct Flow Orchestration: How To Create a Static Flow with a Cisco Network Switch , on page 395
•
Configuring a GV Fabric Network Switch Device , on page 396
•
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7 , on page 399
•
Configuring an NVISION Hybrid Series Router , on page 404
•
Configuring Router Devices , on page 410
•
Configuring a Device that Supports Audio Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live , on page 421
•
Configuring an IQAMD40 Device , on page 434
331
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Description of Common Device Properties
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Description of Common Device Properties
The description for certain device properties are universal.
Parameter
# Input Connectors
Description
The number of physical input port connections made to the device.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
# Output Connectors The number of physical output port connections made to the device.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
# Streams Per Input The typical number of streams available on each physical input connection. This shows the current status for information purposes.
# Streams Per Output The typical number of streams available on each physical output connection. This shows the current status for information purposes.
# Streams The actual number of streams available on the selected physical input
/ output connection. This shows the current status for information purposes.
Automatic
Destination
Automatic
Destinations on
Inputs
Automatic
Destinations on
Outputs
Automatic Source
Automatic Sources on
Outputs
Automatic Sources on
Inputs
Set to automatically create a destination by the system for the
specified streams. See also About Automatic Sources or Destinations , on page 246.
Set to automatically create a source by the system for the specified streams. See also
About Automatic Sources or Destinations , on
Description
Enabled
Expose Streams
An optional description for the related input, output, or device.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
When set, it displays the streams for this device in the Logical Device
Table. See Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241.
Quick Config can be used to set or clear this parameter; see Using
Logical Level
Name
Short Name
The logical level for this input or output. See Logical Level Editor Tasks , on page 190.
The name or identifier for this device instance.
The name or identifier for this input or output port.
The nickname by which the input, output, or device is referred to everywhere in the system.
SSM Address Enabled Shows if the source specific multicast address is enabled.
SDP See
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device , on page 385.
332
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
Configuring a GV Node Device
To configure a GV node Device
1 Add the GV Node device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Virtual Device , find the GV Node
device bubble. See To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
2 Select the GV Node bubble and configure the Device Properties in the Property Editor .
See
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more information.
See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Frame IP Address
Description
The network IP address for the associated GV Node frame.
Network Host Name The hostname is the unique name by which the associated GV Node
CPU-ETH3 is known on the network.
Advanced >
Description
An optional description for this GV Node’s control port.
333
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
Advanced > 2022-7
Mode
Advanced > 6 HD
Mode
Advanced > Card
Enabled Option
Description
When the IFM-2T-OPT-40G-6 option is active, you can choose to enable SMPTE ST 2022-7 Low Latency redundant, high-bit-rate streams on the aggregation ports, using the GV Node manager.
If this option has been enabled in the GV Node Manager, then enable it here.
This no redundancy, low bitrate option reduces each channel from
3Gbps to 1.5Gbps, allowing all 144 channels to be sent on aggregation ports 1-6, and leaving aggregation ports 7-12 unused.
If this option has been enabled in the GV Node Manager, then enable it here.
This option controls audio embedding / de-embedding.
For example, the XIO-4901 3G/HD/SD SDI input/output card supports audio embedding/de-embedding, as a software option (MDX):
MDX: The GV Node Manager allows you to enable or disable audio embedding/de-embedding on a card’s SDI inputs and outputs.
None: If your system is monitoring MADI signals (supported at the
XIO-4901 card’s inputs/outputs 8 and 9), then disabling the MDX option lets you select MADI at the inputs and outputs matching your physical configuration. See
Configuring MADI support with a GV Node
Device , on page 339 for more information.
Set the signal type.
Advanced > Card
Mode
Advanced > Gateway
Connection State 1
Advanced > Gateway
Connection State 2
Advanced > Gateway
NP16 Connection
State
Advanced > IFM-2T
Version
Advanced > Internal
Wiring Done
Gateway Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the GV
Node frame with the primary server of a server group.
Gateway Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the GV
Node frame with the secondary server of a server group. See
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
unknown:
to the GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The GV Node frame does not have network connectivity to the
GV Orbit Server(s).
online: The GV Node frame is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
This shows the NP16 connection status of the GV Node frame with a server of a server group. unknown:
to the GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The GV Node frame does not have network connectivity to the
GV Orbit Server(s).
online: The GV Node frame is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
The IFM-2T Fabric Module User Interface version number.
Shows if the internal modeling of the GV Node is complete.
334
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
Parameter
Advanced > Join
Timeout (ms)
Advanced > Router
Connection State 1
Advanced > Router
Connection State 2
Description
When GV Orbit Control is used with a GV Node version 1.3.0, to allow a clean switch that will not be reported as a fail, we recommend this parameter to be set to 2 ms.
Router Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the router with the primary server of a server group.
Router Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the router
with the secondary server of a server group. See Configuring a
Controller Group , on page 179.
unknown:
GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The router does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit
Server(s).
online: The router is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
3 Configure the card in each slot and configure the inputs and outputs for each card by making a selection at the top to make the related parameters become available below.
Select the
Card by its slot number in Slots
Card’s SDI output number in SDI Outputs.
Then select the Card’s SDI Output Stream
Configuration number in Streams
Card’s Stream SDP Configuration number in Stream SDP Config
Card’s Input Lanes number in Input Lanes .
Then select the card’s stream number in
Streams .
To configure the properties exposed below under
Slot #
Out #
GV Node-[instance] Out #
IP Stream Prototype #
Eth In #.#
GV Node-[instance] Eth In#.# Stream #
335
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select the
Card’s SDI Input number in SDI Inputs .
Then select the card’s stream number in
Streams .
Card’s Output Lanes number in Output
Lanes .
Then select the card’s stream number in
Streams .
To configure the properties exposed below under
In#
GV Node-[instance] In#
Eth Out #.#
GV Node-[instance] Out#.# Stream #
Configure the GV Node Card Properties in the Property Editor . See also
Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Slot #
Description
Card Enabled Option This option controls audio embedding / de-embedding.
For example, the XIO-4901 3G/HD/SD SDI input/output card supports audio embedding/de-embedding, as a software option (MDX):
MDX: The GV Node Manager allows you to enable or disable audio embedding/de-embedding on a card’s SDI inputs and outputs.
None: If your system is monitoring MADI signals (supported at the card’s inputs/outputs 8 and 9), then disabling the MDX option lets you select MADI at the inputs and outputs matching your physical configuration. See
Configuring MADI support with a GV Node Device , on page 339 for more information.
Out #
Name
# Sreams
Port Identifier
Number
Direction
Connector Type
The name or identifier for this SDI output.
The number of streams for this SDI output.
An input lane is specified as QSPFport.lane which in turn corresponds to a physical port on the router. The number property specifies which physical port it is. The port identifier is how you name it so that you can refer to it.
Set the port number on the router.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
Capacity (bps)
IP Address
Mods-Out to IFM
The stream’s data rate.
The stream’s network IP address.
This option sets the expected output signal type:
SDI: The output signal is a standard SDI video signal with embedded audio.
MADI: The output signal is a MADI signal (supports 64 audio
channels). See Configuring MADI support with a GV Node Device , on page 339 for more information.
336
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
Parameter
Redundancy Port
Description
Associate this port with another port to create a redundant network traffic flow path for failover protection. The associated port will not be available to carry other traffic.
GV Node-[instance] Out #
Name The name or identifier for this SDI output.
Automatic Source
Bandwidth (bps)
Set to automatically create a source by the system using the specified stream.
The stream’s data rate.
IGMPv3 SSM Address Source Specific Multicast address as per IGMPv3 (Internet Group
Management Protocol) protocol.
IP Stream Prototype #
Name
Flow Type
SDP
The name or identifier for this SDI output.
Set the content type for this stream: Audio , Data , or Video .
The Session Description Protocol is a format for describing streaming media communications parameters.
Eth In #.#
Name
# Sreams
Port Identifier
The name or identifier for this IP input.
The number of streams for this IP input.
An input lane is specified as QSPFport.lane which in turn corresponds to a physical port on the router. The number property specifies which physical port it is. The port identifier is how you name it so that you can refer to it.
Set the port number on the router.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
Number
Direction
Connector Type
Capacity (bps) The stream’s data rate.
GV Node-[instance] Eth In#.# Stream #
Name
Flow Type
Automatic Source
The name or identifier for this IP input.
Set the content type for this stream: Audio , Data , or Video .
SDP
Set to automatically create a source by the system using the specified stream.
The Session Description Protocol is a format for describing streaming media communications parameters.
IGMPv3 SSM Address Source Specific Multicast address as per IGMPv3 (Internet Group
Management Protocol) protocol.
IP Address The stream’s network IP address.
IP Port
In#
Port number for the stream.
337
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
Name
# Sreams
Port Identifier
Description
The name or identifier for this IP input.
The number of streams for this IP input.
An input lane is specified as QSPFport.lane which in turn corresponds to a physical port on the router. The number property specifies which physical port it is. The port identifier is how you name it so that you can refer to it.
Set the port number on the router.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
Number
Direction
Connector Type
Capacity (bps)
Bandwidth Usage
(bps)
IP Address
Mods-In to IFM
The stream’s data rate.
The stream’s data rate.
Redundancy Port
The stream’s network IP address.
This option sets the expected input signal type:
SDI: The input signal is a standard SDI video signal with embedded audio.
MADI: The input signal is a MADI signal (supports 64 audio channels).
See
Configuring MADI support with a GV Node Device , on page 339
for more information.
Associate this port with another port to create a redundant network traffic flow path for failover protection. The associated port will not be available to carry other traffic.
GV Node-[instance] In#
Name The name or identifier for this IP input.
Automatic Source Set to automatically create a source by the system using the specified stream.
IGMPv3 SSM Address Source Specific Multicast address as per IGMPv3 (Internet Group
Management Protocol) protocol.
Eth Out #.#
Name
# Sreams
Port Identifier
Number
Direction
Connector Type
Capacity (bps)
The name or identifier for this IP input.
The number of streams for this IP input.
An input lane is specified as QSPFport.lane which in turn corresponds to a physical port on the router. The number property specifies which physical port it is. The port identifier is how you name it so that you can refer to it.
Set the port number on the router.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
The stream’s data rate.
338
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
Parameter
Bandwidth Usage
(bps)
IP Address
Redundancy Port
Description
The stream’s data rate.
The stream’s network IP address.
Associate this port with another port to create a redundant network traffic flow path for failover protection. The associated port will not be available to carry other traffic.
GV Node-[instance] Out#.# Stream #
Name The name or identifier for this IP input.
IP Address
IP Port
The stream’s network IP address.
Port number for the stream.
Flow Type
Automatic Source
Set the content type for this stream: Audio , Data , or Video .
Set to automatically create a source by the system using the specified stream.
SDP The Session Description Protocol is a format for describing streaming media communications parameters.
The stream’s data rate.
Bandwidth (bps)
IGMPv3 SSM Address Source Specific Multicast address as per IGMPv3 (Internet Group
Management Protocol) protocol.
Configuring MADI support with a GV Node Device
To support a MADI input on a GV Node frame, this option must be configured both in
GV Orbit Control and the MADI input must have been previously configured in iControl
Navigator; locate the GV Node Manager associated with your GV Node and double-click its icon. For example, the following figure shows the 9 th input XIO-4901 card in slot 16 is set to accept a MADI input. Within GV Orbit Control, the same setting must be made wherever a
MADI input has been configured in iControl Navigator for a GV Node frame.
Fig. 7-1: A GV Node in iControl Navigator
339
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The above iControl Navigator configuration is used as an example configuration for the following procedure.
To configure a GV node MADI input in GV Orbit Control
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
3 Add and configure a GV Node device. See Configuring a GV Node Device , on page 333.
4 In the Property Editor for the GV Node device, make the same setting as in GV Node
Manager for Enabled Options for the card: in the GV Node’s properties, in Slots , select
16 , then set None in Card Enabled Option .
340
5 Use the following table to identify the SDI input number used by GV Orbit Control from the card’s slot and input number for the next step. Only the eighth and ninth inputs of each slot support MADI input signals. For example, the ninth input of the card in slot 16 is 144 .
Matrix Input from Fabric Number for each GV Node Frame Slot
Card’s Input from GV Node
Fabric
First Input
GV Node Frame Slot Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 10 19 28 37 46 55 64 73 82 91 100 109 118 127 136
Second Input 2 11 20 29 38 47 56 65 74 83 92 101 110 119 128 137
Third Input
Fourth Input
Fifth Input
Sixth Input
3 12 21 30 39 48 57 66 75 84 93 102 111 120 129 138
4 13 22 31 40 49 58 67 76 85 94 103 112 121 130 139
5 14 23 32 41 50 59 68 77 86 95 104 113 122 131 140
6 15 24 33 42 51 60 69 78 87 96 105 114 123 132 141
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
Matrix Input from Fabric Number for each GV Node Frame Slot (continued)
Card’s Input from GV Node
Fabric
GV Node Frame Slot Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Seventh Input 7 16 25 34 43 52 61 70 79 88 97 106 115 124 133 142
Eighth Input
Ninth Input
8 17 26 35 44 53 62 71 80 89 98 107 116 125 134 143
9 18 27 36 45 54 63 72 81 90 99 108 117 126 135 144
6 In the Property Editor for the GV Node device, make the same setting as in GV Node
Manager for the card’s input: in the GV Node’s properties, in SDI Inputs , select 144 , then set MADI in Mods-In to IFM .
For each MADI input, 64 audio streams are shown in Streams and the logical level is
MADI for each stream. These 64 streams are made available within the Logical Device
Table for use on manually created logical devices. If you choose the Automatic source/destination option for the MADI, then 4 devices of 16 channels of audio are
341
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Node Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide created in the Logical Device Table on the appropriate tab. See
342
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IPG 3901 / IPG 4901 Device
Configuring an IPG
-
3901 / IPG
-
4901 Device
The Densité IP Gateway (IPG-3901) plug-and-play module is a 3 RU module for the Densité
3 frame, which provides bidirectional IP/SDI conversion. The Gateway operates with 10
GigE audio/video video-over-IP, supporting UHD/3G/HD/SD-SDI formats.
The GV Node IP Gateway (IPG-4901) plug-and-play module is a 3 RU single slot module for the GV Node frame, which provides bidirectional fiber IP connectivity to provide conversion to and from other equipment that cannot be handled directly by the GV Node aggregation ports (GV Node’s receivers and transmitters). This card allows you to expand the receivers available on the GV Node, as well as it brings more flexibility to the allowed audio profiles that can be accepted through the IPG-4901
PREREQUISITES: All IPG-3901 and IPG-4901 devices must have been previously configured in iControl Navigator. GV Orbit Control reads this configuration information from iControl through the GV Node / Densité Manager.
To configure an IPG-3901 / IPG-4901 Device
1 Add the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Virtual
Device , find the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 device bubble. See
To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
343
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IPG 3901 / IPG 4901 Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
2 Select Device Group Properties . Configure the GV Node IP Address / Frame IP
Address and Slot Number properties.
344
See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
# Devices
Network Host Name
# Input Connections
# Output Connections
Advanced > Default
Connector Type
Advanced > # Streams Per
Input
Advanced > # Streams Per
Output
Advanced > Receive Stream
IP Pattern
Advanced > Send Stream IP
Pattern
Description
The number of panel instances in this device group.
The hostname is the unique name by which the associated
IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 is known on the network.
The current status for information purposes, once the GV Node
IP Address and Slot Number parameters are configured and the topology is activated. See
Activating a Topology , on page 235.
3 Activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
The card configuration is read from Densité Manager and applied to the device.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IPG 3901 / IPG 4901 Device
4 Select the Device Properties tab and then select IPG next to Devices . See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Network Host Name
GV Node IP Address
Frame IP Address
Slot Number
Connection to
Controller 1
Connection to controller 2
Firmware Version
Internal Wiring Done
Operation Mode
Applies to
IPG-3901 IPG-4901
Description
The hostname is the unique name by which the associated IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 is known on the network.
IP Address of the CPU-ETH3 for the GV Node frame into which the IPG-4901 card is installed.
IP Address of the CPU-ETH3 for the Densité frame into which the IPG-3901 card is installed.
The slot in which the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 device is located in the GV Node frame.
Connection to Controller 1 shows the connection status of the IPG device with the primary server of a server group.
Connection to Controller 2 shows the connection status of the IPG device with the secondary server of a server group. See
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
unknown: The topology is inactive (see
Activating a Topology , on page 235) or the IPG
device does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The IPG device does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit Server(s).
online: The IPG device is connected to the
GV Orbit Server(s).
Shows the firmware version installed on the
IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 card. This shows the current status for information purposes.
Shows if the internal modeling of the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 is complete.
Shows the operation mode of the ETH2 port of the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 card for information purposes:
Redundancy: ETH 2 is redundant to ETH 1.
Aggregation: Both ETH 1 and ETH 2 are available simultaneously.
OFF: ETH 2 is disabled.
345
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IPG 3901 / IPG 4901 Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
5 Select ETH# next to Ethernet Ports . These are the network configuration parameters
for the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 card’s Ethernet ports. See also Description of Common
Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
IP Address
Gateway
Subnet Mask
Description
The network IP address for this Ethernet port.
The network gateway IP address.
The IP network’s subnet mask.
6 Select one of the streams next to Gateways (by default labelled as OUT# or IN# ). See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Direction
Description
This shows the current status for information purposes.
Logical Level on SDI Stream To force a stream to use the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 device,
the source and destination ports. Set the logical level that will be used for this here.
For example, create a logical level called IPG-SDI from the SDI logical level. Now use this level to send and receive streams to and from this device.
7 Select 1 or 2 next to Streams . See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Ethernet Port
Format
Description
The Ethernet port this gateway is assigned to (ETH 1 or ETH 2).
This shows the current status for information purposes.
The gateway format: SD, HD, or 3G for video streams, or AES67 profile for audio streams. This shows the current status for information purposes.
IGMPv3 Source
IP Address
For a receiver gateway, this is the address of the joined stream’s port when SSM Address is enabled on the device.
The stream’s network IP address.
Logical Level on ETH stream The Logical level to apply on the ETH side of the gateway. By default for the video stream, this value is SDI and for the audio stream, this value is SDI audio.
Port The stream's network port.
Redundant IGMPv3 Source When the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 card is in Redundancy mode:
For a receiver gateway, this is the address of the joined stream’s port when SSM Address is enabled on the device.
346
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Connecting an IPG-4901 device
Parameter
Redundant IP Address
Redundant Port
Description
When the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 card is in Redundancy mode:
The stream’s network IP address.
When the IPG-3901 or IPG-4901 card is in Redundancy mode:
The stream's network port.
Connecting an IPG-4901 device
The IPG 4901 has 9 SDI input ports, 9 SDI output ports, and 2 bidirectional ETH ports. The
SDI ports must be connected to the SDI ports of the GV Node in which the IPG-4901 is slotted in. This rule is not enforced in GV Orbit Control. GV Orbit Control allows you to use an IPG-4901 like an IPG-3901, however this is not a valid use case and will not work.
The 9 SDI input ports short labels are called OUT for OUT from fabric, and the 9 SDI output ports short labels are called IN for In to fabric to follow iControl’s behavior.
Device properties
• It is possible to assign a logical level to SDI ports by changing the Logical Level of SDI stream at the Gateway level.
• It is possible to assign a logical level to IP streams by changing the Logical Level on ETH stream on Stream level, under the Gateway.
• It is possible to change the multicast address for SDI to IP gateways (called OUT) by changing the IP Address, Port, Redundant IP Address and Redundant Port properties on Stream level, under Gateway. These changes are propagated to iControl.
• In OFF or Redundancy mode, gateways OUT 6 to 9 and IN 6 to 9 are disabled and not visible in Property Editor . They become visible only if card is in Aggregation mode.
347
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Example Topology Using an IPG-4901
Example Topology Using an IPG-4901
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
348
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IPVU Device
Configuring an IPVU Device
The IPVU is a compact dual-channel IP-to-HDMI converter that is perfect for displaying IP sources and a multiviewer’s IP outputs on HD and UHD HDMI displays.
The inputs of an IPVU are called spigots . See also
How to Know if a Spigot is an Input or an
WARNING
The IPVU’s configuration is set through GV Orbit Client and then GV Orbit Control reads the configuration from the IPVU device. All spigots on an IPVU are inputs.
There is no offline configuration of the IPVU device. It must first be discovered on the network by GV Orbit Control.
The IPVU device must have been previously configured with GV Orbit Client before being integrated into GV Orbit Control as most configuration parameters shown in GV Orbit
Control are for information purposes only (GV Orbit Control reads it from the IPVU devices).
See the IPVU Installation Guide for more information.
PREREQUISITES: The Domain ID of the IPVU device(s) must be set in the System Controller
Group Properties under Domain Ids . See
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
These devices must be on the same subnet that the GV Orbit Server is connected to.
Related Topics
•
How to Know if a Spigot is an Input or an Output , on page 353.
•
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix,
IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device , on page 354.
•
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or
Spigot Usage
An IPVU device has 8 input spigots. They are used according to the IPVU’s output resolution.
Input Spigot Number HD Output Description
Spigot1 Stream input for Monitor
Output 1 connection
Spigot2 Not used
Spigot3
Spigot4
Spigot5
Spigot6
Not used
Not used
Stream input for
Output 2
Not used
Monitor
connection
UHD Output Description
SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 1 input stream for
Monitor Output 1 output connection
SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 2 input stream for
Monitor Output 1 output connection
SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 3 input stream for
Monitor Output 1 output connection
SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 4 input stream for
Monitor Output 1 output connection
SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 1 input stream for
Monitor Output 2 output connection
SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 2 input stream for
Monitor Output 2 output connection
349
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IPVU Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Input Spigot Number HD Output Description
Spigot7
Spigot8
Not used
Not used
UHD Output Description
SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 3 input stream for
Monitor Output 2 output connection
SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 4 input stream for
Monitor Output 2 output connection
To configure an IPVU Device
1 Add the IPVU device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Discovered , find an
IPVU device bubble that you want to control. See
To add a Discovered Device to a
2 Configure the IPVU properties. See also
integrated into GV Orbit Control as most configuration parameters shown in GV Orbit
Control are shown for information purposes only.
Parameter Description
Network Host Name The hostname is the unique name by which the associated IPVU is known on the network.
Domain ID Set the same Domain IDs on all IPVU devices that are to communicate with each other on the network.
The default value for Grass Valley equipment is 101 .
Valid range: 0 to 232.
See also
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
Internal wiring Shows if the internal modeling of the IPVU is complete.
350
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IPVU Device
3 Create and connect the core IP devices to the IPVU. See
351
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IQMix, IQUCP, or UCP-3901 Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuring an IQMix, IQUCP, or UCP-3901 Device
The IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 series is a range of multi-channel video over IP transceiver modules developed for use within low latency, high bandwidth Ethernet IP networks, capable of encoding / decoding multiple SDI signals. They provide both compressed and uncompressed modes of operation.
The inputs and outputs of an IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 are called spigots . There are a variety of spigot configurations that are available; for example, 6 inputs / 6 outputs, 12
inputs / 0 outputs, 0 inputs / 12 outputs, 8 inputs / 0 outputs. See also How to Know if a
Spigot is an Input or an Output , on page 353.
WARNING
The spigot configuration is set through GV Orbit Client and then GV Orbit Control reads it from the IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 card. For any given spigot, you must know which mode (input or output) has been configured to connect the spigots correctly in GV Orbit Control.
There is no offline configuration of the IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device. It must first be discovered on the network by GV Orbit Control.
The IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device must have been previously configured with GV Orbit
Client before being integrated into GV Orbit Control as most configuration parameters shown in GV Orbit Control are for information purposes only (GV Orbit Control reads it from the IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 devices). See the IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP 3901 User Manual for more information.
PREREQUISITES: The Domain ID of the IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device(s) must be set in the System Controller Group Properties under Domain Ids . See
Group , on page 179. These devices must be on the same subnet that the GV Orbit Server is
connected to.
Note: An IQMix using VC2 video compression format is not currently supported by
GV Orbit Control.
Related Topics
•
How to Know if a Spigot is an Input or an Output , on page 353
•
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix,
IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device , on page 354.
•
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or
352
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
How to Know if a Spigot is an Input or an Output
To configure an IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP3901 Device
1 Add the IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device to the Topology: from the Device Library ,
Discovered , find an IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device bubble that you want to control.
See
To add a Discovered Device to a Topology , on page 209.
2 Configure the IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 properties. See also
Device Properties , on page 332. The IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device should be first
configured with GV Orbit Client before being integrated into GV Orbit Control as most configuration parameters shown in GV Orbit Control are shown for information purposes only.
Parameter
Internal wiring
Description
Network Host Name The hostname is the unique name by which the associated IQMIX /
IQUCP / UCP-3901 is known on the network.
Domain ID Set the same Domain IDs on all IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 devices that are to communicate with each other on the network.
The default value for Grass Valley equipment is 101 .
Valid range: 0 to 232.
See also
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
Shows if the internal modeling of the IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901 is complete.
3 Create and connect the edge devices (SDI and IP devices) that are connected to the
IQMIX / IQUCP / UCP-3901. See Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
How to Know if a Spigot is an Input or an Output
To know if a spigot In GV Orbit Control is an input or output, proceed as follows:
1 Select the device bubble on the Topology Configurator. See
Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
2 Expand Ip Spigots in Device Properties and select a spigot from the list.
3 For each spigot, interpret the Mode property as follows:
• SRC = Output
• DST = Input
353
Special Device Configuration Tasks GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device User
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device
To support UHD 4K streams, the image is mapped onto four SDI HD sub-images using a two-sample interleave division. This means each of the four sub-stream carries a quarterresolution picture. These four sub-streams must:
• each be individually represented by four logical levels; one level for each sub-stream.
For example, SDI2SIuhd1 , video2SIuhd2 , video2SIuhd3 and video2SIuhd4 .
• The first logical level, SDI2SIuhd1 , carries the full SDI stream for video, audio, and ancillary data.
• The remaining logical levels will only use the video stream from the SDI levels, video2SIuhd2 , video2SIuhd3 , and video2SIuhd4 .
• be logically linked together so that they are switched together at once ensuring that there is no switching delay between the four streams that would create visible glitches between the four quadrants.
The following shows the typical video stream composition of a two-sample interleave division display with the associated logical levels used in this procedure.
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
UHD Composite Image
1 1 2 2
3 3 4 4
1: SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 1 pixels carried by HD Logical
Level SDI2SIuhd1
2: SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 2 pixels carried by HD Logical
Level Video2SIuhd2
3: SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 3 pixels carried by HD Logical
Level Video2SIuhd3
4: SMPTE ST 424-5 Link 4 pixels carried by HD Logical
Level Video2SIuhd4
354
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
Special Device Configuration Tasks
User Guide Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU
PREREQUISITES:
• For IQMix / IQUCP / UCP-3901 devices:
• The IQMix / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device(s) must already be configured in GV Orbit
Client. See
Configuring an IQMix, IQUCP, or UCP-3901 Device , on page 352.
• Configure the IQMix / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device spigots to be used for UHD in
GV Orbit Client by enabling the UHD Links parameter in the Link Control Page for all quad-link signal spigots.
• Set the corresponding spigots to use 2SI signals: Under TPG , clear (disable) the
SDQS check boxes as required.
• The IPVU device(s) must already be configured in GV Orbit Client. See Configuring an
• Configure the IPVU device spigots to be used for UHD in GV Orbit Client by:
• Enabling the Enable UHD parameter in the IPVU configuration page for
Monitor Output 1 and 2 as necessary.
• Set the UHD Mode to 2SI .
To configure UHD 2SI Streams with an IPVU Device
1 Add IPVU device(s) to the topology and configure them in GV Orbit Control. See
Configuring an IPVU Device , on page 349.
355
Special Device Configuration Tasks GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device User
2 Link the IPVU device(s) to the logical sources and destinations in GV Orbit Control. See
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
The following topology will be used as an example, where the IPVU receives UHD stream sources from the GV Node.
3 Create the logical levels necessary to support 2SI sources and destinations: Create the following UHD logical levels from the Logical Level Editor from the pre-existing SDI logical level: SDI2SIuhd1 , SDI2SIuhd2 , SDI2SIuhd3 , and SDI2SIuhd4
. See Duplicating a Logical Level , on page 193.
Duplicate the SDI Logical Level four times to create SDI2SIuhd1 ,
SDI2SIuhd2 , SDI2SIuhd3 , and SDI2SIuhd4
356
For this example, only the following “2SIuhd” levels will be used: SDI2SIuhd1 ,
Video2SIuhd2 , Video2SIuhd3 , and Video2SIuhd4 . It is optional to delete all other
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
Special Device Configuration Tasks
User Guide Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU
“2SIuhd” logical levels for a cleaner presentation, if they are not used elsewhere. See
Deleting a Logical Level , on page 196.
4 From the Multilevel Table of the Logical Device Table , under the Sources tab, click the
Levels icon . See Accessing the Logical Device Table task , on page 241.
5 Select the levels you want to display in the Logical Device Table . As shown below, the
2SIuhd filter was applied and then you can select the 4 SIuhd levels ( SDI2SIuhd1 ,
Video2SIuhd2 , Video2SIuhd3 , and Video2SIuhd4 ), each representing one sub-stream of a of a 2SI signal. Click OK .
The columns of the Multilevel Table updates to only show the SDI2SIuhd1 ,
Video2SIuhd2 , Video2SIuhd3 , and Video2SIuhd4 columns .
6 In the Logical Device Table, select a source’s row to which you want to add the streams.
See
To configure streams for the new sources , on page 251.
357
Special Device Configuration Tasks GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
Configuring UHD 4K Two-Sample Interleave Division IP Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device User
7 In the Logical Device Table, map streams with levels: Configure the UHD sources and destinations by assigning quad-link IP streams to each level.
Select the row before dropping a destination onto it
8 Select the levels you want to display in the Logical Device Table . Again, select the 4
SIuhd levels ( SDI2SIuhd1 , Video2SIuhd2 , Video2SIuhd3 , and Video2SIuhd4 ), each representing one sub-stream of a of a 2SI signal. Click OK .
The columns of the Multilevel Table updates to only show the SDI2SIuhd1 ,
Video2SIuhd2 , Video2SIuhd3 , and Video2SIuhd4 columns.
9 From the Multilevel Table of the Logical Device Table , under the Destinations tab, click the Levels icon . See
Accessing the Logical Device Table task , on page 241.
10 Repeat step 6 for destinations.
11 Test the configuration by making takes between a logical source and destination that use the two-sample interleave division streams. See
Control , on page 459. See in Pathfinder that the correct source sub-streams are
received by each destination. See Viewing Information about the Destinations , on page 442.
358
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix,
IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device
To support UHD 4K streams, a quad-link (square division) configuration is used. That is, the
UHD image is divided into four SDI HD quadrants, and each quadrant is sent as four separate streams. These four streams must:
• each be individually represented by four logical levels; one level for each quadrant. For example, SDI , SDIuhd2 , SDIuhd3 and SDIuhd4 .
• The first logical level is the base SDI logical level. This logical level carries the video, audio, and ancillary data.
• The SDIuhd2 , SDIuhd3 and SDIuhd4 logical levels are video only.
• be logically linked together so that they are switched together at once ensuring that there is no switching delay between the four streams that would create visible glitches between the four quadrants.
The following shows the typical video stream composition of a UHD quad-link display with the associated logical levels used in this procedure.
Quadrant 1, Link 1
HD Logical Level SDI
Quadrant 2, Link 2
HD Logical Level
SDIuhd2
Quadrant 3, Link 3
HD Logical Level
SDIuhd3
Quadrant 4, Link 4
HD Logical Level
SDIuhd4
UHD Composite Image
359
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
PREREQUISITES:
• For IQMix / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device(s):
• The IQMix / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device(s) must already be configured in GV Orbit
Client. See
Configuring an IQMix, IQUCP, or UCP-3901 Device , on page 352.
• Configure the IQMix / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device spigots to be used for UHD in
GV Orbit Client by enabling the UHD Links parameter in the Link Control Page for all quad-link signal spigots.
• Set the corresponding spigots to use Square Division signals: Under TPG , set
(enable) the SDQS check boxes as required.
• For IPVU device(s):
• Configure the IPVU device spigots to be used for UHD in GV Orbit Client by:
• Enabling the Enable UHD parameter in the IPVU configuration page for
Monitor Output 1 and 2 as necessary.
• Set the UHD Mode to SQD .
360
To configure UHD Quad-Link Streams
Create the logical levels necessary to support quad-link sources and destinations.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device
1 Create the following UHD logical levels from the Logical Level Editor from the preexisting SDI logical level: SDIuhd1 , SDIuhd2 , SDIuhd3 and SDIuhd4 . See
Duplicate the SDI Logical Level four times to create SDIuhd1 , SDIuhd2 ,
SDIuhd3 , and SDIuhd4
2 From the Multilevel Table of the Logical Device Table , click the Levels icon . See
Accessing the Logical Device Table task , on page 241.
3 Select the levels you want to display in the table. As shown below, a filter SDIuhd was applied and then you can select the 4 SDI UHD levels and click OK .
The logical device table will show 4 items ( SDIuhd1 , SDIuhd2 , SDIuhd3 , and SDIuhd4 ), each with a UHD level representing one quadrant of a of a quad-link signal.
4 Add IQMix / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device(s) to the topology and configure them in
GV Orbit Control. See
Configuring an IQMix, IQUCP, or UCP-3901 Device , on page 352.
5 Link the IQMix / IQUCP / UCP-3901 device(s) to the logical sources and destinations in
GV Orbit Control. See
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
361
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring UHD 4K Quad-Link SDI Streams for use with an IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, or IPVU Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The following topology will be used as an example, where the IQMix is used as the UHD stream sources (called uhd1 and uhd2 ) and the IQUCP is used as the UHD stream destination (called DEST-uhd ).
6 In the Logical Device Table, map streams with levels: Configure the UHD sources and destinations by assigning quad-link IP streams to each level.
Select the row before dropping a destination onto it
7 Repeat step 6 for destinations.
8 Test the configuration by making takes between a logical source and destination that use the quad-level link streams. See
Performing a Take in Router Control , on page 459.
See in Pathfinder that the correct quad-level link streams are received by each
destination. See Viewing Information about the Destinations , on page 442.
362
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an MV-820-IP Multiviewer Device
Configuring an MV-820-IP Multiviewer Device
The MV 820 IP multiviewer has 48 IP inputs and 12 IP outputs in a 2 RU chassis, making it ideal for high-density IP monitoring applications. Internally, the MV 820 IP multiviewer is an MV 820 SDI multiviewer wrapped inside four IQMix cards to provide IP connectivity through a rear panel that supports the QSFP network interface adapters (refer to the MV-
820 Multiviewer User Manual, where this is referred to as the Video IP Circuitry ). These four
IQMix cards are used to convert the IP network input streams to feed the 48 SDI inputs of the MV-820 cards, and uses three of the four same IQMix cards to also convert the 12 SDI mosaic outputs of the MV-820 cards into IP stream outputs. These IQMix cards are labeled as MV 820 IP REAR
in GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit Control. See Configuring an IQMix,
IQUCP, or UCP-3901 Device , on page 352 for more information about how to configure an
IQMix.
The inputs and outputs of an MV 820 IP are called spigots that, within GV Orbit Control, are provided by four MV 820 IP REAR devices with the following spigot configuration: 48 input spigots across four MV 820 IP REAR devices and 12 mosaic output spigots across three
MV 820 IP REAR devices. The third MV 820 IP REAR device has no output spigots.
MV-820-IP-REAR ‘A’: 12 Input Spigots
MV-820-IP-REAR ‘B’: 12 Input Spigots
MV-820-IP-REAR ‘C’: 12 Input Spigots
MV-820-IP-REAR ‘D’: 12 Input Spigots
MV 820 SDI
Multiviewer
MV-820-IP-REAR ‘A’: 4 Output Spigots
MV-820-IP-REAR ‘B’: 4 Output Spigots
MV-820-IP-REAR ‘C’: 0 Output Spigots
MV-820-IP-REAR ‘D’: 4 Output Spigots
For each MV 820 IP REAR device, the spigots are used as follows. The third MV 820 IP REAR
Input: Spigot 5
IQMix
Mosaic Output: Spigot 1
Mosaic Output: Spigot 2
Mosaic Output: Spigot 3
Mosaic Output: Spigot 4 Input: Spigot 16
There is no offline configuration of the MV 820 IP device. It must first be discovered on the network by GV Orbit Control.
The MV 820 IP multiviewer must have been previously configured with GV Orbit Client before being integrated into GV Orbit Control as most configuration parameters shown in
GV Orbit Control are for information purposes only (GV Orbit Control reads it from the
MV 820 IP cards). See the MV 820 IP User Guide for more information.
For example, in GV Orbit Client 2.5 the MV 820 IP is shown as 4 MV 820 IP-REAR.
PREREQUISITES: The Domain ID of the MV 820 IP devices must be set in the System
Controller Group Properties under Domain Ids . See
Configuring a Controller Group , on
363
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an MV-820-IP Multiviewer Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
page 179. These devices must be on the same subnet that the GV Orbit Server is connected
to.
Note: An MV 820 IP using VC2 video compression format is not currently supported by GV Orbit Control.
To configure an MV 820 IP Multiviewer
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
3 The topology must be currently:
• Activated (see
Activating a Topology , on page 235).
• Unlocked (see
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology , on page 238).
4 From the Device Library , on the left, select Discovered , from the drop-down list.
364
5 From the Device Library , Discovered , find the four MV 820 IP REAR devices with the IP addresses that correspond with those for the MV 820 IP multiviewer on your network: select one of the MV 820 IP REAR device bubbles and drag it into position on the
Topology and release the mouse button.
The device pulled from the Device Library , Discovered becomes greyed out and another instance of the same device instance cannot be added again to the Topology.
6 Now create a device group by adding the remaining three MV 820 IP REAR device bubbles on top of the MV 820 IP REAR already on the Topology: a Select another MV 820 IP REAR device bubble from the Device Library and drag it on top of the first MV 820 IP REAR device instance already on the Topology and release the mouse button. b Repeat this action for the third and fourth MV 820 IP REAR device bubble in the
Device Library .
The four MV 820 IP REAR device instances are shown as a single device on the
Topology and can be individually configured in the Property Editor , under Devices , by
clicking an instance. See Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more information.
7 Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device or device
group. See To name a device and set the number of devices in the group , on page 205.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an MV-820-IP Multiviewer Device
8 Configure the MV 820 -
IP multiviewer’s properties. See also Description of Common
Device Properties , on page 332. The MV
820 IP device should be first configured with
GV Orbit Client before being integrated into GV Orbit Control as most configuration parameters shown in GV Orbit Control are shown for information purposes only.
Parameter Description
Network Host Name The hostname is the unique name by which the associated MV 820 IP is known on the network.
Domain ID Set the same Domain IDs on all MV 820 IP devices that are to communicate with each other on the network.
The default value for Grass Valley equipment is 101 .
Valid range: 0 to 232.
See also
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
Internal wiring Shows if the internal modeling of the MV 820 IP is complete.
9 Create the logical sources and destinations in GV Orbit Control for the MV 820 IP by adding SDI devices to the topology and then linking them. See
Devices in a Topology , on page 222. An example is shown below.
Logical Sources
Represent the
Multiviewer’s SDI
Mosaic Outputs
Logical
Destinations
Represent the
Multiviewer’s SDI
Inputs
These logical sources and destinations represent the SDI inputs and outputs of the
MV 820 multiviewer that will be used when making a take. a From the Device Library , Virtual Devices, find the SDI Device bubble and drag it into position on the Topology and release the mouse button.
365
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an MV-820-IP Multiviewer Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide b Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device or
MV-Out in both the Name and Short Name fields, then enter 12 for the number of device instances. These parameters can also be set in the Property Editor .
c From the Device Library , Virtual Devices, find the SDI Device bubble and drag it into position on the Topology and release the mouse button.
d Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device or device group. For example, Enter MV-In in both the Name and Short Name fields, then enter 48 for the number of device instances. e Interconnect the SDI source and destination devices to the proper IQMix spigot SDI inputs and outputs as shown above.
If needed, contact support for more information as how to configure this device. See
Grass Valley Technical Support , on page 846.
366
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Kahuna IP Production Switcher Device
Configuring a Kahuna IP Production Switcher Device
The Kahuna IP is a production switcher. Internally, the Kahuna IP production switcher is an
Kahuna SDI production switcher wrapped inside two IQMix cards to provide IP connectivity. These two IQMix cards are used to convert the IP network input streams to feed the 12 SDI inputs of the Kahuna, and the other IQMix card to convert the 12 SDI outputs of the Kahuna into IP stream outputs. These IQMix cards are labelled as
KahunaIPI10 and KahunaIPO10 in GV Orbit Control. See
Configuring an IQMix, IQUCP, or
UCP-3901 Device , on page 352 for more information about how to configure an IQMix.
The inputs and outputs of a Kahuna IP are called spigots . There are 12 input and 12 output spigots. In the GV Orbit Control Device Library, the Kahuna IP switcher is discovered as two separate IP devices: the first represents the IP inputs (device type: KahunaIPI10) and the second represents the IP outputs (device type: KahunaIPO10).
KahunaIPI10: 12 Input Spigots
Kahuna SDI
Switcher
KahunaIPO10: 12 Output Spigots
See also
How to Know if a Spigot is an Input or an Output , on page 353.
There is no offline configuration of the Kahuna IP device. It must first be discovered on the network by GV Orbit Control.
The Kahuna IP device must have been previously configured with GV Orbit Client before being integrated into GV Orbit Control as most configuration parameters shown in
GV Orbit Control are for information purposes only (GV Orbit Control reads it from the
Kahuna IP device). See the Kahuna IP User Guide for more information.
PREREQUISITES: The Domain ID of the Kahuna IP device(s) must be set in the System
Controller Group Properties under Domain Ids . See
to.
To configure a Kahuna IP Device
1 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
2 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
3 The topology must be currently:
• Activated (see
Activating a Topology , on page 235).
• Unlocked (see
Unlocking / Relocking a Topology , on page 238).
367
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Kahuna IP Production Switcher Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 From the Device Library , on the left, select Discovered from the drop-down list.
368
The Kahuna IP is discovered as two separate IP devices: the first represents the IP inputs
(device type: KahunaIPI10) and the second represents the IP outputs (device type:
KahunaIPO10).
5 From the Device Library , Discovered , find the Kahuna IP input device that you want to control: select the KahunaIPI10 device bubble and drag it into position on the
Topology and release the mouse button.
The device pulled from the Device Library , Discovered becomes greyed out and another instance of the same device instance cannot be added again to the Topology.
6 From the Device Library , Discovered , find the matching KahunaIPO10 device bubble and drag it into position on the Topology and release the mouse button.
7 For each Kahuna IP device (IP inputs device type: KahunaIPI10 and IP outputs device type: KahunaIPO10 ) Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device. See
To name a device and set the number of devices in the group , on page 205.
8 Configure the Kahuna IP properties. See also Description of Common Device
Properties , on page 332. The Kahuna IP device should be first configured with GV Orbit
Client before being integrated into GV Orbit Control as most configuration parameters shown in GV Orbit Control are shown for information purposes only.
Parameter Description
Network Host Name The hostname is the unique name by which the associated Kahuna IP is known on the network.
Domain ID Set the same Domain IDs on all Kahuna IP devices that are to communicate with each other on the network.
The default value for Grass Valley equipment is 101 .
Valid range: 0 to 232.
See also
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
Internal wiring Shows if the internal modeling of the Kahuna IP is complete.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Kahuna IP Production Switcher Device
9 Create and connect the edge devices (SDI and IP devices) that are connected to the
Kahuna IP. See Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222. An example is
shown below.
Logical Sources
Represent the
Switcher’s SDI
Mosaic Outputs
Logical Destinations
Represent the
Switcher’s SDI Inputs
These logical sources and destinations represent the SDI inputs and outputs of the
Kahuna switcher that will be used when making a take. a From the Device Library , Virtual Devices, find the SDI Device bubble and drag it into position on the Topology and release the mouse button.
b Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device or
Switcher-Out in both the Name and Short Name fields, then enter 3 for the number of device instances. These parameters can also be set in the Property Editor .
c From the Device Library , Virtual Devices, find the Monitor Device bubble and drag it into position on the Topology and release the mouse button.
d Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device or device group. For example, Enter Switcher-In in both the Name and Short Name fields, then enter 12 for the number of device instances. e Interconnect the SDI source and destination devices to the proper IQMix spigot SDI inputs and outputs as shown above.
If needed, contact support for more information as how to configure this device. See
Grass Valley Technical Support , on page 846.
369
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher
The K-Frame is a series of production switchers, and certain models support IP connectivity.
The following frames are supported:
• K-Frame-V Production Switcher has 4 slots each providing 8 inputs and 4 outputs to the switcher, for a total of 32 inputs x 16 outputs.
• K-Frame-X Production Switcher has 14 slots. 10 slots each providing 16 inputs and 8 outputs to the switcher, followed by 4 slots each providing 8 inputs and 4 outputs of the switcher, for a total of 192 inputs x 96 outputs.
The following diagram shows a K-Frame-V / K-Frame-X Production Switchers populated with a typical assortment of I/O cards.
8 × 4 I/O SDI Card
8 Inputs, 4 Outputs
8 × 4 I/O IP Card
8 Inputs, 4 Outputs, 4 SFPs
Inputs 1 to 8
Outputs 1 to 4
SFPs 1 to 4
Inputs 9 to 16
Outputs 5 to 8
SFPs 5 to 8
K‐Frame‐V Series
8 × 4 I/O IP Card
8 Inputs, 4 Outputs, 4 SFPs
Inputs 17 to 24
Outputs 9 to 12
SFPs 9 to 12
8 × 4 I/O IP Card
8 Inputs, 4 Outputs, 4 SFPs
Inputs 25 to 32
Outputs 13 to 16
SFPs 13 to 16
16 × 8 I/O SDI Card
16 Inputs, 8 Outputs
16 × 8 I/O IP Card
16 Inputs, 8 Outputs, 8 SFPs
16 × 8 I/O IP Card
16 Inputs, 8 Outputs, 8 SFPs
16 × 8 I/O IP Card
16 Inputs, 8 Outputs, 8 SFPs
16 × 8 I/O IP Card
16 Inputs, 8 Outputs, 8 SFPs
16 × 8 I/O IP Card
16 Inputs, 8 Outputs, 8 SFPs
16 × 8 I/O IP Card
16 Inputs, 8 Outputs, 8 SFPs
16 × 8 I/O SDI Card
16 Inputs, 8 Outputs
Inputs 1 to 16
Outputs 1 to 8
SFPs 1 to 8
Inputs 17 to 32
Outputs 9 to 16
SFPs 9 to 16
Inputs 33 to 48
Outputs 17 to 24
SFPs 17 to 24
Inputs 49 to 64
Outputs 25 to 32
SFPs 25 to 32
Inputs 65 to 80
Outputs 33 to 40
SFPs 33 to 40
Inputs 81 to 96
Outputs 41 to 48
SFPs 41 to 48
Inputs 97 to 112
Outputs 49 to 56
SFPs 49 to 56
Inputs 113 to 128
Outputs 57 to 64
SFPs 57 to 64
Inputs 129 to 144
Outputs 65 to 72
SFPs 65 to 72
Inputs 145 to 160
Outputs 73 to 80
SFPs 73 to 80
K‐Frame‐X Series
8 × 4 I/O SDI Card
8 Inputs, 4 Outputs
Inputs 161 to 168
Outputs 81 to 84
SFPs 81 to 84
8 × 4 I/O IP Card
8 Inputs, 4 Outputs, 4 SFPs
Inputs 169 to 176
Outputs 85 to 88
SFPs 85 to 88
8 × 4 I/O IP Card
8 Inputs, 4 Outputs, 4 SFPs
Inputs 177 to 184
Outputs 89 to 92
SFPs 89 to 92
8 × 4 I/O SDI Card
8 Inputs, 4 Outputs
Inputs 185 to 192
Outputs 93 to 96
SFPs 93 to 96
There are two types of modules which can be used in the K-Frame Production Switcher slots:
• SDI only card, equipped with BNC connectors.
370
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher
• IP only card, equipped with SFP connectors.
Here are some details about IP cards you will need to know to model your K-Frame
Production Switcher in GV Orbit Control:
• An SFP can receive two streams and transmit one. A stream is a group of the essence flows (a 2022-6 stream has a single flow, a TR-04 stream has two flows and a SMPTE
2110 stream has three flows)
• Each SFP stream maps directly to a switcher input or output of the slot. For example: the IP card in the second slot of the K-Frame-V Production Switcher has 4 SFP pairs (for redundancy) providing signals to inputs 9-16 of the switcher. The first SFP provides streams for inputs 9-10, the second SFP provides streams for inputs 11-12 and so on.
• IP cards support SMPTE 2022-6, SMPTE 2110, and TICO.
• Redundancy in SMPTE 2022 and SMPTE 2110 is supported.
• For SMPTE 2110-30, the following profiles are supported: L16/48K/125us, L16/48K/1ms,
L24/48K/125us, L24/48K/1ms.
Note that GV Orbit Control only controls the K-Frame Production Switcher’s IP receivers and transmitters. In consequence, The K-Frame Production Switcher must have been previously setup and configured before being integrated into GV Orbit Control. See the K-Frame
Installation & Service Manual for more information.
PREREQUISITES: GV Orbit Control must have IP connectivity to the K-Frame Production
Switcher:
• to automatically detect the K-Frame Production Switcher’s model (K-Frame-V / K-
Frame-X) and its current configuration parameters that are needed by GV Orbit Control.
• before making connections to the Production Switcher bubble in GV Orbit Control. See
To configure a K-Frame Production Switcher , on page 373.
371
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
K-Frame Production Switcher Nomenclature used in GV Orbit Control
The following diagram shows the nomenclature used in GV Orbit Control for the K-Frame-V
Production Switcher signal flow. A K-Frame-X Production Switcher’s signal flow uses a similar architecture, with more inputs and outputs.
Slots
8 4
Inputs 1 to 8
Outputs 1 to 4
K‐Frame‐V
Video/Audio Routing & Processing
32 Inputs & 16 Outputs
8 4
Inputs 9 to 16
Outputs 5 to 8
8 4
Inputs 17 to 24
Outputs 9 to 12
8 4
Inputs 25 to 32
Outputs 13 to 16
Boards
IP I/O Board
SFPs 1 to 4
IP I/O Board
SFPs 5 to 8
IP I/O Board
SFPs 9 to 12
IP I/O Board
SFPs 13 to 16
System SFPs
Physical SFPs* A
1 2 3 4
B A B A B A B
5 6 7 8
A B A B A B A B
9 10 11 12
A B A B A B A B
13 14 15 16
A B A B A B A B
Streams
Flows
Video
Audio
Ancillary
Port Number Equivalent
Used in GV Orbit
Control / GV Convergent
1 17 2 18 3 19 4 20 5 21 6 22 7 23 8 24 9 25 10 26 11 27 12 28 13 29 14 30 15 31
SMPTE 2022‐7 Support: Ports shown in red are for the Red LAN. Ports shown in blue are for the Blue LAN
16 32
* This is shown in the Short Name property for a port. For example, SFP‐1A is the first input port.
* Note that GV Orbit Control’ s Short Name property for a port is composed of a combination of the System SFP number and the Physical SFP letter in the following format:
SFP-[System SFP number][Physical SFP letter]
372
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher
For example, SFP-1A is the first input port. This port is shown below in the K-Frame Menu for reference.
When Redundancy Mode is Enabled in the K-Frame Menu, you must use a SMPTE ST 2022-7 network setup; see
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7 , on page 399.
To configure a K-Frame Production Switcher
1 Add the Production Switcher device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Virtual
Device , find the Production Switcher
device bubble. See To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
2 Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to enter a meaningful name to identify this device in the Name
field. See To name a device and set the number of devices in the group , on page 205.
373
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
These parameters can also be set in the Property Editor .
3 Click New next to Control Port at the top of the Property Editor and select K-
Frame CPL TCP/IP from the list. See also
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for
more information.
The K-Frame CPL TCP/IP tab appears. To remove the control port, click Delete.
4 Configure the K-Frame Production Switcher properties. See also Description of
Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter Description
Network Host Name The hostname is the unique name by which the associated K-Frame
Production Switcher is known on the network.
IP Address The IP address of the K-Frame Production Switcher to be controlled.
Once connected, GV Orbit Control automatically detects the K-Frame
Production Switcher’s model (K-Frame-V / K-Frame-X) and K-Frame
Production Switcher’s configuration parameters that are needed by
GV Orbit Control.
374
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher
Parameter
Connection State 1
Connection State 2
Frame Model
Description
K-Frame Production Switcher Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the K-Frame Production Switcher with the primary server of a server group.
K-Frame Production Switcher Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the K-Frame Production Switcher with the secondary server of a server group. See
unknown:
connectivity to the GV Orbit Server(s).
Reconnecting: The topology has been activated and GV Orbit Control is learning the K-Frame Production Switcher’s current configuration.
offline: The K-Frame Production Switcher does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit Server(s).
online: The K-Frame Production Switcher is connected to the GV Orbit
Server(s).
Once the topology has been activated, this shows the frame model.
This is shown for information purposes only.
5 Activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
The current K-Frame Production Switcher input and output ports are read into GV Orbit
Control and become available to be connected within GV Orbit Control. According to the type of streams configured in K-Frame Production Switcher, the corresponding logical levels are created in the Logical Device Table. See
Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241 for more information.
375
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a K-Frame Production Switcher
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
When a port is selected, see the Short Name property to see the K-Frame Production
Switcher’s internal port reference. For more information, see K-Frame Production
Switcher Nomenclature used in GV Orbit Control , on page 372.
376
Each input port supports two sources. When a stream is selected, see the Short Name property to see the stream type currently configured in the K-Frame Production
Switcher.
Streams Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
This is the video stream for the first source.
This is the audio stream for the first source a .
This is the Ancillary stream for the first source
This is the video stream for the second source.
This is the audio stream for the second source
This is the Ancillary stream for the second source a
.
a.This stream is not shown if the selected port is configured as SMPTE 2022-6.
Short Name
Swr-In-1A-Vid
Swr-In-1A-Aud
Swr-In-1A-Anc
Swr-In-2A-Vid
Swr-In-1A-Aud
Swr-In-1A-Anc
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Control supports Networked Media Open Specifications (NMOS) AMWA IS-04 for device discovery and registration and IS-05 for connection management 1 supports AMWA BCP-002-01 for the natural grouping of NMOS resources.
. Furthermore, it
GV Orbit Control has a built-in NMOS registry (see below) that can be used to register
NMOS devices. To be able to discover NMOS devices, you have one of the following options:
• Allow GV Orbit Control to automatically discover one or more NMOS registries through
DNS-SD. DNS-SD can discover an NMOS registry that is available on the network and registered in your DNS server.
• Point GV Orbit Control to use its internal NMOS registry (when enabled), or to an external NMOS registry.
GV Orbit relies on the NMOS senders / receivers Group Hint Tag property to determine the available audio streams / flows to be used in order to extract the appropriate audio channels used for the creation of the automatic logical sources / destinations. You can still create custom logical sources / destinations using specific streams and specific audio channels.
PREREQUISITES:
• Entries for your NMOS registries have been added to the network DNS server. This enables automatic DNS-SD discovery. Contact your IT department to do so. Otherwise you can manually specify the registry to connect to.
• Routing between IP sources and IP destinations that have different flow configurations requires an Audio Live in order to convert audio flows into compatible ones. See
Configuring a Device that Supports Audio Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live , on page 421.
Notes
• GV Orbit Control listens for changes to any of the nodes in the registry. As it receives updates, it automatically updates any device that is dropped onto any topology that is associated with that node.
• If the registry is shut down, or the node is stopped and is removed from the registry, the devices will disappear from the list of discovered devices. The devices you already have dropped will remain on the topology, but will no longer receive updates.
• If the registry is restarted or the node is restarted, GV Orbit Control will continue to update the devices on the topology (assuming the devices have the same UUID).
To configure GV Orbit Control for use with NMOS
To use GV Orbit Control with NMOS devices, you first must configure it to use its internal
NMOS registry, to use an external NMOS registry, or to automatically search for external
NMOS registries.
1.GV Orbit Control supports IS-05 v1.1 API when available. This version is used before v1.0 when both versions are available.
377
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
1 Open the System Controller Group Properties
. See Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
2 Set the following parameters.
378
Parameter Description
NMOS Discovery DNS GV Orbit Control can automatically discover an NMOS registry
NMOS Discovery
Search Domain through DNS-SD when the NMOS Discovery DNS and NMOS
Discovery Search Domain parameters are set.
NMOS Discovery DNS: The IP address of the network DNS server that is also used to support networked NMOS devices.
NMOS Discovery Search Domain: The network’s domain name on which GV Orbit Control will search for NMOS devices and the NMOS registry.
The NMOS Discovery DNS and NMOS Discovery Search Domain parameters are automatically retrieved from the GV Orbit’s Server operating system when available (refer to IP Configuration , DNS tab in the GV Orbit Admin Guide ; see Related Documentation , on page 7).
The operating system values can be overridden by setting the appropriate values here.
NOTE: If the DNS information is changed in the admin interface,
GV Orbit Control must be restarted to retrieve the new values from the OS.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology
Parameter
NMOS Registry
Description
This shows the current NMOS Registry Query API URL (hostname / IP address and port number).
Set a static NMOS registry URL when NMOS registry discovery is nonfunctional or when you want to override it to use a specific NMOS registry.
If the NMOS Registry service is installed and running on the GV Orbit
Server and you want to use GV Orbit Control’s built-in NMOS registry, set this URL to the local host IP address for this service: http://127.0.0.1:4041 . The NMOS registry is available to NMOS devices at the current system controller’s IP address a , on port 4041 . The priority of GV Orbit Control’s NMOS registry is 0.
If redundancy has been configured for GV Orbit Control, use the
Virtual IP Address, on port 4041 to access the NMOS registry.
Refer to Application Upgrade in the GV Orbit Admin Guide to install the NMOS Registry service and ensure that it is running. See Related
Documentation , on page 7.
To revert to automatic NMOS registry discovery, clear this field, press
<Enter>, and wait 10 seconds for the above NMOS Discovery DNS and
NMOS Discovery Search Domain parameters to take effect.
a.This is the same IP address as for GV Orbit Control ’s administration interface. This is shown as IP
Address
3 To be able to discover NMOS devices in GV Orbit Control, you have one of the following options:
• Allow GV Orbit Control to automatically discover one or more NMOS registries through DNS-SD (set the NMOS Discovery DNS and NMOS Discovery Search
Domain parameters). This is possible when the NMOS registries have been added to the network DNS server.
• Manually point GV Orbit Control to use the NMOS Registry service (when enabled), or to an external NMOS registry by setting a fixed URL for the registry (set the
NMOS Registry parameter).
Update the server’s Host file
In order for GV Orbit Control to communicate with the NMOS registry to retrieve a list of all its resources, retrieve update notifications, download SDP files and perform connection management, GV Orbit Control must be able to reach the host where the registry is running by its hostname. In order to do this, an entry for the NMOS host MUST be added to the server’s hosts file.
The Host file is found here: /etc/hosts
Sample entry:
10.37.80.177 <registryHostName>
Once the server for the NMOS registry has been added to the hosts file, the GV Orbit
Control service needs to be restarted. See Reboot found under Upgrade Task in the GV Orbit
Admin Guide . See Related Documentation , on page 7.
Note that this applies even if you use the registry's IP address when specifying the URL of the NMOS Discovery Registry. Once the entry in the hosts file is added, the NMOS Registry
379
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide parameter can be either http://10.37.80.177:4041 or http://<registryHostName>:4041
To update the server’s Host file, contact Grass Valley Technical Support. See Grass Valley
Technical Support , on page 846.
NMOS Node control port status in GV Orbit Control
GV Orbit Control pings the NMOS node to keep the connection active using the URL http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:4041/x-nmos/node/v1.2/self . GV Orbit Control uses the success of the ping to determine the node’s control port status (Online/Offline).
Note: If the NMOS node’s status is offline, check if the node’s URL contains only a hostname (as opposed to a numeric IP address). If GV Orbit Control cannot resolve the hostname, then you need to add an entry into the server’s hosts file and then restart GV Orbit Control. GV Orbit Control must be able to resolve the node’s hostname in order to report the control port status as being online, download SDP files, and perform connection management. See
Update the server’s Host file , on page 379 and
Reboot found under Upgrade Task in the GV Orbit Admin Guide . See
Related Documentation , on page 7.
How to test the NMOS registry
Test the registry as follows: in a web browser, enter the following address into the browser’s address bar: http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:4041/x-nmos/query/v1.2/
Where XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
is the IP address of GV Orbit’s NMOS registry. This can be either
GV Orbit’s Server IP address (for its internal NMOS registry), or the query API IP address of an external NMOS registry, if available. For external NMOS registries, see the NMOS registry’s documentation as it may use a number of different IP addresses; one for the query API and another for the registration API for example.
380
The following NMOS registry switches show the current NMOS registry’s content: subscriptions nodes devices senders receivers flows sources
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology
This is accessible by, for example, entering the following address into the browser’s address bar: http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:4041/x-nmos/query/v1.2/ nodes
As the NMOS registry has just been started, it is normal that it is empty of content. Wait for devices to discover the NMOS registry and to publish their resources to the registry.
Note: If nodes are not published to the registry and are not listed under http://XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX:4041/x-nmos/query/v1.2/nodes discovered by GV Orbit Control. Further device troubleshooting will be required to identify why a device is not publishing to the NMOS registry.
, they will not be
About the grouphint tag
AMWA BCP-002-01 makes use of the grouphint tags to identify senders and receivers. When a discovered device publishes grouphint tag information in senders / receivers to the NMOS registry, GV Orbit Control will automatically create the related logical sources and destinations for the device, once the NMOS device has been added to the topology. If a discovered device does not publish grouphint tags to the NMOS registry, then you will have to create the logical sources and destinations for the device manually in GV Orbit Control.
Logical sources / destinations are created using the audio channels from the grouphint tag information, when available. GV Orbit assesses if the audio flows use 1, 2 or 4 audio streams and then the 16 audio channels from the automatic logical sources / destinations are accordingly created using the multi audio streams / flows as required.
Number of Audio
Flows as determined by the flow’s grouphint tag
1
Effect in GV Orbit Control
There is 1 audio stream with 16 audio channels which are represented in
GV Orbit Control by the AES67-16 logical level. In the NMOS device’s
Properties, the following streams are available:
1: SDI, SMPTE ST 2022. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the SDI column.
2: Video, SMPTE ST 2110-20. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the V column.
3: Audio AES67-16, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A1 to A16 columns.
7: Ancillary, SMPTE ST 2110-40. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the ANC column.
381
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Adding NMOS Devices to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Number of Audio
Flows as determined by the flow’s grouphint tag
2
4
Effect in GV Orbit Control
There are 2 audio streams; each stream has 8 audio channels which are represented in GV Orbit Control by the AES67-8 logical level. In the NMOS device’s Properties, the following streams are available:
1: SDI, SMPTE ST 2022. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the SDI column.
2: Video, SMPTE ST 2110-20. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the V column.
3: Audio AES67-8, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A1 to A8 columns.
4: Audio AES67-8, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A9 to A16 columns.
7: Ancillary, SMPTE ST 2110-40. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the ANC column.
There are 4 audio streams; each stream has 4 audio channels which are represented in GV Orbit Control by the AES67-4 logical level. In the NMOS device’s Properties, the following streams are available:
1: SDI, SMPTE ST 2022. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the SDI column.
2: Video, SMPTE ST 2110-20. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the V column.
3: Audio AES67-4, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A1 to A4 columns.
4: Audio AES67-4, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A5 to A8 columns.
5: Audio AES67-4, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A9 to A12 columns.
6: Audio AES67-4, SMPTE ST 2110-30. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the A13 to A16 columns.
7: Ancillary, SMPTE ST 2110-40. In the Logical Device Table, this is represented by the ANC column.
In the NMOS device Properties, the number, type of streams, and AES67 Logical Level are updated in real time according to the grouphint tag information. For example, this screen shows the Properties for an NMOS device where there is 1 audio stream, and as a consequence, the level for the audio stream is shown as AES67-16.
382
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
To Add an NMOS Device to a Topology
In the Logical Device Table, the NMOS device reflects the automatic.
To Add an NMOS Device to a Topology
PREREQUISITES:
• There is an operational NMOS registry on the network.
• GV Orbit Control has been configured to connect to the NMOS registry. See
To configure GV Orbit Control for use with NMOS , on page 377.
• NMOS devices must be configured to publish their available resources to the NMOS registry.
Proceed as follows.
1 Add the NMOS device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Discovered , find an
NMOS device bubble that you want to control. See To add a Discovered Device to a
2 Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device or device
group. See To name a device and set the number of devices in the group , on page 205.
383
Special Device Configuration Tasks
To Add an NMOS Device to a Topology
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 The NMOS Control Port parameters are configured in the device’s Property Editor, under the Device Properties tab. See
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more
information about this tab.
4 Select NMOS tab (next to Control Port at the top of the Property Editor ) to configure the Device Properties in the Property Editor . See also
The NMOS control port properties appear.
Parameter Description
Connection State 1 / 2 This shows the current connection state to the NMOS nodes. When a redundant configuration is used (two GV Orbit Servers form a cluster)
Connection State 1 and Connection State 2 shows the connectivity of each server to the NMOS nodes.
unknown:
the GV Orbit Server(s).
reconnecting: The GV Orbit Server is in the process of establishing communications with the NMOS device.
offline: The NMOS device does not have network connectivity to the
GV Orbit Server(s).
online: The NMOS device is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
Force Resync Device Set to make GV Orbit Control reload the NMOS device’s parameters from the NMOS registry.
IS-05 Controllable
NMOS Device URL
This status shows whether the corresponding node in the NMOS registry has devices that support being controlled through IS-05
(connection management).
Yes: Routes to these devices should succeed.
No: If you try to route to a device that is not IS-05 controllable, the route will fail.
Partial: Some devices are controllable in this node, while others are not.
This is the NMOS device’s current URL and port number.
Ports and streams are automatically created using the values found in the registry, and they will automatically be updated whenever GV Orbit Control receives notifications of changes from the NMOS registry.
You can change the following NMOS device properties which will not be overwritten with values from the NMOS registry (the value you set for these properties will persist in GV Orbit
Control): Labels, Short labels, Descriptions, Network label, and Logical levels. See Defining
Device Properties , on page 229.
384
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device
In order to use IS-05 connection management, Session Description Protocol (SDP) information is required to be sent as part of the command. GV Orbit Control can create SDP type parameters that a receiving NMOS device requires in order to successfully complete a take made from devices that do not generate and publish their own information.
The SDP information is now generated by GV Orbit Control and is included in the connection management commands to allow discovered AMWA NMOS receivers to join non-discovered senders, or source devices created within the GV Orbit Control client. This
SDP information is not currently published to the AMWA NMOS registry.
Within GV Orbit Control, a number of default SDP parameter templates are built-in and are selected according to the stream’s Logical Level parameter. The SDP parameters can be tweaked if necessary as these SDP parameters must represent the current details and specifications of the source’s stream.
The following device bubbles support SDP parameters:
• IP Device
• GV Node
• IQ-family type IP devices, for example, IQMix, IQUCP, UCP-3901, IQAMD, MV-820-IP,
Kahuna IP, and so on
• Audio Live
Related Topics
• The Stream Configurator allows you to configure the SDP template for streams on a large scale. See
Stream Configurator Tasks , on page 322.
PREREQUISITES: To customize the SDP parameter, you must know how to form a valid SDP.
This is beyond the scope of this document. For more information about SDP specific parameters, see RFC 4566 . See also SDP .
385
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The SDP parameters are configured in the device’s Property Editor, under the Device Group
Properties tab and in the Device Properties
tab. See Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more information about these tabs.
386
Certain SDP parameters have been enhanced with new GV Orbit Control variables which allows for better device control integration within GV Orbit Control. These variables are available for SDP parameters configured under the Device Group Properties and the
Device Properties tab, output stream property. Variables always start with a dollar sign ($) and are enclosed in curly brackets {} as shown in the example below.
Once the topology is activated, the variables set in the SDP are replaced with the actual values GV Orbit Control has resolved for the device’s stream. This can be helpful for troubleshooting.
See
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 to know more about how parameter values in
the Device Properties tab inherit their values from the corresponding parameter values in the Device Group Properties tab.
Example of SDP parameters used in GV Orbit Control
The following is a typical example of the SDP parameters used in GV Orbit Control. v=0 o=- ${sequence} 0 IN IP4 ${portIpAddress} s=grassvalley 1 t=0 0 a=recvonly a=ts-refclk:ptp=IEEE1588-2008:08-00-11-FF-FE-22-04-00:127 a=mediaclk:direct m=video ${streamPortNumber} RTP/AVP 98
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device c=IN IP4 ${streamIpAddress}/1 a=rtpmap:98 SMPTE2022-6/27000000
Special GV Orbit Control SDP Variables
The following table lists the supported special GV Orbit Control variables for use anywhere within the SDP parameter. These variables reference parameters that are configured elsewhere in GV Orbit Control, thereby automatically keeping stream information up-todate.
GV Orbit Control SDP
Variable
${audioBits}
${channelCount}
${clockSetting}
${sequence}
${packetTime}
${portIpAddress}
${streamIpAddress}
${streamPortNumber}
${redundantIpAddress}
${redundantPortNumber}
${redundantPortIpAddre ss}
${rtpPayloadType}
${samplingRate}
Description
The audio stream’s bit depth.
The number of (audio) channels.
The PTP master clock setting.
This SDP file’s ID
The length of time in milliseconds represented by the (audio) media in a packet.
The sending port’s IP address.
The source for this variable comes from the Port’s IP Address parameter for this stream.
The transmit (sending) stream’s multicast IP address.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Address parameter.
The transmit (sending) stream’s IP port number.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Port parameter.
The transmit (sending) stream’s redundant multicast IP address.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Address parameter used for the redundancy port. See the Redundancy
Port parameter to identify the current redundancy port.
The transmit (sending) stream’s redundant IP port number.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Port parameter used for the redundancy port. See the Redundancy
Port parameter to identify the current redundancy port.
The transmit (sending) stream’s redundant IP port number.
The source for this variable comes from the stream’s IP Address parameter used for the redundancy port. See the Redundancy
Port parameter to identify the current redundancy port.
The RTP payload type as defined by the SDP specification.
The audio stream’s sampling rate.
Editing SDP Parameters
Any of the above variables can be substituted with a fixed equivalent value so that it is hard coded. For example, the variable ${portIpAddress} represents a multicast IP address and it can be replaced with an IP address such as 230.1.1.1
.
387
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Using SDP Parameters to Take a Stream from a non-NMOS Device to an NMOS Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
When you edit any SDP parameter:
• The SDP becomes fixed and will no longer automatically update when you make a change elsewhere in the Property Editor. For example, changing the logical level parameter will not update the SDP parameters with the logical level change. You will have to further edit the SDP to adapt it to any such change.
• The SDP becomes orange to indicate that its default value has been overridden. See
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 to know more about how to reset a parameter
to its default value.
388
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Cisco DCNM Network Switch Devices
Configuring Cisco DCNM Network Switch Devices
Networks that use Cisco Data Center Network Manager (DCNM) to manage LAN fabric can be controlled by GV Orbit Control.
PREREQUISITES:
• DCNM build 11.0(1) or higher
• Switch’s firmware: NXOS 9.2(1) or higher for 9200, 9300-EX, and 9500-R switches.
• Switch’s BIOS: version 07.64, compile time: 05/17/2018
• Configure the required DCNM network switch’s flow policies. See below.
Note: As of DCNM v11.5(1), the DCNM application is now separate from the
RabbitMQ application, with each application having its own independent user credential management. Thus, changing DCNM user credentials will not change existing RabbitMQ user credentials. Note that GV Orbit Control uses the user credentials from RabbitMQ and not from DCNM.
Configuring the Network Switch’s Flow Policies
If you are using a network switch with DCNM control port, flow policies must be manually set in the DCNM web interface, before you configure GV Orbit Control to use the network switch.
Each flow policy sets the maximum bandwidth that can be allocated to a type of traffic flow.
See the table below. Only the flow policies for bandwidths you will use in your network need to be created.
Each flow policy must have a multicast IP address range associated to it, according to your network addressing pattern, as GV Orbit Control uses a different multicast IP range for each type of traffic flow and bandwidth (audio, video 3G, Video HD, ANC / metadata, and so on).
Class D IP addresses are multicast addresses. By default, IP address 239.255.0.1 may be reserved for use by certain Grass Valley equipment for DDS discovery and should not be allocated for any other purpose.
Review documentation for all equipment you are going to use on your network for any specific IP addressing and bandwidth requirements.
Establish the Customer Multicast IP Addressing Pattern
All network IP devices must be assigned an IP address, and each network traffic type is assigned to a IP address range according to its bandwidth requirement.
389
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring the Network Switch’s Flow Policies
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
For example, the following table shows a typical multicast IP addressing pattern and the bandwidth allocation required by traffic flow type.
Traffic Flow
Type
Video
Audio
ANC
(metadata)
Default a
Flow Policy
Typical IP address range
From To
Recommended
Bandwidth Allocation
SMPTE2022-6(3G) 230.1.1.1
230.255.255.255 3.2Gbps
SMPTE2022-6(HD) 229.1.1.1
229.255.255.255 1.601Gbps
SMPTE2022-6(SD) 228.1.1.1
228.255.255.255 0.27Gbps
SMPTE2110-20(3G) 238.1.1.1
238.255.255.255 2.703Gbps
SMPTE2110-20(HD) 237.1.1.1
237.255.255.255 1.401Gbps
SMPTE2110-20(SD) 236.1.1.1
236.255.255.255 0.23Gbps
SMPTE2110-30(AES) 234.1.1.1
234.255.255.255 61Mbps
SMPTE2110-40(ANC) 235.1.1.1
235.255.255.255 2Mbps
* 150Kbps a.This allows any general network management data to pass through the network while guaranteeing that it will not take up any significant amount of total network bandwidth. When needed, this bandwidth allocation is also used for DDS discovery when such equipment uses a multicast address that is outside of any other pre-existing flow policy you have created (this must be the case).
Delete Pre-existing Flow Policies
If your switch has been previously configured, you may need to remove any pre-existing flow policies. These flow policies have the status Create under Deployment Action .
To delete pre-existing current flow policies
1 In the Deployment drop menu, select Undeploy All Custom Policies .
390
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring the Network Switch’s Flow Policies
2 The Deployment Action column will show Delete instead of Create .
3 Select all flow policies from the list, but exclude the Default flow policy: do not remove the Default flow policy as it will be needed.
4 Use the delete (X) button to delete the selected flow policies.
Add New Flow Policies Using Your IP Addressing Pattern
According to the IP addressing pattern shown in the above table, create the new flow policies for each traffic flow type you are going to use.
To add new flow policies
1 Click New (+).
2 Set the parameters for the flow policy. The setting for QoS/DSCP is CS1 .
3 Click Deploy.
4 Repeat to create all necessary flow policies.
5 In the Deployment drop menu, select Deploy All Custom Policies .
The status under Deployment Action becomes Create and the Deployment Status becomes Success .
391
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a DCNM Network Switch Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuring a DCNM Network Switch Device
To configure a DCNM Network Switch Device
1 Add the Network Switch device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Discovered, find the Network Switch device bubble. See
To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
2 Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to enter a meaningful name to identify this device in the Name
field. See To name a device and set the number of devices in the group , on page 205.
These parameters can also be set in the Property Editor .
3 Set the number of physical input and output connectors being used on the network switch in # Input Connectors and # Output Connectors . See
Properties , on page 229 for more information.
392
The configuration for these ports become available as Ports under IN and OUT .
4 Click New next to Control Ports at the top of the Property Editor and select Cisco
DCNM from the list. Dummy Network Switch should be used when the DCNM network
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a DCNM Network Switch Device manager is not being used for the network switch. See
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more information.
The Cisco DCNM tab appears. To remove the control port, click Delete.
5 Select Cisco DCNM tab (next to Control Port at the top of the Property Editor ) to configure the Device Properties in the Property Editor . Only the properties shown
below should be used. See also Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter Description
Network Host Name This is the unique name by which the Network Switch is identified within GV Orbit Control. This value is used to construct the input/output port labels.
Cisco DCNM Control Port parameters
Virtual IP Address
Exclusive Policy
Control
Enabled
Username
Password
This is the virtual IP address to communicate with DCNM cluster. This
IP is used to address any active member of the two nodes that are operating in High Availability (HA) mode. If DCNM is not operating in
HA mode, use the DCNM node IP address.
When set, GV Orbit Control operates in exclusive mode: any change to the host aliases, host policies or flow policies (through DCNM web interface for example) will be overwritten and restored by GV Orbit
Control. This is the supported mode to be used.
Only deselect this parameter under the guidance of Grass Valley
Technical Support.
When set, GV Orbit Control controls the switch.
When deselected, GV Orbit Control no longer controls the switch, thus allowing you to perform maintenance operations on the switch.
When re-establishing control (set Enabled ), GV Orbit Control will push the current policies to the switch.
Set the administrator’s username to access the DCNM network.
Set the administrator’s password to access the DCNM network.
393
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a DCNM Network Switch Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter Description
Connection State 1 / 2 This shows the current connection state to the switch. When a redundant configuration is used (two GV Orbit Servers form a cluster)
Connection State 1 and Connection State 2 shows the connectivity of each server to the switches.
Unknown: The Virtual IP is not configured yet or the topology is inactive.
Online: GV Orbit Control is connected to DCNM.
Offline: The topology is active and GV Orbit Control is unable to communicate with DCNM.
Reconnecting: GV Orbit Control is trying to reach DCNM.
Active Host Name
Active IP Address
Standby Host Name
Standby IP Address
In a redundant High Availability network architecture, one node (in standby mode) provides failover protection to another node (currently active).
Host Name : The hostname is the unique name by which the active / standby node is known on the network.
IP Address : The network IP address for the active / standby node.
6 Do not configure any parameters found under Ports or Streams. These are shown for information purposes only.
7 Add IP devices to the topology and then connect them to the switch: Click Quick
Connect to link the devices. See
To support network redundancy for use with SMPTE ST 2022-7 compatible equipment, see
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7 , on page 399.
Use the Path Manager to view and troubleshoot the flow of streams through the switch fabric. See
Path Manager Tasks , on page 438.
394
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Direct Flow Orchestration: How To Create a Static Flow with a Cisco Network Switch
Direct Flow Orchestration: How To Create a Static Flow with a Cisco
Network Switch
This topic describes the use case where a destination IP device does not have an API exposed that allows GV Orbit Control to direct the device’s receivers to join send streams.
Or you want to control what is to be sent to an IP destination. For this, GV Orbit Control can control the egress ports of a network switch to statically stitch flows feeding the IP device. It is also necessary to remove the network interface ports from the available resources for dynamically stitching flows via IGMP joins. Another way of stating this, it is necessary to remove these paths from the available tielines.
To create a static flow with GV Orbit Control you need to set some information on an output port of a network switch with a DCNM control port.
1 For this procedure the following topology will be used. See
2 In the Network Switch’s Property Editor , under Control Ports , select an output port on your network switch (for example, Cisco DCNM ). This port should not be connected to anything. See
Configuring Cisco DCNM Network Switch Devices , on page 389.
3 Set the number of streams you need in #Output Connectors .
4 With the Cisco DCNM control port selected, set Expose Streams .
5 Set the name and IP address of the network switch’s control port ( Cisco DCNM ). You find this information through the Inventory page on the DCNM web UI. ( Inventory ,
Switches , Select a leaf , Interfaces tab). You have to add 1 to the last number of the IP. For example: 192.102.45.0/31 becomes 192.102.45.1.
6 On the port's streams, set the Logical Level . See
Configuring the Logical Levels for the
Devices in a Topology , on page 197.
7 On the port's streams, set Automatic Destination if you do not want to create a logical destination yourself.
8 To create the static flow, you need to do a normal take from the streams (or logical destination if you created one) to the source you want.
9 To confirm if the flow is passing, you can check the flow status page on the DCNM UI
( Media Controller , Flow status ). Note: If the static flow was created but the source does not have a signal, there will be no feedback.
To delete a static flow, you need to do a take from the destination to a source with an IP of
0.0.0.0 on the streams.
395
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Fabric Network Switch Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuring a GV Fabric Network Switch Device
GV Fabric is an IP switch enabling format agnostic signal routing for small to enterprisewide installations. GV Orbit Control automatically discovers and configures any GV Fabric switch found by the GV Orbit Automatic Network Configurator service. When this service finds a GV Fabric network switch on the network, or when you factory-reset an existing
GV Fabric network switch, the service uses Zero Touch Provisioning (ZTP) to automatically configure the GV Fabric network switch to optimize its configuration to forward media traffic. Once the initial configuration of the GV Fabric switch is done, the GV Fabric switch becomes available as a discovered device in the Device Library .
GV Orbit Control also monitors the switch and updates the configuration as required. For example, the switch’s media Ethernet interfaces are automatically assigned as members of the MEDIA_VLAN and configured for use.
PREREQUISTIES:
• The Automatic Network Configurator service must be licensed, installed, and running on the GV Orbit Server. See Automatic Network Configurator Service in the GV Orbit Admin
Guide ; see Related Documentation , on page 7.
• The GV Orbit Server must be configured to use DHCP. See DHCP Task and Connecting the GV Fabric Network Switch in the GV Orbit Admin Guide ; see Related
Documentation , on page 7.
LIMITATION: You must manually configure an interface breakout by using the GV Fabric
Command Line Interface (CLI).
To configure a GV Fabric Network Switch Device
1 Add the GV Fabric Network Switch device to the Topology: from the Device Library ,
Discovered , find the GV Fabric Network Switch device bubble that you want to use. See
To add a Discovered Device to a Topology , on page 209.
396
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Fabric Network Switch Device
2 Select Device Properties and select GV Fabric
. See Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more information.
3 Select GV Fabric tab (next to Control Port at the top of the Property Editor ) to configure the Device Properties in the Property Editor . Only the properties shown
below should be used. See also Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter Description
Network Host Name This is the unique name by which the Network Switch is identified within GV Orbit Control. This value is used to construct the input/output port labels.
GV Fabric Control Port parameters
Name Once GV Orbit Control connects to the switch, the switch’s name is read from the switch’s configuration.
MGT0 / MGT1 IP
Address
Username
Once GV Orbit Control connects to the switch, the switch’s management IP addresses are read from the switch’s configuration.
The Zero-Touch Provisioning (ZTP) process creates a gvapi user account in the switch. By default, GV Orbit Control uses the gvapi user account to access the switch.
The username field can be customized to use another switch user account. Such a user account’s capability must be Monitor or higher.
See GV Fabric documentation to create a new user on the switch.
397
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a GV Fabric Network Switch Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
Password
Description
Set the administrator’s password for GV Orbit Control to access the
GV Fabric switch’s user account.
When the GV Fabric device is added to the topology, the password for the gvapi user account is preset.
Connection State 1 / 2 This shows the current connection state to the switch. When a redundant configuration is used (two GV Orbit Servers form a cluster)
Connection State 1 and Connection State 2 shows the connectivity of each server to the switches.
Unknown: The Virtual IP is not configured yet or the topology is inactive.
Online: GV Orbit Control is connected to DCNM.
Offline: The topology is active and GV Orbit Control is unable to communicate with DCNM.
Reconnecting: GV Orbit Control is trying to reach DCNM.
4 Do not configure any parameters found under Ports or Streams. These are shown for information purposes only.
5 Add IP devices to the topology and then connect them to the GV Fabric switch: Click
Quick Connect to link the devices. See
Using Quick Connect to Link all Devices in a
Topology , on page 222. See also Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
To support network redundancy for use with SMPTE ST 2022-7 compatible equipment, see
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7 , on page 399.
Use the Path Manager to view and troubleshoot the flow of streams through the switch fabric. See
Path Manager Tasks , on page 438.
398
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE
ST 2022
-
7
This topic describes the theory of how to implement network redundancy, and as such, information is provided as an example that can be used for any SMPTE ST 2022-7 compatible equipment.
To make streaming more reliable over an IP network, the implementation of SMPTE
ST 2022-7 seamless protection switching depends on stream redundancy. This protection scheme transmits two identical packet streams over physically separate network routes
(shown as Red LAN and Blue LAN in the figure below), so that if packets from one network are lost or delayed, the data can be reconstructed using packets from the second network stream. This process is seamless because switching between the streams is instantaneous and does not impact content.
Network
Switch ‘Red’
Red LAN
IPG-4901 A
GV Node A IPG-3901 A
GV Node B IPG-3901 B
IPG-4901 B
Blue LAN
Network
Switch ‘Blue’
PREREQUISITES:
• At least two DCNM-compliant switches must be used for this application. Contact Grass
Valley for more information about switch compatibility. See
399
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• For any GV Node frame: a In iControl’s GV Node Manager, make sure to set redundancy to ON. See the GV
Node User Manual for more information. b In GV Orbit Control, set 2022-7 Mode and configure the Redundancy Port parameter. See
Configuring a GV Node Device , on page 333.
• For any IPG-4901 / IPG-3901 card a In iControl’s Network panel , Settings tab, for the ETH 2 Port , make sure to set the
Operation Mode to Redundancy . See the IPG-4901 Guide to Installation and
Operation for more information.
b In GV Orbit Control, set the Operation Mode to Redundancy
IPG 3901 / IPG 4901 Device , on page 343.
• For certain third-party devices you may have to configure port redundancy manually.
See
Setting Port Redundancy for Many Devices at Once , on page 220.
To configure SMPTE ST 2022-7 example
1 Add the following devices to the Topology: from the Device Library , Virtual Device , add the following device bubbles to the Topology. See
To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
Quantity
2
2
2 3 instances in a group
2 3 instances in a group
Device
Network Switch
IPG-3901
Camera
Monitor
400
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Arrange the devices on the Topology as shown below.
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7
2 Activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
3 Configure the devices on the Topology. See
Special Devices , on page 331. For any other
device, see
Adding Devices to a Topology , on page 204.
401
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 Click Quick Connect to link the devices as shown below. See
Link all Devices in a Topology , on page 222. See also Methods to Link Devices in a
2 8
4
6
1 10
5
3 9
7
Much more elaborate systems can be configured. The objective is to connect all SMPTE
ST 2022-7 IP devices (#2 to #9) to both network switches (RED and BLUE).
5 If you are manually making the connections between the devices, select the links between devices, one at a time, to make the connections between devices as shown below. See
Manually Setting the Link’s Physical Connection Parameters (Sources and
Destinations) , on page 225. If you use Quick Connect, this is not necessary.
Link
# From
1 Camera
2 IPG-3901
3 IPG-3901
To
IPG-3901
Network Switch
RED
Network Switch
BLUE
IPG-3901
Make the following connections
From To
Cam1
Cam2
Cam3
ETH1
SDI to 1 (Input Port Id: 3)
SDI to 2 (Input Port Id: 4)
SDI to 3 (Input Port Id: 5)
SwitchIn1
ETH2
SwitchOut1
SwitchIn1
ETH1 4 Network Switch
RED
5 Network Switch
BLUE
6 IPG-3901-A
IPG-3901
Network Switch
RED
SwitchOut1
ETH1
ETH2
SwitchIn2
402
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Network Switch Redundancy to Support SMPTE ST 2022 7
Link
# From
7 IPG-3901-A
To
Network Switch
BLUE
IPG-3901-A
Make the following connections
From
ETH2
To
SwitchIn2
SwitchOut2 ETH1 8 Network Switch
RED
9 Network Switch
BLUE
10 IPG-3901
IPG-3901-A
Camera
SwitchOut2
SDI to 1 (Output Port Id: 3)
SDI to 2 (Output Port Id: 4)
SDI to 3 (Output Port Id: 5)
ETH2
Mon1
Mon2
Mon3
403
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an NVISION Hybrid Series Router
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuring an NVISION Hybrid Series Router
To control an NVISION Hybrid Series Router, GV Orbit Control uses the NP0016 router control protocol. The following NVISION Hybrid Routers are supported: NV8140, NV8144,
NV8280, NV8576 or NV8576 Plus. Once the IP address(es) have been added to the Control
Port(s) that connects to the NVISION Hybrid Series Router, the router’s configuration is read into GV Orbit Control, and the router’s card types and ports are automatically configured within GV Orbit Control.
PREREQUISITE: You must have a list of the card type for each slot in the router’s frame. This information may be available in the router’s MRC configuration software.
LIMITATIONS:
• The disembedder / embedder output card is currently not supported.
• The following topology use case is unsupported.
The tieline between two NVISION Hybrid Routers should not be MADI (for example, to link between a MADI source and a MADI destination). Taking a MADI source to a MADI destination will only work if both of them are directly connected to the same NVISION
Hybrid Series Router.
• The following topology use case does not support lock and protect from a third-party control system on the NVISION Hybrid Router for a Logical Destination.
Any output of a NVISION Hybrid Router that is connected to another router cannot be locked in GV Orbit Control. GV Orbit Control will only update the lock/protect status of a destination which is directly connected to the NVISION Hybrid Router (that is, without any other devices in-between).
404
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an NVISION Hybrid Series Router
To configure an NVISION Hybrid Series Router Device
1 Add the NV Hybrid Router device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Virtual
Device , find the NV Hybrid Router
device bubble. See To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
2 The control port(s) must be configured to allow communication with the router thereby permitting GV Orbit Control to control the router. NVISION Hybrid Series
Routers are controlled through the NP0016 router control protocol.
Select the NV Hybrid Router bubble and click New next to Control Port at the top of the Property Editor and select the router’s control protocol from the list. Dummy can be used for testing purposes (or pre-deployment) when the actual router model is unknown. See also
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more information.
A tab for the selected router model appears. Select this tab to configure the control port.
If the router has a second redundant network connection for controlling it, add a second control port and configure it the same way as the first one except for the IP address which must reflect that of the router’s second network connection.
Specifically, you must set the router’s control port IP Address and IP Port number parameters.
Router Control Protocol See
NP0016 Compact Router
NP0016 Compact Router Control Port Configuration Parameters , on page 415
NP0016 Enterprise Router
NP0016 Enterprise Router Control Port Configuration Parameters , on page 415
To delete a control port, see
To delete a router’s control port , on page 414.
3 Activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
405
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an NVISION Hybrid Series Router
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The Connection State 1 / 2 status for the control port(s) becomes Online when is has successfully connected to the NVISION Hybrid router.
Once GV Orbit Control has connected to the NVISION Hybrid Router through the
Control Port, it reads the router’s configuration to then automatically configure the
NVISION Hybrid Router device properties in GV Orbit Control accordingly. Should the
NVISION Hybrid router’s configuration change (for example, changes have been made to the type and slot location of the router’s cards), the router’s configuration can be reloaded into GV Orbit Control; see
4 Deactivate the topology. See
Making an Active Topology Inactive , on page 236.
5 Configure the NVISION Hybrid Series Router properties. See also
Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter Description
Network Host Name The hostname is the unique name by which the associated NVISION
Hybrid Series Router is known on the network.
Audio Physical Level
ID
Video Physical Level
ID
From the NVISION Hybrid Series Router’s configuration, specify the level ID number that has been assigned to the router’s audio matrix.
Usually this is 2.
From the NVISION Hybrid Series Router’s configuration, specify the level ID number that has been assigned to the router’s video matrix.
Usually this is 1.
NVision Hybrid Router
Type
Advanced > Internal
Wiring Done
Shows the router’s model type. This is automatically read from the router.
Shows if the internal modeling of the NVISION Hybrid Router is complete.
6 This step is optional; setting the Card Type for each slot in the router’s frame can automatically be done by GV Orbit Control: To automatically update GV Orbit Control’s configuration when the type and slot location of the cards have been changed in the router, see
To automatically refresh the NVISION Hybrid router’s card information in
GV Orbit Control , on page 409.
Manually set the router’s card type for any of the router’s input and output slots that need to be updated: select an Input Slot or Output Slot in the router’s frame in the
406
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an NVISION Hybrid Series Router
Property Editor and then set the card type in the Card Type parameter. If the slot has no card installed in it, set the Card Type parameter to NONE .
407
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an NVISION Hybrid Series Router
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
7 Select each input or output port to configure them individually. These are the configuration parameters for each of the router’s input/output ports. See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
User Guide
408
Parameter
Port Identifier
Number
Description
This is the generic identifier of the port within GV Orbit Control.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
Direction
Connector Type
Capacity (bps)
Bandwidth Usage
(bps)
The stream’s data rate.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
Embedder bypassed Shows the current embedder status for the selected output port according to the current path being routed. See also
When set, the output embedder is not being used.
When deselected, the output embedder is being used.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an NVISION Hybrid Series Router
8 Select each steam found under each input and output port to configure them individually. These are the configuration parameters for the individual streams carried on a network port. See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
To automatically refresh the NVISION Hybrid router’s card information in GV Orbit
Control
When the router has been reconfigured with new or different cards, GV Orbit Control can read the router’s configuration again to automatically configure the NVISION Hybrid Router device properties in GV Orbit Control accordingly.
1 De-activate the topology if activated. See Making an Active Topology Inactive , on page 236.
2 Select one of the router’s control ports.
3 Scroll-down the router’s Device Properties list to the control port.
4 Click Update Slotted Cards and then click OK .
GV Orbit Control reads the router’s configuration to then automatically configure the
NVISION Hybrid Router device properties in GV Orbit Control accordingly.
5 Activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
409
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Router Devices
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuring Router Devices
The following procedure configures a router device. Different models of routers use a range of control protocols that GV Orbit Control uses to control the router. Each router control protocol is individually covered in follow up procedures: see also
For more information about how GV Orbit Control manages a router’s Lock, Protect, and
Release, see also
About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460.
To configure a Router Device
1 Add the Router device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Virtual Devices , find the Router Device
bubble. See To add a Virtual Device to a topology , on page 204.
2 Add and configure router control port(s) according to the router model you want to control. Control port(s) must be configured to allow communication with the router thereby permitting GV Orbit Control to control the router; see
3 Select the router’s tab (next to Control Port at the top of the Property Editor ) to configure the Device Properties in the Property Editor
Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Physical Level ID
Description
Network Host Name The hostname is the unique name by which the associated router is known on the network.
Set the Physical Level ID value that has been configured for the corresponding router to be controlled by this device instance. To obtain this value, use the router’s native configuration interface.
Advanced > Default
Connector Type
Controller Starting
Input
The router’s physical interface port connector: HD/SDI , IP/RJ-45 ,
MADI .
The starting input port number from which you want to control the router’s physical level.
Controller Starting
Output
The starting output port number from which you want to control the router’s physical level.
410
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Router Devices
4 Set the number of physical input and output connectors being used on the router in #
Input Connectors and # Output Connectors .
The configuration for these ports become available as Ports under IN and OUT .
411
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring Router Devices
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
5 Select each input or output port to configure them individually. These are the configuration parameters for each of the router’s input/output ports. See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
User Guide
412
Parameter
Port Identifier
Number
Direction
Connector Type
Capacity (bps)
Bandwidth Usage
(bps)
IP Address
Redundancy Port
Description
This is the generic identifier of the port within GV Orbit Control.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
The stream’s data rate.
This shows the current status for information purposes.
This is the interface IP address of the selected port. This is currently not used in the router virtual device.
Associate this port with another port to create a redundant network traffic flow path for failover protection. The associated port will not be available to carry other traffic.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
6 Select each steam found under each input and output port to configure them individually. These are the configuration parameters for the individual streams carried on a network port. See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
Control port(s) must be configured to allow communication with the router thereby permitting GV Orbit Control to control the router. There are many types of control ports suited to the router’s individual model or control protocol. First, you must add a control port to the router’s configuration in GV Orbit Control and then configure it.
PREREQUISITE: Add a router device to the Topology Configurator. See To configure a Router
To add a router control port
1 Select the Router bubble on the Topology Configurator and then select Device
Properties and click New next to Control Port at the top of the Property Editor and select the router’s model / control protocol from the list. Dummy can be used for testing purposes (or pre-deployment) when the actual router model is unknown. See also
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more information.
A tab for the selected router model appears. Select this tab to configure the control port. The control port(s) must be configured to allow communication with the router thereby permitting GV Orbit Control to control the router.
If the router has a second redundant network connection for controlling it, add a second control port and configure it the same way as the first one except for the IP address which must reflect that of the router’s second network connection.
2 Configure the control port. See below.
413
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
To delete a router’s control port
Delete a router’s control port as follows.
1 De-activate the topology if activated. See
Making an Active Topology Inactive , on page 236.
2 Select one of the router’s control ports.
3 Scroll-down the router’s Device Properties list to the control port
414
4 Click Delete .
Supported router control protocols
The following router control protocols are supported.
Router Control Protocol See
NP0016 Compact Router
NP0016 Compact Router Control Port Configuration Parameters , on page 415
NP0016 Enterprise Router
NP0016 Enterprise Router Control Port Configuration Parameters , on page 415
NS-BUS
NV9000 TCP/IP (NP0017 device-based)
SAM SW-P-08 TCP/IP
NS-BUS Control Port Configuration Parameters
NV9000 TCP/IP Control Port Configuration Parameters , on page 418
SAM SW-P-08 TCP/IP Control Port Configuration Parameters , on
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
NP0016 Compact Router Control Port Configuration Parameters
See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
IP Address
Connection State 1
Connection State 2
Connections From
Multiple Servers
IP Port
In router Lock/Protect enabled
Description
The network IP address for the associated router’s management or control port Ethernet address.
Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the router with the primary server of a server group.
Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the router with the secondary server of a server group. See
unknown: The topology is inactive (see
Activating a Topology , on page 235) or the router does not have network connectivity to the
GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The router does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit
Server(s).
online: The router is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
Set this if the router supports multiple concurrent connections to it.
When set, this allows GV Orbit Control main and backup servers to connect at the same time to the router, thereby increasing system availability.
Port number for the control port stream used by the router. The default is 5194.
Set to transfer the management of Locks/Protects from the GV Orbit
Control control system to the Router for destinations that are directly connected to this router.
Deselect to manage all Lock/Protect in GV Orbit Control exclusively.
See
NP0016 Enterprise Router Control Port Configuration Parameters
The enterprise router control port supports the protocol's 'Coherent take' command when
performing multiple crosspoint changes at the same time. See also Description of Common
Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
IP Address
Description
The network IP address for the associated router’s management or control port Ethernet address.
415
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
Connection State 1
Connection State 2
Connections From
Multiple Servers
IP Port
In router Lock/Protect enabled
Use Coherent Take
Message
Description
Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the router with the primary server of a server group.
Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the router with the secondary server of a server group. See
unknown:
GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The router does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit
Server(s).
online: The router is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
Set this if the router supports multiple concurrent connections to it.
When set, this allows GV Orbit Control main and backup servers to connect at the same time to the router, thereby increasing system availability.
Port number for the control port stream used by the router. The default is 5194.
Set to transfer the management of Locks/Protects from the GV Orbit
Control control system to the Router for destinations that are directly connected to this router.
Deselect to manage all Lock/Protect in GV Orbit Control exclusively.
See
Set for GV Orbit Control to use the protocol's 'Coherent take' command when performing multiple crosspoint changes at the same time for this router.
416
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
About In router Lock/Protect enabled for a Router using NP0016 router control protocol
For a router using the NP0016 router control protocol, Lock, Protect, and Release have different behaviors depending on whether the In router Lock/Protect enabled parameter is set in the Router Control Port configuration.
In router
Lock/Protect enabled parameter Description
Set For destinations that are directly attached to the router, this setting transfers the management of Locks/Protects from the GV Orbit Control control system to this router, thereby allowing better third-party router control integration with GV Orbit Control. This is called in router lock and protect.
This setting keeps the router’s Lock/Protect and GV Orbit Control’s
Lock/Protect in synchronization as follows:
• If a Lock/Protect is updated in the router, it's also updated in GV Orbit
Control.
• If a Lock/Protect is updated in GV Orbit Control, it's also updated in the router.
This option has the following effects and consequences: When locks / protections are created in the router through another control system, the user name used to create the locks / protections will be unknown to GV Orbit Control’s user management mechanism. These unknown users are treated as admin users within GV Orbit Control. Note that admin users within GV Orbit Control can override the locks and protections of any other GV Orbit Control user. This means that any third-party control system will override locks / protections made in
GV Orbit Control.
Deselected GV Orbit Control stores the locks in its database and they are preserved after a restart/reboot. As such, destinations will remain locked/protected. GV Orbit Control system does not read a lock from a router and does not control a lock in the router. This is called in control system lock and protect. This is how all other types of routers are managed.
Locks and protections are made in GV Orbit Control without consideration of any locks and protections that have been made through another control system (locks and protections are not synchronized between GV Orbit Control and the router). This can result in unexpected routing behavior such as a failed path that looks as though it should have been successful.
See also
About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460.
417
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
NS-BUS Control Port Configuration Parameters
See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Connection State 1
Connection State 2
IP Address
IP Port
Multiple Connections
Capable
Description
Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the router with the primary server of a server group.
Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the router with the secondary server of a server group. See
unknown:
GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The router does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit
Server(s).
online: The router is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
The network IP address for the associated router’s management or control port Ethernet address.
Port number for the control port stream used by the router. The default is 37800.
Set this if the router supports multiple concurrent connections to it.
When set, this allows GV Orbit Control main and backup servers to connect at the same time to the router, thereby increasing system availability.
NV9000 TCP/IP Control Port Configuration Parameters
This option uses the NP0017 device-based router control protocol to control an NV9000 router through Ethernet network link(s). If the router has two control ports, add a second
control port, one for each control port on the router. See also Description of Common
Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
IP Address
Connection State 1
Connection State 2
Description
The network IP address for the associated router’s management or control port Ethernet address.
Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the router with the primary server of a server group.
Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the router with the secondary server of a server group. See
unknown:
GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The router does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit
Server(s).
online: The router is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
418
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
Parameter
Connections From
Multiple Servers
IP Port
Protocol
Description
Set this if the router supports multiple concurrent connections to it.
When set, this allows GV Orbit Control main and backup servers to connect at the same time to the router, thereby increasing system availability.
Port number for the control port stream used by the router.
The IP connection protocol.
TCP: A point-to-point connection protocol.
UDP: A stateless connection protocol that can also broadcast data to more than one device.
Lock, Protect, and Release with the NV9000 Control Port
GV Orbit Control stores the locks in its database and they are preserved after a restart/reboot. As such, destinations will remain locked/protected. The GV Orbit Control system does not read a lock from a router and does not control a lock in the router.
See also
About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460.
SAM SW-P-08 TCP/IP Control Port Configuration Parameters
Grass Valley/Pro Bel devices including the Sirius router that use the Pro Bel SW-P-08 switcher protocol can be controlled by GV Orbit Control through an IP network. These routers use two control ports to control them.
LIMITATION: GV Orbit Control control of a Sirius router is limited to a maximum of 1152
2 crosspoints using single-level X-Y control.
To connect the GV Orbit Server to the router
1 Add two control ports in GV Orbit Control. See To add a router control port , on page 413.
2 Configure both control port configuration parameters. See also
Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
IP Address
Connection State 1
Connection State 2
Description
The network IP address for the associated router’s management or control port Ethernet address.
Connection State 1 shows the connection status of the router with the primary server of a server group.
Connection State 2 shows the connection status of the router with the secondary server of a server group. See
unknown:
GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The router does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit
Server(s).
online: The router is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
419
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Router’s Control Port
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Parameter
Connections From
Multiple Servers
Description
Set this if the router supports multiple concurrent connections to it.
When set, this allows GV Orbit Control main and backup servers to connect at the same time to the router, thereby increasing system availability.
IP Port
Matrix ID
Port number for the control port stream used by the router. The default is 14000.
A SW-P-08 device can have multiple matrices, each with multiple physical levels. Set the Matrix ID value that has been configured for the corresponding router to be controlled by this device instance. To obtain this value, use the router’s native configuration interface.
Refer to your router’s documentation for more information about this parameter.
Set this to poll the crosspoint status at regular intervals.
Polling
Protocol The IP connection protocol.
TCP: A point-to-point connection protocol.
UDP: A stateless connection protocol that can also broadcast data to more than one device.
Use Extended Mode Set this for GV Orbit Control to try to use the extended command set of the SW-P-08 protocol with the router first. Extended commands allow routers larger than 1023 1023 to be controlled. If the router does not support extended commands, the GV Orbit Control will fallback to the standard command set and with it, the associated control limitations.
420
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring a Device that Supports Audio Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live
Configuring a Device that Supports Audio Breakaway/Shuffling such as Audio Live
Audio breakaway and shuffling can be done by Audio Live and by GV Node. Audio Live is designed specifically for audio processing.
About Audio Live
Input Streams
Audio Live is an IP-only device that manages audio feeds only. It accepts a number of AES67 streams as inputs. Internally, it demultiplexes these inputs to obtain a series of mono PCM audio channels which then go through an audio router. Outputs from the router get multiplexed in accordance with the required output configuration. This allows Audio Live to perform breakaway and/or shuffling of mono channel audio feeds, in addition to audio format conversion.
Demultiplexers Multiplexers Output Streams
Channel 1
Channel 2
1
2
1
2
Channel 1
Channel 2
AES
Stream
1
Channel 16
Channel 1
Channel 2
16
17
18
AES
Stream
1
AES
Stream
2
Channel 16 32 32 Channel 32
Internal Audio Matrix
2048 × 2048
2017
2018
Channel 1
Channel 2
Channel 1
Channel 2
2031
2032
AES
Stream
64
AES
Stream
2
Channel 16 2048 2048 Channel 32
Example Audio Live configuration with 128 16 matrix for the input and 64 32 matrix for the output
The inputs and outputs of an Audio Live are called spigots . There are a variety of spigot configurations that are available. See also
How to Know if a Spigot is an Input or an Output , on page 353.
GV Orbit Control is able to detect the number of channels in the input spigots and will assign one of the AES67 levels to the input stream for each spigot (for example, AES67-4,
AES67-8, AES67-16, AES67-32 or AES67-64). This is conditional on having configured the input spigots in GV Orbit Client to not use the Auto setting for the number channels. This is shown in the procedure below (
Required Audio Live Configuration in the GV Orbit Client
421
Special Device Configuration Tasks
About the Routing Path of Audio Channels
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
GV Orbit Control will detect the number of channels in the output spigots and one of the
AES67 logical levels will be automatically assigned to the output stream of each output spigot (for example, AES67-4, AES67-8, AES67-16, AES67-32 or AES67-64).
Audio Live can accept audio packets with any packet time on the input. Audio Live can convert audio packet times as well as the number of channels in the streams. For example, an input spigot accepts an AES67 stream with 8 channels and packet time of 1 millisecond, and route the signals to an output spigot with 16 channels and packet time of 250 microseconds. When using audio streams with different packet times however, extra configuration steps are required: see
Required Configuration for Audio Streams with
Different Packet Times , on page 425.
About the Routing Path of Audio Channels
If there are multiple devices on the topology that can perform audio shuffling, Audio Live will not necessarily always do the shuffle. For example, if the first device reached along the path (from destination to source) is a GV Node, then the GV Node may do the shuffle. It is
GV Orbit Control that determines whether and when Audio Live is required for a given route. To know if an Audio Live or GV Node device is currently in use for a given route, use the Path Manager to see if there are tie-line connections to the Audio Live / GV Node
device. See Path Manager Tasks , on page 438.
Prerequisites
Audio Live v1.5 or higher must be connected to the network, licensed, and has been previously configured with GV Orbit Client.
Required Audio Live Configuration in the GV Orbit Client Control Panel
In the Audio Live User Guide , see the following topics that must be configured according to your needs.
1 In GV Orbit Client, set the size of Audio Live’s audio matrix ( Maximum Supported
Channel Count ) and the number of channels per AES input and output streams. This setting is found under Audio Live > Setup > System Configuration > Input
Configuration and Output Configuration .
2 Stop the Audio Live server in Agent Configuration ; under Available Agents , select
Audio Live and click Stop .
422
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Prerequisites
3 Once the Status under Selected Agent becomes Stopped , click Start .
4 In GV Orbit Client, set the Channels parameter to the maximum number of channels available for each stream . This setting is found under Audio Live > Input > Source Flows
> Channels .
For each available stream, you must...
Set the number of channels to the maximum available in this dropdown. Note: the default
Auto setting will not work.
423
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Prerequisites
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Setting the maximum number of channels is necessary as GV Orbit Control expects that all channels be available for it to use at any time.
5 Click Take .
6 In GV Orbit Client under Audio Live > Output > Dest Flows :
• Set the Channels parameter to the maximum number of channels available for each stream . This setting is found under Audio Live > Output > Dest Flows .
• Set the Packet Time parameter according to the number of channels configured for each stream . See table below. This setting is found under Audio Live > Output >
Dest Flows .
Packet Time
125us
250us
500us
1ms
4 ms
Maximum number of channels that the stream can carry up to 64 channels up to 32 channels up to 16 channels up to 8 channels up to 2 channels
7 Click Take .
AES Logical Levels that are used for IP Audio Streams
To support a GVOP device’s ability to support a range of audio channels per AES stream (for devices such as Audio Live; see
GVOP Devices , on page 206), and on GVOP devices that
support this feature, the following logical levels are used according to the number of
424
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Prerequisites channels in the AES stream. See also
Logical Level Editor Tasks , on page 190 and
Logical Levels to be Displayed in the Multilevel Table , on page 247.
Logical Level
AES67-4
AES67-8
AES67-16
AES67-32
AES67-64
Description
4 mono audio channels
8 mono audio channels
16 mono audio channels
This logical level is interchangeable with the SDI audio logical level.
32 mono audio channels
64 mono audio channels
To see the number of audio channels a given logical level supports, see
Required Configuration for Audio Streams with Different Packet Times
If for a given topology, all audio streams have the same packet time, then the automatically assigned levels to the output spigots will work. If the topology has audio streams with different packet times, you will have to configure the packet times on Audio Live’s output spigots. Currently GV Orbit Control is unaware of these settings in GV Orbit Client, so you must proceed as follows: duplicate the SDI audio level as many times as there are different
packet times. To duplicate an SDI audio level, see Duplicating a Logical Level , on page 193.
For example, to accommodate a 1 microsecond audio packet time, you duplicate the SDI audio level with the -1 suffix. To accommodate a 250 microseconds audio packet time, you again duplicate the SDI audio level with the -250 suffix.
425
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an Audio Live device in GV Orbit Control
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
You also need to set the proper AES67 levels on the Audio Live output streams in GV Orbit
Control. For example:
• If output spigot 1 has been configured with 16 channels at 250 microseconds, then the streams for output spigot 1 should be assigned the AES67-16-250 level.
• If the output spigot has been configured with 8 channels at 1 ms, then the streams for that spigot should be assigned the AES67-8-1 level.
Note: You will need to set the level on all output streams of the Audio Live configuration in GV Orbit Control if your topology uses more than one packet time value.
Configuring an Audio Live device in GV Orbit Control
To add an Audio Live device to a topology
1 Add the Audio Live device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Discovered , find an Audio Live device bubble that you want to control. See
To add a Discovered Device to a Topology , on page 209.
2 Click on the name of the device underneath the bubble to name the device or device
group. See To name a device and set the number of devices in the group , on page 205.
426
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an Audio Live device in GV Orbit Control
3 On the topology, connect the Audio Live device to the network switches. See
Methods to Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
By default, the Audio Live device is created according to the configuration defined in
GV Orbit Client. The streams are assigned the appropriate AES67 levels, based on the number of channels. The Audio Live can be used as is, without a need to modify the device properties in the Property Editor, unless you need to modify the streams to use custom levels.
4 Select the Audio Live bubble and configure the Device Properties in the Property
Editor . See
Defining Device Properties , on page 229 for more information.
427
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an Audio Live device in GV Orbit Control
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
See also
Description of Common Device Properties , on page 332.
Parameter
Name (of device bubble)
Name (found under
Node)
Nodes
Software
Primary IP Address
Secondary IP Address
Connection to
Controller 1
Connection to controller 2
Primary spigot routing count
Primary matrix routing count
Redundancy Mode
Description
The name of the Audio Live device set in GV Orbit Client. When two
Audio Live devices have been configured to be redundant, the name comes from the primary device.
The name of the individual Audio Live device set in GV Orbit Client.
When two Audio Live devices have been configured to be redundant:
Node 1: The Audio Live that has been configured as Redundant -
Primary in RollCall.
Node 2: The Audio Live that has been configured as Redundant -
Secondary in RollCall.
See
Audio Live Redundancy Support , on page 429.
The firmware version running on the Audio Live device.
When two Audio Live devices have been configured to be redundant:
Primary IP Address: The IP Address of the Audio Live that has been configured as Redundant - Primary .
Secondary IP Address: The IP Address of the Audio Live that has been configured as Redundant - Secondary .
See
Audio Live Redundancy Support , on page 429.
Connection to Controller 1 shows the connection status of the Audio
Live device with the primary server of a server group.
Connection to Controller 2 shows the connection status of the Audio
Live device with the secondary server of a server group. See
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179.
unknown:
connectivity to the GV Orbit Server(s).
offline: The Audio Live device does not have network connectivity to the GV Orbit Server(s).
online: The Audio Live device is connected to the GV Orbit Server(s).
These paramters come from the Audio Live’s configuration made in
RollCall.
Shows the Audio Live’s current configuration.
Independent: This Audio Live bubble represents a single Audio Live device.
Redundant: This Audio Live bubble represents a pair of Audio Live devices operating in a cluster for improved availability. See
Redundancy Support , on page 429.
428
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Known Audio Live limitations
6 Test the configuration by making takes between a logical source and destination that
use the AES67 audio levels. See Performing a Take in Router Control , on page 459.
Known Audio Live limitations
• When choosing an Audio Live spigot to use for the take, GV Orbit Control will only use an output spigot that has the same number of channels as the destination, and only use an input spigot that has the same number of channels as the source. If no such spigot is available, the take will fail. It will not try to use multiple spigots (for example, if the source/destination is 16 channels, it will not try to use 2 spigots, each with 8 channels), and it will not try to use part of a spigot (for example, if the source/destination is 8 channels, it would not try to use the first 8 channels of a 16 channel spigot).
• In the Audio Live configuration, the channel count of an Input Configuration and
Output Configuration cannot be set to Auto as GV Orbit Control does not support this setting. See
Required Audio Live Configuration in the GV Orbit Client Control Panel , on page 422.
• The number of channels on the input stream must match the number of channels on the source stream, and the number of channels on the output stream must match the number of channels on the destination stream.
• For streams that have an AES67-X level, the logical source/destination that is automatically created is not usable. Instead, you must create custom logical sources and destinations, and place the streams in the SDI Audio or audio1 to audio16 level columns instead. See
Required Configuration for Audio Streams with Different Packet
Audio Live Redundancy Support
Audio Live redundancy is supported in GV Orbit Control systems with Audio Live v1.5.3 firmware version or higher. With this Audio Live firmware, each Audio Live unit can be configured as Independent , Redundant - Primary , or Redundant - Secondary . These configuration parameters are available through the RollCall Unit Redundancy page, for each unit. When two Audio Live units are configured as follows, the units form a cluster for increased availability: Audio Live 1 is configured as Redundant - Primary and Audio Live 2 is configured as Redundant - Secondary .
429
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Audio Live Redundancy Support
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Audio Live Network Connections
The Audio Live Primary and Secondary input and output ports from both units must be connected to RED and BLUE network switches and the corresponding spigots/streams must be properly configured.
Inputs
Media Port 1
Media Port 2
Audio Live 1
Primary
Synchronization
Media Port 1
Media Port 2
×
Outputs
Media Port 1
Media Port 2
Audio Live 2
Secondary
Media Port 1
Media Port 2
×
Red / Network A The receiver
Blue / Network B
×
Unused chooses which output to use
For more information about network connections, refer to GV Orbit Server Cabling chapter of the GV Orbit Admin Guide
. See Related Documentation , on page 19.
Redundancy on Audio Live was designed to prevent signal loss or signal glitching in case of a hardware failure of one of the two units. In order to achieve this, the Audio Live cluster is using, on the sender side, the primary port from the Primary unit as the cluster primary output, whereas the secondary port of the secondary unit is used as the cluster secondary output.
The secondary output from the primary unit and the primary output from the secondary unit are not used by the GV Orbit Control systems.
On the receiver side, input ports from both Primary and Secondary units are used and join the same flows; primary input from the primary unit and the primary input from the secondary unit, as well as the secondary input from the primary unit and the secondary input from the secondary unit. The input and output ports currently being used are displayed through the Path Manager. See
Path Manager Tasks , on page 438.
Required Audio Live Configuration in RollCall
Access the Audio Lives units, one at a time through RollCall and configure them as follows in their Unit Redundancy page. For redundancy support, both Audio Live units must be
430
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Audio Live Redundancy Support configured in redundancy mode, one unit as Redundant - Primary and the other one as
Redundant - Secondary .
Parameter
Unit State
Description
Shows this unit’s state.
-: Unknown status.
Initializing: Unit is in the process of connecting and synchronizing with the partnered unit.
Running : Unit has successfully paired with the partnered unit.
Partner State Shows the partnered unit’s state, when available.
-: Unknown status.
Running : Unit has successfully paired with this unit.
Redundancy Status Shows the status of the paired Audio Live units.
Matched: The two Audio Live units are operating with redundancy.
Error: Configuration or communication issue.
Unit assignment
Network interface
Partner IP Address
Set this unit’s role.
Independent: This unit is not associated with another Audio Live unit; there is no Audio Live redundancy currently enabled.
Redundant - Primary: This unit is the primary unit to be associated to another Audio Live unit (the secondary unit) for redundancy through the Partner IP Address parameter.
Redundant - Secondary: This unit is the secondary unit to be associated to another Audio Live unit (the primary unit) for redundancy through the Partner IP Address parameter.
Set the Ethernet interface on which this Audio Live is to communicate with the other Audio Live. With redundancy, this must be set on both units such that both Audio Live units have network connectivity with each other.
With redundancy, set the IP Address of the other Audio Live device. If this is the primary unit, set the secondary unit’s IP address. If this is the secondary unit, set the primary unit’s IP address.
Both units must be identically configured with respect to any parameter that can affect the output audio. This is done in each Audio Live’s RollCall configuration. This includes:
• Spigot routing (destinations and sources).
431
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Audio Live Redundancy Support
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• Internal channel matrix routing.
• Input and output configurations. In GV Orbit Client, set the size of Audio Live’s audio matrix ( Maximum Supported Channel Count ) and the number of channels per AES input and output streams. This setting is found under Audio Live > Setup > System
Configuration > Input Configuration and Output Configuration .
• Input and output delays.
• Timestamp alignment settings.
• Input 2110-31/AES3 selections.
• Input synchronizer selections.
• Output channel counts and packet times.
Once the Audio Live configuration is complete, both units are synchronized in order to exchange flow data in order to handle redundancy.
Redundant Audio Live Configuration in GV Orbit Control
It is important to have both units up-and-running while configuring the Audio Live cluster in GV Orbit Control. Once the Audio Live cluster configuration is completed, the cluster will be discovered in GV Orbit Control systems, as a GVOP discovered device. If there is any configuration issue between the two Audio Live units, causing the cluster to be in a bad state (not synchronizing properly), then the discovered entity will not be discovered under the GV Orbit Control system and if the device is already on the topology, its status will change to offline.
A new icon is used to distinguish between Audio Live units using v1.5.3 firmware and units using an older firmware, regardless of the redundancy mode (Independent or Redundant).
Audio Live Icon Audio Live Firmware Version Description v1.5.2 or lower Audio Live redundancy is unsupported.
v1.5.3 or higher Audio Live redundancy is supported.
The name of the discovered cluster and its related spigots will be using the ones from the primary Audio Live unit.
Once the cluster is added to the topology, the cluster group device will be listing two nodes corresponding to the two Audio Live units. Each node will provide the Audio Live unit properties (Unit name, hostname, Control IP address, GUID. and so on) and also the specific
unit ports and spigots. See Configuring an Audio Live device in GV Orbit Control , on page 426.
The cluster device group lists the ports and the spigots from those units; the primary port is the one from the primary unit where the secondary port is the one from the secondary unit.
432
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Audio Live Redundancy Support
The cluster Redundancy mode property will reflect the current cluster status (Independent or Redundant).
The control port status (Online / Offline / Reconnecting) for the cluster is available on the cluster device group and also through the System Status page where the status for both units is also available. See
System Status Task , on page 445.
Further notes:
• When replacing a failed unit, it's important to apply the same IP configuration to the new unit as was applied to the previous faulty unit, otherwise tally issues may occur.
• Independent Audio Live units from existing topologies, using an older Audio Live firmware, cannot be used for redundancy. Those units must be deleted from the topology, upgraded to v1.5.3 firmware (or higher), configured in a cluster mode and then they will be discovered by GV Orbit Control systems.
• No changes will be noticed if an independent Audio Live unit, using v1.5.3 Audio Live firmware (or higher) is added to the topology, except the new icon and the new unit
Redundancy Mode, shown as Independent .
• Cisco DCNM host policies are only created for the streams corresponding to the ports that are actually used by GV Orbit Control systems.
433
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Configuring an IQAMD40 Device
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuring an IQAMD40 Device
About IQAMD40
The IQAMD40 provides multichannel MADI-to-IP interfacing, and has been developed to allow high-density audio integration into Ethernet IP networks. Using industry standard
AES67 encapsulation and an IP interface enables the IQAMD40 to interface directly with many common audio desks and systems.
PREREQUISITES: IQAMD40 must be connected to the network, licensed, and has been previously configured with GV Orbit Client.
IQAMD40 Integration in GV Orbit Control
GV Orbit Control supports the routing of audio signals through an IQAMD40 card.
To add an IQAMD device to a topology
1 Add the IQAMD device to the Topology: from the Device Library , Discovered , find an
IQAMD device bubble that you want to control. See
To add a Discovered Device to a
434
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Automatically Creating AES67 Audio Channels for Sources and Destinations
2 On the topology, connect the IQAMD device to the network switches. See
Link Devices in a Topology , on page 222.
Automatically Creating AES67 Audio Channels for Sources and Destinations
GV Orbit Control routes multiples of 16 audio channels by default. As a result, if you want to send 64 audio channels to a destination, you create four destinations with 16 audio channels each.
An automation shown in the procedure below allows you to add the all the Stream’s AES67 audio channels to the Multilevel Table in the Logical Device Table at once for AES67 sources and destinations.
To automatically create the AES67 audio channels for sources and destinations
1 In the Logical Device Table, Multilevel Table, select the Sources tab.
2 Select one or more streams in the Stream Browser (using <Ctrl> + click) for which you want to create all the source / destination audio channels.
3 Click to show the Channel Browser in the Stream Browser of the Logical Device
Table. See Stream Browser / Channel Browser , on page 242.
4 Click to select all in the Channel Browser.
435
Special Device Configuration Tasks
Automatically Creating AES67 Audio Channels for Sources and Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
5 Click automated sources / destinations in the Channel Browser to create the selected streams in the multilevel Table.
The 64 audio streams are created as four sources / destinations with 16 audio channels each.
6 Select the Destinations tab and repeat from
7 Test the configuration by making takes between a logical source and destination that use AES67 levels. See
Performing a Take in Router Control , on page 459.
436
Overview
The Monitoring tasks in GV Orbit Control are used to view information about tie line use and the source to destination path of the streams and to monitor the health of the GV Orbit
Servers and the devices in the selected topology.
The GV Orbit Control Monitoring Tasks include:
•
Path Manager Tasks , on page 438
•
System Status Task , on page 445
•
Audio Live Usage , on page 451
437
Monitoring Tasks
Path Manager Tasks
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Path Manager Tasks
Use the Path Manager task to view information about the tie-line use and the source to destination path of the streams. Tie-lines also show the current percentage of bandwidth used.
When a topology includes a DCNM Network Switch, the Path Manager shows:
• Technical information that can be used to help diagnose network connectivity and path issues (no signal or wrong signal at the destination).
• The overall health status of each Network Switch device.
DCNM
Network
Switches
Click to view more DCNM
Network Switch device detail
The DCNM Network
Switch is currently offline
Percent of currently-used bandwidth
Network Switch devices have a blue bubble that when clicked provides more information about the internal status of the DCNM Network Switch that is shown in the Status tab.
438
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Monitoring Tasks
Accessing the Path Manager
Interpreting DCNM Network Switch Symbols
The following DCNM network switch symbols are used to represent the Network Switch device’s health.
Symbol Description
The DCNM network switch device is healthy.
Connection to the DCNM network switch device is offline.
To diagnose: Select this device and select the Status tab to view more technical information that can be used to troubleshoot the issue in the DCNM Web interface
(by looking at the host policy / flow policy / flow status).
For a system-level health status, see
System Status Task , on page 445.
Accessing the Path Manager
To access the Path Manager Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Make the topology active. See
Activating a Topology , on page 235.
439
Monitoring Tasks
Accessing the Path Manager
5 Select Monitoring > Path Manager .
The Path Manager task opens:
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
440
Under Path Management, click any of the following tabs for more information:
• Tie-lines
• Streams
• Destinations
• Status
Path Manager Topology Menu
The Path Manager Topology menu has the following menu options.
Icon
Refresh
Description
Reloads the Topology’s contents. See
Refreshing the Topology , on page 202.
Overview Shows the top level of the topology.
Refresh Tielines Allows you to recompute the tielines usage based on the current crosspoints in each device, in case the tieline status in the control system has become out-of-sync with what is actually routed.
During tieline refresh, all tielines are locked and you can not perform any takes. Only use this feature during off hours as this can take up to
30 seconds to complete.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Monitoring Tasks
Viewing Information about the Tie-lines
Viewing Information about the Tie-lines
To view information about the tie-lines
1 Open the Path Manager for the selected topology. See Accessing the Path Manager , on page 439.
2 Click Overview if available.
The tie-lines show their currently-used capacity in percent.
3 Select a tie line in the Topology.
In the Tie-lines tab, the source and destination information is displayed under the following headings:
• Tie line Name
• Tie line Source: Device, Port, Capacity (bps), BW (bps)
• Tie line Destination: Device, Port, Capacity (bps), BW (bps)
• Source
• Destination
Viewing Information about the Streams
To view information about the streams
1 Open the Path Manager for the selected topology. See Accessing the Path Manager , on page 439.
2 Click Overview if available.
3 Select a tie line in the Topology.
4 Select the Streams tab.
5 In Tie-lines, select a tie-line that you want more information on its streams.
441
Monitoring Tasks
Viewing Information about the Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The stream information is displayed under the following headings:
• Stream
• IP address
• BW (bps)
• Source
• Destination
Viewing Information about the Destinations
This tab shows the path for a signal to a destination. If a destination is showing the wrong signal, use this tab to trace the destination signal back to the source or to start fault-finding.
When a topology includes a GV Fabric / DCNM Network Switch, this tab shows operational status information about the path used by a signal to a destination through the GV Fabric /
DCNM Network Switches, GV Node senders and receivers for example. When you select a
Network Switch device that is in alarm, more information about the internal status of the
GV Fabric / DCNM Network Switch is shown in the Status tab.
To view information about the destinations
1 Open the Path Manager for the selected topology. See Accessing the Path Manager , on page 439.
2 Select the Destinations tab.
442
All the destinations are listed on the right.
3 Select a destination. The path details to that destination are shown.
If the topology includes a DCNM Network Switch, the path details will include the spine and leaf connections within the DCNM network. This can be used to diagnose issues with the DCNM network switch or any other signal path issue. For example, the figure
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Monitoring Tasks
Viewing Information about the Status below shows that the RED network is in alarm and as such no signal is passing through this part of the switch’s fabric.
To know more about the DCNM Network switch symbols that are used for health monitoring, see
Interpreting DCNM Network Switch Symbols , on page 439
4 If a DCNM network switch is in alarm, select it and more specific diagnostic information for the related flow shown under the Path Management , Status tab.
Use this information to diagnose path issues, for example, through the switch’s or
GV Node’s native configuration interface.
5 Click Overview to view a highlighted path between the source, shown in green, and the destination, shown in brown.
Viewing Information about the Status
When a topology includes a DCNM Network Switch, this tab shows more technical information about the DCNM Network Switches such as the Network Switch device’s operational status that can be used to diagnose the issue in the path issue, for example, through the switch’s or GV Node’s native configuration interface.
To view information about the status
1 Open the Path Manager for the selected topology. See Accessing the Path Manager , on page 439.
2 Select the Status tab.
443
Monitoring Tasks
Viewing Information about the Status
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
The flow status of the DCNM Network Switches are displayed, if applicable.
User Guide
DCNM
Network
Switches
Click to view more DCNM
Network Switch device detail
The DCNM Network
Switch is currently offline
Percent of currently-used bandwidth
Network Switch devices have a link that when clicked shows the exploded network switch showing more information about spine and leaves, and the bandwidth capacity for each specific link.
Click each switch to see its health of the switch (as report by the switch itself).
Disabled Ports shows a list of all the switch’s disconnected or unused ports that are currently disabled by the switch.
444
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Monitoring Tasks
System Status Task
System Status Task
Use the System Status Task to monitor the health of the GV Orbit Servers and the devices in the selected topology. You can also perform a manual failover from this task.
Accessing the System Status Task
To access the System Status Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Monitoring > System Status .
The System Status task opens:
In this configuration, Controller 1 is the active controller and Controller 2 is not present.
The System Status task displays the following information for both GV Orbit Control controllers: Controller 1 and Controller 2 . Depending on the server hardware model
445
Monitoring Tasks
Accessing the System Status Task
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide and the software applications that are currently installed, certain status parameters shown in the table below will not be displayed.
Parameter
IP
Status
Description
The current controller’s IP address.
The current status of GV Orbit Control Controller 1 and Controller 2 (if equipped):
Active: All GV Orbit Control task are being processed by this controller.
Ina ctive: This controller is in hot standby. It is ready to take over from the active controller.
Force Active:
Make this controller the active controller. See Forcing the
Inactive Controller to be the Active Controller , on page 447.
Health
ID
The current controller’s health metric:
Green bar: Indicates that the controller’s overall health is good.
Red Bar: Indicates an issue requires attention / maintenance actions.
Identifies the members of a cluster:
1: The server that the administrator logged in to when creating the cluster.
This is the first server of the cluster.
2: The second server that was added by an administrator who was logged in to the first server when creating the cluster.
CPU and Memory The current GV Orbit Server’s CPU and memory usage show the current level of activity.
Orbit Control
Memory
The current GV Orbit Server’s memory usage for the local GV Orbit applications.
Densité Memory The current GV Orbit Server’s memory usage for the local Densité application. The percentage reflects the memory used out of its allocated heap size of 8 GB.
Fans The current controller’s cooling fan health:
A green box indicates that the controller’s fans are operating correctly.
PSU Green : the PSU is plugged and detects power.
Red : the PSU doesn't detect power. Possibly the power cable is unplugged.
Gray or no status: the server doesn't detect correctly the PSU unit because the unit is physically removed or the initialization isn’t done. In this second case, shutdown the server, disconnect both power cables, physically remove both power supply units, re-insert them both and apply power to both. Then start the server.
Network Interface The current controller’s Ethernet interface names and health:
A green box indicates that the controller’s Ethernet interfaces are operating correctly.
Panels
Communications
Status
Shows the network connection status between the GV Orbit Server and the panel that have been configured in GV Orbit Control.
446
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Monitoring Tasks
Forcing the Inactive Controller to be the Active Controller
Parameter
Devices
Description
The current status of the devices:
Active: This device is in active operation.
Standby : This device is in hot standby. It is ready to take over from the active device.
Primary / Secondary: When a cluster of Audio Live devices are configured for redundancy, this shows the IP addresses and the health of those devices. See also
Audio Live Redundancy Support , on page 429.
A list of any current faults.
Faults
For more information about the health status of a DCNM Network Switch device, see Path
Forcing the Inactive Controller to be the Active Controller
If two controllers are configured in a redundant configuration, then during the normal course of operations, one controller is active and the other is inactive at all times.
If a problem occurs, such as network loss or connectivity issues, the inactive controller
(Controller 2) becomes the active controller. The controller that was formerly active
(Controller 1) reboots. This is an automatic failover. You can perform a manual failover if you have administrator rights in the selected Area. See
Viewing Permissions by Role , on page 472.
To perform a manual failover
1 Open the System Status task for the required topology. See Accessing the System
2 Click the Force Active button for the Inactive Controller.
447
Monitoring Tasks
Forcing the Inactive Controller to be the Active Controller
A confirmation message appears.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Click OK to continue.
The controllers switch states. The formerly inactive controller (Controller 2) becomes active. The formerly active controller (Controller 1) reboots. As it shuts down, the following changes occur and are reflected on the System Status task.
• The Status of the Controller 1 is now Inactive .
• A red bar is displayed for the Health of Controller 1, indicating it is not good.
• The CPU and Memory are at 0% .
• The Fans and Network Interface are blank.
• The Status of the Controller 2 is now Active .
• A green bar is displayed for the Health of Controller 2, indicating it is good.
• The CPU and Memory fields show their level of activity.
• The Fans are green, indicating health.
• The Network Interface displays the Management Interface port name (em1).
• The status of all devices controlled by Controller 1 is unknown .
• The status of all devices controlled by Controller 2 is active .
448
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Monitoring Tasks
Forcing the Inactive Controller to be the Active Controller
When Controller 1 comes back, the following changes occur and are reflected in the interface.
• The status of Controller 1 is now Inactive .
• The health field for Controller 1 displays a green bar indicating it is good.
• The CPU and Memory fields for both controllers show the current level of activity.
• The fans for both controllers show green boxes indicating health.
• The Network Interface port of both controllers is displayed, em1 .
• The status of the devices on Controller 1 is unknown .
• The status of the devices on Controller 2 is active .
Finally, when Controller 1 is fully rebooted, the following changes occur:
449
Monitoring Tasks
Permissions
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• The status of the devices on Controller 1 is standby .
Permissions
Only users who are assigned to Administrators role in the selected area have View, Edit, and
Delete permissions in the System Status task. Users who are assigned to Engineers,
Operators, and Maintenance roles have view rights only. See
Viewing Permissions by Role , on page 472.
450
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Monitoring Tasks
Audio Live Usage
Audio Live Usage
Use the Audio Live Usage Task to have more information about the loading and use of an
Audio Live’s capacity. This is a debugging tool to help you to better understand what the
Audio Live’s routing capacity.
PREREQUISITES: One of more Audio Live devices must have been configured on the current topology. See
Configuring an IQAMD40 Device , on page 434.
Accessing the Audio Live Usage Task
To access the Audio Live Usage Task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 In the Topology Configurator, activate the topology. See Activating a Topology , on page 235.
5 Select Monitoring > System Status .
The Audio Live Usage task opens:
All table columns can be filtered. See
Filtering Lists, Table Columns, Sources, and Destinations , on page 266.
Icon
Refresh
Audio Live Name
64ch Input Usage
16ch Input Usage
8ch Input Usage
4ch Input Usage
Description
Reloads the Audio Live Usage task contents. If you make a Take for audio streams through an Audio Live device, then you must click
Refresh to see the results.
The device name configured for the Audio Live device, in the device’s properties.
The number of AES67-64 input levels currently being used out of the available number of AES67-64 input levels, expressed as a fraction.
The number of AES67-16 input levels currently being used out of the available number of AES67-16 input levels, expressed as a fraction.
The number of AES67-8 input levels currently being used out of the available number of AES67-8 input levels, expressed as a fraction.
The number of AES67-4 input levels currently being used out of the available number of AES67-4 input levels, expressed as a fraction.
451
Monitoring Tasks
Accessing the Audio Live Usage Task
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Icon Description
64ch Output Usage The number of AES67-64 output levels currently being used out of the available number of AES67-64 output levels, expressed as a fraction.
16ch Output Usage The number of AES67-16 output levels currently being used out of the available number of AES67-16 output levels, expressed as a fraction.
8ch Output Usage The number of AES67-8 output levels currently being used out of the available number of AES67-8 output levels, expressed as a fraction.
4ch Output Usage The number of AES67-4 output levels currently being used out of the available number of AES67-4 output levels, expressed as a fraction.
6 Select an Audio Live device from the list. Detailed spigot information is shown under
Spigot Information .
Icon
Spigot Name
Channel Capacity
Direction
Tieline Status
Multicast IP
Sources
Destinations
Description
The name configured for this spigot, in the device’s properties.
The number of AES-67 channels supported by the spigot.
Shows the signal direction for this spigot.
Input: The spigot is a destination from another device.
Output: The spigot is a source to another device.
Shows this spigot’s current connection status.
Free: There is no device connection for this spigot.
Busy: The tieline is connected to another device.
Exposed: Indicates that the spigot’s stream is exposed.
Shows the current multicast IP address that is joined to this spigot.
For an Input, this is the source multicast IP address that the Audio
Live is connected to.
For an Output, this is the Audio Live source multicast IP address that a destination device connects to.
Shows the current name of the source(s) connected to the input.
Shows the current name of the destination(s) connected to the output.
Columns in the Spigot Information table can be multi-sorted, the same way the Stream
Configurator List can be sorted. See Sorting the Stream Configurator List , on page 326.
452
Overview
The GV Orbit Control Tasks include:
•
Alias Editor Tasks , on page 454GV Orbit Client
•
Router Control Tasks , on page 458
453
Control Tasks
Alias Editor Tasks
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Alias Editor Tasks
Use the Alias Editor to assign aliases to sources and destinations. More than one set of aliases can be created to allow the source / destination naming conventions to be changed on the fly, for example, to change the interface for different programs or production staff, or to support another language(s).
Accessing Alias Editor Tasks
To access the Alias Editor
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Control > Alias Editor .
The Alias Editor task opens.
454
The Alias Editor has tabs for Source and Destination IDs.
Alias Editor Menu
The Alias Editor menu has the following menu options.
Icon
Refresh
Cut
Copy
Paste
Description
Reloads the Alias Editor’s contents.
Cuts the selected contents from an alias column.
Copies the selected contents from an alias column.
Pastes the clipboard contents to the alias column.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Control Tasks
About External IDs and Northbound Control Interfaces
Icon label
Restore default
New
Delete
Description
When a selected alias has been renamed, this resets the name to its original label.
Adds an alias column. See
Removes the selected alias column.
About External IDs and Northbound Control Interfaces
External IDs are shown by setting Show External ID Columns . External IDs are used for
Northbound control interfaces that use ID-based protocols.
Certain control protocols require that the numbering of external IDs must be contiguous. In this case, if they are not sequential, click Re-Index Ext. IDs . In order to protect against an erroneous click, a captcha-style dialog requires that you confirm this action which can have a large impact on router tables.
GV Orbit Client can use the GV Orbit Control External ID's when Show External IDs is set to
True ; see
Step 7.3.1: Project Variables (Project -> Edit Variables) , on page 70. If
Show External
IDs is set to False , and you click Re-Index Ext. IDs , then you will need to make sure that any external system that relies on this updated index will still have the correct associations for their external IDs, including GV Orbit Client.
External IDs that are larger than the total number of sources or destinations will not status northbound.
GV Orbit Control must have status for all destinations within GV Orbit Control or they will not report northbound for that external ID. For example, if a take has never been made to a destination, that destination will not have its status set. This behavior is different from a physical router where all destinations have a status set by default.
Adding Aliases
These aliases can be used in router control to change the name of sources and destinations from short labels to the labels of the corresponding alias. The alias can be composed of up to 24 characters to create a more descriptive name than its equivalent short label. Aliases
can also be used with panels; see Creating a New Panel
, on page 277. See also Using Source and Destination Aliases with a Panel , on page 291.
Once an alias column has been added, you can also copy/paste a list of values from an
Microsoft Excel spreadsheet column into the alias column to bulk name the sources and destinations.
Aliases created here can be selected in GV Orbit Control’s user interface where sources and destinations are used with the Select Alias option. For example, in the Category
Configurator; see
Category Configurator Tasks , on page 268.
To Add Aliases
1 Open the Alias Editor. See Accessing Alias Editor Tasks , on page 454.
The Alias Editor task opens.
455
Control Tasks
Renaming Source and Destination Labels
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The Alias Editor has tabs for Source and Destination IDs.
2 Select Show External ID Columns columns if necessary.
The aliases are now available to be used with router control and panels. If aliases are used with a panel and they are longer than 8 characters, consider setting the Display 24 characters option for the panel in the Panel’s Property Editor
Destinations Menu , on page 269.
Renaming Source and Destination Labels
Source and destination labels can be renamed. You can also copy/paste a list of values from an Microsoft Excel spreadsheet column into the Name or Alias columns to bulk rename the sources and destinations. Or you can copy the content of one column and paste it into another column.
To rename Source and Destination Labels
1 Open the Alias Editor. See Accessing Alias Editor Tasks , on page 454.
The Alias Editor task opens.
456
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Control Tasks
Renaming Source and Destination Labels
The Alias Editor has tabs for Source and Destination IDs.
2 Rename the source or destination by slow clicking it twice. Or paste a list of names from an Microsoft Excel spreadsheet column into the Name or Alias column to bulk rename them.
Source and Destination labels in the Alias Editor may be shown as grayed out and they cannot be edited. These devices’ configuration properties come from GV Orbit Client.
See
Synchronization of Discovered GVOP Devices, Source, Destination, and Spigot
Names made in GV Orbit Client , on page 211.
457
Control Tasks
Router Control Tasks
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Router Control Tasks
Use the Router Control task to control the sources and destination in an active topology.
Accessing the Router Control Task
To access the Router Control task
1 Open GV Orbit Control Stage. See Navigating Back to Stage , on page 170.
2 Select the required Area. See Selecting an Area , on page 183.
3 Select the required topology. See Selecting a Graph , on page 184.
4 Select Control > Router Control .
The Router Control task opens
458
The sources are listed on the left under Logical Router. The destinations are listed in the center. The right hand column displays the actions you can perform.
Router Control Menu
The Router Control menu has the following menu options.
Icon
Select All
Clear All
Description
Selects all source or destination items.
Deselects all source or destination items.
Sort Ascending Sort the source or destination items in alphabetical order from A to Z.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Control Tasks
Performing a Take in Router Control
Icon Description
Sort Descending Sort the source or destination items in alphabetical order from Z to A.
Use Wide Widgets Doubles the source or destination display width to accommodate longer labels.
This option setting is remembered for the currently logged in user on the current client PC.
Select Alias Select the Alias you want to use to identify Source and Destination streams in GV Orbit Control’s interface.
Aliases are created in the Alias Editor. See Adding Aliases , on page 455.
Performing a Take in Router Control
You can perform a take in Router Control as follows.
1 Under Logical Router , select a source, shown in green.
2 Select a destination, shown in brown.
3 Under Router Control , Control tab, click Take .
459
Control Tasks
Performing a Take in Router Control
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
460
Parameter
Take / Auto-Take /
Salvos radio buttons
Take button
Cancel button
Lock button
Protect button
Description
Sets the router control mode:
• Take: Once the source and destination has been selected, you then click Take to make the take.
• Auto-Take: Once the source and destination has been selected, the take is automatically made.
• Salvos:
Trigger previously-configured salvos. See also Creating
Makes the connection between the currently selected source and destination. In salvo mode, it triggers the selected salvo.
Cancels the current selection.
Will lock the current destination to not allow the source to be changed by any user. High Tally when enabled on selected destination. See also
About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460.
Will protect the current destination to not allow the source to be changed by a user other than the current user. High Tally when enabled on selected destination.
Releases lock or protect on the selected destination.
To minimize the destinations within the selected virtual XPT b .
Release button
Virtual XPT >
Minimize Virtual XPT a
Virtual XPT > Expand
Virtual XPT > Reset
To show all the destinations within the selected virtual XPT, including
the nested destinations of all other virtual XPTs b
.
Initialize the selected virtual XPT. This will route the appropriate virtual source to the logical destinations that were configured for the virtual
XPT in the logical device table.
a.This becomes available when virtual XPTs have been previously configured (see Configuring Virtual
the router control grid or select a virtual destination in the router control grid.
b.See
Minimize and Expand Virtual XPT Destinations , on page 264 for more information.
About Lock, Protect, and Release
The following topics provide a detailed look at how GV Orbit Control manages Lock,
Protect, and Release.
LIMITATIONS:
• iControl matrices do not support protect.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Control Tasks
Performing a Take in Router Control
• Lock and protect currently affects all levels of the destination and does not consider individual levels. Locking one level locks all destination levels and the control system does not currently support specific lock levels.
Ability to Override a Lock or Protect according to User Rights
When logged in to GV Orbit Control, the permissions assigned to your user profile determine whether you can override a Lock or Protect made by other users. For example, when a user has admin or Operator rights, the user can override any lock or protection made by:
• Any other user. See
Viewing Permissions by Role , on page 472.
• A third-party control system that uses NP0017 to control GV Orbit Control.
• A third-party control system that placed a lock on a device which is also controlled by
GV Orbit Control and for which in router lock and protect is enabled. See
Lock/Protect enabled for a Router using NP0016 router control protocol , on page 417.
• A panel used to set a lock.
Otherwise, without admin or Operator rights, you will not be able to override a Lock or
Protect set by other users.
See
Administration Tasks , on page 465 for more information about how to create users and
how to set a user’s permissions to allow or deny them from overriding a Lock or Protect set by another user. The following user permissions control the ability to override a Lock or
Protect.
• Force Unlock
• Force Unprotect
For example, the admin user has the user permissions for both Force Unlock and Force
Unprotect. Therefore, an admin user can override any other user who has set a Lock or
Protect on a destination.
Using a Panel to Override a Lock or Protect
If a configured panel in GV Orbit Control is used, a user must be assigned to it. Assign a user to a panel through the Panel User parameter (see
Panel User parameter that determines the panel’s priority to override a lock or protect made by another panel user. This can be used to prevent other users from being able to remove a lock. When the Panel User parameter is set to a user that has admin or Operator rights, the panel can be used to override any lock or protection made by:
• Any other user. See
Viewing Permissions by Role , on page 472.
• A third-party control system that uses NP0017 to control GV Orbit Control.
• A third-party control system that placed a lock on a device which is also controlled by
GV Orbit Control and for which in router lock and protect is enabled. See
Lock/Protect enabled for a Router using NP0016 router control protocol , on page 417.
• Another panel used to set a lock.
461
Control Tasks
Creating Salvos
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Identifying the User who has Locked a Destination
To see who has locked a destination, try to make a take to the destination in the Router
Control task. See
Router Control Tasks , on page 458. The user locking / protecting the
destination is then shown in the lower left corner. If the user is admin , then this could be the result of a third-party control system having locked or protected a destination in the router.
How is Lock, Protect, and Release Implemented?
The router protocol and the GV Orbit Control’s router control port configuration can affect how the Lock, Protect, and Release are implemented. For a further explanation, refer to the router protocol you are using.
Router Control Protocol See
NP0016 Compact Router
About In router Lock/Protect enabled for a Router using NP0016
NP0016 Enterprise Router
router control protocol , on page 417
NV9000 TCP/IP (NP0017 southbound)
Lock, Protect, and Release with the NV9000 Control Port , on page 419
NP0016 Enterprise Router
Lock, Protect, and Release with the NP0016 / NS-Bus / SAM SW-P-
NS-BUS
08 Control Ports , on page 462
SAM SW-P-08 TCP/IP
Lock, Protect, and Release with the NP0016 / NS-Bus / SAM SW-P-08 Control Ports
GV Orbit Control stores the locks in its database and they are preserved after a restart/reboot. As such, destinations will remain locked/protected. GV Orbit Control system does not read a lock from a router and does not control a lock in the router.
Creating Salvos
When a salvo is triggered, it executes a list of pre-configured actions. You can create a salvo as follows.
1 Under Router Control , Salvo Editor tab, click New .
2 Enter a name and description for the salvo in the Salvos list.
462
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Control Tasks
Creating Salvos
Salvos
Salvo Action
List
Icon
New
Duplicate
Delete
Take
Lock
Protect
Release
Pause
Append
Insert
Description
Create a new salvo and associated salvo action list.
Make a copy of the currently-selected salvo.
Remove the currently-selected salvo / take.
Add the currently-selected source and destination as a take action to the salvo list. The following functional behaviors are by design:
• If multiple destinations are selected, then there will be multiple take actions added to the salvo list.
• If there is only one source and multiple destinations selected, then that source is routed to all destinations.
• If multiple sources are selected (for example, Source1, Source2,
Source3) and multiple destinations are selected (for example,
Destination1, Destination2, Destination3, and Destination4), then the takes added to the salvo list are Source1 to
Destination1, Source2 to Destination2, Source3 to
Destination3.
Lock the currently selected destination. See also
About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460.
Protect the currently selected destination.
Release the currently selected destination.
The wait time in milliseconds that can be added to the list of operations.
In this mode, any new salvo operation will be added to the end of the salvo action list.
In this mode, any new salvo operation will be inserted at the currently selected spot in the salvo action list.
463
Control Tasks
Selecting the Name of Sources and Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Icon
Replace
Move Up
Move Down
Description
In this mode, any new salvo operation will replace the currentlyselected salvo action from the salvo action list.
Move the selected salvo action up in the salvo action list.
Move the selected salvo action down in the salvo action list.
3 Under Logical Router , select a source, shown in green.
4 Select a destination, shown in brown.
5 Under the salvo action list, click Take .
Selecting the Name of Sources and Destinations
When a source or destination has been assigned an alias, you can select the alias to be
shown through the Alias drop-down menu. To create aliases, see Alias Editor Tasks , on page 454.
1 Select a source or destination under Logical Router .
2 Click the alias drop-down menu and select an alias option.
The label for the selected source or destination changes to the selected option.
464
10
User Management is the only Administration task. Only administrators have access to it.
User Management Task
As an administrator, you have access to the User Management Task. This is used for:
• Creating, editing, and deleting user profiles. See
Creating User Profiles , on page 467.
• Managing access rights to the areas in your system. See
Granting Access Permissions to an Area , on page 469.
• Viewing and assigning permissions according to predefined user roles. See Viewing
Permissions by Role , on page 472.
465
Administration Tasks
The User Management Task Overview
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The User Management Task Overview
Note: Before you assign access permissions, you must create areas in your system.
For details, see Area Configurator Tasks , on page 177.
When you first log in to the User Management Task, the admin tile appears in the Users section.
The User Management Task UI has four columns:
• Users : The column displays a tile for each user who has access to your system. See
Creating User Profiles , on page 467.
• Areas
: The column displays a tile for each area defined in your system. See Granting
Access Permissions to an Area , on page 469.
• Roles : The column displays a tile for each of the predefined roles: Administrator,
Engineer, Operator, Maintenance, and Guest.
Permissions to view, edit, and delete within each client task vary by role. These permissions can be seen when you select the role in the Roles column; for example,
Administrator is selected in the screen shot above. The permissions granted to the administrator role are shown in the Permissions column. (Members of the administrator role have full access permissions to all areas in the system). See
Role , on page 472 for a list of the permissions available to each role.
• Permissions : The column displays a tile for the tasks that users can perform within the areas in your system according to the selected User, Area, and Role. View, edit and delete icons show the current user’s rights for the task.
466
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Administration Tasks
Creating User Profiles
Creating User Profiles
The first step is to create your user profiles.
Note : To access the user profiles, you must belong to the administrator role.
Otherwise, Administration tasks are not visible in GV Orbit Control Stage.
To create a new user account:
1 Launch GV Orbit Control.
2 Log in as an administrator.
3 Select Administration > User Management .
The User Management window appears.
4 Click the Add button in the top left corner.
The user configuration window appears.
5 Enter the required information in the User ID , First Name , Last Name , Password , and
Confirm Password fields.
6 If this user is to represent an external northbound routing device for Lock, Protect, and
Release with the NP0016 / NP0017 router control protocol, set the External ID that this
467
Administration Tasks
Creating User Profiles
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide device uses in its NP0017 router protocol communications with GV Orbit Control. This
value is an unsigned integer. See Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with
NDAC NP0016 / NP0017 Northbound Interfaces , on page 475 for more information.
Note: User databases are not synchronized between the GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit Control. You must assign the same ID to the same user in both the GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit Control.
In all cases, you must ensure that user IDs are coherent between GV Orbit Client and
GV Orbit Control.
Equivalent Parameter in GV Orbit Client Equivalent Parameter in GV Orbit Control
User name User ID
Control External Id External Id
See
How to Add a User , on page 159 for how to set these parameters in GV Orbit Client.
7 Click OK .
A new tile representing the new user account appears in the Users section.
In addition, you can perform the following procedures in the Users section:
• Edit: Select the icon for the user and click Edit to modify the user’s credentials.
• Delete: Select the icon for the user and click Delete to remove the user account. There is no confirmation when you click Delete . The user profile is immediately removed.
See also
•
Switching User Profiles , on page 171
468
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Administration Tasks
Granting Access Permissions to an Area
Granting Access Permissions to an Area
Users are granted access to each area via a predefined role. The procedure is as follows:
To grant access to an area
1 Launch GV Orbit Control.
2 Log in as an administrator.
3 Select Administration > User Management .
The User Management task appears.
The Users column displays tiles for all the users who have access to the system.
4 Select the applicable user tile in the Users section.
The Areas column displays tiles for all the areas defined in your system.
469
Administration Tasks
Granting Access Permissions to an Area
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
5 Select an area tile in the Areas section while keeping the user tile selected.
The Roles column displays tiles for all the roles when both the user tile and the area tile are selected, at the same time.
6 Select a role tile and drag it on top of the area tile.
This action gives the user all the permissions defined for the role in the selected area.
470
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Administration Tasks
Granting Access Permissions to an Area
When you select the user tile in the Users section, the user’s role in the area is displayed at the bottom right of the Area tile.
The permissions granted to the selected role; for example, view, edit, delete, are displayed on the Permissions tile in the Permissions column.
These are listed in the next section.
471
Administration Tasks
Viewing Permissions by Role
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Viewing Permissions by Role
Users are granted access to the areas in the system via their assigned roles. The following rules apply:
• Users can be assigned to different roles in different areas.
• Users cannot be granted permissions as individuals, only according to role.
• The roles are predefined, as follows: Administrator, Engineer, Operator, Maintenance, and Guest. The roles cannot be modified.
• Administrators have full access to all tasks in all areas. Guests have the least permissions. The Engineer, Operator, and Maintenance roles have various permissions, as listed in the following table:
The permissions granted to each role can be viewed on the tiles in the Permissions list book of the User Management task. These can be viewed when the user, the area, and the role are all selected at the same time.
Task
Area configurator
Logical Level Editor
Topology Configurator
Category Configurator
Role
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Permissions
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
View
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
No access
472
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Task
Logical Device Table
Panel Configurator
User Management
Path Manager
System Status
Alias Editor
Router Control
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Role
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administration Tasks
Viewing Permissions by Role
Permissions
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
No access
No access
View
View
View
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
View
View
View
No access
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
View
No access
No access
473
Administration Tasks
Viewing Permissions by Role
Task Role
Maintenance & Deployment Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Router Force Unlock
See also About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460 and
Northbound Interfaces , on page 475.
Router Force Unprotect
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
See also About Lock, Protect, and Release
Northbound Interfaces , on page 475.
External ID
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
Administrator
Engineer
Operator
Maintenance
Guest
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Permissions
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
View
No access
View, Edit, Delete
No access
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
No access
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
View, Edit, Delete
View, Edit, Delete
No access
No access
No access
474
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Administration Tasks
Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC NP0016 / NP0017 Northbound Interfaces
Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC NP0016
/ NP0017 Northbound Interfaces
With the NP0016 and NP0017 router control protocols, Lock/Protect commands require a
User ID. So that users with different User IDs cannot release a destination locked by another user or panel user; in GV Orbit Control and GV Orbit Client, each user can be assigned a different External ID / Control External Id parameter value. Users with a different External
ID / Control External Id cannot release a destination locked by another user with a different
External ID / Control External Id , unless they have admin or Operator rights.
The NP0016 and NP0017 router control protocol User ID should be set in:
• GV Orbit Control: as of GV Orbit version 1.7.0 and above, the User ID provided in northbound commands is taken into account as follows:
• You map this User ID to the External Id parameter of a GV Orbit Control user set in
User Management .
• If this GV Orbit Control user has its External Id parameter value configured to the same value as the User ID in a command, the operation will be performed internally using the alias of the matching user with the user’s associated privileges with respect to Lock, Protect, and Release.
• If this GV Orbit Control user does not have admin or Operator rights, the third-party control system that uses NP0016 / NP0017 to control GV Orbit Control cannot override the lock or Protect set by other GV Orbit Control users. See
Permissions by Role , on page 472..
• If no GV Orbit Control user has an External Id parameter value matching the command's user ID, the operation is performed internally as the GV Orbit Control admin user.
• GV Orbit Client: as of GV Orbit version 2.0.0 and above, the User ID provided in northbound commands from the GV Orbit Control Routing service is taken into account as follows:
• You map this User ID to the Control External Id parameter of a GV Orbit Client user set in the User tab.
• This user then issues NP0017 router control protocol communications with the
User ID from the user’s Control External Id value.
• The admin user or a user with an Control External Id set to 0 can override locks set by any other user.
Note: User databases are not synchronized between the GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit Control. You must assign the same ID to the same user in both the GV Orbit Client and GV Orbit Control separately.
The User ID / External ID / Control External Id parameter is an unsigned integer.
To create a User to represent external northbound routing device in GV Orbit Control
Proceed as follows.
1 In GV Orbit Control, create a new user to represent the third-party control system. See
Creating User Profiles , on page 467.
475
Administration Tasks
Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC NP0016 / NP0017 Northbound Interfaces
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
2 In GV Orbit Control, set the External Id parameter to that of the user ID used by the third-party control system in its NP0016 / NP0017 router control protocol.
3 In GV Orbit Control, assign the privileges to this new user. See Granting Access
Permissions to an Area , on page 469:
• Assign Engineer or Maintenance rights to this new user to prevent the third-party control system from overriding the lock or Protect set by other GV Orbit Control users.
• Assign admin or Operator rights to this new user to allow the third-party control system to override the lock or Protect set by other GV Orbit Control users.
If the third-party control system’s NP0016 / NP0017 router control protocol,
Lock/Protect commands use a user ID that GV Orbit Control cannot match to the
External Id value of any GV Orbit Control user, the Lock/Protect commands will be carried out as an Admin user (which has the Router Force Unlock and Router Force
Unprotect privileges), thereby allowing the external control system to overrride the locks of other GV Orbit Control users.
See also About Lock, Protect, and Release , on page 460 to better understand how Lock,
Protect, and Release works with other users and other GV Orbit Control components such as panels.
GV Orbit Control stores the locks in its database and they are preserved after a restart/reboot. As such, destinations will remain locked/protected. GV Orbit Control system does not read a lock from a router and does not control a lock in the router.
4 In GV Orbit Client, create a new user to represent the same user name you created in
GV Orbit Control above. See How to Add a User , on page 159.
5 In GV Orbit Client, set the Control External Id parameter to the same User ID value you set above in the External Id parameter above.
476
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Administration Tasks
Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC NP0016 / NP0017 Northbound Interfaces
477
Administration Tasks
Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC NP0016 / NP0017 Northbound Interfaces
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
478
11
The Channel Manager abstracts physical cards to make their processing channels available without having to know where the card is physically located in the system.
You can logically associate one or more precessing channels by assigning them to a group.
A group can represent the Channels used for ingest for example.
You can set and save card processing channel configuration parameters, and apply saved settings to other channels that may be on other cards of the same type.
PREREQUISITES:
• The Channel Manager is available by default in projects created in GV Orbit Control
version 2.2.0 and above. To add it to projects created before this, see Adding Channel
Manager to Projects Created before GV Orbit Control Version 2.2.0
• The Channel Manager is supported by the Channel Manager Service. The Channel
Manager Service must be installed and running on the GV Orbit Server. Refer to Channel
Manager Service in the GV Orbit Admin Guide . See Related Documentation , on page 7.
• One or more supported devices. Supported devices are listed in the GV Orbit Release
Notes under Channel Manager Card Support . See
Related Documentation , on page 19.
• Channels are auto populated from suitable devices found / discovered in the Network
Tree. See Network Tree
in Network Window , on page 84.
Icon / Parameter
Select All
Clear All
Channel Name
Group Name
Description
Selects all items in the Channels Browser.
Deselects all items in the Channels Browser.
Filters the Channels / Groups list according to the text you type in the filter field and according to the filter option set by clicking ; see below. Clear the filter text and press <Enter> to remove the filter.
479
Channel Manager GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Icon / Parameter Description
Click to set the scope for the filtering to the text contained in the
Channel Name , Group Name , or Description of the channel’s properties.
Add
Delete
Creates a new Channel Group. See Creating a New Channel Group , on page 481.
Removes the currently-selected Channel Group. This does not delete any of the channels in the group.
Save Settings Saves the configuration parameters to a configuration snapshot. A configuration snapshot can be later recalled to quickly recreate the configuration settings needed for a given system deployment. See
Configuring the Channel and Saving the Channel Settings to a
Recall Settings Applies the saved configuration setting from a previously-created
Channel snapshot, to the current channel. Configuration snapshots created from the settings of one channel can be applied to another compatible channel, that is, the channel’s origin is of the same card
bundle / SDC combination. See Recalling a Channel Snapshot , on page 485.
Name
Description
Add / edit a unique Channel Group name.
Add / edit an optional description for the Channel / Channel Group to make its role easier for you and others to distinguish.
480
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Channel Manager
Creating a New Channel Group
Creating a New Channel Group
A Channel Group organizes a number of associated channels together.
1 In the Channel Manager, click Add .
2 Configure the creation parameters.
Parameter
Number of groups
Name
Description
Description
The number of Channel Groups to add. When this is set to 2 or more, the Channel Groups are suffixed with a number.
A unique Channel Group name.
An optional description for the Channel Group / Channel to make its role easier for you and others to distinguish.
3 Click OK .
The Channel Group(s) are added to the Groups section of the Channel Manager.
481
Channel Manager
Adding Channels to a Channel Group
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Adding Channels to a Channel Group
A Channel Group collects associated streams, for example a 4K UHD stream and an HD stream of the same content. A Channel can be added to more than one Channel Group.
PREREQUISITE:
You must have created one or more Channel Groups. See Creating a New
1 Select one or more Channels that you want to add to a Channel Group.
You can multi-select using the <Shift> / <Ctrl> key:
• By holding the <Shift> key and selecting the first and the last Channel, all Channels in between are selected.
• By holding the <Ctrl> key, you can toggle the selection by clicking individual
Channels.
2 Drag and drop the Channels into the Channel Group. The mouse cursor shows the channels that are to be added. Or if a Channel Group is currently selected, you can drop the Channels into the Channel Group.
OR
Parameter
Name
Description
Description
Add / edit a unique Channel Group name.
Add / edit an optional description for the Channel / Channel Group to make its role easier for you and others to distinguish.
482
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Channel Manager
Configuring the Channel and Saving the Channel Settings to a Snapshot
Configuring the Channel and Saving the Channel Settings to a
Snapshot
When a Channel is selected in a Channel Group, you can set and save card processing channel configuration parameters, to create a snapshot. All current operational parameters for that channel are saved in the snapshot. A configuration snapshot can be later recalled to quickly recreate the configuration settings needed for a given system deployment.
1 Select a Channel in the Channel Group.
2 Set the Channel’s processing parameters. Refer to the card’s documentation for configuration information.
Parameter
Description
Card parameter configuration screens
Description
An optional description for the Channel to make its role easier for you and others to distinguish.
Configure the device/module/card parameters for this channel. These parameters are device-specific. For more information, see the documentation for the individual device/card/module type.
3 Click Save Settings to save the configuration parameters to a configuration snapshot.
Parameter
Name
Description
Description
A unique Channel name.
An optional description for the Channel to make its role easier for you and others to distinguish.
483
Channel Manager
Configuring the Channel and Saving the Channel Settings to a Snapshot
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
All current operational parameters for that channel are saved in the snapshot. During snapshot generation, all users looking at this same channel will be blocked with a spinning icon to indicate that card configuration is temporarily suspended.
4 Click OK .
Once you have saved the Channel setting to a snapshot, you can apply the settings to other
484
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Channel Manager
Recalling a Channel Snapshot
Recalling a Channel Snapshot
Recalling a Channel Snapshot overwrites and applies the saved configuration settings and operational parameters from a previously-created Channel Snapshot, to the currentlyselected channel. Configuration Snapshots created from the settings of one channel can be applied to another compatible Channel, that is, the channel’s origin is of the same card bundle / SDC combination.
PREREQUISITE: You must have created one or more Channel Snapshot(s). See
Configuring the Channel and Saving the Channel Settings to a Snapshot , on page 483.
1 Select a Channel in the Channel Group.
2 Click Recall Settings .
3 Select a Channel Snapshot to apply to the Channel.
4 Click OK .
All operational channel parameters and settings for the selected channel are overwritten by the parameters contained in the snapshot. During snapshot recall, all users looking at this same channel will be blocked with a spinning icon to indicate that card configuration is temporarily suspended.
485
Channel Manager
Deleting a Channel Snapshot
Deleting a Channel Snapshot
A Channel Snapshot that is no longer needed can be removed.
1 Select a Channel in the Channel Group.
2 Click Recall Settings .
3 Select a Channel Snapshot to delete.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 Click Delete .
5 Click OK to confirm the deletion.
486
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Channel Manager
Adding Channel Manager to Projects Created before GV Orbit Control Version 2.2.0
Adding Channel Manager to Projects Created before GV Orbit
Control Version 2.2.0
To add Channel Manager to an existing project that was created before GV Orbit Control version 2.2.0, proceed as follows.
1 Upgrade the GV Orbit Client to version 5.2.x or higher. Refer the GV Orbit Release Notes and GV Orbit Admin Guide for more information. See
Related Documentation , on page 19.
2 Ensure the project is not open in GV Orbit Client.
3 Copy the file C:\Program Files\Grass
Valley\GV Orbit\workflows\workflow.wfl
into the workflows folder of your project. For example: C:\My-Project-Folder\My-Project-Name\workflows
4 Open the project in GV Orbit Client.
487
Channel Manager
Adding Channel Manager to Projects Created before GV Orbit Control Version 2.2.0
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
488
Introduction
GV Orbit Client has user router control functionality and offers the following routing control panels:
•
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
(see this chapter) - a simple, non-editable soft panel for fast control of all router cross-points.
•
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel - an editable and customizable soft panel, typically
used for small custom panels for specific routing needs.
This chapter describes the Bulk Routing Panel .
GV Orbit System
Routing control panels (soft or hard) connect to a GV Orbit Routing service running on a
GV Orbit Server.
Controller-specific connection protocol:
• SW-P-08; or
• NP-0017
GV Orbit Server
GVOP protocol
GV Orbit Routing Panel
GV Orbit Client
Fig. 12-1: GV Orbit Routing Panel, Routing Service and Router Controller
A GV Orbit system has one or more GV Orbit Servers which run GV Orbit services. Routing panels in a GV Orbit Client connect to a router controller device via the GV Orbit Routing service. Router controllers include GV Orbit itself, a Grass Valley Router Controller device, or
489
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Prerequisites
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
GV Convergent. The Routing service provides source/destination information to the client
and acts on routing commands from the client. See Figure 12-2.
Fig. 12-2: GV Orbit System Diagram
Prerequisites
A GV Orbit Server is required, running:
• A GV Orbit Control application.
• A GV Orbit Routing service configured for connection to a Router Controller using either NP0017 or SW-P-08 protocol.
What is a Bulk Routing Panel?
The GV Orbit Bulk Routing panel is accessible from the GV Orbit Client application. This is a simple, quick, non-editable panel which has been designed to allow fast control of router cross-points and facilitate both keyboard and mouse navigation.
490
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Key Features
Fig. 12-3: Bulk Routing Panel Example
Key Features
• Keyboard navigation.
• Single source to single destination.
• Single source to multiple destinations.
• Multiple sources to multiple destinations.
• Copy Paste
• Take and Auto Take.
• Lock and Protect.
• Salvos.
•
List View mode for level-focused routing.
• Shuffles and Breakaways.
• Filter Sources, Destinations, Levels and Salvos.
• Custom filtering.
• Filter destinations by routed source.
• Sort (ascending and descending).
• Source and Source-Level Dial-up.
491
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Open a Bulk Routing Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Open a Bulk Routing Panel
The GV Orbit Bulk Routing Panel is accessible from the GV Orbit Client application:
•
•
Note: The Bulk Routing Panel is best viewed in full-screen on a 1080P 16:9 monitor screen with GV Orbit Client.
From the Workflow Window
To open the Bulk Routing Panel from the Workflow window:
1 Open a GV Orbit C&M project in GV Orbit Client and adjust the window size to be fullscreen.
Full-size is the recommended window size for operation; all controls are visible.
2 Ensure the GVOP client domain is set to be the same as that being used by the GV Orbit
Routing service on the GV Orbit Server. (Main menu: ‘Connections > GVOP’.)
3 In the Workflow window, click on the Bulk Routing
Click on Bulk Routing icon.
Fig. 12-4: Open a Bulk Routing Panel
The Bulk Routing Panel is opened. See Figure 12-6 for a sample Bulk Routing Panel.
From the Network Window
To open the Bulk Routing Panel from the Network window:
1 Open a GV Orbit C&M project in GV Orbit Client and set the window size to be fullscreen.
2 Ensure the GVOP client domain is set to be the same as that being used by the GV Orbit
Routing service on the GV Orbit Server. (Main menu: ‘Connections > GVOP’.)
3 Locate the Routing service item in the Network window of GV Orbit Client. And right-
click on the item and select ‘Open Panel’. See Figure 12-5.
492
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
From the Network Window
Right-click on the
Routing service item and select ‘Open Panel’.
Fig. 12-5: Open a Bulk Routing Panel
Note: A ‘Routing service’ item in the Network window is formed when a
Routing service is running on the GV Orbit Server and is configured to talk to a router controller.
An example Bulk Routing Panel is shown in Figure 12-6.
493
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
From the Network Window
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
494
Fig. 12-6: Example Bulk Routing Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Bulk Routing Panel Layout and Controls
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Bulk Routing Panel Layout and Controls
Keyboard Shortcuts icon
(1) Source Grid
(3) Destination Grid
(5) Router Control
(6) Salvos
Splitter handles
(2) Source Levels Grid
(4) Destination Levels Grid
Fig. 12-7: Bulk Routing Panel Layout
The panel is laid out as six grids/panes (see Figure 12-7):
• (1) Source Grid – Scrollable list of all available sources.
• (2) Source Levels Grid – Scrollable list of available levels for selected source(s).
• (3) Destination Grid – Scrollable list of all available destinations.
• (4) Destination Levels Grid – Scrollable list of available levels for selected destination(s).
• (5) Router Control Pane – Take, Lock, and Protect functionality.
• (6) Salvos Pane – List of available Salvos when connected over the NP0017 protocol.
Vertical sizing of the Source and Destination grids can be altered by dragging a splitter handle up/down the screen. Horizontal sizing and sizing of the Router Control and Salvos panes can be altered by dragging a splitter handle left/right. Other sizing is handled
automatically. See Figure 12-7.
495
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
What are the Operational Keyboard Shortcuts?
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
What are the Operational Keyboard Shortcuts?
Keyboard shortcuts are available when navigating and operating the Bulk Routing Panel, in addition to using a mouse. You can freely mix ‘mouse’ and ‘keyboard’ methods.
A list of keyboard shortcuts may be displayed in a movable window which can remain on display while using the Bulk Routing Panel.
To see a list of keyboard shortcuts:
1 Click on the ‘Keyboard Shortcuts’ icon in the tool bar of the Router Control pane.
The Bulk Routing Keyboard Shortcuts
window is shown, see Figure 12-8. This window lists the keyboard shortcuts. It remains
on display and may be moved.
496
Fig. 12-8: Bulk Routing Keyboard Shortcuts Movable Window
Equivalent mouse clicks for some keyboard shortcuts are listed in Table 12-1.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
What are the Operational Keyboard Shortcuts?
Table 12-1: Bulk Routing Panel Operational Keys / Mouse operations
Operation Keyboard
Toggle Selection
Take
Space bar
Enter
Panel Button Focus
Panel/Grid Focus
Add a series of items to/remove from a multiple selection
Add distinct items to/remove from a multiple selection
Select Range
(Select a contiguous range)
Cursor Arrow Keys
CTRL + Arrow Keys
SHIFT + Cursor keys
CTRL + Space bar
Space bar on first item then
SHIFT + space bar on last item.
Paste Series
Take
Dial Source
Dial Source-Level
Mouse
Mouse click
Click Take
Mouse movement/click
Mouse movement/click
SHIFT + Mouse click
CTRL + Mouse click
Mouse click on first item then
SHIFT click on last item.
Alt-CTRL + V when a range of destinations are selected.
Click ‘Paste Series’ icon in panel.
See
What is Copy-and-Paste Series Routing?
Return / Enter Double-click
N/A Begin to type the name of a
Source when a destination is selected.
See
Dial Source Dialog , on page 510.
Press any single alpha-numeric key when a destination and (one or more) levels are selected.
N/A
Cancel
See
Dial Source-Level Dialog , on page 511.
Escape
Select All in the focused panel
Select None in focused panel
Copy a Destination
Paste a Destination
CTRL + A
CTRL + D
CTRL + C when a destination is selected
CTRL + V when target destination, or destinations, are selected
Click ‘Cancel’ button in the Router
Control pane.
Click ‘Select All’ icon in panel.
Click ‘Select None’ icon in panel.
Click ‘Copy’ icon in panel
Click on ‘Paste’ icon in panel
497
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Select/Focus in a Bulk Routing Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select/Focus in a Bulk Routing Panel
Current Button-Focus
When the mouse cursor is moved over a button, or control item, the button/item is highlighted indicating the current item is in focus.
Selected Destination
Current Button- Focus
Navigate with:
Cursor Keys, or use the mouse
Fig. 12-9: Current Button-Focus Item
Select a Button
To select a button:
• click on a button; or
• press the space-bar key when a button is the current focus item.
De-select Buttons
To deselect all buttons:
• click Cancel in the Router Control pane; or
• press the ESC key.
Move Focus Between Grids/Panels of the Bulk Routing Panel
To move the focus between a grid/panel of the Bulk Routing panel:
• Use the CTRL key and one of the cursor arrow keys.
Focus is indicated by a border around the focused grid.
498
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Selecting Multiple Items
Pre-selected Source
Currently-routed
Source
Current
Button-Focus
Current Panel/Grid Focus
Navigate with:
Control-Cursor Keys, or use the mouse
Fig. 12-10: Current Panel/Grid Focus Item
Selecting Multiple Items
Select Multiple Items (CTRL select)
Select multiple items (such as destinations, or sources, etc.) by selecting the first item and
CTRL-selecting the others. For example, to select multiple destinations:
1 Select the first destination by clicking on the destination selection button.
2 CTRL-click on the next destination to add that to the selection.
3 Add other destinations.
Select Multiple - Alternative Method
Multiple items can be selected using the Control key, the Cursor Arrow keys and the Enter key.
1 With the cursor over the first item to be selected, press enter to select it.
2 Use the cursor arrow keys to move to the next item.
3 Select it with CTRL-Enter. This adds to the selection.
4 Add other items similarly.
Select a Range of Items (SHIFT select)
When selecting multiple items (such as destinations, or sources etc.), a range may be selected by selecting:
1 The first destination in the range by clicking on the destination selection button.
2 Selecting the last destination by SHIFT + clicking on its destination button.
Source ranges can be selected similarly.
499
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Source/Destination Grid Buttons
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select a Range - Alternative Method
A range of consecutive sources or destinations can be selected using the Shift key, Cursor
Arrow keys, and Enter key.
1 With the cursor over the first item to be selected, press Enter to select it.
2 Move to the last item in the range with the cursor keys.
3 Hold down the SHIFT key and press Enter to select it.
The last item and all the items from the first to the last are added to the selection.
Source/Destination Grid Buttons
The source/destination selection grid buttons and level-selection buttons are annotated to reflect the source/destination name or the level name. Additionally, the destination buttons may show the currently-routed source and currently-selected source for the selected destination. Buttons also change shape and are highlighted to show if they are selected or
if sources are currently-routed or currently-selected. See Figure 12-11.
Note:
See
for examples of selecting levels.
500
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Source Name Destination Name
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Level Selection
Currently-Routed Source
Pre-Selected Source
Currently-Routed Source Name
Pre-Selected Source Name
Selected Destination
Source Level Name
Destination Level Name
Pre-Selected Source Level Name
Pre-Selected Source Name
Fig. 12-11: Selection Buttons
Note: Select a Destination or a Source to see the corresponding Level selection buttons.
Level Selection
When a source or a destination is selected, the associated levels are shown in the corresponding ‘Levels’ grid. If multiple sources or destinations are selected, then only their common levels are shown.
All levels are selected by default. If you select one or more levels, then all other levels are deselected.
501
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Level Selection
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Keep Last Level Selection After Take
When a different source or destination is selected after a ‘Take’, the level selection is normally cleared. To keep the selected levels, select the Keep Last Selection button in the
‘Levels Grid’ pane tool bar (see Figure 12-12).
Keep Last Selection toggle buttons
Source Levels Grid
Fig. 12-12: Keep Last Selection Buttons
Destination Levels Grid
502
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Router Control Pane
Router Control Pane
The Router Control pane in the Bulk Routing Panel contains the Take , Lock and Protect functions.
Click icon to see a list of keyboard shortcuts.
Select Auto-Take to make a route as soon as source(s) and destination(s) are selected.
Click Cancel to cancel all selections.
With a destination selected, Lock and Protect buttons are active.
a) No Selections Made b) Destination Selected
After destination(s) and source(s) are selected, the Take button goes active ( red ). c) After Destination and Source Selection
Fig. 12-13: Router Control Pane: a) No Selections Made; b) Destination Selected; c) Destination and Source Selected.
503
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Tool Bars in a Bulk Routing Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Tool Bars in a Bulk Routing Panel
There is a small tool bar at the top of each grid/pane containing controls for selection/deselection, sorting and filtering.
Source Selection Grid Tool Bar
Click to see drop-down menu of tool bar items.
Click to Select all sources.
Click to Deselect all sources.
Click to Sort sources A-Z.
Click to Sort sources Z-A.
Click to toggle the optional display of Wide Source and
.
Filter control, see
Fig. 12-14: Source Selection Grid - Tool Bar
Source Levels Grid Tool Bar
Click to see drop-down menu of tool bar items.
Click to Select all levels.
Click to Deselect all levels.
Click to keep the Levels selection after a Take.
Click to Sort levels A-Z.
Click to Sort levels Z-A.
Filter control, see What is Bulk Routing
Fig. 12-15: Source Level Selection Grid - Tool Bar
504
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Tool Bars in a Bulk Routing Panel
Destination Grid Tool Bar
Click to:
• See a drop-down menu of all tool bar items.
• Copy routing information of a Destination selection.
• Paste routing information to a Destination.
• Paste a series of sources to a Destination range.
(See
What is Copy-and-Paste Routing?
• Select all destinations.
• Deselect all destinations.
• Sort destinations A-Z.
• Sort destinations Z-A.
• Toggle display of wide selection buttons.
• Toggle Hide Sources
. See Hide Sources , on page 546.
• Toggle List View
mode. See List View , on page 548.
Filter control, see
Fig. 12-16: Destination Selection Grid - Tool Bar
505
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Tool Bars in a Bulk Routing Panel
Destination Levels Grid Tool Bar
Click to see drop-down menu of tool bar items.
Click to Select all level.
Click to Deselect all levels.
Click to keep the Levels selection after a Take.
Click to Sort levels A-Z.
Click to Sort levels Z-A.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Filter control, see
Fig. 12-17: Destination Level Selection Grid - Tool Bar
Router Control Pane Tool Bar
Keyboard Shortcuts icon
Fig. 12-18: Router Control Pane - Tool Bar
506
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Salvos Pane Tool Bar
Click to see drop-down menu of tool bar items
Click to sort sources A-Z
Click to sort sources Z-A
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Wide Source and Destination Selection Buttons
Filter control, see
What is Bulk Routing Panel Filtering?
Fig. 12-19: Salvos Pane - Tool Bar
Wide Source and Destination Selection Buttons
To facilitate the display of longer source or destination names on selection buttons, there is a
‘wide button’ display option. This is selectable in the Source Grid and, independently, in the
Destination Grid. The option is selected with a toggle button in the tool bar of each grid. See
The display option persists between sessions with the Bulk Routing Panel.
Click to toggle display of normal and wide buttons.
Fig. 12-20: Wide Buttons (Source Grid Shown)
Panel Pop-Up Items
Right-Click in a Bulk Routing Panel
Right-click on the Bulk Routing Panel to display a pop-up context menu. See Figure 12-21.
507
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Pop-up Notification Messages
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 12-21: Right-Click Context Menu
Table 12-2: Right-Click Context Menu Items
Window
Item
Dock/Undock
Full Screen
Keyboard
Undock or dock the Bulk Routing Panel window from/to the
GV Orbit Client window.
The Bulk Routing Panel window is shown full-screen.
The control toggles full screen mode on/off.
Copy Same as:
• clicking on Copy icon in grid/pane tool bar; or
• pressing Ctrl-C.
Deselect All
Lock/Unlock
Set Timeout
Deselects all items.
Click to lock panel. When panel is locked, controls are grayed-out and user operation is disabled. The control toggles lock on/off
Click to set a timeout (in seconds) for confirmation from the router controller of routing actions (that is setting the router’s crosspoints).
Copy As Widgets
If the timeout is exceeded, a timeout notification is shown on screen. See
.
Click to copy a selection of one or more buttons to the GV Orbit
Client’s copy-buffer.
(This is used when designing an XY Routing Panel. See Chapter 13,
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Pop-up Notification Messages
During Bulk Routing Panel operation, notification messages may pop up at the foot of the
GV Orbit Client application window to provide information and advice, for example, on the
setting up of a route, or of a broken/re-made Routing service connection. See Figure 12-22
for some example messages.
Click OK to clear a message.
508
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Dial Source and Dial Source-Level Dialogs
Click OK to clear the message.
Fig. 12-22: Notification Message Examples
Dial Source and Dial Source-Level Dialogs
To help with source and source level selection when making a route, a ‘dial-up’ dialog allows you to begin to type in a source name and see a filtered list of sources and source levels.
There are two ‘dial-up’ dialogs
•
for Source selection.
•
for Source and Level selection.
These dialogs enable a user to select a source and/or level and route it to a destination.
509
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Dial Source and Dial Source-Level Dialogs
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: To clear a ‘dial-up’ dialog before making a route, click the ESC key.
Dial Source Dialog
Dial Source is a quick way of selecting a Source for a destination and routing it.
With a Destination selected, a Source may then be found by typing a part of a source name with the keyboard’s alpha-numeric keys. A Dial Source dialog is displayed and, as characters are entered:
• Sources matching the entered characters are displayed in a drop down list; and the
• Source Grid is correspondingly filtered.
After a valid Source has been selected, a route can be made by pressing the Enter key.
Example
To see and use the Dial Source dialog:
1 Select a Destination .
2 Begin to type in a Source name.
A Dial Source
dialog pops up. (See Figure 12-23.)
3 Continue typing in a valid source name and press Enter; and/or select a source from the (scrollable) filtered list in the dialog.
A route is made from the selected Source to the selected Destination . No ‘Take’ is required.
Note: Enter will execute the route if a valid source has been selected. A mouse click on a source will also execute the route.
Selected
Destination
Pop-up Dial Source dialog
Type in Source name, or select Source name.
510
Fig. 12-23: Dial Source Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Dial Source and Dial Source-Level Dialogs
Further routing examples can be found at:
•
Route with Dial Source , on page 514.
Dial Source-Level Dialog
Dial Source-Level is a quick way of selecting a Source and a Level for a destination and routing it. By default, the Dial Source-Level dialog shows the currently-routed Source and
Source-Level.
With a Destination and a Destination Level selected, type a single alpha-numeric character to display the default Dial Source-Level dialog.
A Source may then be found by starting to type a source name. As the Source name is typed, the Sources listed in the dialog are filtered.
After a valid Source has been highlighted, press Tab to select a valid Source Level and a route can be made by pressing the Enter key.
Routing a level from a different source to a destination forms a breakaway (see Breakaway and Levels
). Routing a different level from the same source forms a shuffle (see Shuffle and
).
Example
To see and use the Dial Source-Level dialog:
1 Select a Destination .
2 Select one or more Destination Levels .
3 Type a single alpha-numeric character.
A default Dial Source-Level dialog pops up and shows the currently-routed Source
name and Level. (See Figure 12-24.)
( Note: It is assumed that level-based routing is required.)
511
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Dial Source and Dial Source-Level Dialogs
Selected
Destination
Selected
Destination
Levels
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Pop-up Dial Source-Level dialog
Type in a valid Source name; and press Tab key to toggle focus to Levels.
Type in Level name; and/or select Level name.
512
Fig. 12-24: Dial Source-Level Dialog
4 If a different Source Name is required, begin to enter the required Source name.
The list of Source names is filtered on the typed text.
5 Either:
• continue typing in a valid Source name (but do not press the Enter key); or
• highlight a Source name in the list (do not select it).
6 When the required (and valid) Source name is in the upper text box of the dialog,
press the Tab key. (See Figure 12-24.)
This toggles focus from ‘Sources’ to ‘Levels’; the filtered list changes to listing Levels.
Note: To clear a ‘dial-up’ dialog before making a route, click the ESC key.
7 Type in the Level name required and press Enter; and/or select the Level from the filtered list in the dialog.
A route is made from the (one) selected Source Level to the selected Destination
Level(s) . No ‘Take’ is required.
Note: Enter will execute the route if a valid source and level has been selected. A mouse click on a source or source level will also execute the route.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Bulk Routing Panel Operation
Further routing examples can be found at:
•
Quick Breakaway with Dial Source-Level , on page 524.
•
Quick One-Level Shuffle with Dial Source-Level , on page 530.
Bulk Routing Panel Operation
Make a Simple Route
To make a simple route:
1 Select a Destination .
The source currently routed to the selected destination is automatically highlighted in the Source Grid.
2 Select a Source to be routed to the selected destination.
1
2
3
Click Take to make route
Before a Take , the Levels Grids show level information for the selected source and destination.
Fig. 12-25: Make a Route Example - Before TAKE.
3 Click Take . (Click Cancel , to deselect the source/destination.)
513
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Route with Dial Source
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The selected source (all of its levels) is routed to the selected destination. See Figure 12-
After the TAKE, the new source of the destination and its levels is shown in the Destination Grid and
Destination Levels Grid .
Fig. 12-26: Make a Route Example - After TAKE.
Simple Route - Alternative Method
Also, to make a route, the source may be selected first:
1 Select a Source .
2 Select a Destination .
3 Click Take .
Route with Dial Source
See
Dial Source Dialog , on page 510, for more information. To make a simple route:
1 Select a Destination .
2 Begin to type in a Source name.
A Dial Source dialog pops up.
3 Continue typing in a source name and press Enter; and/or select a source from the (scrollable) filtered list in the dialog.
514
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Route One Source to Multiple Destinations
A route is made from the selected Source to the selected Destination . No ‘Take’ is required.
Route One Source to Multiple Destinations
One to many.
Note: The Bulk Routing Panel may be operated with a mouse, or using keyboard shortcuts, or by using a mixture of both.
To route a single source to multiple destinations:
1 Select a Destination by clicking on the destination selection button.
(Equivalent keyboard shortcuts = cursor arrow keys and space-bar.)
2 Select a second Destination by CTRL + clicking on a destination button.
(Equivalent keyboard shortcuts = cursor arrow keys and CTRL-Space-Bar.)
3 Select further destinations with CTRL + click.
A selection of destinations has been made.
Note: Alternatively, a range selection may be made by:
• Selecting the first destination; and then
• SHIFT-selecting the last one.
This selects a sequential range of destinations, from first to last.
When all destinations have been selected:
4 Select a Source .
(Equivalent keyboard shortcuts:
Change to Source grid = CTRL-Cursor arrow keys.
Select Source = cursor arrow keys and space bar.)
5 Click Take .
(Equivalent keyboard shortcuts = Enter.)
The selected source is routed to all selected destinations.
One Source to Multiple Destinations - Alternative Method
Alternatively, the source may be selected first:
1 Select a Source .
2 Make a selection of Destinations (by CTRL-clicking, or SHIFT-clicking, or a combination).
3 Click Take .
Route Multiple Sources to Multiple Destinations
Many to many.
To route multiple sources to multiple destinations:
1 Select a Destination by clicking on the destination selection button.
2 Select a second Destination by CTRL + clicking on a destination button.
515
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Multiple Selection Type and Routing Order
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Select further destinations with CTRL + click.
Note: Alternatively, a range selection may be made by:
• Selecting the first Destination; and then
• SHIFT-selecting the last one.
This selects a range, from first to last.
When all destinations have been selected:
4 Select a Source by clicking on the source selection button.
5 Select a second Source by CTRL + clicking on a source button.
6 Select further sources with CTRL + click.
Note: Alternatively, a range selection may be made by selecting the first
Source and then SHIFT-selecting the last one. This selects a range, from first to last.
Note: Select the same number of sources as there are selected destinations.
A reminding, pop-up notification message will appear.
7 Click Take .
The source is routed to all selected destinations.
Multiple Sources to Multiple Destinations - Alternative Method
Alternatively, the source may be selected first:
1 Select multiple sources.
2 Select multiple destinations.
3 Click Take .
Multiple Selection Type and Routing Order
Routing multiple Sources and/or multiple Destinations requires a selection of Sources and of Destinations to be made. This can be done as:
• a selection of multiple items (see
Select Multiple Items (CTRL select) , on page 499); or
as
• a range selection of multiple items (see
Select a Range of Items (SHIFT select) , on page 499).
The selection order is different in each case and affects routing order.
CTRL-Selection Type Order
When routing multiple sources to multiple destinations and selecting multiple items with
CTRL-clicks (that is, not by using a range selection), then the order of selection is significant and affects the order in which routing is done.
For example, to route sources 1 to 8 to destinations 8 to 1:
516
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Multiple Selection Type and Routing Order
• Select sources 1 to 8 by CTRL-clicking on each source button in the order 1 to 8.
• Select destinations 8 to 1 in that order by CTRL+clicking on each destination button in the order 8 to 1.
• Click Take .
SHIFT-Selection (Range) Type Order
When routing multiple sources to multiple destinations and using a selection range (a selection made with ‘SHIFT’), then selection order is from the first to the last item of the range, in the order that the items (Source or Destination buttons) are shown. This is the routing order used.
What is Copy-and-Paste Routing?
Copy and paste allow routing information from one destination to be copied onto another destination. The Copy and Paste controls are in the Destination Grid tool bar.
Copy
Paste
Fig. 12-27: Destination Grid Copy and Paste Controls
To Perform Copy-and-Paste Routing
1 Select a Destination .
2 Click the Copy icon in the tool bar of the Destination Grid , or press ‘CTRL +C’.
The copy-selected Destination is shown highlighted with a ‘crawling’, dashed outline.
‘Copy-Selected’ Destination
Fig. 12-28: Copy-Selected Destination
Then:
3 Select a different Destination (the one to copy to).
4 Click the Paste icon, or press ‘CTRL + V’.
The routing of the first destination is applied to the second destination and a route is made automatically. The routing done is ‘all-levels’.
517
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
What is Copy-and-Paste Series Routing?
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The copy-selection is still selected (the dashed outline indicates this), so further pastes can be made. To paste the same to further Destination(s):
5 Select a Destination (or select multiple destinations) and click on the Paste icon (or press ‘CTRL-V’.)
6 Repeat for any further Destinations.
Finally:
7 To clear the copy selection, press ESC. (This can be done at any time.)
What is Copy-and-Paste Series Routing?
Paste Series fills a range of Destinations with a consecutive series of Sources .
To Perform Copy-and-Paste Series Routing
1 Select a Destination .
2 Click the Copy icon, or press ‘CTRL +C’.
The routing information of the selected destination is copied.
3 Select a range of Destinations .
4 Click the Paste Series icon, or press ‘SHIFT + V’.
Paste Series icon
518
Fig. 12-29: Paste Series Icon
The routing of the first, ‘copy-selected’ destination is applied to the first destination in the selected range.
The next sequential source is routed to the next destination in the range and so on.
Routing is done automatically (no Take required).
Paste Series Example
1 Select destination 1 and click Copy .
2 Select destination range 11 up to 19 . (Select first and Shift-select last.)
3 Click Paste Series .
The following routing is done:
Source 1 to destination 11 , source 2 to 12 , 3 to 13 , 4 to 14 , ... , 9 to 19 .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
What is Quick 1-to-1 Routing?
Note: The rules of selection type and order apply. See
Type and Routing Order , on page 516.
What is Quick 1-to-1 Routing?
Quick 1-to-1 routing can be used to make 1-to-1 routes quickly. This can be useful at system set up. For example, for the first 100 sources routed to the first 100 destinations.
To Perform Quick 1-to-1 Routing
To make a set of quick 1-to-1 routes:
1 Select destination 1 , select Source 1 , and click Take .
This routes the first destination.
2 Click Copy .
Destination 1 ’s routing information is copied.
3 Select destination range 1 to 100 . (Select first and Shift-select last.)
4 Click Paste Series .
The following routing is done:
Source 1 to 1 , source 2 to 2 , 3 to 3 , ... , 99 to 99 , and 100 to 100 .
This has quickly copied Sources to all selected Destinations.
Destination Protect
What is Destination Protect?
When a destination is protected by a user, users of other types of routing control panel cannot route to it.
This means that users of Bulk Routing Panels in GV Orbit Clients would be able to route to a destination protected by another such Bulk Routing Panel. But hardware panel users would not be able to route to a destination protected by a Bulk Routing Panel. (And vice versa.)
To Protect a Destination
1 Select a Destination.
2 Click the Protect button in the Router Control pane.
The destination is protected.
519
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
To Un-Protect a Destination
Protected
Destination, selected
Protect button
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
A Protected
Destination, not selected
Selected
Destination’s levels are also shown as protected
Fig. 12-30: Protected Destination
To Un-Protect a Destination
1 Select the protected destination.
2 Click the Release button in the Router Control pane.
The destination protection is removed from the selected destination.
520
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Destination Lock
What is Destination Lock?
When a destination is locked, it cannot be routed to by any user. When a destination is locked by another user, click on a destination to see which user locked it.
To Lock a Destination
1 Select a destination.
2 Click Lock in the Router Control pane.
The destination is locked.
Lock button
Selected
Destination, Locked
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Destination Lock
Locked
Destination’s levels are also shown as locked
Fig. 12-31: Locked Destination
To Unlock a Destination
1 Select the locked destination.
2 Click the Release button in the Router Control pane.
The destination lock is removed from the selected destination.
521
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Breakaway and Levels
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Breakaway and Levels
What is a Breakaway?
A ‘breakaway’ occurs when all levels of a destinations do not come from the same source.
This is also referred to as the destination being ‘unmarried’.
Breakaway example shown:
Two audio channels of Destination B (A1 and A2) are obtained from a different source (Source C).
522
Fig. 12-32: Breakaway
Destinations which are ‘unmarried’ are indicated with a breakaway icon (Figure 12-33c) on
the destination button.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Perform a Breakaway
Perform a Breakaway
To perform a breakaway:
1 Select a Destination .
2 Select the Destination Levels to make a route to (for example, audio channels A1 and
3 Select a new Source .
4 Click Take .
The corresponding levels of the selected source are routed to the selected destination
levels and a breakaway is formed. Figure 12-33b shows the breakaway result.
1
4
3
2 a) Before TAKE:
• Destination MV10-9 is currently all routed from source
S10-9
(as shown in the Destination Levels Grid ).
• Destinations levels A1 and A2 are selected.
• S10-18 is the currently-selected source.
b) After TAKE:
• Destination MV10-9 is routed partly from source S10-9 and partly from S10-18 (levels A1 and A2).
• This breakaway situation is indicated with a Breakaway icon on the destination button.
• The source of each destination level is shown in the
Destination Levels Grid .
c) Breakaway icon on button
Fig. 12-33: Breakaway Example: a) Before TAKE; b) After TAKE; c) Breakaway Icon on
Button.
523
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Quick Breakaway with Dial Source-Level
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Breakaway - Alternative Method
Also, to perform a breakaway, the source may be selected first:
1 Select a Source .
2 Select a Destination .
3 Select the Destination Levels to route.
4 Click Take .
Note:
A ‘breakaway’ occurs when not all of a destination’s levels are selected for routing.
This can also happen if a source with fewer levels than the selected destination is routed, this will result in a ‘breakaway’ (without selecting destination levels).
Quick Breakaway with Dial Source-Level
A quick single-level breakaway method uses the
.
To perform a quick video-level breakaway:
1 Select a Destination .
2 Select a Destination Level
Selected Destination
Selected Video Level
524
Fig. 12-34: Selected A Destination and a Level
3 Type a single alpha-numeric character.
A default Dial Source-Level dialog box appears showing the currently-routed Source and Level.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Quick Breakaway with Dial Source-Level
4 Begin to type a (new) Source name at the keyboard.
(For example, type “s” or “S” if source names begin with “S” - “S10-10”, “S10-11”, etc.)
A Dial Source-Level
dialog box appears. See Figure 12-35.
Type Source name
Source name text entry box
Level text entry box
Fig. 12-35: Dial Source-Level Dialog
5 Type the new Source name into the dialog box. But do not press the Enter key yet.
6 When the Source name is typed, press the Tab key.
This toggles focus from ‘Sources’ to ‘Levels’ and to the lower dialog text entry box.
Press Tab key to toggle focus to the Level text entry box
Typed in source name
Fig. 12-36: Source and Level are Dialed-up
7 Type in the Level name, for example “V” and press the Enter key when done.
Or select a level from the filtered list.
525
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Shuffle and Levels
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The route is made, connecting the dialed-up Source Level to the selected Destination
Level and forming a breakaway. See Figure 12-37.
Video Level sourced from a different source. (Breakaway)
(Level sources:
‘Video’ - now from S10-111,
‘other’ - unchanged, S10-10.)
Fig. 12-37: Resulting Video Level Breakaway
Use this method to set up any breakaways (or shuffles, see
Dial Source-Level , on page 530) required.
Shuffle and Levels
What is a Shuffle?
A destination is said to be ‘shuffled’ when one of its levels is routed from another level of the same source . For example, destination audio channel 5 from source audio channel 4. When this occurs, the Bulk Routing Panel indicates a ‘shuffled’ destination with a Shuffle icon on the destination button.
526
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
To Perform a Shuffle
Shuffle example shown:
Audio channels of Destination B (A1 and
A2) are obtained from a source (Source
A) but not all levels are mapped “1 to 1”.
A source is routed to a destination and audio channels are ‘shuffled’ around; they are not routed ‘1-to-1’.
Fig. 12-38: Shuffles
To Perform a Shuffle
1 Select a Destination .
2 Select the Destination Levels .
For example, in Figure 12-40a, levels A1, A2, A3 and A4 are selected
in that order .
3 Select a Source .
4 Now select the Source Levels in the order in which they shall apply to the destination
Levels.
For example, in Figure 12-40a, levels A4, A3, A2 and A1 are selected
in that order .
Note: Selecting just one source level will route this to all selected destination levels.
Otherwise select the same number of source levels as destination levels. A notification prompt appears at the bottom of the GV
Orbit Client window, reminding you to select source levels (see
527
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
To Perform a Shuffle
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Notification prompt.
Fig. 12-39: Select Levels Notification
5 Click Take .
The selected source levels are routed to the selected destination levels and a shuffle is
formed. Figure 12-40 shows a shuffle example reversing the order of the four audio
channels (A1 to A4).
528
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
To Perform a Shuffle
3
1
5
4 2 a) Before TAKE:
• Destination MV10-9 is currently all routed from source
S10-9
(as shown in the Destination Levels Grid ).
• Destinations levels A1 , A2 , A3 and A4 are selected.
• Source S10-9 is selected.
• Source Levels A4 , A3 , A2 and A1 have been selected
(in that reversed order).
b) After TAKE:
• Destination MV10-9 is still all routed from source S10-9 .
• This ‘shuffled’ situation is indicated with a Shuffle icon on the destination button.
• The source of each destination level is shown in the
Destination Levels Grid .
In particular, the destination’s A1, A2, A3 and A4 are now routed from A4, A3, A2, and A1 respectively.
c) Shuffle icon on button
Fig. 12-40: Shuffle Example: a) Before TAKE; b) After TAKE; c) Shuffle Icon on Dest. Button.
529
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Quick One-Level Shuffle with Dial Source-Level
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Quick One-Level Shuffle with Dial Source-Level
To shuffle (route) one level using the Dial Source-Level Dialog :
1 Select a Destination .
2 Select a Destination Level .
A Destination and one Level are now selected.
3 Type a single alpha-numeric character.
A default Dial Source-Level dialog appears and showing a filtered list of source names.
The currently-routed Source and Level are shown.
Do not click; do not press Enter at this time.
Note: The currently-routed Source name is shown in the default dialog.
4 Press the ‘ Tab ’ key.
Focus then moves (toggles) from Source to Levels in the dialog.
Current Source routed to selected Destination
Selected Destination
Dial Source-Level dialog
Source name
Selected Source Level
Selected Destination Level
Fig. 12-41: Dial Source-Level Dialog
5 Type in a new Level name and press Enter, or select a new Level item in the filtered list, click to select.
A route is performed, connecting the selected Source Level to the selected Destination
Level. A shuffle is made, see Figure 12-42.
530
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Filtering
Shuffle now made, audio level A11 at destination comes from audio level A7.
Fig. 12-42: Shuffle Routed
Note: Using this method, one Source Level can be routed to one or more
Destination Levels.
Use this method to set up any shuffles (or breakaways, see
Source-Level , on page 524) required.
Filtering
What is Bulk Routing Panel Filtering?
Most grids/panes of the Bulk Routing Panel have a filter control on their tool bar. The filters control what items are shown in the grid/pane. Filters can be applied to the
Source/Destination grids, the Level Selection grids and the Salvos pane. Custom filters can be created and applied. For destinations, filtering can also be by (routed) source.
By default, level filtering is set up to show the usual video and audio levels.
531
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Filtering Actions
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: Filtered Lists:
When a filter is applied, a filtered (reduced) set of items is shown in a grid/pane.
Subsequent actions, such as ‘select all items’ or ‘selecting a range’, then all operate on the filtered items shown and not on the full list of items.
What are the Filter Controls in a Bulk Routing Panel?
Each grid/pane contains a similar filter text box and icon. These access a filter items list (also accessed by typing Ctrl-F when in a grid/pane), and filter options menu respectively.
Filter search text box Click the Filter icon to show the Filter options menu.
a) Filter Controls - Text Entry Box
Destination Grid’s Filter options menu b) Filter Drop-Down Menu
Filter items list c) Filter Drop-Down Menu - for the Destination Selection Grid
Note: The default ‘Levels’ filter list shows one video level and 16 audio channels.
d) Levels Grid Filter Default
Fig. 12-43: Filter Controls: a) Filter Text Entry Box; b) Filter Drop-Down Options Menu; c) Drop-Down Menu for Destination Grid; d) Level Grid Filter Items List (Default).
Filtering Actions
Simple Filtering by Name
To simply filter items in a grid or pane by name:
1 Select the Filter text entry box.
2 Enter a filter search term into the Filter text box.
For example, type ‘S11’ to only show source names starting with ‘S11’.
532
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Filtering Actions
As the filter search term is typed, the number of displayed items in the Grid/Pane is reduced (filtered). The reduced number of items gives a preview of the filter’s action.
3 To abort the filter set up, press the ESC key.
4 When the required filtering is reached, press the Return/Enter key to apply the filter.
The filter has been applied to the grid. Then only filtered items are shown in the grid/pane, with names which contain the search term.
Filter search term
Fig. 12-44: Example of Simple Filtering Applied to a Grid/Pane (Search Term = “S11”)
Clear Applied Filtering in a Grid/Pane
To clear filtering that has been applied in a grid or pane:
1 Either:
• click on the Filter icon ( ) in the grid/pane’s tool bar; or
• in the Filter text entry box, press the Tab key.
And then select ‘Clear Filter’.
The filtering is removed and all grid/pane items are shown.
The filter search term is also cleared and the Filter items drop-down list is shown.
2 At this point, a new search term may be entered.
Or the filter clearing action can be aborted by pressing the ESC key.
If no further filter set up is required:
3 Press the Enter/Return key to remove the Filtering and the Filter items drop-down list.
Set Level Filtering in a Grid/Pane
To set any applied Level filtering back to its ‘default’:
1 Either:
• click on the Filter icon ( ) in the Level grid/pane’s tool bar; or
• in the Filter text entry box, press the Tab key,
533
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Filtering Actions
And select ‘Video, Audio 1 to 16’.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select ‘Video, Audio 1 to 16’
Fig. 12-45: Set Level Filtering to Default
Any filtering is replaced by the default ‘Video, Audio 1 to 16’ filtering and the filter search term reflects this.
Fig. 12-46: Level Filtering Default
2 Press Enter to apply this change (or press ESC to cancel this filter change).
Fig. 12-47: Level Filtering Default Applied
534
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Filtering Destinations by Source
Dynamic Filtering By Name
Filter search term List of names containing the search term (scrollable).
a) Enter Search Term and Select b) Selected Item(s) Displayed
Fig. 12-48: Dynamic Filtering (Source Names Example): a) Enter Search Term and Select. b) Selected Item Displayed
To dynamically filter items by their name:
1 Enter the filter search term into the Filter text box.
GV Orbit looks for names which contain the filter search term.
A drop-down, scrollable filtered list of names is presented.
The list dynamically changes with the search term.
2 Find a name in the list by scrolling through the items.
(Use a mouse wheel, the scroll-bars, or up/down arrow keys to scroll through the list.)
3 Select an item.
(Click on it, or press the Return/Enter key when item is highlighted.)
The result of the selected filter item is shown in the grid.
Filtering Destinations by Source
Filtering of items by their names has been described so far. The filtering is extended for
Destinations to enable Destination names to be filtered by the names of the sources that are routed to them. The filter drop-down menu of the Destination Grid contains an extra item, for this, ‘Filter by Source’.
1 In the Destination Grid, click on the Filter icon ( ) and select Filter by Source .
535
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Filtering Destinations by Source
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
‘Filter by Source’ is selected
Fig. 12-49: Filtering of Destinations by Source is Enabled
2 Enter a search term in the Filter text box.
Filter search term.
536
Fig. 12-50: Filter Destinations by Source
3 Press the Enter/Return key to apply the filtering.
With the Filter by Source option selected, the Destination Grid will show only destinations which have a filter-matching source routed to them.
Search term
‘Filter by Source’ is selected
Destinations shown have
Source names matching the filter search criteria.
Fig. 12-51: Example Destination ‘Filter by Source’
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Preset Level Filters
Preset Level Filters
The Source Level and Destination Level grids offer some preset filters to filter audio/video levels. For example, ‘Video, Audio 1 to 16’ which is for video and 16 audio channels. This preset filter is listed in the drop-down Filter items list, along with the names of the items
(levels).
Custom Filters
What is a Custom Filter in a Bulk Routing Panel?
GV Orbit allows more complex and custom filters to be created. This can be done for any of the filterable grids/panes.
A custom filter can be:
• Created, given a name and saved.
• Edited or deleted.
• Re-named.
A custom filter is applied by entering the start of the custom filter name into the filter text box. The custom filter name will appear in the Filter items drop-down list for selection.
Select the custom filter name to apply it.
Custom filters are stored in the GV Orbit Routing service for the currently-logged-in
GV Orbit user. In this way, the filter will be available to the same user on other machines.
Note: Custom filters will not be seen by other users on other machines.
What is a Custom Filter Rule?
Filter expressions can be defined and combined together to form complex filter conditions, filter rules. The filter rule of a custom filter is designed in a Filter dialog.
Expressions can be combined to make rules by ANDing and ORing them together:
• AND - filter condition is met if both filter expressions are satisfied.
• OR - filter condition is met if either filter expression is satisfied.
Custom Filtering
Creating a Custom Filter
In a grid/pane:
1 Click on the Filter tool bar icon and select ‘Create Filter’.
An empty Filter
dialog is shown. See Figure 12-52.
537
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Custom Filtering
Fig. 12-52: Filter Dialog
2 Enter a Filter name for the filter.
Filter name entered
Fig. 12-53: Saving New Custom Filter
3 Click Save .
A new Custom Filter has been created.
Selecting a Custom Filter
A Custom Filter is listed in the drop-down Filter items list:
1 In the Filter text box, start to type the name of a Custom Filter .
The Filter items drop-down list contains the Custom Filter name.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Custom filter rule to be defined here.
538
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Custom Filtering
Select a Custom Filter name
Fig. 12-54: Custom Filter in Filter Items List
Constructing the Rules for a Custom Filter
See
Filter Dialog and Custom Filter Rules , on page 540, for adding filter rules with the dialog
to construct the filter.
To Edit an Existing Custom Filter
1 Click on the Filter tool bar icon and select Edit Filter .
A Custom Filter name a) Select Edit Filter name b) Select which Custom Filter to Edit
Fig. 12-55: Select Custom Filter to Edit
2 Select the filter to edit from the list shown. (See Figure 12-55b.)
The Filter dialog is shown for the selected custom filter.
To Delete a Custom Filter
1 Click on the Filter tool bar icon and select Delete Filter .
2 Select the filter to delete from the list shown.
539
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Filter Dialog and Custom Filter Rules
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The filter is deleted when the selection is made.
Filter Dialog and Custom Filter Rules
The filter rule of a custom filter is designed in the Filter
dialog (see Figure 12-56). A rule is
formed from the logical combination of filter expressions. Expressions can be ANDed or
ORed together and complex AND/OR configurations can be defined for a custom filter:
• AND - filter condition is met if both filter expressions are satisfied.
• OR - filter condition is met if either filter expression is satisfied.
A worked example is given ( Example Custom Filter , on page 541) which shows how to
construct Filter rules with the Filter dialog.
Click to Add Expression item under an AND/OR item.
Custom Filter name (editable)
Click to Add AND/OR item under an AND/OR item.
Logical AND/OR combination item
Defines the logical
AND/OR structure
Delete AND/Or item and items beneath it .
Delete Expression item
AND/OR item
Expression item
Select the target of the expression,
(Destination) ‘Name’ or ‘Source’
Enter operand
Click to save the custom filter and close the dialog.
Click to apply custom filter.
Fig. 12-56: Filter Dialog - Custom Filter Example
Logical AND / OR Combining
The Custom Filter being designed must be expressible in the form of a logical expression so that it can be captured in the Filter dialog.
A rule might be designed to filter:
• destination names that both start with a ‘C’ and contain a ‘6’.
• destination names that either end with a ‘4’ or end with a ‘5’.
• destinations whose source names start with ‘Cam’.
540
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Example Custom Filter
• destinations whose names end with a ‘X’ and whose source names are ‘Cam12’.
Filter Expressions
An expression tests a Destination Name or Source Name with an operator and an operand.
Filter Expression Operators
The operators include:
Table 12-3: Operators - Name/Source and Operand
Operation
Equals Name matches.
Not Equals
StartsWith
EndsWith
Contains
No match.
Starts with the operand.
Ends with the operand.
Contains the operand.
NotContains
Greater Than
Less Than
GreaterThanEqual
LessThanEqual
True when...
Does not contain the operand.
Numerical part of name is greater than the operand.
Numerical part of name is less than the operand.
Numerical part of name is greater than or equal to the operand.
Numerical part of name is less than or equal to the operand.
Example Custom Filter
This section explains
and Defining the Custom Filter Example via
the Filter dialog.
What the Filter Should Do
“Display two destinations only if they have certain sources currently routed to them.“
(Destinations Mon1 and Mon2 and sources Cam1 and Cam2 are used in this example.)
The filter for this example may be written:
“Show a destination if the destination name is Mon1 or Mon2 , and its routed source name is Cam1 or Cam2 .”
This may be written out to show its logical expression structure.
Show a destination if the following is true:
541
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Example Custom Filter
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Destination name is Mon1
OR
Destination name is Mon2
AND its routed Source name is Cam1
OR its routed Source name is Cam2
Defining the Custom Filter Example
This example Custom Filter filter may be entered into the Filter dialog as follows:
1 Click on the Destination Grid’s Filter tool bar icon and select Create Filter .
An empty Filter
dialog is shown. See Figure 12-52 on page 538.
2 Enter a Filter Name for the filter.
3 Select AND as the first (top-level) logical combination item with the drop-down menu
Filter Name entered
Fig. 12-57: Select AND
4 Click the Add AND/OR icon.
An indented AND/OR item appears.
An expression item also appears below the OR. See
5 Select OR as the new, indented logical combination item.
Expression item
Fig. 12-58: Select OR
6 Click the new Add Expression icon.
A second expression item appears
under the OR. See Figure 12-59.
542
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Example Custom Filter
Fig. 12-59: Added a Second Expression Item
7 Click the first Add AND/OR icon again.
This add a second OR logical combination item
indented under the AND. See Figure 12-60.
Second expression item
Fig. 12-60: Second OR Logical Combination Item Added
8 Add a second expression item under the new OR item. See Figure 12-61.
Operator
Fig. 12-61: Second Expression Item Added
The basic ‘AND-OR-OR’ logical combination structure for the example has now been entered for the Filter rule.
The next step completes the expression item and saves the filter:
9 Set up the expressions as shown in Figure 12-62.
543
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Example Custom Filter
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Filter Name
Expressions
Fig. 12-62: Completed Custom Filter
10 Click Save in the Filter dialog to save the custom filter and close the dialog.
Custom filter rules have been entered; the Custom Filter has been created, ready to use.
See
Using a Custom Filter
To use the custom filter ‘My Custom Filter 1’:
1 Start entering the custom filter name into the Filter text box.
(‘My’ in this example.) A list of possible matching custom filters is presented.
Fig. 12-63: Select Custom Filter
2 Select the ‘My Custom Filter 1’ item.
The filter is applied.
In this example, only destinations ‘Mon1’ or ‘Mon2’ are shown if they have sources
‘Cam1’ or ‘Cam2’ routed to them. See Figure 12-64.
544
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Salvos
(The Custom Filter displays only destinations
‘Mon1’ and ‘Mon2’ - which happen to be locked.)
Fig. 12-64: Applied Custom Filter
To clear the filtering:
3 Click on the Filter tool bar icon and select Clear Filter .
Salvos
What is a Salvo?
Salvos are created and defined in Grass Valley’s GV Orbit product and are available to the
Bulk Routing Panel through the GV Orbit Routing service that the Bulk Routing Panel is connected to.
Salvos are shown in the Salvos pane of the Bulk Routing Panel. The list of Salvo names can be filtered using the tool bar controls. Filters can be set up in a similar way to the other grids/panes of the Bulk Routing Panel.
Fig. 12-65: Salvos Pane with Salvo Buttons
Executing Salvos
To Execute a Salvo
Either:
• double-click on the Salvo button; or,
• select the Salvo button (single-click) and click Take .
545
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Hide Sources
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
To Execute multiple Salvos
1 Select the first Salvo .
2 Select other Salvos with CTRL-click.
3 Press Take .
Hide Sources
What is the Hide Sources Mode?
In Hide Sources mode, the Source Selection and Source Level Selection grids may be hidden from view. Thus more destinations are displayed.
The Hide Sources icon in the Destination Grid’s tool bar enables this mode.
Fig. 12-66: Hide Sources Icon in Destination Grid Tool Bar
Enter Hide Sources Mode
Toggle Hide Sources on/off by:
• Click the Hide Sources icon in the Destination Selection grid tool bar.
The Bulk Routing Panel hides the Sources and more Destinations are shown. See
Routing in Hide Sources Mode
Use the Dial Source or Dial Source-Level facility to route source signals and/or levels to
destinations. See Dial Source Dialog , on page 510 and
Dial Source-Level Dialog , on page 511.
546
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Routing in Hide Sources Mode a) Sources Shown b) Hide Sources
Fig. 12-67: Bulk Routing Panel: a) Sources and Destinations Shown; b) Hide Sources.
547
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
List View
What is List View Mode?
List View is a level-centric view of a Bulk Routing Panel, allowing a user to focus on routing to Destination Levels. List View hides Sources and Source Levels and presents all of the destinations in a ‘list’ format; each list item is a Destination with all of its Levels.
Figure 12-68a shows a normal Bulk Routing Panel view and Figure 12-68b shows a
List
View .
Click icon to toggle between views a) Normal Bulk Routing Panel View
Destination Levels Grid
Focus is on
Destinations
List b) List View
Fig. 12-68: Bulk Routing Panel: a) Normal View; b) List View
548
Scrollable list of destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Selection in List View
Focus between the Destination and Destination Levels sections can be moved with the
CTRL-Cursor-arrow-keys, as usual. Focus is shown with a thin blue bounding box.
List View Tool Bar
The List View tool bar is an amalgamation of the tool bars of the normal Destination pane and Destination Level grid of a Bulk Routing Panel. Icons may be grayed-out according to
panel focus. See Figure 12-69.
Icons, some may be grayed-out depending on panel focus.
Two filter boxes, for Destination filtering and Destination Level filtering
Fig. 12-69: List View Tool Bar
Destination Filtering
There are two filter boxes and these are for: Destination filter and Destination Level filter.
List View presents all of the destinations in a scrollable list. To aid selection of destinations and levels, and navigation of the list, the filter facility can be used to limit what is listed:
• Destination filtering may be done by name or by their routed Source.
• Destination Level filtering may be done by Level name.
See
Filtering , on page 531, for more information about using the filter facility.
A filter may be invoked by pressing CTRL-F according to where your panel focus is. In List
View, with panel focus on:
• the Destination column, then CTRL-F invokes Destination filter; or on
• the Level grid, then CTRL-F invokes Destination Level filter.
Selection in List View
Select a Destination
1 Click on a Destination.
(Or move focus to the level with the cursor keys and press Space-Bar.)
All of the destination’s levels are automatically selected.
549
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Selection in List View
Select a Destination, then all Levels are selected
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 12-70: Select a Destination
Select Multiple Destinations
1 Click on a Destination to select it.
(Or move focus onto the Destination with the cursor arrow keys and press the Space-
Bar key.)
2 CTRL-click to add other Destinations.
(Or focus on another Destination and press CTRL-Space-Bar.)
Alternatively or additionally, SHIFT-select can be used when selecting a range.
Select a Destination Level
1 Click on a Destination Level.
e
The Level is selected and the Destination is selected automatically. No other Levels are selected.
Select a Level, then the Destination is selected.
Fig. 12-71: Select a Destination Level
Select Multiple Destination Levels
CTRL-Selecting
1 Select a Destination Level.
2 CTRL-Select other Levels to add further Levels to the selection.
550
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Selection in List View
Select a Level, then CTRL-Select others.
Fig. 12-72: Select Multiple Destination Levels
SHIFT-Selecting a Range of Destination Levels
To select a range of Levels:
1 Select the first Level in the range.
(Move button focus onto a Level and click on it, or press Space-Bar.)
2 SHIFT-Select the last Level in the range.
(To move focus from the first Level to the last, use the mouse or use SHIFT-cursorleft/right arrow keys. To select, click or press Space-Bar.)
Levels from the first to the last are selected.
Select the first Level, then SHIFT-Select the last.
Fig. 12-73: Select a Range of Destination Levels
SHIFT-Selecting a Block of Destination Levels
A block of Levels may be selected. This is similar to selecting a range, but it goes across more than one destination. To select a block of Levels:
1 Select the first, ‘top-left’ Level in the block.
2 SHIFT-Select the last, ‘bottom-right’ Level in the block.
Levels from the first selection to the last in a block are selected.
551
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Routing in List View
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select the first, ‘top-left’ Level, then SHIFT-Select the last, ‘bottom-right’.
Fig. 12-74: Select a Block of Destination Levels
Selecting Source and/or Source Level
Source and Source Level selection is done via the Dial Source and Dial Source-Level dialup dialog facility. After the required Destination(s) or Destination Level(s) are selected type
in an alpha-numeric character to open one of the dial-up dialogs. (See Dial Source and Dial
Source-Level Dialogs , on page 509.)
For normal routing operation in List View mode, only a single Source or a Single Source
Level can be selected.
Routing in List View
Routing in List View is done by selecting a Destination (and Levels) and then selecting a
Source and Source Levels via the Dial Source and Dial Source-Level facility. (See
Source and Dial Source-Level Dialogs , on page 509.)
Some Routing examples are provided, see:
•
Routing Examples - ‘All Levels’ , on page 552.
•
List View Routing Examples - One-Level , on page 554.
•
List View Routing Examples - Destination Copy-Paste , on page 559.
•
List View Routing Examples - Copy-Paste Levels , on page 561.
A brief summary of these examples is found at
List View Routing Summary , on page 565.
Routing Examples - ‘All Levels’
Several routing examples are presented:
•
Simple Route, One Source to One Destination (‘All-Levels’) .
•
One Source to Multiple Destinations (‘All-Levels’) .
Routing utilizes the
Dial Source and Dial Source-Level Dialogs
.
Simple Route, One Source to One Destination (‘All-Levels’)
To make a simple ‘all-levels’ route in List View :
1 Select a Destination.
552
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Routing Examples - ‘All Levels’
Fig. 12-75: Destination Selected
2 Begin to type a Source name, for example, ‘S10-’.
A Dial Source dialog appears. Source names are listed in the dialog and are filtered on
the typed text. See Figure 12-76.
Typed in text
Fig. 12-76: Dial Source Dialog
Filtered Source List
3 Continue to type in (‘dial-up’) a Source Name and press Return; and/or select the required Source name from the filtered Source list in the Dial Source dialog. For example, ‘S10-22’.
An ‘all-levels’ route is made to the selected Destination.
New source is routed to the destination, all levels.
553
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - One-Level
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 12-77: Routed All-Levels
An ‘all-levels’ route has been made.
One Source to Multiple Destinations (‘All-Levels’)
To make a simple ‘all-levels’ route from one Source to multiple Destinations:
1 Select the first Destination.
2 CTRL-Select and/or SHIFT-Select other Destinations.
When all Destinations have been selected:
3 Begin to type a Source name, for example, ‘S10’.
A Dial Source dialog appears. Source names are listed in the dialog and are filtered on the typed text.
4 Proceed to ‘dial up’ a Source name, as described in
Simple Route, One Source to One
.
5 Select a Source to make the route.
An ‘all-levels’ route is made to multiple Destinations.
List View Routing Examples - One-Level
Several routing level-based examples are presented:
•
Simple One-Level Route (Breakaway)
.
•
.
•
One Level to Multiple Levels .
Simple One-Level Route (Breakaway)
To make a ‘one-level’ route in List View :
1 Select a Destination Level.
Fig. 12-78: Destination Level Selected
The corresponding Destination is also selected.
2 Type a single alpha-numeric character.
A default Dial Source-Level dialog appears. User focus is in the (upper, Source-name) text entry box. The dialog shows the currently-routed Source name and Level.
3 Begin to enter a new Source name into the upper text entry box, for example, ‘S11-’.
Source names are listed, filtered on the typed text. See Figure 12-79.
554
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - One-Level
Select a Source, or type in the name fully and press Enter.
Fig. 12-79: Select a Source Name
4 Either:
• select the required Source name in the filtered list; or
• finish entering the Source name into the dialog and press Enter.
A ‘one-level’ route is made to the selected Destination Level from the selected Source, on the same Level. This forms a Breakaway.
Fig. 12-80: One Level Routed from a Different Source, Breakaway
A one-level, breakaway, route has been made.
One-Level Shuffle
A shuffle is similar to a breakaway and, in List View mode, is routed is a similar way to
Simple One-Level Route (Breakaway)
.
Note: When a Dial Source-Level dialog first appears, it shows the currently-routed Source and Level. For a Shuffle, the Source name simply needs to remain the currently-routed Source.
555
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - One-Level
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
(Refer to
, on page 522, and What is a Shuffle?
general information.)
To do a one-level route:
1 Select a Destination Level.
The corresponding Destination is also selected.
2 Type a single alpha-numeric character.
A default Dial Source-Level dialog appears. User focus is in the (upper, Source-name) text entry box. The dialog shows the currently-routed Source and Level.
Note: The default dialog already shows the currently-routed Source name and Level name, regardless of the single alpha-numeric character typed.
3 Press the Tab key.
In the dialog, user focus changes from the (upper Source name) text entry box to the
(lower, Source-Level-name) text entry box.
4 Either:
• begin to type in a (new) Source Level name and then select the required Source
Level in the list (by clicking on it, or by highlighting the Level and pressing the
Enter key); or
• fully type in the Source Level name (for example, ‘A2’) and press the Enter key.
A ‘one-level’ route is made from the selected |Source Level to the selected Destination
Level, which forms a one-level Shuffle in this case.
A one-level shuffle route has been made.
Channel-Swap Shuffle
To do a channel-swap in List View , carry out two
556
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - One-Level a) Before one-Level routing b) After first one-Level route
Routed-Source’s channel A3 is routed to Destination’s Channel A2 c) After second one-Level route
Routed-Source’s channel A2 is routed to Destination’s Channel A3, and vice versa
Fig. 12-81: Forming a Channel-Swap Shuffle: a) Before any one-Level routing; b) After first one-Level route; c) After second one-Level route.
One Level to Multiple Levels
To route one Source Level to multiple Destination Levels:
1 Select a Destination Level.
2 CTRL-Select and/or SHIFT-Select other Destination Levels.
( Note: These Levels do not have to belong to the same Destination.)
Figure 12-82a gives an example of multiple selected Destination Levels.
This has selected the Destination Levels required.
Then:
3 Type a single alpha-numeric character.
A default Dial Source-Level dialog appears. User focus is in the (upper, Source-name) text entry box. The dialog shows the currently-routed Source and Level.
Note: The default dialog already shows the currently-routed Source name and Level name, regardless of the single alpha-numeric character typed.
557
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - One-Level
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 Dial-up a Source Level with the Dial Source-Level
dialog, see Simple One-Level Route
(Breakaway) and make a one-Level route to all selected Destination Levels.
Figure 12-82b shows an example with Figure 12-82c showing the resulting route made.
a) Multiple Selected Destination Levels
558 b) Dialing Up the Source Level c) Routed Levels
Fig. 12-82: One Level to Multiple Levels: a) Multiple Selected Destination Levels; b) Dialing Up the Source Level; c) Routed Levels.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - Destination Copy-Paste
List View Routing Examples - Destination Copy-Paste
With Copy-Paste routing, the Source assignments of a Destination (that is, the current routing to all the Levels of a Destination) can be copied to other Destinations. Alternatively, the routing to just one or more Destination Levels can be copy-pasted to other Destination
Levels.
Several routing Copy-Paste examples are presented:
•
•
.
Destination Copy-Paste
The routing to a Destination can be copied to one or more other Destinations. This operates on all levels and allows a routing to be quickly copied to other Destinations:
1 Select a Destination. (See Figure 12-83a.)
2 Copy the Destination by, either:
• CTRL-C; or
• right-click and select ‘Copy’; or
• click on the ‘Copy’ icon in the List View tool bar.
The selected Destination (with its Levels) is outlined with a ‘crawling’ dashed line. (See
a) Selected Destination b) Destination Copied
Fig. 12-83: Destination Copy-Paste: a) Selected Destination; b) Destination Copied.
3 Select a Destination to ‘copy to’. (See Figure 12-84.)
559
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - Destination Copy-Paste
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 12-84: ‘Copy’To’ Destination Selected
4 If required, further ‘copy-to’ Destinations can be added to the selection with CTRL-Select and/or
SHIFT-Select.
When all ‘copy to’ Destinations are selected, to paste the ‘copied’ Destination’s routing to the selection:
5 Paste the ‘copied’ Destination’s routing to the selection by either:
• pressing CTRL-V; or
• right-click and select ‘Paste’; or
• click the ‘Paste’ icon in the List View tool bar.
The routes are made (all levels) and the original copied Destination’s routing is applied
(pasted) onto all the selected Destination(s). (See Figure 12-85.)
560
Fig. 12-85: Routing Pasted onto a Destination
Destination Paste-Series
Destination Copy-Paste applies the copied Destination into all of the selected ‘Copy to’
Destinations. Alternatively, a series of sources can be applied to several selected ‘Copy to’
Destinations. The series starts from the ‘Copied’ Destination’s currently-routed Source and the Source increments.
The operation is similar to Destination Copy-Paste
. To paste a series onto a selection of
‘Copy to’ Destinations:
1 Select a Destination and copy it.
2 Select a first ‘Copy to’ Destination and select a range of these by SHIFT-Selecting the last ‘Copy to’ Destination.
This has selected the ‘Copy to’ range.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - Copy-Paste Levels
Currently-routed
Source of the copied Destination
Currently-routed
Source applied to first ‘Copy to’
Destination.
Next Source applied to next
Destination.
And so on.
At this point (with a Destination copied and several ‘Copy to’ destinations selected) a normal ‘paste’ would result in the copied routing being applied to all ‘Copy to’ Destinations.
But, instead, to Paste Series :
3 Press Alt-CTRL-V, or click the Paste Series icon in the List View tool bar.
The currently-routed Source of the copied Destination is applied to the first ‘Copy to’
Destination in our ‘Copy to’ range. The next Source is applied to the next ‘Copy to’
Destination in the range, etc. See Figure 12-86 for an example.
Fig. 12-86: Result of Destination Paste-Series
List View Routing Examples - Copy-Paste Levels
The routing to one or more selected Destination Levels can be copied and pasted onto other Destination Levels. This allows a user to set up levels quickly on one or more
Destinations.
The copy-paste is a two-step process:
1 Copy - Destination Levels are selected and copied.
2 Paste - A paste ‘starting Level’ is selected and pasting is done from this ‘starting Level’.
With more than one Destination Level copied, the pasting of routing onto ‘Copy to’
Destination Levels can be done in two ways:
•
Paste Levels with CTRL-V - pastes with no gaps.
•
Paste Levels with Alt-CTRL-R - pastes preserving gaps.
Both paste types are done in the Levels grid from the ‘starting Level’.
When pasting to more than one ‘starting Level’, a warning is given if there are any pasting conflicts. See
.
Paste Levels with CTRL-V
1 Select Destination Levels and copy them. For example, A3, A4, A6 and A8, see
This has copied the routing of these selected Destination Levels.
561
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - Copy-Paste Levels
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
One selected ‘Copy to’ Level,
‘starting Level’
2 Select one ‘Copy to’ Destination Level. This is the ‘starting Level’.
And click the Paste icon, or press CTRL-V, or select right-click ‘Paste’.
Routes are made to consecutive Destination Levels and the copied routing is applied to the ‘Copy to’ Destination Level and to subsequent, consecutive Destination Levels.
See Figure 12-87 for the result of CTRL-V paste from the copied Destination Levels.
Selected Destination Levels
Routes made to consecutive Levels
Fig. 12-87: Result of CTRL-V Paste
Paste Levels with Alt-CTRL-R
The CTRL-V pasting pastes into consecutive Destination Levels and ignores any gaps there might be in the original copied Levels. Whereas, pasting with Alt-CTRL-R retains the original copied Levels pattern, preserving any gaps in the original pattern. Pasting is still done from a ‘starting Level’.
To paste and preserve gaps:
1 Select Destination Levels and copy them. For example, A3, A4, A6 and A8, see
2 Select one ‘Copy to’ Destination Level. This is the ‘starting Level’.
And press Alt-CTRL-R.
Routes are made and the routing of the copied Levels is applied to the ‘Copy to’ Destination
Level (‘starting Level’) and to subsequent Levels with any gaps preserved. See Figure 12-88
for the result of an ALT-CTRL-R paste from the two copied Destination Levels.
562
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
One selected ‘Copy to’ Level,
‘starting Level’
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - Copy-Paste Levels
Selected Destination Levels
Routes made to Levels and the original copied pattern is retained, gaps are preserved.
Fig. 12-88: Result of Alt-CTRL-V Paste
Levels Copy-Paste Footprint
The copied Levels pattern and the pasting type determine a pasting ‘footprint’ in the List
View Levels grid. The pasting footprint pattern
• retains or ignores any gaps in the copied Levels pattern, depending on pasting type
(CTRL-V or Alt-CTRL-R);
• is applied in the List View Levels grid and is based at each ‘starting Level’ in turn, starting with the first ‘starting Level’.
( Note: It is possible to select more than one ‘starting Level’.)
Figure 12-89 shows 2x1 copied Levels pasted with various ‘Copy to’ starting Levels. In
Figure 12-89d, the pasting footprints overlap.
• Figure 12-89a - Single starting Level and a resulting 2x1 pasting.
• Figure 12-89b - One column of four starting Levels which result in four 2x1 pasting
footprints.
• Figure 12-89c - Two columns of four starting Levels which result in two columns of four
2x1 pasting footprints, which do not overlap.
adjacent columns of four starting Levels which results in two columns of four 2x1 pasting footprints which do overlap. The overlap is warned with a
pop-up Levels Paste message, see Levels Paste Warning .
563
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Examples - Copy-Paste Levels
Copied Levels, a ‘2x1’ shape.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide a) Single starting Level and resulting ‘2x1’ pasting.
b)
Fig. 12-89: Example Level Pasting c) d)
Paste footprint overlaps
Levels Paste Warning
For a Levels Copy-Paste operation which has more than one ‘starting Level’, if the
operation will result in overlapping paste footprints (see Figure 12-89d), a
Levels Paste
warning pops up. See Figure 12-90.
564
Fig. 12-90: Level Paste Warning
You can choose to not paste, or to paste anyway, in which case the paste footprints are applied sequentially, starting with the first ‘starting Level’ in the selection. If there is overlap, then some of the Levels Copy-Paste routing may be overwritten. The later routing wins.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Summary
List View Routing Summary
List View Routing Summary - All-Levels
One Source to One Destinations One Source to Multiple Destinations
To make: An ‘all-levels’ route to a destination:
1 Select a single Destination .
An ‘all-levels’ route to multiple destinations:
Select a Destination .
2
3
Select further with CTRL-Select and/or
SHIFT-Select.)
Begin to type a Source name.
A Dial Source dialog appears.
4
5
Proceed to ‘dial up’ a Source name.
Then either:
• select the typed-in Source by pressing Enter/Return; and/or:
• select a Source from the Dial Source filtered source list.
Result: An ‘all-levels’ route is made to the destination.
An ‘all-levels’ route is made to the destinations.
List View Routing Summary - One-Level
Simple One-Level (Breakaway) Simple One-level (Shuffle)
To route: One level from another source:
1 Select a single
One level from same destination.
Destination Level .
2
3 Begin to enter a new
Type a single alpha-numeric character.
A default Dial Source-Level dialog appears showing currentlyrouted Source and Level .
Source name into the dialog’s upper text entry box.
Press the Tab key.
User focus changes to the lower text entry box in the dialog, for Source Level entry.
565
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Summary - Destination Copy
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
List View Routing Summary - One-Level
(continued)
Simple One-Level (Breakaway)
4 Then in the dialog, either:
• select the required Source name; or
• finish entering the Source name and press Enter/Return.
Result: A one-level, breakaway route has been
made. (For a channel-swap, do 2x Simple
).
Simple One-level (Shuffle)
Then in the dialog, either:
• begin to type in a (new) Source
Level name and then select the required Source Level in the list; or
• fully type in the (new) Source Level name (for example, ‘A2’) and press the Enter/Return key.
A one-level, shuffle route has been made.
One Level to Multiple Levels
To route: One level to multiple destination levels:
1 Select a Destination Level .
2 And select further with CTRL-Select and/or SHIFT-Select.
3 Type any single alpha-numeric character.
A Dial Source-Level dialog appears showing currently-routed Source and Level .
4 Press the Tab key.
User focus changes to the lower text entry box in the dialog.
5 Then, either:
• begin to type in a (new) Source Level name and then select the required
Source Level in the list; or
• fully type in the (new) Source Level name (for example, ‘A2’) and press the
Enter/Return key.
Result: A one-level route is made to all selected Destination Levels .
List View Routing Summary - Destination Copy
Destination Copy-Paste Destination Paste-Series
1
To: Copy a Destination’s Source-assignments to another Destination:
‘Copy-Paste’ a series of Destinations:
Select a single Destination .
566
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
List View Routing Summary - Paste Levels
List View Routing Summary - Destination Copy
(continued)
Destination Copy-Paste Destination Paste-Series
2 Either:
• type CTRL-C; or
• right-click ‘ Copy ’; or
• click on the ‘ Copy ’ icon in the List View tool bar.
The Destination ’s routing (all levels) is
‘copied’ and is outlined with a ‘crawling’ dashed line.
3 Select a Destination to ‘copy to’.
The Destination is copied.
4 (Optionally, select further ‘copy-to’
Destinations with CTRL-Select and/or
SHIFT-Select.)
Select the first Destination in the range to
‘copy to’.
SHIFT-Select the last range to ‘copy to’.
Destination in the
This has selected the ‘Copy to’ range.
5 Either:
• press CTRL-V; or
• right-click ‘ Paste ’; or
• click the ‘ Paste ’ icon in the List View tool bar.
Result: The ‘copied’ routing (all levels) is pasted to the selected Destination (s).
This has selected the ‘Copy to’ range.
Then either:
• press Alt-CTRL-V; or
• click the Paste Series icon in the
List View tool bar.
The currently-routed Source of the copied
Destination is applied to the first
Destination in our ‘Copy to’ range. The next
Source is applied to the next Destination in the ‘Copy to’ range, etc.
List View Routing Summary - Paste Levels
Paste Levels with CTRL-V Paste Levels with Alt-CTRL-R
1
2
To: Copy multiple Destination Level s’ routing and to consecutive Destination Levels with no gaps
Copy multiple and to
Destination Level
Destination Levels s’ routing
.with gaps.
Select a Destination Level .
Select further with CTRL-Select and/or SHIFT-Select.
3 Then either:
• press CTRL-C; or
• right-click ‘ Copy ’; or
• click on the ‘ Copy ’ icon in the List View tool bar.
The routing of the Destination Levels is copied along with the pattern of levels.
567
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
GV Orbit Custom User Panels
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
List View Routing Summary - Paste Levels
(continued)
4
Paste Levels with CTRL-V Paste Levels with Alt-CTRL-R
Select one ‘Copy to’ Destination Level (the ‘starting level’).
And press Alt-CTRL-R 5 And then either:
• click the Paste icon; or
• press CTRL-V; or
• select right-click ‘ Paste ’.
Result: The copied routing is applied to the ‘Copy to’ Destination Level (‘starting level’) and to subsequent, consecutive Destination
Levels . Any gaps in the copied pattern are not preserved.
The copied routing is applied to the ‘Copy to’ Destination Level (‘starting Level’) and to subsequent Levels with any pattern gaps preserved.
GV Orbit Custom User Panels
Can a Bulk Routing Panel be Opened from a Custom User Panel?
The Bulk Routing Panel may be opened from a GV Orbit custom user panel (created as part of a GV Orbit control and monitoring, C&M, project).
When the custom user panel is designed, a ‘Load Panel’ GV Orbit Routing Behaviour is used to invoke the Bulk Routing Panel when the custom user panel is run.
Typically, this GV Orbit ‘Behaviour’ would be invoked upon the press of a button on an
GV Orbit C&M project custom user panel.
See:
•
Amend an Existing GV Orbit C&M Project
•
Exercise the C&M Custom Screen
Amend an Existing GV Orbit C&M Project
To prepare a GV Orbit C&M project to be able to open a Bulk Routing Panel:
1 Open/create a GV Orbit C&M project.
2 In the main menu, click on Control and Monitoring > Connections > GVOP and set the
Client Domain to a domain with an GV Orbit Routing Service running.
3 Create a New Screen . For example, in the Project window: expand the project item, right-click on ‘screens’, and select ‘New Screen’, enter a name, and click OK.
A new blank C&M project screen opens as a tabbed screen.
4 In the new C&M project screen, add a Button widget. For example, drag on a Button widget from the widget icons along the bottom edge of the GV Orbit Client application window.
5 Edit the Button widget’s Caption
568
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Project item expanded in Project window
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Amend an Existing GV Orbit C&M Project
Button widget on screen
Edit Behaviours button
Button widget icon Set
Fig. 12-91: C&M Project Screen with Button Widget
Button widget’s Caption property
6 Select the Button widget on screen.
7 Click on the Edit Behaviours button.
The ‘Behaviour and Bindings’ graphical editor is shown. See Figure 12-92.
In the ‘Behaviour and Binding’ graphical editor:
8 Select to show ‘Routing’ Behaviours and click on the ‘Load Panel’ item.
A Load Panel Behaviour and a configured Click Handler Binding is automatically placed into the graphical editor.
569
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Amend an Existing GV Orbit C&M Project
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
‘Behaviour and Binding graphical editor’
Select ‘Routing’
Select ‘Open Panel’ item (single-click) to add a Load Panel Behaviour.
570
Fig. 12-92: Behaviour and Bindings Graphical Editor
9 Double-click on the added Load Panel Behaviour.
The Behaviour’s configuration screen is shown in the graphical editor.
In the Network window:
10 Expand and locate the Routing service of the GV Orbit Server being used.
11 Right-click on the Routing service item and select ‘Copy > Address’.
This copies the RollCall address of the Routing service.
In the graphical editor:
12 Paste the copied address into the ‘Address’ property of the Load Panel configuration.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Exercise the C&M Custom Screen
Right-click on a ‘Routing Service’ item in the Network window.
Select ‘Copy > Address’.
Paste the address into the ‘Address’ property of the Load Panel configuration screen.
Click Close in the Load Panel configuration screen.
Fig. 12-93: Setting Load Panel Behaviour’s RollCall Address
13 Click Close in the configuration screen.
To save this project change:
14 Click Project > Save File in the main menu
15 Click Project > Save Project .
This has designed (a simple) C&M custom screen which contains a button which will open the Bulk Routing Panel.
Exercise the C&M Custom Screen
With the designed C&M custom screen open in GV Orbit Client:
571
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Exercise the C&M Custom Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
1 Click the Design/Run Mode button in the main tool bar of the GV Orbit Client
application window. See Figure 12-96a.
Click to enter Run mode.
Click to enter Design mode.
Fig. 12-94: Design/Run Mode Icon (in Main Tool Bar)
The GV Orbit Client enters Run
mode and the custom screen is run. See Figure 12-96b.
Design/Run Mode icon indicates GV Orbit is in Design mode.
a) Click to Enter Run Mode
Design/Run Mode icon indicates GV Orbit is in Run mode.
572
Click on the Button widget to open the Bulk Routing Panel.
b) Screen is running.
Fig. 12-95: Running the Custom Screen
2 Click on the Button widget to open a new tab containing an Bulk Routing Panel. See
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Exercise the C&M Custom Screen
Tab running C&M Custom Panel Tab running the opened Bulk Routing Panel
Fig. 12-96: Bulk Routing Panel Opened in a Tab
573
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
Exercise the C&M Custom Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
574
Introduction
GV Orbit Client has user router control functionality and offers the following routing control panels:
•
Routing Control - Bulk Routing Panel
- a simple, non-editable soft panel for fast control of all router cross-points.
•
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel (this chapter) - an editable and customizable soft
panel, typically used for small custom panels for specific routing needs.
This chapter describes the XY Routing Panel .
GV Orbit System
Routing control panels connect to a GV Orbit Routing service running on a GV Orbit Server.
Controller-specific connection protocol:
• SW-P-08; or
• NP-0017
GV Orbit Server
GVOP protocol
GV Orbit Routing Panel
GV Orbit Client
Fig. 13-1: GV Orbit Routing Panel, Routing Service and Router Controller
A GV Orbit system has one or more GV Orbit Servers which run GV Orbit services. Routing panels in a GV Orbit Client connect to a router controller device via the GV Orbit Routing service. Router controllers include GV Orbit itself, a Grass Valley Router Controller device, or
GV Convergent. The Routing service provides source/destination information to the client
and acts on routing commands from the client. See Figure 13-2.
575
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Prerequisites
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 13-2: GV Orbit System Diagram
Prerequisites
A GV Orbit Server is required, running:
• A GV Orbit Control application.
• A GV Orbit Routing service configured for connection to a Router Controller using either NP0017 or SW-P-08 protocol.
What is an XY Routing Panel?
An XY Routing Panel runs in the GV Orbit Client application. It is editable and customizable and is typically used for small, purpose-built routing panels for specific routing needs. It can be part of a custom soft user/operator panel in GV Orbit Client.
It can be created with a wizard and tailored to most needs. It is a flexible soft routing control panel which may be:
• Created with a wizard and used.
• Created and then edited for customized use.
• Created from scratch with the GV Orbit Client, in a similar way to a GV Orbit Client C&M project user/operator soft control panel.
XY panels can also be embedded in GV Orbit soft custom operator/user panels.
576
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Key Features a) Example XY Routing Panel from the Wizard b) Example Customized XY Routing Panel
Fig. 13-3: XY Routing Panel Examples
Key Features
• X/Y panel wizard.
• Source and Destination filtering.
• Take, Auto-take, Cancel.
• Shuffles and Breakaways.
• Panel Lock.
c) Example with Customized Layout
• Customizable, editable.
• Source and Destination selection:
• paged access to all ports; or
• definable port-per-button.
• Levels
577
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
This Chapter
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
This Chapter
This chapter describes:
•
How to Create a New XY Panel , on page 578.
•
Customizing with the XY Wizard , on page 581.
•
XY Panel Layout , on page 586.
•
Getting XY Routing Panel Running , on page 594.
•
XY Panel Operation , on page 598.
•
Assigning Ports to a Port-per-Button XY Panel , on page 605, including:
•
Assigning Port-per-Button , on page 605.
•
Assign Ports to Individual Buttons , on page 605.
•
Quick Port-per-Button Assignment , on page 609.
•
Customizing an XY Panel , on page 612, including:
•
Further Editing an XY Panel , on page 612.
•
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch , on page 613.
•
Creating a Custom BPX Panel , on page 621.
•
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel , on page 627.
•
How to Embed an XY Panel into a Custom User Panel , on page 634.
How to Create a New XY Panel
One or more XY Routing Panels can be created in a GV Orbit C&M project.
XY Routing Panels are created in GV Orbit Client and stored in a ‘panels’ folder in the
Project window. (If your project does not contain a ‘panels’ folder, see
Folder for Early GV Orbit Client Projects , on page 578 for instructions on creating one.)
For instructions on creating a new XY Panel, see Create a New XY Routing Panel , on page 579.
Creating a ‘panels’ Folder for Early GV Orbit Client Projects
Some early GV Orbit C&M projects do not contain a ‘panels’ folder in the Project window. If this is the case, then one may be created. See below.
If your project does
have a ‘panels’ folder in the Project window, go on to Create a New XY
To create a missing ‘panels’ folder:
1 Open a C&M project in the GV Orbit Client application.
2 Right-click on the project name item in the Project window and select ‘New Folder’.
Fig. 13-4: Creating a New ‘panels’ Folder’
578
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Create a New XY Routing Panel
3 Enter ‘panels’ as the folder name, and click OK .
A new folder called ‘panels’ is added into the Project window.
Fig. 13-5: New ‘panels’ Folder’
4 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
This has created a default new ‘panels’ folder in the project.
Now go on to
Create a New XY Routing Panel , on page 579.
Note: A project folder named ‘panels’:
• allows only files of type ‘panel’;
• displays a ‘New Panel’ right-click menu item.
The folder name is case-sensitive.
Create a New XY Routing Panel
To create an XY panel in a C&M project in the GV Orbit Client application:
1 Expand the project name in the Project window and look for the ‘panels’ sub-folder.
2 Right-click on the ‘panels’ folder and select ‘New Panel’.
579
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Create a New XY Routing Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
580
Fig. 13-6: Create a New XY Routing Panel
The New X/Y Panel dialog is shown.
3 Enter a name for the new XY Panel in the New X/Y Panel dialog.
4 And click OK .
A new panel item is then added into the ‘panels’ folder and a new generic XY Panel is shown in a tab.
Figure 13-7 shows an example with GV Orbit shown in ‘Design Mode’ (not ‘Run Mode’).
5 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
This has created a default new, generic XY Panel (see example in Figure 13-7) which is
editable and customizable, see
Customizing with the XY Wizard , on page 581. Various
button types can be shown/hidden on the panel with the wizard.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Customizing with the XY Wizard
GV Orbit Client shown in ‘Design Mode’
Fig. 13-7: Example New Generic XY Routing Panel
Customizing with the XY Wizard
A default new, generic XY Panel can be created which is editable and customizable. See
How to Create a New XY Panel , on page 578. When an XY Panel is open in GV Orbit Client,
the panel is editable with the client in ‘Design Mode’ (rather than in ‘Run’ mode).
Customizing may be done with the XY Wizard and editable items include the:
• panel size
• number of and arrangement of Sources/Destinations
• number of and arrangement of Levels
• enabling/disabling of other controls
Use the XY Wizard on new, generic XY Panels.
To Open the XY Wizard
To open the XY Wizard for an XY Panel:
1 Open the XY Panel and go to ‘Design’ mode in GV Orbit Client.
2 Click XY Wizard
581
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
To Open the XY Wizard
‘Design’ mode indicated
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
XY Panel open in GV Orbit Client
Click XY Wizard to open the XY Wizard dialog.
Fig. 13-8: XY Wizard Button
The XY Wizard dialog is displayed for editing the XY panel. For a new XY Panel, it is
generic XY panel settings that are shown selected. See Figure 13-9.
a) Settings of a new, generic XY Panel b) Corresponding XY Panel
582
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
To Open the XY Wizard
Fig. 13-9: XY Wizard Dialog (a) and Panel (b, New, Generic Panel Settings Shown)
Note:
Some settings are not currently applicable to a GV Orbit Client system, these include:
Undo, Re-do, Protect and Dial.
Recommendation:
Deselect these settings for GV Orbit Client systems. See Figure 13-10.
= Deselected for GV Orbit Client system cases a) Deselected Settings for GV Orbit Client b) Corresponding XY Panel
Fig. 13-10: XY Wizard Dialog and Panel (Deselected Settings Shown for a GV Orbit Client System)
3 Deselect the wizard options that are not applicable to GV Orbit Client. See Figure 13-
The panel appearance changes in response to the settings changes as they are made.
For the remaining settings, these may be selected/deselected and configured as required:
4 Change the XY panel setting as required.
(See XY Wizard Settings and Table 13-1 for descriptions of each
XY Wizard setting.)
The panel appearance changes in response to the settings changes as they are made.
5 Close the XY Wizard dialog when finished changing settings.
(This dialog can always be re-opened if required.)
6 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
The modified XY Panel has been saved.
583
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
XY Wizard Settings
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
XY Wizard Settings
Item
Panel Size:
Table 13-1: XY Wizard Dialog Settings
For
GV Orbit
Client
Description
Sets the overall size of the XY Panel (in pixels).
Normally, set this to be the size of the monitor used to display the panel.
Width Text box.
Enter the panel screen width (pixels). Default = 1920.
Height Text box.
Enter the panel screen height (lines). Default = 1080.
Layout Select the left-right/top-bottom layout arrangement of the
Source/Source-level and Destination/Destination-level grids:
Sources
Destinations
Source Levels
Destination Levels
Columns
Auto
Control:
Enable Take
Enable Undo
For selection buttons on the XY panel:
Text box.
Select the number of items to control. (Sources, Destinations, etc.)
Text box.
Select the number of columns used to display items.
Check box.
• Select to automatically arrange the items in columns.
Enable various ‘Routing Control’ controls.
Note: Some items do not apply to GV Orbit Client systems and should be deselected.
Check box.
• Select to enable a Take button.
This does not apply to GV Orbit Client systems.
Check box.
• Select to enable an Undo button.
• Deselect for GV Orbit Client systems.
584
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
XY Wizard Settings
Item
Table 13-1: XY Wizard Dialog Settings (continued)
For
GV Orbit
Client
Enable Protect
Description
This does not apply to GV Orbit Client systems.
Check box.
• Select to enable a Protect button.
• Deselect for GV Orbit Client systems.
Enable Redo This does not apply to GV Orbit Client systems.
Check box.
• Select to enable a Redo button.
• Deselect for GV Orbit Client systems.
Enable Panel Lock
Enable Cancel
Check box.
• Select to enable a Panel Lock button.
Check box.
• Select to enable a Cancel button.
Display:
Port Numbers Check box.
• Select to show router port numbers on Source/Destination selection buttons.
Paging:
Page Sources
The Source selection and Destination selection button-grids can be independently configured for either:
• paging through all of the respective router sources/destination ports; or for
• accessing a specific router source/destination port per button.
Check box.
Control Source button-grid configuration:
• Select for ‘Paged’:
Paged Source port selection. Button-grid gives paged access to all router Sources, indexed.
See
• Deselect for ‘Port-per-Button’:
A ‘fixed’ specific Source port is assignable per button. Each button accesses a specific Source port, non-indexed.
See
Port-per-Button , on page 589.
585
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
XY Panel Layout
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Item
Table 13-1: XY Wizard Dialog Settings (continued)
For
GV Orbit
Client
Page Destinations Check box.
Description
Control Destination button-grid configuration:
• Select for ‘Paged’:
Paged Destination port selection. Button-grid gives paged access to all router Destinations, indexed.
See
• Deselect for ‘Port-per-Button’:
A ‘fixed, specific Destination port is assignable per button.
Each button accesses a specific Destination port, non-indexed.
See
Port-per-Button , on page 589.
Filtering:
Filter Sources
Filter Destinations
Check box.
• Select to show Sources filter control.
Check box.
• Select to show Destinations filter control.
Dialing:
Dial Sources
Dial Destinations
Invert Keypads
For dial-up selection of a Source or a Destination via its router port number.
Note: Dialing does not apply to GV Orbit Client systems and these controls should be deselected.
This does not apply to GV Orbit Client systems.
Check box.
• Select to show Sources dial-up controls.
• Deselect for GV Orbit Client systems.
This does not apply to GV Orbit Client systems.
Check box.
• Select to show Destinations dial-up controls.
• Deselect for GV Orbit Client systems.
This does not apply to GV Orbit Client systems.
Check box.
• Select to show Dial-up numeric keypads with 7,8,9 on top row.
• Deselect to show 1,2,3 on top row.
XY Panel Layout
The layout and controls of a newly-created XY Panel are shown in Figure 13-11.
586
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
XY Panel Layout
Fig. 13-11: Example New XY Panel Layout
An XY Routing Panel is designed in and run from the Client application. Figure 13-11 shows
a view of the XY Panel in ‘Design Mode’ and Figure 13-12 shows an annotated view in ‘Run’
mode.
The panel is laid out with the following main grids/areas (see Figure 13-12):
• Source Grid – Sources are presented here, configurable in the XY Wizard to be a:
• Paged list of all available sources.
• Sub-set of defined sources.
• Source Levels Grid – List of available levels for selected source(s).
• Destination Grid – Destinations are presented here, configurable in the XY Wizard to be a:
• Paged list of all available destinations.
• Sub-set of defined destinations.
• Destination Levels Grid – List of available levels for selected destination(s).
• Routing Controls – Buttons are configured as shown/hidden in the XY Wizard , and include: ‘Undo’, ‘Redo’, ‘Protect’, ‘Take’, ‘Panel Lock’ and ‘Cancel’.
587
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
XY Panel Layout
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Source grid paging control Sources filter box Destination grid paging control Destinations filter box
(2)
Source Grid
(3)
Destination Grid
(1)
(4)
Routing
Controls
Source Levels Grid Destination Levels Grid
Shown when a Source is selected Shown when a Destination is selected
Click to toggle
Source Port Dial Grid on/off.
Click to toggle
Destination Port
Dial Grid on/off.
Note: Dial Grids are not applicable to GV Orbit
Client systems.
Button face legend:
(1) Destination selected.
(2) Currently-routed Source shown.
(3) New Source pre-selected.
(4) Click Take to make route.
Buttons show names and router port numbers.,see Figure 13-15.
Fig. 13-12: New XY Panel Layout and Controls (Annotated, ‘Run’ Mode)
Note: The following controls on a newly-created XY Panel are not applicable to GV Orbit Client systems:
• Undo, Re-do, and Protect buttons; and
• Source and Destination Dial Grids.
588
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Source and Destination Selection Button-Grids
Source and Destination Selection Button-Grids
The Source and Destination button-grids can be independently configured with the XY
•
operation; or for
•
When an XY Panel is running, buttons are annotated to reflect the source/destination
names, see Source/Destination Button Annotations
.
Paged Ports
A Source or Destination button-grid can be configured for paging through all of the respective router sources/destination ports. (Configuration is done in the
Figure 13-13 shows a running example XY Panel with 12-button button-grids configured
for ‘paged ports’ operation. Each paged button grid has paging controls to access all router ports (source or destinations accordingly). Page 1 starts at port 1 and shows consecutive ports on the button grid buttons.
Paging controls
Fig. 13-13: Example Paged Ports Button Grid
Port-per-Button
A Source or Destination button-grid can be configured for accessing a ‘fixed’, specific router source/destination port per button. (Configuration is done in the
XY Wizard Settings , on page 584.)
Figure 13-14 shows an example XY Panel with 12-button button-grids configured for ‘port
per button’ operation. There is no paging here.
The example XY Panel is shown both in ‘Design’ mode and in ‘Run’ mode. This example has an initial, default assignment (from the XY Wizard) of ports-to-buttons, where buttons in each grid access ports starting from 1 onwards.
Each button can be further configured to access a specific port, as required. See
Port-per-Button , on page 605.
589
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Source and Destination Selection Button-Grids
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
590 a) Wizard settings used in the example here
By default, buttons are assigned ports starting from 1 onwards.
b) Example XY Panel, Port-per-Button, ‘Design’ mode
Buttons show router port names etc. when panel is running.
c) Example XY Panel, Port-per-Button, ‘Run’ mode
Fig. 13-14: Example Port-per-Button
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Source/Destination Button Annotations
Source/Destination Button Annotations
The source/destination selection and source/destination level selection buttons in ‘Run’ mode are annotated to reflect the source/destination name or level name etc. when the panel is running.
Additionally, when making a route, the selected destination button shows the currentlyrouted source and the current (pre-)selected source for that destination.
Buttons can be configured to show router port numbers and port names, see XY Wizard
Figure 13-15 shows button-face annotations.
Source name
Source Button:
Port number
Destination Button:
Currently-Routed Source name
Pre-selected Source name
Destination Name name
Port number
Source Level Button:
Level name
Destination Level Button:
Currently-Routed Source Level name
Pre-selected Source Level name
Destination Level name
Fig. 13-15: XY Panel Buttons on a Running XY Panel
Routing Control Buttons
Note: Undo , Redo , Protect functions are not currently available in an XY
Panel for GV Orbit systems. (Use the Bulk Routing Panel for these functions.)
Depending on the settings in the XY Wizard, the Routing Control section of the panel contains:
• Take button.
Click to make a route to the selected Destination from a pre-selected Source.
• Cancel button.
Click to deselect all Destinations and Sources.
• Lock button.
Click to lock the XY panel controls. Click again to unlock.
591
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
XY Routing Panel- Operational Keys
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
XY Routing Panel- Operational Keys
Table 13-2: XY Panel Operational Keys
Operation
Select
Select a Range
Mouse
Mouse click on a Source or Destination.
Mouse click on first item then
SHIFT click on last item.
Add to/remove from a multiple selection CTRL + Mouse click
Paste Series Click ‘Paste Series’ icon in panel.
Take Double-click on pre-selected Source;
Cancel or click Take button.
Click ‘Cancel’ button.
XY Panel Level Selection
When a source or a destination is selected, the associated levels are shown in the corresponding ‘Levels Grid’ panel. If multiple sources or destinations are selected, then only their common levels are shown.
All levels are selected by default. If you select one or more levels, then all other levels are deselected.
XY Panel Right-Click Menus
Right-click on background of a XY Routing Panel to show a drop-down context menu. See
592
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
XY Panel Right-Click Menus a) In ‘Run’ mode’ b) In ‘Design’ mode
Fig. 13-16: XY Panel Background Right-Click Menu: a) in ‘Run’ Mode; b) in ‘Design’ Mode.
Window
Item
Dock/Undock
Full Screen
Exit Run Mode
Enter Run Mode
Scale to Fit
Select All
Deselect All
Table 13-3: XY Panel Right-Click Menu Items
Shown in
‘ Run ’
Mode
‘ Design ’
Mode
Description
Undock or dock the XY Routing Panel window from the GV Orbit
Client window.
Show the XY Routing Panel window full-screen.
When full-screen, right-click > Exit Full Screen .
Click to exit ‘Run’ mode and enter GV Orbit ‘Design’ mode.
Click to enter GV Orbit ‘Run’ mode.
Click to fit the panel to the window.
Selects all items.
Deselects all items.
593
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Getting XY Routing Panel Running
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Item
Lock/unlock
Table 13-3: XY Panel Right-Click Menu Items (continued)
Shown in Description
‘ Run ’
Mode
‘ Design ’
Mode
Click to toggle locking/unlocking the panel.
When the panel is locked, user operation is disabled.
Note: Clicking the ‘Lock’ icon in the GV Orbit Client main tool bar also toggles panel lock.
Resize to Widgets
Reset Panel Styles to Default
Variables...
Connection Mode
Click to resize the XY panel background to fit to its constituent widgets.
Click to set widget styles all to ‘default’.
Click to show the Variables dialog.
Note: The Variables dialog is not editable in ‘Run Mode’.
Note: This item is a generic widget feature, not routing-specific.
Widget feature:
When designing C&M project screens or XY Panels, the graphical widgets used may be shown to be visually connected together by a curved line.
Click Connection Mode to show connection points on the widgets.
Edit Behaviours Click to toggle showing the Behaviours and Bindings graphical editor.
Getting XY Routing Panel Running
When an XY Panel runs on the GV Orbit Client in a C&M project, it controls signal routing via the Routing service running on a GV Orbit Server.
594
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
What is a Routing Service?
What is a Routing Service?
As part of setting up a GV Orbit Client system, a Routing service must be configured with a
RollCall address and a GVOP domain, and started up to run on a GV Orbit Server. The
Routing service uses its RollCall address and is visible in the Network window of a GV Orbit
Right-click and select ‘Info’ to see details of the Routing service item
Routing service RollCall address’.
To copy this address, right-click in Network window and select ‘Copy > Address’.
Fig. 13-17: Routing Service in Network Window
Note: The GVOP domain of the GV Orbit C&M project and the GVOP domain of the Routing service must be the same.
How to Connect an XY Panel to a Routing Service
Automatic Setup
To run in GV Orbit Client, an XY Panel must point at a Routing service on a GV Orbit Server.
This is usually automatically set up for you, including:
• GV Orbit Client C&M project GVOP domain the same as the Routing service. This should be set automatically.
(To see the project’s GVOP domain number, go to the main menu item
‘Connections > GV Orbit Server’, and look at the ‘Client domain’ setting.
Edit the domain number here if required.)
595
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
To Run an XY Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• XY Panel set with a RollCall address of the Routing service. This should be set automatically.
To do this, the XY Panel’s ‘Address’ variable must be set to be the RollCall address of the target Routing service.
Manual Setup
To manually set up the XY Panel to point at a Routing service:
1 In the Network window, right-click on the Routing service item, and select ‘Copy > Address’.
This copies the RollCall address of the service into your copy buffer.
2 Go to the XY Panel and right-click on the XY Panel background and select ‘Variables...’.
The Variables
dialog is shown. See Figure 13-18.
Paste copied address into ‘Address’ value field
Fig. 13-18: Setting Routing Service RollCall Address for XY Panel
3 In the Variables dialog, paste in the copied RollCall address into the value of the ‘Address’ variable.
See Figure 13-18. (Alternatively, simply enter the address manually.)
4 Click OK .
5 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
This has manually pointed an XY Panel at a Routing service.
To Run an XY Panel
When an XY Panel runs, it connects to the Routing service and collects routing information and data (Source names/port numbers, Destination names/port numbers, routed source names etc.) and populates the panel buttons with names and router port numbers etc.
596
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
To Run an XY Panel
To run an XY panel:
1 Open the panel in GV Orbit Client and click on the ‘Run’ mode/’Design’ mode main tool
bar icon to enter ‘Run’ mode. See Figure 13-20.
Click to enter ‘Run’ mode (from ‘Design’ mode)’ Buttons show actual source and destinations name s etc.
a) XY Panel in ‘Design’ mode
Fig. 13-19: Enter Run Mode b) XY Panel in ‘Run’ mode
The XY Panel run and connects to the Routing service and gets source and Destination
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(1) Destination selected.
(2) Current Source shown.
(3) New Source pre-selected.
(4) Click Take to make route.
Note: Routing Control buttons can be shown/hidden with the XY Wizard tool.
(See
Customizing with the XY Wizard , on page 581.)
597
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
XY Panel Operation
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 13-20: Running XY Panel Example
XY Panel Operation
Make a Simple Route with an XY Routing Panel
Simple Route
To make a simple route:
1 Select a Destination .
The currently-routed Source is shown.
2 Select a Source .
The pre-selected Source is shown.
3 Click Take . (Click Cancel , to deselect the source/destination.)
The selected source is routed to the selected destination. The route is made.
Alternatively, select the Source first.
1) Select Destination
Currently-routed Source is shown.
2) Select Source
3) Take
1) 1)
2)
3)
598
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Route One Source to Multiple Destinations
Fig. 13-21: Making a Simple Route
Route One Source to Multiple Destinations
1 Select a Destination by clicking on the destination selection button.
2 Select a second Destination by CTRL + clicking on a destination button.
3 Select further destinations with CTRL + click.
4 Select one Source .
5 Click Take .
The source is routed to all selected destinations.
Note: A contiguous range of Destinations (or Sources) can be selected by clicking the first Destination (or Source) in the range and then SHIFTclick on the last Destination (or Source) in the range.
Pre-selected Source Selected Destinations
Currently-routed Sources shown
Routed result
Fig. 13-22: One Source Routed to Multiple Destinations
Alternatively, the source may be selected first.
599
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Route Multiple Sources to Multiple Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Route Multiple Sources to Multiple Destinations
1 Select a Destination by clicking on the destination selection button.
2 Select a second Destination by CTRL + clicking on a destination button.
And select any further destinations with CTRL + click.
3 Select a Source by clicking on the source selection button.
4 Select a second Source by CTRL + clicking on a source button.
And select any further sources with CTRL + click.
Note: Select the same number of sources as there are selected destinations.
5 Click Take .
The source is routed to all selected destinations.
Selected Destinations
Currently-routed Sources are shown
Pre-selected Sources
600
Routed result
Fig. 13-23: Making Multiple Routes
Alternatively, the Sources may be selected first.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Breakaway
Note: Source or Destination CTRL-selection Order:
When routing many sources to many destinations and making selections with CTRL-clicks, then the order of selection is significant and affects the order in which the routing is done.
For example, to route sources 1 to 8 to destinations 8 to 1:
• Select Destinations 1 to 8 by ‘CTRL-clicking’ on each button in the order 1 to 8.
• Select Sources 8 to 1by ‘CTRL-clicking’ on each button in the order 8 to 1.
• Click Take .
Note: With the contiguous SHIFT-selection, the order used is that of the buttons on the panel, not the order of selection of buttons.
Breakaway
What is a Breakaway?
See
, on page 522, for an explanation of a breakaway.
Note: Implied Breakaway:
A ‘breakaway’ occurs when not all of a destination’s levels are selected for routing. This can happen if a source with fewer levels than the selected destination is routed, this will result in a ‘breakaway’ (without explicitly selecting destination levels when routing).
Note:
Performing a ‘normal’ route to a Destination which already has a ‘Breakaway’ will over-ride the breakaway on the Destination, resulting in no ‘Breakaway’.
Perform a Breakaway
To perform a breakaway (see Figure 13-24):
1 Select a Destination .
2 Select one or more Destination Levels to route (for example, audio channels A1 and
A2).
3 Select a new Source . (Pre-selected source)
4 Click Take .
A routing is made: The selected Destination Levels have corresponding levels from the preselected Source
routed to them. See Figure 13-24b.
The Destination button shows a ‘Breakaway’ symbol.
601
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Breakaway
Currently-routed Source shown
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Selected Destination
Selected Destination Level(s)
Pre-selected Source a) Before TAKE
Take
Breakaway symbol shown on button
Audio channels shown routed from another Source b) After TAKE
Fig. 13-24: Breakaway Example: a) Before TAKE; b) After TAKE.
As an alternative, to perform a breakaway, the source may be selected first.
602
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Shuffle
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Shuffle
What is a Shuffle?
See
, on page 526, for an explanation of a shuffle.
Note: A shuffle is applied to a destination and stays with that destination when other routes are made to it until the shuffle is explicitly undone.
Example Shuffle
This example swaps two audio channels pairs.
Fig. 13-25: Swap Two Audio Channel Pairs
1 Select a Destination .
2 Select one or more Destination Levels . (For example, click on audio channels A5, A6,
3 Select the currently-routed Source .
4 Select the Source Levels in the order in which they shall apply to the destination
Levels.
(For example, audio channels A7, A8, A5 and A6 in that order .)
Note: Selecting just one level will route this to all selected destination levels.
5 Click Take .
The selected source levels are routed to the selected destination levels and a shuffle is
formed. Figure 13-26 shows a shuffle example, swapping the order of two audio
channel pairs, as per Figure 13-25.
603
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Shuffle
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select the currently-routed Source
Select Source Levels A7, A8, A5 and A6 in that order.
Selected Destination
Selected Destination Level(s) A5 to A8 a) Before TAKE
Take
‘Shuffle’ symbol shown on button b) After TAKE
Audio channels shown shuffled
Fig. 13-26: Shuffle Example: a) Before TAKE. b) After TAKE.
604
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Assigning Ports to a Port-per-Button XY Panel
Routing to a Shuffled Destination
When routing to a shuffled Destination , the ‘Shuffle’ persists.
For example, when a routing Source ‘Cam S10’ to the already-shuffled destination ‘Mon1’,
, the Source is routed and the audio stereo pair swapping of
Figure 13-25 still exists (but with the new source).
A ‘Shuffle’ persists on a Destination until it is explicitly undone with a new routing operation.
Undo Shuffle
This example describes a new routing operation to undo the shuffle of the
Example Shuffle , on page 603.
1 Click Cancel to cancel any selections already made.
2 Select the ‘already-shuffled’ Destination .
3 Select the shuffled Destination Levels .
4 Select the currently-routed Source .
5 Select the Source Levels in the order in which they shall apply to the Destination
Levels .
So, to undo our
Example Shuffle , on page 603,
select audio channels A5, A6, A7 and A8 in that order.
6 Click Take .
The selected Source Levels are routed to the selected Destination Levels , undoing the shuffle. The ‘shuffle’ symbol no longer appears on the Destination button.
Assigning Ports to a Port-per-Button XY Panel
When creating an XY Panel, a Source button-grid or Destination button-grid can be defined for accessing a ‘fixed’, specific router source/destination port per button. (This ‘fixed’ definition is done in the
.)
Following definition with the XY Wizard, each button of a ‘port-per-button’ button-grid then can be configured to access a specific port. This port assignment is described here.
Assigning Port-per-Button
Following creation from the XY Wizard, buttons in a ‘Port-per-Button’ button-grid can be assigned specific ports on a per button basis, as required.
There are two ways to perform the port assignments to the buttons:
1
Assign Ports to Individual Buttons , on page 605. This describes individual assignment
of ports to buttons.
2
Quick Port-per-Button Assignment , on page 609. This describes selecting all ports with
the Bulk Routing panel and copy-pasting this into the XY Panel.
Assign Ports to Individual Buttons
Assigning individual buttons done in the XY Panel in ‘Design’ mode.
605
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Assign Ports to Individual Buttons
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The example of Figure 13-14 shall be used to show how to assign a port to a button:
1 In ‘Design‘ mode, select the Source button-grid and ‘Alt-select’ its first button.
The first button is selected. See Figure 13-27a.
2 Click on the Edit Behaviours button in the Properties
The graphical Behaviours and Bindings editor is opened. See Figure 13-27b.
The editor shows the Behaviours and Bindings linked to the selected button widget.
Source button selected Edit Behaviours button a) First Source button selected, click Edit Behaviours b) Graphical Behaviours and Bindings Editor
Fig. 13-27: Open Behaviour and Bindings Editor
3 Double-click on the Behaviour linked to the selected widget.
The properties of the Behaviour are shown. See Figure 13-28a.
4 Select the value of the ‘Source’ property (see Figure 13-28a)
and enter a router port to use:
606
Behaviour
Binding
Selected Widget
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Assign Ports to Individual Buttons
• enter a port name and/or port number; or
• click on the icon and select a Source name from the filterable list; or
• enter a GV Orbit Client variable. (For example, {My_Source_Port} )
A new ‘Source’ property value has been entered.
Note: The entered router port may be:
• a port number;
• a port name; or
• a ‘Number:Name’, for example, 12:Cam1; or
• a GV Orbit Client variable.
In the case of a port name, the name is looked up automatically to find the port number to assign.
In the case of ‘Number:Name’, then the port number is used to assign with.
In the case of a user variable, this should be defined as a port number.
Note: To select a router port from a filterable list:
• Click on the icon at the far end of the Source/Destination
property value field (see Figure 13-28 a).
The Source/Destination Picker dialog is shown and displays a
list of Sources/Destinations. See Figure 13-28b.
• The list is filterable.
• Select a Source/Destination name from the filterable list.
• Click OK when done.
607
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Assign Ports to Individual Buttons
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Enter a Port Number, or Name, or Number: Name.
Alternatively, click on the icon.
a) Setting ‘Source’ property of the Behaviour
608 b) Source Picker Dialog ( Destination Picker is similar)
Fig. 13-28: Setting ‘Source’ or ‘Destination’ Property Value
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Quick Port-per-Button Assignment
Fig. 13-29: New ‘Source’ Property Value
5 Click Close .
6 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
7 Enter ‘Run’ mode.
8 The XY Panel runs and the newly-assigned Source is assigned to the Source button, see
Fig. 13-30: Running XY Panel
Thus, a Source button can have a port assigned to it.
Destinations buttons are assigned similarly.
Assign all buttons as required.
There is a quicker way to make these assignments, which uses the help of the Bulk Routing
Panel. See Quick Port-per-Button Assignment .
Quick Port-per-Button Assignment
This describes a quicker method of assigning buttons to ‘Port-per-Button’ XY Panel buttongrids. All ports are selected via the Bulk Routing panel and then simply ‘copy-pasted’ into the XY Panel.
Prerequisites:
• A new XY Panel with one or more button grids set to be ‘Port-per-Button’ (not ‘Paged
Ports’, see ‘Paging’ setting in
XY Wizard Settings , on page 584).
The following example assumes that the buttons of both the Source button-grid and of the
Destination button-grid require setting up in for ‘Port-per-Button’ operation. If an XY Panel just has one such button-grid, then that grid may be quickly set up in a similar way.
To quickly make port-to-button assignments:
609
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Quick Port-per-Button Assignment
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
1 Open a Bulk Routing Panel.
(Click the ‘Bulk Routing’ icon on the Routing Workflow, see Figure 13-31.)
User Guide
Fig. 13-31: Open Bulk Routing Panel
2 Select all the Destination and Source ports required.
Note: When selecting the ports in the Bulk Routing panel, the filtering may be used and ranges of ports and individual ports can be selected.
Selected Sources and selected Destinations
610
Right-click and select ‘Copy as Widgets’.
Fig. 13-32: Copy As Widgets in Bulk Routing Panel
3 When all ports are selected, right-click in the background of the Bulk Routing panel and select ‘Copy as Widgets’.
The selected buttons (Source and Destination ones in this example) are copied to your
GV Orbit Client copy-buffer.
4 Open the target XY Panel.
5 Enter ‘Design’ mode in GV Orbit Client.
6 Right-click in the background of the XY Panel and select ‘Paste’.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Quick Port-per-Button Assignment
The copied buttons are pasted into the XY Panel. See Figure 13-33.
Pasted buttons ‘Design’ mode is shown
Right-click and select ‘Copy as Widgets’.
Fig. 13-33: Paste Buttons in from Bulk Routing Panel ‘Copy as Widgets’
7 The buttons now in the XY Panel can be arranged as required and any previouslyexisting Source/Destination buttons may be deleted if required.
8 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
9 Go to ‘Run’ mode to exercise the XY Panel.
Fig. 13-34: XY Panel with Quick-Assigned Ports
Port-per-Button Pasting into C&M Custom Soft Panel
The example in Quick Port-per-Button Assignment
pastes selected button widgets from a
Bulk Routing Panel into an XY Panel. This selection of buttons may also be pasted into a
GV Orbit Client C&M user/operator custom panel.
611
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Customizing an XY Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
:
Note:
In the GV Orbit Client Project window:
• XY Panels are listed in the ‘panels’ folder; and
• Custom user/operator soft panels are listed in the ’screens’ folder.
In this case, the pasted buttons are still functional and will select Destinations and Sources when
the soft panel is run. There is no ‘Take’ button and ‘auto-take’ applies. See Figure 13-35
Selected Destination
Routed Source
Pre-selected Source
Route automatically made to destination
Fig. 13-35: Auto-Take with Pasted-in Routing Buttons (Running)
Customizing an XY Panel
An XY Panel may be modified and customized by simply using the XY Wizard. Additionally, an XY Panel may be further modified and customized by:
• Using the XY Wizard and then further editing the XY panel,
see Further Editing an XY Panel , on page 612.
An XY Panel may also be created from scratch without using the XY Wizard.
This is done with GV Orbit graphical widgets and GV Orbit Client Behaviours and Bindings in a similar way to designing a custom user/operator panel in a C&M project.
See:
•
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch , on page 613; and see
•
Creating a Custom BPX Panel , on page 621.
To enhance the appearance of a control panel, lines, labels etc may be added.
See
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel , on page 627.
Further Editing an XY Panel
Editing an XY panel is done in a similar way to editing a GV Orbit Client C&M Project custom user/operator screen and an XY Panel can be customized as required. For example:
• buttons may be re-positioned, re-sized;
612
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
• other widgets can be added (Labels, Tally Lamps, etc.);
• colors can be changed (background colors); and
• widget style themes can be selected.
Figure 13-36 shows an example XY Panel that has been edited after being started with the
XY Wizard. See
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel , on page 627, for further examples of
enhancing the appearance of an XY Panel.
Fig. 13-36: Edited XY Panel Example
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
A custom XY Panel can be created from scratch in a GV Orbit Client C&M project.
A custom panel can be made to be smaller and more suited to be embedded into a C&M project screen. An example small panel with two destinations and a handful of possible
sources is given in Figure 13-37 and the steps to generate it are below.
613
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 13-37: Custom XY Panel Example
Step1: New Empty Basic XY Panel
Firstly, create a new empty XY Panel :
1 Open an GV Orbit C&M project in the GV Orbit Client application.
2 Right-click on the ‘panels’ folder item in the Project window and select ‘New Panel’.
3 Enter a name into the New XY Panel dialog and click OK
614
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
Fig. 13-38: Create New XY Panel
A new XY Panel is created in the ‘panels’ folder and is shown in the Project window and is open in a tab.
4 In the new XY Panel tab, delete all widgets.
(Type CTRL-A in the tab to select all widgets and then press the Delete key.)
An empty XY Panel results.
5 Click Save File .
This has created an empty XY Panel in the C&M project. See Figure 13-39.
Fig. 13-39: Empty XY Panel
When editing the XY Panel, it is useful to adjust the position of the routing control widgets tool bar in the GV Orbit Client, to make it more accessible. To do this:
615
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
6 Drag the routing control widgets tool bar by its handle to a convenient position. See
Drag handle and release to re-position Routing Control widget tool bar
616
Fig. 13-40: Re-positioning the Routing Control Widgets Tool Bar
Step 2: Add Routing Control Widgets to (empty) XY Panel
With the empty XY Panel open in GV Orbit Client:
1 Add 8 Source Button
widgets from the Routing widget tool bar (see Figure 13-41).
(Click on ‘Source Button’ button on the tool bar and drag on button widgets.)
The button annotation names increment automatically for each added button.
2 Similarly add 2 Destination Button widgets.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Source Button widgets
Destination Button widgets
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
Routing control widgets tool bar
Fig. 13-41: Adding Source and Destination Buttons
Finally, add a Take button:
3 Select ‘Control Buttons’ in the tool bar.
A small dialog appears.
Fig. 13-42: Adding a Take Button
4 Select ‘Take’ and click OK .
A Take button widget appears at your cursor, drop this onto the XY Panel.
5 Arrange the buttons as required.
6 Click Save File and Save Project .
617
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 13-43: Added Buttons
Step 3: Exercise Panel
This XY Panel, when run, will allow you to select a source from sources 1 to 8 and route it independently to destinations 1 or 2.
Destination selection buttons
Source selection buttons
618
Fig. 13-44: Running the New XY Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
Step 4: Assigning a Port-per-Button
With the XY Panel in ‘Design’ mode in GV Orbit Client, the Source buttons and Destination buttons can be configured for other source or destination ports in the same way as in a
‘Port-per-Button’ panel (See Assigning Ports to a Port-per-Button XY Panel , on page 605, for
more information.)
To assign ports:
1 Right-click in the XY Panel’s background and select ‘Edit Behaviours’.
The ‘Behaviours and Bindings’ graphical editor is shown.
Fig. 13-45: Double-click on ‘Source Button’ Behaviour
2 Select a Source button in the XY Panel and double-click on the ‘Source Button’
Behaviour in the editor. See Figure 13-45.
The Behaviour’s properties are shown.
3 Set the ‘Mode’ property to ‘Fixed’.
4 Set the ‘Source’ property to a chosen Source name.
5 Click Close .
A Source button now has a port assigned.
6 Repeat for the other Source buttons.
And then:
7 Perform similar steps for each Destination button.
The buttons now all have assigned ports.
619
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom XY Panel from Scratch
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 5: Styling
1 Arrange the buttons and resize as required.
2 Add any further labels/shapes/colors to enhance the panel’s appearance, as required.
Finally:
3 Right-click on the XY Panel background and select ‘Resize to Widgets’.
620
Fig. 13-46: Custom XY Panel
4 Click Save File .
Click Save Project .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom BPX Panel
Step 6: Exercise Panel
1 Click the ‘Run Mode’ icon in the main tool bar and exercise the panel.
• Select Destination.
• Select source to route
• Click Take.
Fig. 13-47: Exercising the XY Panel
The small custom panel operates like a fixed, reduced-size XY Panel and may be dragged
onto a C&M project custom user panel screen and embedded into it, if required. See How to
Embed an XY Panel into a Custom User Panel , on page 634.
Creating a Custom BPX Panel
What is a BPX Panel Type?
A BPX (BPX, button per crosspoint) panel enables a button-click to specify and make a route between a source and destination. A simple custom panel can be designed as part of a C&M project, for example, to route one of several sources to a single destination.
A BPX Behaviour is available in GV Orbit which can be associated with a button widget. This enables a button-click to make a route between a specific source and destination. BPX
Panel Example
An example BPX panel is a simple panel where each button is configured to set a route to the same destination, but from a different source. This simple BPX panel is shown in
Figure 13-48 and the steps to generate it in GV Orbit are given below.
621
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom BPX Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Each button configured to make a different route
(usually) to the same destination.
Fig. 13-48: Custom BPX Example
Basic BPX Panel
To create this panel:
1 Create a new empty XY Panel .
(This is described in
Step1: New Empty Basic XY Panel , on page 614 for the
Custom XY Panel from Scratch , on page 613.)
2 Add a graphical Button
widget to the panel. (See Figure 13-49.)
622
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom BPX Panel
Drag on a Button widget
Fig. 13-49: Add a Button Widget
3 Right-click in the XY Panel’s background and select ‘Edit Behaviours’.
The ‘Behaviours and Bindings’ graphical editor is shown.
4 Select the Button widget.
The ‘Behaviours and Bindings’ graphical editor for the selected button is shown.
623
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom BPX Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
624
Fig. 13-50: Behaviours and Bindings of Selected Button Widget
In the editor:
5 Filter the Behaviours on ‘Routing’. See Figure 13-51a.
6 Select a BPX Behaviour. See Figure 13-51b.
A BPX Behaviour is added to the ‘Behaviour and Bindings’ editor and a Binding too. See
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom BPX Panel
Filtered list of
Routing
Behaviours a) Filter Behaviours on ‘Routing’ b) Select a BPX Behaviour
Fig. 13-51: Adding a BPX Behaviour
BPX Behaviour is added and a Binding
A BPX button’s function is to specify a Source and a Destination and a route between the two:
7 Double-click on the BPX Behaviour.
The Behaviour’s properties are shown. See Figure 13-52.
8 Set the ‘Source’ property to a required Source.
9 Set the ‘Destination’ property to the required Destination.
625
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Creating a Custom BPX Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 13-52: Setting ‘Source’ and ‘Destination’ Property Values
10 Click Close .
This has defined one BPX button. For example, a route between the Source and
Destination.
Now we will copy this button (with its Behaviour/Binding settings) twice:
11 In the BPX panel, select the one Button widget, right-click on it and select ‘Copy’.
12 Select the panel’s background, right-click and select ‘Paste’.
13 And again, select the panel’s background, right-click and select ‘Paste’.
This copies the button twice more on the panel.
14 Select the panel’s background, right-click and select ‘Edit Behaviours’.
For each button that was copied:
15 Select the button, and edit the button’s BPX Behaviour.
16 Change the ‘Source’ property to select a different Source each time.
Then:
17 Click Close .
18 Click Save File .
19 Click Save Project .
626
Fig. 13-53: BPX Panel, Designed
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel
This has created a basic BPX panel with three buttons. Each button is configured to set a route to the same destination, but from a different source.
Exercise the BPX Panel
1 Enter ‘Run’ mode in GV Orbit Client.
2 Operate the panel. See Figure 13-54.
Click the second button to make a route from its source, S10-2.
See the result
Click the third button to make a route from its source, S10-3.
See the result
Currently routed Source to the Destination
Source which the button will route to the Destination, if selected.
Destination
Fig. 13-54: BPX Panel Running
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel
•
Panel Enhancement - Add Labels , on page 627.
•
Enhancement - Add Lines , on page 631.
Note: Carry out edits to the panel design in GV Orbit Client in ‘Design’ mode.
Panel Enhancement - Add Labels
Label widgets can be added for the display of information. In this example, some text is added to the BPX panel to display the destination name and the source routed to it.
1 Add four Label
widgets to the BPX panel. See Figure 13-55.
2 Set two labels to have fixed ‘Caption’ properties. See Figure 13-55.
627
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel
Label widgets with fixed ‘Caption’ property
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Label widgets using a Destination Behaviour
Selected Label
Add a Destination Behaviour
Fig. 13-55: Adding Labels
For each of the other two Label s:
3 Open the ‘Behaviour and Bindings’ graphical editor.
(Right-click and select ‘Edit Behaviours’ in the panel background.)
4 Select one of the Label
5 Add a Destination
A Destination Behaviour and a Binding are added to the ‘Behaviour and Bindings’ editor.
6 Double-click on the Destination Behaviour and set its ‘Destination’ property to the same destination that each of the Buttons
7 Click Close .
628
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel
Destination Behaviour pointed at the same destination monitored as the BPX buttons.
Fig. 13-56: Setting Destination for a Label’s Destination Behaviour
This has set up both of the Label captions to show the Source name of the pointed-to
Destination. To modify one of the Label captions to show the Destination name instead:
8 Select the Label to see its Behaviours and Bindings. See Figure 13-57.
Fig. 13-57: Select a Label
9 Double-click on the Binding to see the Binding’s properties.
629
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 13-58: Edit Binding Properties
10 Change the following properties of the Binding:
• ‘Behaviour Value’ property from ‘Source Name’ to ‘Dest Name’.
• ‘Name’ property from ‘Routed source onto caption’ to ‘Dest name onto caption’.
11 Click Close .
12 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
This has modified our BPX Panel design. See Figure 13-59a.
13 Exercise the BPX panel with the Labels .
When a button is clicked, the resulting route is shown by the labels. See Figure 13-59b.
a) Designed BPX Panel with Labels b) Running BPX Panel with Labels
Fig. 13-59: BPX Panel with Labels: a) Designed; b) Running
630
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel
Enhancement - Add Lines
Lines ( Line widgets) or any shapes may be added to a panel.
Fig. 13-60: Added Lines
Additionally, Line widgets can have their visibility controlled from the state of the routing.
This is shown by using the example panel from
Panel Enhancement - Add Labels , on page 627. To do this:
1 Open the panel and show the ‘Behaviour and Bindings’ graphical editor.
2 Add the required lines, in this example, three lines are added.
For each button:
3 Select the button and then view the properties of the associated BPX Behaviour; change the ‘Name’ property to a unique name. (for example, to ‘BPX-1’, ‘BPX-2’, and
‘BPX-3’.)
This gives each BPX Behaviour a unique name.
For each line:
4 Select the line and add a Property
631
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 13-61: Add Property Binding
5 Double-click on the added Property Binding to edit its properties.
6 Change the following Property
Binding property values: (See Figure 13-62.)
• ‘Source Behaviour’, select a unique BPX Behaviour. For example, ‘BPX-1’,or ‘BPX-2’, or ‘BPX-3’.
• ‘Behaviour value’ to ‘Is Routed’.
• ‘Property to Bind’ to ‘Visibility’.
Fig. 13-62: Added Property Binding
7 Click Close .
This has set the visibility of a line to be controlled by the routing status of the BPX
Behaviour associated to a Button .
Do this for each line and select a unique BPX Behaviour name each time.
632
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
Enhancing the Appearance of a Panel
Fig. 13-63: BPX Panel Example
When the visibilities of all three lines are changed:
8 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
9 Exercise the panel. See Figure 13-64.
The lines simply indicate the route that is made when clicking buttons.
633
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
How to Embed an XY Panel into a Custom User Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Click button:
Route is made and a line indicates the routing made.
Click Button:
Route is made and a line indicates the routing made.
Click Button:
Route is made and a line indicates the routing made.
Fig. 13-64: Exercising BPX Panel with Lines
How to Embed an XY Panel into a Custom User Panel
An XY Panel may be embedded into an XY Routing Panel C&M project screen as an GV Orbit
‘Component’.
To embed:
634
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
How to Embed an XY Panel into a Custom User Panel
1 Open the GV Orbit project containing the XY Panel and a C&M project screen.
Firstly, check that the overall XY Panel size is just bigger than the widgets it contains. To do this:
2 Open the XY Panel and check the size values in the Properties box.
( Properties box: Screen > Dimensions > Page Size > ‘Width’ and ‘Height’.)
3 If the panel size needs adjusting:
• right-click in the panel background and select ‘Resize to Widgets’, and/or
• adjust the background’s screen ‘Width’ and ‘Height’ properties directly.
4 Close the XY Panel.
Now embed the XY Panel into a C&M project screen:
5 Open a C&M screen.
6 Drag an XY panel from the Project window onto the C&M project screen.
and release. See Figure 13-65.
Drag panel onto screen
Fig. 13-65: Drag on an XY Panel
The panel object is like a GV Orbit component object on a C&M project screen.
7 Resize the panel object as required.
8 Click Save File . Click Save Project .
9 Run the C&M screen and exercise the XY Panel on the screen.
One or more instances of an XY panel on a screen can be used.
635
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel
How to Embed an XY Panel into a Custom User Panel
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
636
Introduction
Lite Professional
Enterprise
A multiviewer cluster ( MV Cluster ) is a group of multiple MV-8 Series multiviewer devices in a GV Orbit system which are all acting together to serve one or more video walls. The cluster is treated as one multiviewer resource, rather than as a set of single, individual multiviewer devices.
All of the video walls served by the multiviewer cluster are designed in a single ‘Clustered
Multiviewer’ project in GV Orbit Client. This is done using the ‘ Room Editor ’ tool and an MV
Cluster Manager service is required to be running on a GV Orbit Server. The resulting video wall(s) are managed at a higher level (at a ‘cluster-level’) and router destinations are referred to in operation rather than video wall tiles or multiviewer inputs.
MV Cluster Information
What is an MV Cluster?
An MV Cluster is a cluster of multiviewer devices configured together and all acting together to serve one or more video walls. An MV cluster contains one or more multiviewer devices.
Number of
Multiviewer
Devices
Table 14-1: MV Cluster Numbers for MV-8 Series Multiviewers
Number of head display outputs: Number of video wall tiles: per device maximum available per device per video wall
1 up to 12 12 48 up to 48
2
3
...
N
Cluster a up to 12 up to 12
...
up to 12
24
36
...
12 * N
Cluster
48
48
...
48 up to 48 * 2 (=96) up to 48 * 3 (=144)
...
up to 48 * N
Cluster a.The number of devices in an MV Cluster has no fixed limit. See
MV Cluster Size for more information.
637
Multiviewer Cluster
MV Cluster Size
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster Size
The number of devices in an MV Cluster ( N
Cluster
) has no fixed limit: The number of multiviewers that GV
Orbit Client and the MV Cluster Manager service can handle has no real limit.
However, in practice, limiting factors are anticipated. The maximum number of MV-8 Series multiviewers in an MV Cluster ( N
ClusterMax
) is determined by performance and various system factors, including:
• GV Orbit system size; and
• network speed.
Contact
Grass Valley Technical Support
for further information on N
ClusterMax for specific use cases.
Defining Video Walls for an MV Cluster
A user can define a set of video walls for a broadcast production studio or OB truck using the GV Orbit Client with a ‘Clustered MV’ project. The video walls are all served by a cluster of MV-8 Series multiviewers.
GV Orbit Client is used along with GV Orbit system services. Video walls are defined and managed independently from the individual multiviewer devices used. Video wall tiles are referred to by their router destination name.
Additionally, for a ‘Clustered MV’ GV Orbit project, TSL tally settings and audio bars configuration can be done for each whole video wall.
638
MV-8XX Multiviewer Cluster Example
Fig. 14-1: Video Walls Served by Multiviewer Cluster (Example shown has an MV Cluster of 6 Devices)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Multiviewer Cluster
What is a Clustered Multiviewer Project?
What is a Clustered Multiviewer Project?
A GV Orbit Clustered MV project (Clustered MV project) enables a user to define a set of video walls for a broadcast production studio or OB truck served by an MV Cluster.
The video walls can each comprise one or more display monitors. One or more video walls may be defined, all served by a cluster of multiviewer devices.
All of the video walls are designed in one ‘Clustered MV’ project, which then holds the designs of one or more video walls for a studio or an OB truck.
Overall TSL tally set up and Audio Bars audio channel configuration of audio bars is also integrated and handled within such a project.
The project is stored centrally on the GV Orbit Server and the entire video wall design is then automatically parsed and administered across the individual multiviewers in the cluster.
Multiviewer Discovery
Is the Multiviewer device on the network?
Yes
Is Multicast data enabled on network?
No
Yes No
Multiviewer is automatically discovered by GV Orbit Client for the
Clustered MV project.
Require manual entry of multiviewer devices into the Clustered MV project.
Add the device to the network.
Video Wall Design
Video walls are formed from a physical arrangement of one or more display monitors and each display monitor is driven from any one of the multiviewer head display outputs available from the multiviewer cluster. Video wall tile layouts can be applied and layouts for the whole video wall and also for individual monitors can be saved and switched between.
Assignment of router destinations to video tile layouts completes the video wall design.
Finally, the assignment of video sources to video tiles (PiPs) is integrated into the GV Orbit routing control system and the routing of video to wall tile positions can be interactively achieved.
Deployment
Deployment is a one-step process, requiring the finished project to be simply pushed to the
GV Orbit Server. Behind the scenes, the video wall designs are then automatically translated
639
Multiviewer Cluster
What is a Clustered Multiviewer Project?
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide into constituent, individual ‘multiviewer projects’ which are targeted at each individual multiviewer of the cluster. The constituent projects are automatically pushed out to the individual multiviewer devices.
IMPORTANT
Multiviewers should be operated either in a clustered mode or as individual, non -clustered single-multiviewers.
Changing readily between these operational modes is not supported.
Recommendation:
All multiviewer set-up and configuration is carried out fully for the intended mode of operation.
Clustered MV project vs. Multiviewer Project
A Clustered MV project is opened, saved, pushed etc. in a similar way to other GV Orbit
multiviewer projects; the main exceptions/differences are listed in Table 14-2.
Table 14-2: Clustered MV Project Differences
Item
Video wall design tool Room Editor in GV Orbit Client
GV Orbit Project Type
Clustered Multiviewer Multiviewer, or
Connected Multiviewer
Wall Editor a in GV Orbit Client
Multiviewer resource(s) A single multiviewer device.
GV Orbit System
Deployment
Max number Video Walls
(
One or more multiviewer devices.
N
Cluster
devices in an MV Cluster)
Required, running a MV Cluster
Manager Service
Push project to a
GV Orbit Server repository.
up to 12x N
Cluster
Can operate with or without a GV
Orbit system
Push project to a single multiviewer device.
12
Max number Video Tiles up to 48x N
Cluster
48
Video Wall Arrangement Flexible Constrained
Video Wall Layouts
Monitor-level Layouts
Yes, Room Layout
Yes, Monitor Layout
No.
Yes, Wall Layout a.For information on the Wall Editor, refer to Orbit documentation.
Use a Clustered MV project when defining and managing video walls from a cluster of MV-
8xx multiviewers.
640
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Multiviewer Cluster
What is an MV Cluster Manager?
Room Editor vs Wall Editor
Wall Editor - Both the original Orbit Client tool and the current GV Orbit Client allow configuration of video walls from single multiviewers using the original GV Orbit
‘Multiviewer’ type projects and the Wall Editor tool (refer to Orbit documentation).
Room Editor GV Orbit additionally allows configuration of video walls from a multiviewer cluster with a ‘Clustered MV’ project. This is done via the new Room Editor tool in GV Orbit
Client with the MV Cluster Manager service running on a GV Orbit Server.
Note: Room Editor vs Wall Editor :
MV-8 Series multiviewer(s)
Cluster of one or more
Single, individual
Client tool?
GV Orbit project type?
Minimum system configuration
Uses MV Cluster
Manager service?
Room Editor
Clustered
Multiviewer
GV Orbit system with server
Yes, an MV Cluster
Manager service is required.
a.For information about the Wall Editor, refer to Orbit documentation.
Wall Editor a
Multiviewer
None
No
Single Multiviewer as an MV Cluster
A single multiviewer may be considered as an ‘ MV Cluster of one’ and a video wall design can be generated for a single multiviewer with the Room Editor in a ‘Clustered MV’ project.
Note: For an MV Cluster of any size, an MV Cluster Manager service is required to be running on a GV Orbit Server.
What is an MV Cluster Manager?
The MV Cluster Manager is a service running on the GV Orbit Server which automatically translates a GV Orbit ‘Clustered MV’ project into its constituent, single-multiviewer projects.
The service automatically manages each individual multiviewer device of an MV Cluster . A
GV Orbit system may have zero or one such service.
Once it is configured, the service will:
• check for the availability of multiviewers in the room; and
• put a watch on the relevant GV Orbit Server repositories for any project changes.
The service processes any detected repository project changes and rebuilds any constituent single-multiviewer projects where necessary, automatically pushing the projects to the appropriate multiviewer device(s).
641
Multiviewer Cluster
Video Wall Configuration Workflow (Clustered Multiviewers)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The service will alert the GV Orbit system to any off-line multiviewers and missing repositories.
The service is automatically discovered by a GV Orbit Client in a GV Orbit system and a user can then create a ‘Clustered MV’ project.
Configuring an MV Cluster Manager Service
The MV Cluster Manager service configuration is carried out on the GV Orbit Server.
Refer to: Refer to the GV Orbit Admin Guide for information about GV Orbit services, including configuring the MV Cluster Manager service.
See Related Documentation , on page 7.
The following settings can be configured from the MV Cluster Manager service’s configuration page on the GV Orbit Server:
• Service Settings:
• GVOP Client Domain ID number for the service to use.
• Network interface(s) on the GV Orbit Server for the service to use.
• RollCall address of the service in the GV Orbit system.
• A friendly name for the service, to be used in a GV Orbit Client’s Network window.
• Project Settings:
• GV Orbit Server repository name of the Clustered MV project for the service to use.
Note: The ‘Project Settings’ may be set up separately later, when a
‘Clustered MV’ project has been created along with its repository.
Video Wall Configuration Workflow (Clustered Multiviewers)
This user guide describes the configuration and operation of clustered MV-8XX multiviewers in a GV Orbit control and monitoring system for multiple video walls, for example in an OB truck environment.
This chapter has provided some MV Cluster definitions. It proceeds to provide some MV
Cluster information:
1
Configuring an MV Cluster Manager Service , on page 642.
2
Creating a New Clustered Multiviewer Project for an MV Cluster , on page 643.
3
Clustered MV Project Screens , on page 652.
4
Managing Multiviewer Cluster Information in a Project , on page 655.
Additionally, the workflow description is continued in further user guide chapters:
5 Chapter 15, MV Cluster - Room Editor
: a
Room Editor Introduction , on page 659.
b
Room Editor Workflow , on page 671.
c
Step 1: Create a Room , on page 674.
d
Step 2: Arrange Monitors and Assign Multiviewer Outputs , on page 675.
e
Step 3a: Design Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts to a Video Wall , on page 688.
642
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Multiviewer Cluster
Creating a New Clustered Multiviewer Project for an MV Cluster f
Step 3b: Create Optional Alternative Layouts for a Video Wall , on page 697.
g
Step 4a: Assign Destinations to Tile Positions , on page 706
h
Step 5a: X/Y Routing Video Sources to Tiles , on page 725.
Also see Chapter 16 MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Audio Bars Configuration , on page 767.
Creating a New Clustered Multiviewer Project for an MV Cluster
The video walls served by an MV Cluster are defined with a ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ Project in GV Orbit Client.
Procedure
To create a new ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ project (Clustered MV project) in GV Orbit Client:
Step 1: Create and Connect a Project to a GV Orbit Server
1 Open GV Orbit Client.
The initial screen is shown.
Fig. 14-2: Initial Screen of GV Orbit Client
2 Select New Project on the initial screen.
The New Project dialog is shown.
643
Multiviewer Cluster
Procedure
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select Clustered Multiviewer project type.
Enter a Name for the new project.
Browse to a folder location.
Fig. 14-3: New Project Dialog
3 Select the Clustered Multiviewer
project type. (See Figure 14-3.)
4 Enter a Name for the new project in the ‘Details’ section.
This is a name for the local storage of project information.
5 Browse to a folder location (local or network) for the project to be stored in while the multiviewer video walls are being designed.
Note: Folder Location:
The folder location must be accessible from the client computer running the GV Orbit Client tool. This location is used while the project is being edited.
When the editing is complete and the project is ready to be deployed, it is pushed from the GV Orbit Client to a central repository location on the GV Orbit Server of the GV Orbit system.
6 Click Choose to select the folder.
644
Fig. 14-4: Filled Out New Project Dialog
7 Click OK in the dialog.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
A Setup
dialog for the project is then shown. See Figure 14-7.
Project Setup Dialog:
Multiviewer Cluster
Procedure
Server 1 IP
Basic system test results
Fig. 14-5: Setup Dialog
In the clustered multiviewer project’s Setup dialog:
8 Set Server 1 IP to the IP address of the GV Orbit Server and press Enter.
(For a GV Orbit Server Cluster system, still just enter the IP address of one server. The second server will be discovered automatically in the steps below.)
After the IP address is entered, some basic system tests are carried out using the current, original settings of the Setup dialog.
(This basic system testing includes testing system connectivity and gathering some basic system information from the GV Orbit Server.)
The results of these basic system tests are then shown in the Setup dialog’s console window.
Note: The current, original dialog settings will most likely differ from those of the GV Orbit system being connected to. Discrepancies are shown in red-highlighted text in the dialog’s console window. This is normal.
9 After these basic system tests are done, any differences in the settings are adopted by the Setup dialog.
Step 2: Repository for Clustered MV Project
When creating a new ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ project, a new repository needs to be created.
(Compare to when opening an existing ‘Clustered Multiviewer ‘project; in this case, an existing repository must be specified, see
Open an Existing Clustered Multiviewer Project , on page 648.)
645
Multiviewer Cluster
Procedure
To Create a New Repository for the Project:
In the Setup dialog, to create a new Repository to be used:
1 At the Repository setting, click New .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Click New
646
Fig. 14-6: Click New in Setup Dialog
The Create Repository dialog is shown.
2 Enter a Name for the new repository on the
GV Orbit Server for the ‘Clustered MV’ project to use and press Enter, or click OK .
Note: Characters to use in a Repository Name:
Use only:
• alpha-numeric characters (0 1 2 A B C x y z etc.); and/or
• underscore characters (_); and/or
• tilde characters (~).
Note: Repository Name:
Use a unique and identifiable repository name for the ‘Clustered MV’ project to use. In this way, it is easily identified and found in a list of all repositories on a server.
The new repository name is shown in the Setup dialog.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Multiviewer Cluster
Procedure
IMPORTANT
If a new Repository has been created during the ‘Clustered MV’ project creation, then the MV Cluster Manage r service repository needs to be configured with the new Repository .
(See the ‘Project Settings‘part of Configuring an MV Cluster Manager
Service , on page 642.)
Step 3: System Re-Test (optional) During Project Setup
With a new or an existing Repository name shown in the Setup dialog, a system re-test can be carried out.
Note: At this point, a system re-test is optional and will now remove any red items in the console pane. Optionally, in the Setup dialog:
1 Click System Test .
This re-does the basic system tests. The results are shown in the console. Any ‘red’ items
from before should now be cleared. See Figure 14-7.
Fig. 14-7: System Re-Test
Step 4: Finally, Create Project
1 Click Apply in the Setup dialog.
The settings are applied to the project and a progress bar appears in the dialog.
647
Multiviewer Cluster
Open an Existing Clustered Multiviewer Project
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
2 While settings are applied, a pop-up dialog may appear, asking if the local project should be updated from the chosen repository:
For a new project where no changes have been made locally, answer Yes .
Fig. 14-8: Update Local Project?
• Click Yes to update the local project from the repository on the server (this will lose any local changes made); or
• Click No to keep any local project changes made (and not pull the project from the repository on the server).
3 While the applying of the settings continues, progress is shown in the progress bar.
4 When the settings changes are all applied, an All Done message pops up.
:
Fig. 14-9: Applying of Project Settings is All Done
5 Click OK .
6 Close the Setup dialog.
The new Clustered Multiviewer project is created and its Home screen is then shown.
See
Clustered MV Project Home Screen .
Note: The Setup dialog can also be viewed when a GV Orbit project is open by clicking Connections > GV Server in the main menu.
7 Click OK .
The Clustered Multiviewer project information is contained in the local folder, ready for editing. For a newly-created project it is an empty project.
Open an Existing Clustered Multiviewer Project
To open an existing ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ project from a repository on the GV Orbit Server, the procedure is similar to the procedure for creating a new ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ project
(refer to Creating a New Clustered Multiviewer Project for an MV Cluster , on page 643).
The steps below open an existing project from an existing repository.
Procedure
Step 1: Create and Connect
1 Carry out the steps in
Step 1: Create and Connect a Project to a GV Orbit Server , on page 643.
This creates an empty, locally-stored project.
648
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Multiviewer Cluster
Procedure
Step 2: Repository for Clustered MV Project
When opening a Clustered MV project from a repository, an existing repository must be specified:
To specify an existing Repository for the project, in the Setup dialog:
1 At the Repository drop-down box, select a Repository from the drop-down list. (See
The repository must be a ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ repository.
Click on drop-down arrow Select an existing Repository
Fig. 14-10: Select Existing Repository
The selected Repository name is shown in the Setup dialog.
Step 3: System Re-Test (optional)
With a Repository name shown in the Setup dialog, a system re-test can be carried out.
1 Carry out the steps in
Step 3: System Re-Test (optional) During Project Setup , on page 647.
Step 4: Finally, Open the Project from the Repository
1 Click Apply in the Setup dialog.
The settings are applied to the project and a progress bar appears in the dialog.
2 While settings are applied, a pop-up dialog may appear, asking if the local project should be updated from the chosen repository:
For a new project where no changes have been made locally, answer Yes .
Fig. 14-11: Update Local Project?
649
Multiviewer Cluster
Deploying a Clustered Multiviewer Project (Push/Pull)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• Click Yes to update the local project from the repository on the server (this will lose any local changes made); or
• Click No to keep any local project changes made (and not pull the project from the repository on the server).
Note: To edit an existing repository project information on a new PC, then click Yes to pull the existing project information from the repository into the newly created ‘Clustered MV’ project.
If you click No here, then subsequent pushing back to the repository will overwrite the existing project information in the repository.
3 While the applying of the settings continues, progress is shown in the progress bar.
4 When the settings changes are all applied, an All Done message pops up.
Fig. 14-12: Applying of Project Settings is All Done
5 Click OK .
6 Close the Setup dialog.
The exiting Clustered Multiviewer project is opened and its Home screen is then
shown. See Clustered MV Project Home Screen
.
Note: The Setup dialog can also be viewed when a GV Orbit project is open by clicking Connections > GV Server in the main menu.
7 Click OK .
The Clustered Multiviewer project information is contained in the local folder, ready for editing. For a newly-created project it is an empty project.
Note: The Home Page is not automatically refreshed, and new Room files will not be shown.
Close and re-open the project to refresh and then see files pulled from the repository.
Deploying a Clustered Multiviewer Project (Push/Pull)
For deployment, a Clustered MV project is pushed to a central store on the GV Orbit Server, for example, to the Repository . There is one project per Repository .
Compare this to a single-multiviewer project: that is for a non -clustered multiviewer device, in which case the project is pushed to the multiviewer itself.
Push Project to Repository
To send a locally-saved and edited project to the Repository for automatic deployment on the multiviewer cluster by the MV Cluster Manager Service on the GV Orbit Server:
650
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
1 Click Push in the main tool bar.
Fig. 14-13: Push in Tool Bar
A Choose Projects dialog is shown.
Multiviewer Cluster
Pull Project from Repository
Fig. 14-14: Choose Push
2 Ensure that the project Repository to be pushed is selected (highlighted in blue) in the
3 Click OK .
The project information is pushed to the Repository.
4 When the Push is done, a Push dialog is shown.
Fig. 14-15: Push Done
5 Click OK to close the Push dialog.
Pull Project from Repository
To get a project from a Repository into an opened project for editing and/or locally saving:
1 Click Pull in the main tool bar.
Fig. 14-16: Pull in Tool Bar
A Choose Projects dialog is shown.
651
Multiviewer Cluster
Clustered MV Project Screens
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 14-17: Choose Pull
2 Ensure that the project Repository to be pulled is selected (highlighted in blue) in the
3 Click OK .
The project information is pulled from the Repository.
4 When the Pull is done, a Pull dialog is shown.
Fig. 14-18: Pull Done
5 Click OK to close the Pull dialog.
Note: For best practice, Pull a project before starting to edit it.
This ensure that the most up to date project information is used.
If there are any conflicts between locally-stored project information and the repository, then you are prompted. You may then either discard their changes, or keep their changes and discard any serverside changes.
Clustered MV Project Screens
Clustered MV Project Home Screen
The Home screen of a Clustered Multiviewer
project is shown in Figure 14-19.
652
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Main menu bar
Main tool bar
Multiviewer Cluster
Clustered MV Project Home Screen
Project name
Click Edit to edit Project name
Local path to project folder
Click ‘Multiviewer > Multiviewer Cluster’ in the main menu for information on the multiviewers in the MV Cluster .
Click Rooms icon to create a and open it in the
Fig. 14-19: Clustered Multiviewer Project Home Screen
.room
Room Editor .
file in the project
The Home screen of the Clustered MV project is similar to that for a GV Orbit Multiviewer project; differences include:
• Multiviewer Cluster dialog which lists the multiviewers of the cluster.
(Main menu item ‘Multiviewer -> Multiviewer Cluster’.)
• Rooms icon on the Home screen which allows you to create .room
files and edit them in the Room Editor
. (See Chapter 15, MV Cluster - Room Editor , on page 659.)
• Project window has a ‘rooms’ sub-folder for .room
files.
The large icons are similar to (non-clustered) multiviewer projects:
• Manage Users
- Set up project users and their roles. (See Chapter 4, Manage Users , on page 141.)
• Themes - Edit or create new on-screen appearance styles for graphical widgets for use on the video wall.
• Rooms - Edit or create .room
file(s) with the Room Editor tool for the ‘Clustered
Multiviewer’ project. (See Chapter 15, MV Cluster - Room Editor , on page 659.)
• Tiles - Edit or create new Custom Tiles for use on the video wall.
653
Multiviewer Cluster
Clustered MV Room Editor Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Main Menu Items
See
Main Menu Items , on page 127.
Main Tool Bar Items
See
Main Tool Bar Items , on page 131.
Further Tool Bar items are shown when a multiviewer video wall is open. See
Main Tool Bar with Room Editor Open .
Clustered MV Room Editor Screen
The Home screen of the Room Editor
Main menu bar
Main tool bar
Project window
.room
file open in Room Editor tab window
Room Editor tool bar Properties Box
Network window
Fig. 14-20: Clustered Multiviewer Room Editor Screen
For further description of the Room Editor
, see Chapter 15, MV Cluster - Room Editor , on page 659.
654
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Multiviewer Cluster
Managing Multiviewer Cluster Information in a Project
Main Tool Bar with Room Editor Open
Additional tool bat icons are shown here. See
for the other icons.
Dock/Undock the active window
Set the active window to full-screen mode
Display drawing grid
Properties window
Run/Design Mode shown in Design mode)
Graphic object alignment controls,
see Graphic Object Alignment Controls , on page 134
Graphic object layer
Options
(Tools > Options in main menu)
Zoom stage screen in/out
Fig. 14-21: Clustered Multiviewer Main Tools Bar with Room Editor Screen Open
Managing Multiviewer Cluster Information in a Project
The multiviewers in a multiviewer cluster are automatically discovered by GV Orbit where a network allows multicast discovery data packets.
In addition, a user can manually add one or more networked multiviewers to the cluster.
Note: Manual entry of multiviewer devices is required where a network does not have multicast data enabled.
View/Edit Multiviewer Information about Multiviewers in the Cluster
Procedure
To view information about each multiviewer in the multiviewer cluster:
1 Click ‘Multiviewer > Multiviewer Cluster’ in the GV Orbit Client main menu.
The Multiviewer Cluster
dialog is shown. See Figure 14-22.
The dialog shows the auto-discovered multiviewers of the cluster.
655
Multiviewer Cluster
Adding Multiviewers Explicitly
IP address
RollCall address
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Number of supported, licensed multiviewer head display outputs
Multiviewer output resolution
Fig. 14-22: Multiviewer Cluster Dialog
In the Multiviewer Cluster dialog, the following should be manually set up:
2 Select the number of ‘Heads’ that are licensed for each multiviewer in the list.
3 Select the output ‘Resolution’ for the multiviewers.
4 Click OK .
If required, multiviewers can be explicitly added, see
Adding Multiviewers Explicitly .
Note: The head display outputs of an MV-8 Series multiviewer all share the same resolution. Select either 1920x1080 or 720x1280.
UHD (4K) is achieved with four outputs and 1080p quad-link.
Adding Multiviewers Explicitly
It is possible to add multiviewers to the list in the Multiviewer Cluster dialog. This may be required if, for example, multicast discovery data packets are not allowed on a network.
Procedure
To add multiviewers manually:
1 Click New
to add the information about each multiviewer of the cluster. See Figure 14-
2 Click OK to close the dialog.
3 Click Project -> Save Project in the main menu to save the project locally.
656
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Multiviewer Cluster
Video Walls Etc. Design Workflow for an MV Cluster
MV-8 Series multiviewer head display outputs all share the same resolution.
Select either 1920x1080 or 720x1280.
Fig. 14-23: Multiviewer Cluster Dialog- Adding New Multiviewer Device
Video Walls Etc. Design Workflow for an MV Cluster
For instructions on designing video walls in a ‘Clustered MV’ project see the workflow described in:
• Chapter 15, MV Cluster - Room Editor , on page 659.
Also see these additional design steps:
• Chapter 16 MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration , on page 741.
• Chapter 17 Audio Bars Configuration , on page 767.
657
Multiviewer Cluster
Video Walls Etc. Design Workflow for an MV Cluster
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
658
Room Editor Introduction
Lite Professional
Enterprise
Room Editor is a facility offered in a ‘Clustered MV’ project in GV Orbit Client. It enables a user to design one or more video walls that are served by a cluster of multiviewers. This allows a user to design and manage all the video walls in a production-facility (for example, studio, or OB truck). The multiviewer devices are automatically discovered by GV Orbit
Client.
Video walls, Rooms
Cluster of multiviewers
Fig. 15-1: Example Facility Schematic - Cluster of Multiviewer Devices Serving a Production Facility
In the
, a user can define and position all of the physical monitor displays for all
their video walls. Assignment of multiviewer devices and outputs to video wall monitors is performed once. Video walls can be fed by any multiviewer output available in the multiviewer cluster and are assigned to router destinations. Assignment of video signals to the video wall for monitoring is integrated into the GV Orbit routing system and carried out with a graphical interface in GV Orbit Client.
659
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is a Room?
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Subsequent design and management of all the various video walls is then independent of the individual multiviewers in the cluster and video tile positions on the video wall are referred to with router destination names.
The Room Editor also enables a user to set up TSL tally settings and audio bars configuration for a video wall.
This section defines and describes some terms etc. used when using the Room Editor in
GV Orbit Client.
What is a Room?
A Room (also known as a Room file, or, simply, a Room ) is part of a Clustered MV project. A file holds information for a video wall ( Room Design ). There can be more than one Room in a Clustered MV project.
The files are stored in the ‘Clustered MV’ project’s folder structure, in the ‘rooms’ sub-folder, and are accessible from the Project window in GV Orbit Client or from the opening project
Home Page .
660
Cluster of multiviewers
Fig. 15-2: Room Files in a Clustered Multiviewer Project Describe Video Walls
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is a Room Design?
What is a Room Design?
A video wall is formed in a ‘Clustered MV’ project from ‘physical’ video monitor displays.
Each video wall design is a Room Design . A user can form a large video wall from multiple
‘physical’ displays arranged and configured. They can be driven from one or more multiviewer devices from an MV cluster. Video wall tile layouts can be applied and video tiles can be assigned router destinations.
A Room Design is stored in a Room file.
See
Step 1: Create a Room , on page 674, for the workflow steps.
What is Monitor Arrangement and Multiviewer Output Assignment?
As part of a Room Design , a user can configure a large video wall from multiple ‘physical’ displays and driven from one or more multiviewer devices from an MV cluster. a) Arrange Monitors for each video wall a Room Design
Monitors
Cluster of multiviewers b) Assign a Multiviewer Output to Each Monitor
Fig. 15-3: Room Designs: a) Arranging Monitors; b) Assigning and Configuring Multiviewer
Outputs.
661
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is Room Design Layout?
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Monitor Arrangement includes:
1 Creating a representation of a large video monitor wall by positioning ‘physical’ displays on a ‘stage’.
2 Defining each display, including:
• Display size, geometry.
• Type: single HD, or quad-split for UHD.
• Orientation: Vertical or Horizontal.
Note: A UHD monitor is fed from four MV-8 Series multiviewer “HD” multiviewer outputs. These must be multiviewer outputs from the same multiviewer device.
Note: Monitor aspect ratio is assumed to be 16:9.
Assign Outputs includes:
3 Assigning a multiviewer output to each physical monitor display.
A monitor arrangement and assigned outputs in a Room file can be saved locally and, when complete, the Room Design can be saved centrally on a GV Orbit Server in a
‘Clustered Multiviewer’ project.
See
Step 2: Arrange Monitors and Assign Multiviewer Outputs , on page 675, for the
workflow steps.
What is Room Design Layout?
This defines the arrangement of tiles used in a project for each video wall monitor.
The arrangement of tiles plus their connection to multiviewer inputs on a monitor is termed its Layout.
662
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Tiles
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is a Tile-Grid?
Tile layouts added to video wall monitors
Fig. 15-4: Video Wall Design Layout
Layout Workflow
For a created Room Design , for each monitor:
• A tile-grid is applied from a selection of templates (for example, 2x2, 3x3 etc.) to position tiles and fine-positioning can be done.
• Each tile type is then defined (for example, video tile, audio tile, or custom tile).
This has prepared a basic Design Layout in a Room Design .
(See What is a Monitor Layout?
See
Step 3a: Design Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts to a Video Wall , on page 688, for the
workflow steps.
What is a Tile-Grid?
A tile-grid determines the position and size of tiles on a monitor, irrespective of tile type.
For example, a tile-grid may comprise:
• 3x3 tiles; or of
• one larger, central tile surrounded by twelve smaller tiles .
A tile-grid includes the assignment of multiviewer inputs and router destinations to each tile position in the grid.
Tile-Grid Excludes Tile Types
A tile-grid excludes the tile types that populate the tile-grid.
663
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is a Monitor Layout?
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: Tile-grid + Tile types = Monitor Layout .
(See
.)
What is a Monitor Layout?
In a project, monitors on the video wall are each configured to show a tile-grid layout, either from pre-configured grids (2x2 or 3x3 etc.), or from user-defined grids. These
‘monitor layouts‘ then make up the layout of the entire video wall.
Further, an individual monitor may be set up with a set of two or more alternative tile-grid layouts which can be available to the monitor at run time. (For example, there may be a 2x2,
3x3, a 4x4 tile grid and a user-defined tile grid layout in the set of alternative layouts to select from at run time on the monitor.)
These alternative layouts are saved for an individual monitor for selecting at run time on the video wall. These are called Monitor Layouts and they apply to individual monitors on the video wall.
These ‘monitor-level’ layouts form part of the overall Layout Configuration .
Note: Live-Selecting of Monitor Layouts:
Monitor Layouts are live-selectable.
( Monitor Layout in the Room Editor tool is equivalent to
Wall Layout in the Wall Editor tool in GV Orbit Client.)
Monitor Layouts can be created (see
Create a New Monitor Layout , on page 697).
Monitor Layouts
can be selected live for a video wall in X/Y Routing mode (see Step 5b:
Change Layouts in X/Y Routing Mode , on page 735).
What is a Room Layout?
A Room Layout is a snapshot of Monitor Layouts across the monitors on a video wall. A
Room Design can have one or more Room Layouts to select from. This ‘room-level’ layout applies across a whole video wall in a Room .
(See Step 3b: Create Optional Alternative Layouts for a Video Wall , on page 697, for the
workflow steps.)
Room Layouts enable a video wall to have various optional, alternative, similar layouts to
use for different scenarios. Table 15-1 shows some possible example combinations.
664
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is Destination Assignment for a Room?
Table 15-1: Example Room Layouts with different Monitor Layouts Combinations
Monitor Layouts
Monitor 1
Monitor Layouts
Monitor 2
Monitor Layouts
Mon
3
Mon
4
Mon 5
Monitor
Layouts
Mon
6
Mon
7
Room Layouts
Soccer Layout 1
Soccer Layout 2
Soccer Layout 3
Hockey Layout 1
Hockey Layout 1b
Hockey Layout 2
Hockey Layout 3
Room Layouts can be created (see
Create a Room Layout for a Video Wall , on page 701).
Room Layouts can be selected live for a video wall in X/Y Routing mode (see
Change Layouts in X/Y Routing Mode , on page 735) and, in this mode, they may also be
created live and saved.
What is Destination Assignment for a Room?
Assignment of router destinations to tile positions on the video wall tile-grid allows you to manage video walls, and their specifically tile positions, in terms of router destinations.
Assignment of destinations is done for all video walls in a Clustered MV project (for example, for all Rooms in the project). There are two destination assignment mechanisms that can be used:
• Static Destination Assignment
- see What is Static Destination Assignment?
• Dynamic Destination Assignment - see
What is Dynamic Destination Assignment?
665
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is Static Destination Assignment?
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Router destinations assigned to each tile position.
Fig. 15-5: Video Wall - Assigned Destinations
TSL Configuration and Audio Bars Configuration
Additionally, this Room Editor mode allows:
• TSL settings to be configured globally for the Room .
(See Chapter 16, MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration , on page 741.)
• Audio bar configuration for Audio Bars in on-screen graphical widgets to be configured globally for the Room .
(See Chapter 17, Audio Bars Configuration , on page 767.)
What is Static Destination Assignment?
Static Destination Assignment is where one, or more, or all video tiles on video walls are manually assigned specific router destinations. It may be implemented partly or fully in a system. Full static assignment is suitable in routing systems where each video tile on each video wall from each multiviewer is assigned a fixed, specific router destination, which needs to remain static throughout routing operation. (For example, this may be suitable for systems with third-party router controllers.)
For a created Room Design , for each monitor in a video wall, the workflow for static destination assignment is:
1 Router destinations are manually mapped to multiviewer inputs for all devices in the
MV cluster.
2 Destinations are then manually assigned to tile positions on the video walls.
This has prepared the Destination Assignments for monitors in a Room . The multiviewers are ready have signals routed to them.
666
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is Dynamic Destination Assignment?
What is Dynamic Destination Assignment?
Dynamic Destination Assignment implements routing based on video wall tiles rather than on router destinations. This is made possible with the integrated nature of multiviewing and routing in a GV Orbit system.
The assignment of router destinations to video tiles is done at run time by a GV Orbit service. This keeps track of the current video wall active layouts for each multiviewer. The service then knows which multiviewer inputs are actively feeding video tiles and which are free. This information is shared with the GV Orbit system.
Note: The GV Orbit Multiviewer Cluster Manager Service (MVCMS) is required for the dynamic destinations assignment to function.
Upon a video wall layout change, the service re-assigns destinations on the fly to meet the needs of the newly switched-to layout.
In this way:
• A user does not have to keep track of multiviewer input usage across different video wall layouts.
• Multiviewer inputs (up to 48 per multiviewer) can flexibly accommodate the needs of different video wall layouts.
• It is easier for a user to design video walls, because dynamic destination assignment is the default on video tiles from the outset.
( Note: A video tile can still be set to a static destination, preventing the destination to be assigned dynamically if required.)
Note: TSL assignments made will automatically follow any destination reassignments done in dynamic destination assignment mode.
667
MV Cluster - Room Editor
What is X/Y Routing Source Assignment for a Room?
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
What is X/Y Routing Source Assignment for a Room?
The final step in designing the video wall ( Room ) involves routing sources to all of the tile positions in each monitor tile-grid. This is done with an integrated, easy-to-use, graphical routing panel enabling you to route by selecting sources and destination tiles.
Router sources assigned to each tile position.
Fig. 15-6: Video Wall - Routed Sources
The ‘X/Y Routing’ tool mixes a graphical representation of the monitor wall with a (router) source selection panel. The monitor wall representation is the (router) destination selection panel.
A source can easily be assigned (routed) to a tile position on a monitor of a video wall.
See
Step 5a: X/Y Routing Video Sources to Tiles , on page 725, for the workflow steps.
Routing Sources Workflow
The workflow for each video tile position on a monitor is:
1 select the tile position in the monitor’s tile-grid (this is the destination to route to); and
2 select the source.
When a route is made, all levels are routed. and tile positions on the tile-grid show their logical names.
668
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Room Editor Home Screen
Video wall design open in Room Editor tab window
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Room Editor Home Screen
Fig. 15-7: Room Editor Screen Example
The Room Editor stores video wall design information for one or more video walls in a single ‘Clustered MV’ GV Orbit project (see
What is a Clustered Multiviewer Project?
). Each video wall design is stored in a Room
Room Editor Workflow Overview
Room Editor allows a user to easily create video walls. This is an overview of the workflow:
1 Create monitor wall arrangements from one or more monitors and assign multiviewer outputs.
2 Create the layout - Assign tile-grids to each monitor in the video wall and populate with tile types, and create all room layouts and monitor layouts.
3 Assign router video destinations to video wall tile positions in the grid.
4 Assign video sources to video wall tile positions in the tile-grid.
The Room Editor workflow steps are outlined in
Room Editor Workflow , on page 671. The
steps are then fully described in the subsequent sections of this chapter, that is in sections:
through to
Step 5a: X/Y Routing Video Sources to Tiles .
669
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Room Editor Tool Bar
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Room Editor Tool Bar
The first few icons in the Room Editor
tool bar (see Figure 15-8) follow the MV Cluster video
wall design’s Room Editor workflow and take you through the various modes of operation of the Room Editor .
Tool bar icons shown depends on workflow step that is active
Room Editor workflow:
• Select for
Arrange Monitors and Assign MV Outputs Mode
.
• Select for
• Select for
Assign Router Destinations Mode
.
• Select for
Fig. 15-8: Room Editor Tool Bar - Main Icons
Arrange Monitors and Assign MV Outputs Mode
Icons in the Room Editor tool bar in this mode:
Click to delete the selected monitor
Fig. 15-9: Room Editor Tool Bar - Arrange Monitors and Assign MV Outputs Mode
Design Layout Mode
Icons in the Room Editor tool bar in this mode:
• Room Layout actions.
• Monitor Layout actions.
• Fine, free-hand positioning of tiles on tile-grid.
• Delete currently-selected item.
• Select all tiles on selected monitor.
Fig. 15-10: Room Editor Tool Bar - Design Layout Mode
670
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Assign Router Destinations Mode
Icons in the Room Editor tool bar in this mode:
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Room Editor Workflow
• Room Layout actions.
• Monitor Layout actions.
• Map multiviewer inputs to router destinations.
• Select all tiles on selected monitor.
Fig. 15-11: Room Editor Tool Bar - Assign Router Destinations Mode
X/Y Routing Mode
Icons in the Room Editor tool bar in this mode:
• Room Layout actions.
• Monitor Layout actions.
Fig. 15-12: Room Editor Tool Bar - X/Y Routing Mode
Room Editor Workflow
The workflow for creating Room designs in the Room Editor is listed here and described in the following sections of this chapter. A prerequisite is a GV Orbit ‘Clustered MV’ project
open in GV Orbit Client. (See Creating a New Clustered Multiviewer Project for an MV
Workflow steps overview:
•
•
Arrange Monitors and Assign Multiviewer Outputs
•
Design Room Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts
•
Create Optional Alternative Layouts for a Video Wall
•
Assign Router Destinations to Tile Positions
•
•
Routing Video Sources to Tile Positions
671
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Create a Room (Room File)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
These steps are outlined in subsequent sections of this chapter, listed as
Procedure Steps , on page 673.
Create a Room (Room File)
Firstly, for each video wall, create a Room for each video wall.
See
Step 1: Create a Room , on page 674.
Then, for each Room , create a Room Design to form the video wall design, as described in subsequent sections:
Arrange Monitors and Assign Multiviewer Outputs
See
Step 2: Arrange Monitors and Assign Multiviewer Outputs , on page 675.
Position monitors on a ‘stage’; define monitor types (includes size, orientation, single HD or quad-split for UHD); and assign one or more MV outputs to each monitor.
Note: The Assign Multiviewer Outputs mode of the Room Editor does not use ‘Run mode’ ; the ‘Design/Run Mode’ tool bar icon is hidden
(See Design Mode / Run Mode , on page 132.)
Design Room Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts
See
Step 3a: Design Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts to a Video Wall , on page 688.
Assign tile-grid templates to the monitors of the video wall; populate with tiles; and customize if required to form the video wall layout. Additionally, manage destinations assigned to the video wall tiles.
Note: Design Room Layout mode of the Room Editor may operate in
GV Orbit Client’s Design or Run Mode .
(See Design Mode / Run Mode , on page 132.)
Create Optional Alternative Layouts for a Video Wall
See
Step 3b: Create Optional Alternative Layouts for a Video Wall , on page 697.
This mode enables creates different layouts for the video monitor wall.
672
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Assign Router Destinations to Tile Positions
Assign Router Destinations to Tile Positions
See
Step 4a: Assign Destinations to Tile Positions , on page 706.
This mode: maps destinations to multiviewer inputs; assigns destinations to video wall tile positions on each tile-grid; and can also be used to assign TSL settings for the Room .
The mapping made between router destinations and multiviewer inputs needs to be made whether operating in the Dynamic Destination Assignment mode or in the Static
Destination Assignment mode, or in a mixture of both. All the destinations that are mapped to tiles configured for dynamic assignment will be assigned dynamically.
Note: The Assign Router Destinations mode of the Room Editor does not use ‘Run mode’ ; the ‘Design/Run Mode’ tool bar icon is hidden.
(See Design Mode / Run Mode , on page 132.)
Tally Configuration
See
Step 4b: Configure TSL Tally Settings for a Room , on page 725.
Optional at this stage and may be done separately later.
Routing Video Sources to Tile Positions
See
Step 5a: X/Y Routing Video Sources to Tiles , on page 725.
This mode routes required sources to video tiles for the required video monitoring.
Different video monitor wall layouts can be selected from this Room Editor mode and seen live on the video monitor wall. Additionally, new layouts can be tried and saved.
Note: Routing Video Sources mode of the Room Editor operates in ‘Run
Mode’, allowing live changes on a video wall to be made.
(See Design Mode / Run Mode , on page 132.)
Workflow Procedure Steps
Workflow steps described in subsequent sections of this chapter:
•
Step 1: Create a Room , on page 674
•
Step 2: Arrange Monitors and Assign Multiviewer Outputs , on page 675
•
Step 3a: Design Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts to a Video Wall , on page 688
•
Step 3b: Create Optional Alternative Layouts for a Video Wall , on page 697
•
Step 4a: Assign Destinations to Tile Positions , on page 706
673
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 1: Create a Room
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
•
Step 4b: Configure TSL Tally Settings for a Room , on page 725
•
Step 5a: X/Y Routing Video Sources to Tiles , on page 725
•
Step 5b: Change Layouts in X/Y Routing Mode , on page 735
Step 1: Create a Room
Create a Room ( Room file) with the Rooms icon from the Home Page or from the Project window. All video wall design information for one video wall will be stored in the Room file. A project may contain one or more Room files, which are shown in the Project window.
Create a Room for each video wall.
Procedure
To create a Room in the project from the Home Page :
1 Click the Rooms icon on the Home Screen and click New Room .
The New Room File
dialog is shown. (See Figure 15-13)
674
Click New Room .
Enter a name for the Room file.
Click OK .
Fig. 15-13: New Room File Dialog
2 Enter a name for the Room and click OK .
A new, empty Room is created and is shown in the Project window in the ‘rooms’ subfolder.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 2: Arrange Monitors and Assign Multiviewer Outputs
Project window ‘rooms’ sub-folder.
Room file is created and shown in the Project window.
Fig. 15-14: Create New Room File
Alternative Procedure, from Project Window
Alternatively, to create a Room from the Project
1 Right-click on the ‘rooms’ folder in the Project window and select New Room .
Rt-click on ‘rooms’ folder in
Project window.
Select New Room .
Fig. 15-15: Create New Room File
The New Room File dialog is shown.
2 Enter a name for the Room and click OK .
A new, empty Room file is created and is shown in the Project window in the ‘rooms’ sub-folder.
Step 2: Arrange Monitors and Assign Multiviewer Outputs
675
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide a) Arrange Monitors
Monitors
Cluster of multiviewers b) Assign Multiviewer and Multiviewer Outputs
Video Wall Room Design
Prerequisites:
• There is a new Room in GV Orbit Client as part of a Clustered MV project.
• Multiviewers in the multiviewer cluster are discoverable or have been manually entered into the GV Orbit Client via the ‘Multiviewer > Multiviewer Cluster’ dialog of the Clustered MV project.
Procedure
Overview of procedure:
•
Drag Monitors onto Video Wall Stage Area , on page 677.
•
Configure Monitor on Video Wall Stage Area , on page 680.
•
Arrange Monitors on Video Wall Stage , on page 684.
676
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
Drag Monitors onto Video Wall Stage Area
To position monitors for one video wall, in the Project window:
1 Open the Room by double-clicking on the Room file name, or by right-clicking on it and selecting Open .
The Room opens in the Room Editor in GV Orbit Client. When first opened, the Room is shown in its ‘Assign Multiviewer Outputs’ mode. And All multiviewer outputs are listed in a banner at the top of the central stage area.
’Assign Multiviewer Outputs’ mode button is selected.
Room Editor tool bar Multiviewer outputs listed in banner,
Room name shown in tab.
Stage area
Fig. 15-16: New Room in Room Editor (‘Assign Multiviewer Outputs’ Mode shown)
677
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: If there are no multiviewer devices in the cluster, then the banner area is empty and a message appears at the bottom of the stage area, instructing you on how to add multiviewer devices to the cluster.
“No multiviewers have been automatically discovered.
To manually add a multiviewer, click ‘Multiviewer > Multiviewer Cluster’ from the tool bar menu.”
Fig. 15-17: Message at the Bottom of the Stage Area
Note: Banner Controls:
The multiviewer outputs banner area has controls to help locate multiviewer outputs (especially useful with several multiviewers and
outputs). Controls are (see Figure 15-18):
• Scroll control - A vertical scroll to see multiviewer outputs.
• Resize control - A splitter bar to re-size the banner and see more multiviewer outputs at one time.
• Filter control - A filter control to locate multiviewer outputs in the banner.
– Enter text in the filter text box.
For example, Enter ‘Output 1’ to see: multiviewer outputs ‘Output 1 MV1’, ‘Output 10 MV1’ ... and
‘Output 1 MV2’, ‘Output 10 MV2’ etc.
Note that this is case sensitive. For example, seraching for output returns nothing, where Output does find results.
– Click on the filter symbol and select a multiviewer name in the drop-down list to see all outputs from that multiviewer.
To clear the filter, clear the filter text box.
678
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
2 Drag a multiviewer output from the banner onto the stage area and release.
All multiviewer outputs
Drag a multiviewer output onto the stage
Use scroll control to see multiviewer outputs.
Use the filter control to find multiviewer outputs.
Drag splitter bar to see more/fewer multiviewer outputs.
Fig. 15-18: Drag on a Multiviewer Output
A representation of the monitor appears on the stage. See Figure 15-19.
Drag on
Fig. 15-19: Dragged-on Monitor
Monitor label:
Output and multiviewer device is indicated in label for display purposes in the Room Editor .
679
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: For display purposes in the Room Editor , each monitor on the stage area has a label indicating which multiviewer output and device is being used for the monitor.
Note: Monitor Aspect Ratio :
Monitors aspect ratio should be 16:9.
Configure Monitor on Video Wall Stage Area
1 Configure the monitor on the stage area by double-clicking on it.
The Configure Monitor
dialog is shown (see Figure 15-20), where monitor properties
can be changed.
2 Also, when a monitor is selected, its properties may be viewed and edited in the Properties window.
To view the Properties window:
• Select the ‘Properties Window’ button in the main tool bar. See Figure 15-20.)
• Right-click on the monitoring and select Configure Output .
680
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Double-click on monitor to show its Configure Monitor dialog
Select Properties Window button to show Properties Window.
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
Fig. 15-20: Configure Monitor Dialog
To edit monitor properties, set up the monitor parameters in the Configure Monitor dialog, including:
3 TV Size - Enter the nominal monitor screen diagonal size (inches).
When a value is entered:
• indicates a supported size; and
• indicates an unsupported size.
4 Rotation - Select the monitor screen orientation used:
• Landscape ( ),
681
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
• Portrait ( ); or
• Inverted Portrait ( ).
5 Resolution - Define whether monitor is an HD monitor, or a UHD monitor (requiring quad-link multiviewer outputs) by selecting the corresponding icon:
• HD monitor ( ).
• UHD monitor, requires 4x multiviewer (HD) outputs ( ).
The following multiviewer assignment settings of the monitor are automatically set up when the monitor is dragged onto the screen. However, these may be changed in the
Configure Monitor dialog, if required:
6 Multiviewer - Select a different multiviewer device to be assigned to the monitor, if required.
7 Multiviewer Output - Select different multiviewer output(s) (head output) to be assigned to drive the monitor. (Already-used outputs are grayed-out.)
For:
• HD monitors, select one output (see Figure 15-21a).
• UHD monitors, select four outputs for driving the four monitor picture quadrants
8 Re-ordering UHD monitor quadrants, if required, enables you to quickly and easily compensate for any quadrant wiring mis-matches. For UHD monitors:
• Re-order four the quadrant inputs by dragging monitor quadrants in the dialog,
682
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure a) HD Monitor - one output selected.
b) UHD Monitor - four outputs selected.
c) UHD Monitor - outputs rearranged
Fig. 15-21: Select Multiviewer Outputs for Monitor: a) HD Monitor - one output selected.
b) UHD Monitor - four outputs selected.
c) UHD Monitor - selected outputs rearranged.
9 Monitor Name - Enter an optional operational name for the monitor, which will appear
on the monitor label. For example “Cameras”, see Figure 15-22.
683
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Enter an operational name for the monitor, which appears on the monitor label.
Fig. 15-22: Monitor Name
Additionally, the following TSL item may be set up:
10 TSL 5.0 screen index to use by default for video tiles shown by the multiviewer output.
Note: If using the TSL 5.0 tally protocol, then set the TSL 5.0 screen index for each monitor screen.
Finally, when all settings changes are complete in the dialog:
11 Click OK in the Configure Monitor dialog.
This has configured the monitor.
Arrange Monitors on Video Wall Stage
1 Position the monitor on the video wall stage area.
Note: Undo / Redo :
Edits in the Room Editor are all un-doable and re-doable with the usual GV Orbit Client key strokes:
• CTRL-Z (undo action); and
• CTRL-Y (redo action).
684
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure
Note: Fine Positioning :
Monitors can be finely-positioned using the arrow keys.
Then:
2 Drag on further monitors, configure and position these to form your video wall monitor arrangement by abutting monitors on the stage.
Note: When dragging monitors on the stage, overlap of monitors is not permitted in a video wall. Any overlapping areas are shown in red .
Note: Monitor Alignment :
Monitors can be aligned and arranged on the stage using the GV
Orbit Client’s alignment tools in the tool bar.
Note: Snap-to-Monitor and Snap-to-Grid :
Monitors will snap to other monitors on the stage when brought close.
If ‘snap to grid’ is turned on for the Room Editor , then snap-to-grid takes precedence over snap-to-monitor when positioning monitors.
(‘Tools > Option > App’ in main menu for Room Editor grid controls.)
685
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Notes Etc. for Monitor Arrangement
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Click Project > Save File in the main menu to save changes to the Room file.
This has created a Room Design in a Room file in the Clustered MV project.
A video wall is defined with its constituent monitors and connected to multiviewer outputs from the MV cluster.
Finally:
4 Repeat this for each video wall required for each Room .
Note: Copy-Paste Monitors with CTRL-C and CTRL-V :
Monitors can be copy-pasted for quick editing on the stage. The configuration of a copied monitor must be set up accordingly in the
Configure Monitor dialog.
To copy-paste a monitor:
• Select a monitor on the stage and press CTRL-C.
• Click elsewhere on the stage and press CTRL-V to paste a copy of the monitor.
(Further CTRL-V will paste more monitors.)
Notes Etc. for Monitor Arrangement
CAUTION
Multiviewer Outputs for UHD monitors :
When assigning four multiviewer outputs for a UHD monitor use any four licensed outputs from the same multiviewer device.
Note
: All four outputs must be from the same multiviewer device. (This enables the required quad-split to be formed from four (HD) multiviewer outputs.)
Note: Landscape and Portrait :
Room Editor:
When using the Room Editor , a monitor arrangement can mix
‘Landscape’ and ‘Portrait’ monitors.
Wall Editor:
However, when using the older Wall Editor , there is a restriction that
‘Landscape’ and ‘Portrait’ must not be mixed on a video wall.
(This restriction does not apply when using the Room Editor and a cluster of multiviewers.)
686
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Notes Etc. for Monitor Arrangement
Note: Monitor Properties :
When the Properties window is open, selecting a monitor in the video wall stage area will show the monitor’s properties in the
Properties window.
Fig. 15-23: Monitor Properties in Properties Window
Example Monitor Arrangement
Figure 15-24 shows an example video wall monitor arrangement with assigned multiviewer
outputs.
Fig. 15-24: Example Video Wall Monitor Arrangement
Next step:
Step 3a: Design Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts to a Video Wall
687
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 3a: Design Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts to a Video Wall
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 3a: Design Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts to a Video Wall
Tile layouts
Video Wall Tile Layout Configuration
Prerequisites:
• There is a Room file open in the Room Editor which has a Room Design .
Note: Tile Grid relates to a grid arrangement of tiles on a video wall monitor. This ‘grid’ is different to the ‘drawing grid’ that can be enabled in graphical drawing tools, such as in the Room Editor in
GV Orbit Client.
(‘Drawing grid’ controls are accessed via ‘Tools > Options > App’ in the main menu.)
Procedure to Assign Tile Grids
To assign tile-grids to a video wall, in the Project window:
1 Open the Room file in the Room Editor .
2 To select the grid design mode, select the Design Layout icon.
688
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure to Assign Tile Grids
Design Layout icon selected
Fig. 15-25: Room Editor Tool Bar - Design Layout Icon
The Room Design is now shown in Design Layout mode which shows the available
Tile Grid
Monitor header, showing: Multiviewer Output and Device
Available Tile Grid templates
Fig. 15-26: Design Layout Mode in Room Editor
To apply a grid layout to a monitor:
3 Select a monitor by clicking on its monitor header.
4 Then select a tile-grid from the available Tile Grid templates.
The grid is applied to the monitor.
689
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure to Assign Tile Grids
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Two things have actually happened to the monitor: i) a grid layout has been applied; and ii) the grid has been automatically populated with video tiles.
Note: Tile-grids are automatically populated with video tiles by default when added to a monitor. The tiles populated on a tile-grid can be
configured as required or replaced with customs Tiles. See Monitor
Layouts and Tiles , on page 699.
Assigned monitors Unassigned monitors
690
Select monitor
Select Tile Grid template
Fig. 15-27: Apply Tile Grid Template to Monitor
5 Apply grid layouts to all monitors.
When all monitors have been assigned grid layouts:
6 Click Project > Save File in the main menu to save the grid layout changes to the Room .
This has quickly defined the layout of the video wall using tile grids from the available
templates. Figure 15-28 shows an example.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Modifying a Tile-Grid on a Video Wall
’Dynamic’ indicates tile has
Dynamic Destination Assignment enabled.
Fig. 15-28: Example Quick Grid Layout on Video Wall
A Room Layout has been generated.
Note: Each video tile in each tile-grid by default has ‘Dynamic
Destination Assignment’ enabled, by default.
Modifying a Tile-Grid on a Video Wall
Quick edits to a tile-grid of a video wall can be done in Design Layout mode. The following example modifies the video wall shown in
1 Select a monitor to modify.
Selected Monitor to modify
Fig. 15-29: Selected Monitor to Modify
691
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Customizing a Tile-Grid on a Video Wall
2 Select a new Tile Grid template.
The new Tile Grid is assigned and shown on the monitor.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
New grid layout on monitor
Select new Tile Grid template to use.
Fig. 15-30: Modified Grid Layout
3 Click Project > Save File to save the grid layout in the Room file.
Customizing a Tile-Grid on a Video Wall
Further, a custom change can be made to a grid layout in Design Layout mode.
In Design Layout mode:
1 Select a monitor to modify.
692
Fig. 15-31: Select a Monitor
2 Select a tile position in the monitor’s tile-grid.
Select a tile position.
Fig. 15-32: Select a Tile Position in a Tile-Grid
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Drag a corner of the tile position and release it to resize it.
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Customizing a Tile-Grid on a Video Wall
Drag tile position corner a) Drag a Corner of a Tile Position
Fig. 15-33: Resize a Tile Position in a Tile-Grid b) Release a Corner of Tile Position
A video wall’s tile-grid layout on one monitor has been customized.
This customized tile-grid may be saved, see
.
693
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Saving a Customized Tile-Grid
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Saving a Customized Tile-Grid
For a customized tile-grid that is on a video wall, to add it to the available templates in
Design Layout mode:
1 Select the monitor containing the with the customized tile-grid.
Select customized monitor
Fig. 15-34: Select a Monitor Grid Layout
2 Click Add Grid .
The Tile Grid of the selected monitor is added to the available templates and is then available for use in the project.
694
Fig. 15-35: Custom Grid Layout Added to Available Grid Templates
3 Click Project > Save File to save the video wall’s grid layout in the Room file.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Saving a Customized Tile-Grid
A customized grid layout has been saved in the Room and can be re-used. The information is stored in the Room file in the project.
Example Customized Tile-Grids
Customized Tile-Grids saved as Tile-Grid Templates
Fig. 15-36: Example Grid Layout with Two Customized Monitor Grid Layouts
695
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Fine Positioning of Tile Positions on a Tile-Grid
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fine Positioning of Tile Positions on a Tile-Grid
So far in this chapter, the tile grids have been populated with tiles placed at tile-positions of the (template) tile-grid. A tile-position may be repositioned ‘off-grid’ when in Design
Layout mode:
1 Click on the Freehand Positioning
Fig. 15-37: Freehand Positioning Icon
The stage now enables the freehand positioning of tile-positions.
696
Drag corner
Fig. 15-38: Freehand Positioning Icon
2 Select a tile at a tile position on a tile-grid.
3 Move it, or drag one of its corners, to finely reposition it.
4 Click Save File in the main tool bar to save the change.
Lastly:
5 Click on the Freehand Positioning icon to toggle freehand mode off.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 3b: Create Optional Alternative Layouts for a Video Wall
Step 3b: Create Optional Alternative Layouts for a Video Wall
Design Layout mode can be used to create different layouts for a video wall.
In a Room , each video wall monitor can have more than one possible tile-grid layout. (This is called a Monitor Layout
. See What is a Monitor Layout?
information.)
A Room Layout is a snapshot of Monitor Layouts on a video wall and a Room can have more than one Room Layout for its video wall.
, on page 664 for more information.)
Use the Room Editor ’s Design Layout mode to optionally create alternative layouts for a video wall, either for its monitors:
•
•
.
Or for the whole video wall:
•
Create a Room Layout for a Video Wall
.
Create a New Monitor Layout
To create a new Monitor Layout for a monitor on a video wall, in Design Layout mode:
1 Select a monitor.
Fig. 15-39: Select a Monitor
2 Click on the Monitor Layout icon ( select ‘New Monitor Layout’.
) in the Room Editor tool bar and
Fig. 15-40: Select ‘New Monitor Layout’
697
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Create a New Monitor Layout
3 Enter a name for the new Monitor Layout and click OK .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 15-41: Enter a Name for the New Monitor Layout’
4 Select a new Tile Grid template from those available.
The selected template appears on the selected monitor.
New selected Tile Grid appears on monitor.
698
Fig. 15-42: Select New Tile Grid Template
5 Click Save File in the main tool bar.
This has created a new tile-grid layout for use by the selected monitor. Further Monitor
Layouts for the monitor may be created.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Monitor Layouts and Tiles
List Monitor Layouts
To see what Monitor Layouts there are for a monitor:
1 Select the monitor.
2 Click the Monitor Layout icon.
The pop-up menu lists the available Monitor Layouts for the selected monitor . See
Figure 15-43. A radio button allows a
Monitor Layout to be selected.
Fig. 15-43: List Monitor Layouts for a Selected Monitor
Monitor Layouts and Tiles
A tile grid is populated with tiles. Monitor Layouts also record the type of tile at each populated tile position. In this way, two Monitor Layouts may have the same tile-grid but contain different tiles. Tile change-overs on a video wall can then be recalled with a
Monitor Layout .
Tile types to populate a tile-grid with include:
• an Auto-tile configured as a video tile. (See Configured Video Tile , on page 700.)
• an Auto-tile configured as a clock tile. (See Clock Tile , on page 700.)
• a
.
A new Monitor Layout can be created for each change of tile type and saved. Then a
Monitor Layout can be recalled and saved as a Room Layout
(see Create a Room Layout for a Video Wall , on page 701).
699
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Monitor Layouts and Tiles
Configured Video Tile
Properties of selected tile
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Video tile properties changed in Properties box
Fig. 15-44: Configured Video Tile Example
Clock Tile
Drag tile on
Fig. 15-45: Dragged-On Clock Tile Example
700
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Custom Tile
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Create a Room Layout for a Video Wall
Image widget added Digital Clock widget added a) Edit a video tile in the Tile Editor to create a Custom Tile
Audio Bars widget configured for more bars etc.
UMD widget added
Drag tile onto the stage b) Drag Custom Tile onto Tile Grid in Room Editor
Fig. 15-46: Drag on Custom Tile
Create a Room Layout for a Video Wall
Prerequisite:
• One or more Monitor Layouts have been generated for each monitor in the video wall of the Room.
With various Monitor Layouts created for monitors, different Monitor Layouts can be selected and saved as new Room Layouts for a video wall.
To create a new Room Layout based on the current Room Layout :
1 View a video wall in Design Layout mode.
701
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Create a Room Layout for a Video Wall
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 15-47: Video Wall in Grid Layout Mode.
2 On each monitor in the video wall, select the required Monitor Layouts on each monitor.
3 Click on the Room Layout icon ( ) and select ‘New Layout’.
702
Fig. 15-48: Select New (Room) Layout
4 Enter a name for the new Room Layout and click OK .
Fig. 15-49: Enter a Name for the New Room Layout
This creates a new Room Layout from the current one.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Create a Room Layout for a Video Wall
To make a change to this new Room Layout :
5 Select a monitor that has more than one Monitor Layout and then right-click on it.
A drop-down menu appears.
6 Select ‘Switch Monitor Layout’ and select a Monitor Layout
from the list. (See Figure 15-50.)
Select a tile
Fig. 15-50: Select a Monitor Layout
The selected monitor shows the new Monitor Layout .
703
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Edit an Existing Room Layout
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 15-51: New, Selected Monitor Layout
7 Click Save File in the main tool bar.
The new Room Layout now uses the selected Monitor Layout for the selected monitor.
Edit an Existing Room Layout
To edit an existing Room Layout :
1 View the Design Layout mode and select the Room Layout to be edited.
2 Select a monitor and, for that monitor, select a new Monitor Layout .
3 Click Save File in the main tool bar to save the modified Room Layout .
704
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Example Room Layouts
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Edit an Existing Room Layout
Example Room Layout1
Uses Monitor Layout = “ Layout1 ”
Example Room Layout2
Uses Monitor Layout = “ Layout_2x2 ”
Example Room Layout3
Uses Monitor Layout = “ Layout_3x3 ”
Example Room Layout4
Uses Monitor Layout = “ Layout_4x4 ”
Example Room Layout5
Uses Monitor Layout = “ Layout_5x5 ”
Fig. 15-52: Example Room Layouts 1 to 5
Next step:
Step 4a: Assign Destinations to Tile Positions
705
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a: Assign Destinations to Tile Positions
Step 4a: Assign Destinations to Tile Positions
This step associates router destinations to video wall tiles.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Router destinations assigned to each tile position.
706
Assign Router Destinations to Video Wall Tile Positions
For video tiles which are configured for Static Destination Assignment , the assignments made are used unchanged.
For video tiles configured for Dynamic Destination Assignment , then the assignments made define which destinations may be dynamically routed.
( Note: This needs the Multiviewer Cluster Manager Service running on the GV Orbit Server),
Prerequisites:
• There is a Room open in the Room Editor which has a Room Design which defines a video wall which has a Design Layout .
• Router destinations have been set up in the router controller (GV Orbit Control).
• The Routing service is connected to GV Orbit Control.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure Overview
Procedure Overview
The Assign Router Destinations workflow is presented below in the following steps:
•
Step 4a-1: Open Room Editor in Assign Destinations Mode
•
Step 4a-3: To Edit a Tile to be Static
•
Step 4a-2: Map Router Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs
•
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
And then some TSL configuration settings may be optionally set up (or set up later, as required):
•
Step 4b: Configure TSL Tally Settings for a Room
Step 4a-1: Open Room Editor in Assign Destinations Mode
By default, destinations are set to dynamic mode. To assign multiviewer router destinations to a video wall, in the Project window:
1 Open the Room in the Room Editor .
2 To select the destination assignment mode, select the Assign Destinations icon.
Assign Destinations icon selected
Fig. 15-53: Room Editor Tool Bar - Assign Destinations Icon
The Room Design is now shown in Assign Destinations
Icon indicates that a video wall tile uses Dynamic
Destination
Assignment
Fig. 15-54: Assign Destinations Mode in Room Editor - First Screen
707
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-2: Map Router Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: Video tiles that are using the Dynamic Destination Assignment mode are indicated with a icon.
Step 4a-2: Map Router Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs
Router destinations should have already been reserved for all multiviewer inputs of the MV cluster in the routing system. These each need mapping to the multiviewer inputs for our
Clustered MV project for either the Static Destination Assignment case or Dynamic
Destination Assignment case.
First, map the destinations before the assignments can be done.
In the Room Editor tool bar in Assign Destinations mode, to map destinations to multiviewer inputs:
1 Click on the Configure Mapping icon.
Click on Configure Mapping icon
Fig. 15-55: Room Editor Tool Bar - Assign Destinations Mode, Configure Mapping Icon
A Destination Configuration tab is opened which lists all multiviewer devices in the cluster. For each multiviewer, all multiviewer inputs are listed. Initially this list is
708
Fig. 15-56: Destination Configuration Tab
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-2: Map Router Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs
To map router destinations to multiviewer inputs:
2 Select the multiviewer.
3 Click on the ‘Destinations’ column heading to select all multiviewer inputs.
Click on column heading to select all multiviewer inputs.
Fig. 15-57: Select Multiviewer, Select All Inputs
All inputs of the selected multiviewer are selected.
4 Alternatively, select a range of inputs by:
• clicking on the first empty destination box in the range;
• scrolling down the list; and
• SHIFT-clicking on the last item.
All inputs in the range are selected.
709
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-2: Map Router Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select
SHIFT-Select to select a range
Fig. 15-58: Select Multiviewer and Select Multiviewer Input Range
With inputs selected:
5 Click on the Destination Picker icon in the Destination Configuration tab tool bar.
Click on the Destination Picker icon
Fig. 15-59: Multiviewer Selected and Inputs Selected
The Add Destinations dialog is shown, which shows a filterable and scrollable list all of
the destinations of the GV Orbit routing system. See Figure 15-60.
710
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-2: Map Router Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs
Tool bar icons:
• Select all - Select all destinations displayed in the dialog.
• De-select All - De-select all destinations.
• Wide Buttons - Click to toggle Destination button width.
Scrollable
Fig. 15-60: Add Destinations Dialog
Note: List items can be selected in a similar way to using the Bulk Routing
Panel: Select and item, then SHIFT-select to select a range of items and CTRL-select to add individual items to the selection.
6 Typically, destination names have consistent and logical naming.
(For example, ‘MV-1 Dest**’, or ‘MV-2 Input**’.)
711
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-2: Map Router Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
If required, use the filtering to locate the destinations for your selected multiviewer inputs.
7 Select the range of destinations for the selected multiviewer inputs. (Select, then SHIFT-
Select.)
Filtering on MV*
Select
Select
712
SHIFT-Select
Fig. 15-61: Selected Range of Destinations
8 Click OK in the Add Destinations dialog.
The selected destinations are mapped and listed against the multiviewer inputs.
Note: Useful Filter feature:
When assigning router destinations to multiviewer inputs, typically, the destinations intended for multiviewer inputs are consistently and logically named. The filter feature of the Add Destinations dialog can then be used to easily list the destinations required.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-2: Map Router Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs
Destinations mapped to multiviewer inputs
Fig. 15-62: Selected Destinations Mapped to Multiviewer Inputs
Some multiviewer inputs have been mapped to destinations.
Now:
9 Repeat these steps to map all of the multiviewers and their inputs to router destinations.
10 Click Save File .
When all multiviewer inputs have been mapped to destinations and saved:
11 Close the Destination Configuration tab.
Fig. 15-63: Close Destination Configuration Tab
All multiviewer inputs have been mapped to router destinations.
Note: Changes made in the Destination Configuration tab need to be saved before the changes can be seen in the Room Editor .
713
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-3: To Edit a Tile to be Static
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 4a-3: To Edit a Tile to be Static
Dynamic Destination Assignment is the default tile configuration. It may be applied to one, or more, or all video tiles. It is possible to mix dynamic- and static-assigned tiles.
To configure a tile for Static Destination Assignment :
1 Select a tile.
Select a tile.
Deselect the
Automatic
Destination
Assignment button.
Fig. 15-64: Preparing to Set a Static Destination
2 Deselect the Automatic Destination Assignment button.
Router destinations are listed in the lower pane. See Figure 15-77.
714
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-3: To Edit a Tile to be Static
Fig. 15-65: Set a Static Destination
If no destinations are listed on the lower pane, then see Step 4a-2: Map Router
Destinations to Multiviewer Inputs , on page 708, for instructions for manually mapping
router destinations.
Once destinations are listed:
3 Select a multiviewer input in the lower pane.
The selected tile now indicates its static router destination setting.
715
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Selected tile has a static router destination setting.
Fig. 15-66: Static Destination for a Tile
4 Click Save File in the main menu.
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
The video wall tab shows our video wall and we have mapped destinations to multiviewer inputs.
Note: This step is only required to be done for tiles which are configured for
Static Destination Assignment .
716
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
Monitor header areas annotated with multiviewer output information.
Video wall tiles populated in the tile positions
Fig. 15-67: Video Wall Tab Ready for Assigning Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
The workflow is presented with these sub-sections:
•
Assign Single, Static Destination to Single Tile Position
.
•
To Assign Static Destination(s) to All Tile Positions on a Monitor’s Tile-Grid .
•
Assign (Static) Series of Destinations to Multiple Tile Positions
.
And:
•
Delete a Destination Assignment .
•
Edit a Static Destination Assignment .
•
Edit a Tile - Static to Dynamic Destination Assignment .
Assign Single, Static Destination to Single Tile Position
To assign static destinations to tile position:
1 Select a tile position on a monitor.
For the selected position, the destinations mapped to the corresponding multiviewer are listed below. These are all possible destinations for the selected position. See
717
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
Selected tile position
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Destinations mapped to multiviewer
Click to toggle wide buttons
Fig. 15-68: Possible Mapped Destinations for Selected Tile Position
2 Select a destination.
The destination is assigned as a static destination to the tile position, which is annotated with the destination name.
Tile position annotated with assigned (static) destination name.
Tile position is unassigned.
Fig. 15-69: Static Destination Assigned to Tile Position
This has assigned a static destination to a tile position on the tile-grid. Other tile positions can be assigned static destinations similarly.
To Assign Static Destination(s) to All Tile Positions on a Monitor’s Tile-Grid
To quickly assign static destinations, all tile positions on a monitor can be selected and assigned:
1 Double-click on a monitor header area.
All tile positions on the monitor are selected.
718
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
Double-click on monitor header area to select all tile positions on the monitor.
Fig. 15-70: Select All Tile Positions on Monitor
2 Select a destination.
An Assign Destination to Multiple Tiles
dialog pops up. See Figure 15-71.
Select several tiles.
Select a destination.
Fig. 15-71: Assign Destination to Multiple Tiles Dialog
719
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 In the Assign Destination to Multiple Tiles dialog:
• Click Fill Series to fill the selected tile positions with a series of destination, starting from the selected one.
• Click Duplicate Destination to fill all the selected tile positions with the selected destination.
Figure 15-72 shows the result of doing
Fill Series .
Series-filled tiles
Fig. 15-72: Result of Fill Series
Assign (Static) Series of Destinations to Multiple Tile Positions
Assignment by Fill Series can be done to a selection of tile positions:
1 Select tile positions from the same multiviewer with ‘select’ and ‘SHIFT-select’.
2 Use ‘Fill Series’ to assign static destinations.
720
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
Delete a Destination Assignment
1 Select one or more tile positions.
2 Click the Unassign icon or press the Delete key to delete the destination assignment.
Destination assignment deleted.
Unassign icon
Fig. 15-73: Deleted Destination Assignment
Edit a Static Destination Assignment
1 Select a tile position.
Tile position selected
Fig. 15-74: Selected Tile Position
2 Select a new static destination.
Selected destination
Fig. 15-75: Select New Destination
The new static destination assignment is made.
721
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
New static destination assignment
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 15-76: New Static Destination Assignment
722
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4a-4: Assign Mapped Destinations to Tile Positions
Edit a Tile - Static to Dynamic Destination Assignment
To set dynamic assignment for a static assignment tile:
1 Select a tile.
2 Select the Automatic Destination Assignment button in the lower pane.
The selected tile now indicates its dynamic router destination setting. See Figure 15-77.
Select a static tile.
Selected tile now has
Dynamic Destination Assignment .
Click on the
Automatic
Destination
Assignment button.
Automatic Destination Assignment button is shown selected.
a) Select a static tile b) Tile now has dynamic destination assignment
Fig. 15-77: Make a Static Destination Assigned Tile Dynamic
3 Click Save File in the main menu.
723
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Destination Assignment Notes
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Destination Assignment Notes
Note: When assigning static destinations:
• assigning the same destination to more than one tile position is permitted.
Note: For MV-8XX multiviewers, the architecture of the MV-8 Series core multiviewer has one image scaling function per multiviewer input. If one destination is assigned to more than one tile position, then the video image is viewed at the smallest resizing scale.
• not all destinations need to be assigned.
Note: Prerequisites of assigning router destinations is that:
1 The router controller (‘GV Orbit Control’ in the GV Orbit system) is configured with destinations reserved for use by multiviewer inputs in its topology. See
Logical Device Table Tasks , on page 241.
2 The GV Orbit Routing service must have a valid connection to
‘GV Orbit Control’. See the GV Orbit Admin Guide . See Related
Documentation , on page 7.
Example Static Destination-Assigned Video Wall
The video wall is now managed in terms of destinations.
724
Fig. 15-78: Example Video Wall Tab
The destination assignment needs only to be done once in a project.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 4b: Configure TSL Tally Settings for a Room
Next
When all destination assignment is done (dynamic, static, or a mixture) to multiviewer inputs and tile positions, then TSL Tally configurations (including for TSL address mappings
to multiviewer inputs and video wall tile) can optionally be done. See Step 4b: Configure
.
Note: The TSL Tally configuration can also be done separately later. It is optional at this stage in video wall design.
After this, the next step in video wall design
is: Step 5a: X/Y Routing Video Sources to Tiles
Step 4b: Configure TSL Tally Settings for a Room
Following the assignment of destinations to multiviewer inputs and mapping to video wall tile positions in the Room Editor ‘Assign Destinations’ mode, TSL Tally configuration for the
Room can also be done.
Note: The Destination Assignments should be all completed in the Room
Editor before for the Tally settings can fully function and map to video wall tiles etc.
Configuring the TSL settings is described in Chapter 16, MV Cluster - TSL Tally
Note: TSL configuration is optional at this stage of the video wall design
( Room design) and it can be set up later, if required.
After this optional TSL Tally configuration step during video wall design, the next step in video wall design is:
Step 5a: X/Y Routing Video Sources to Tiles
Step 5a: X/Y Routing Video Sources to Tiles
725
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Introduction
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Router sources assigned to each tile position.
X/Y Routing of Video Sources to Video Wall Tile Positions
Prerequisites:
• There is a Room file open in the Room Editor which has a Room Design defining a video wall which has a assigned router destinations.
• Clustered Multiviewer project has been pushed to the repository on the GV Orbit
Server.
• The Multiviewer Cluster Manager Service (MVCMS) is running on the GV Orbit Server and is set to use the pushed project from the repository.
Introduction
X/Y Routing mode has a live connection to the multiviewer cluster via the MVCMS service.
When using dynamic destinations, a live connection (through the MVCMS service) to an MV unit is required, otherwise the tiles will show up without any destinations assigned to them.
The X/Y Routing workflow is presented in the following sub-sections:
•
Open ‘X/Y Routing’ in the Room Editor
•
Procedure for ‘X/Y Routing’ to a Video Wall Tile Position
•
Route a Source to Multiple Tile Positions
•
Route Multiple Sources to Multiple Tile Positions
Additionally, in this X/Y Routing mode of the Room Editor, the selection or creation of a different Room or Monitor Layout
is shown live on the multiviewer video wall, see Step 5b:
Change Layouts in X/Y Routing Mode , on page 735.
726
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Open ‘X/Y Routing’ in the Room Editor
Open ‘X/Y Routing’ in the Room Editor
The routing of sources to video tiles (actually to the tile positions) is done in the Room
Editor , in its ‘X/Y Routing’ tool.
Note: If you do not have the Edit screens permission then when you open a
MV Cluster Room File, you will be taken directly to the X/Y Routing
Screen and GV Orbit Client will be put into full screen mode. You will only be able to switch Rooms, switch Room Layout and switch
Monitor Layouts. See
To open this Room Editor facility:
1 Open the Room file in the Room Editor .
2 Click on the X/Y Routing icon to select the mode.
X/Y Routing icon selected
Fig. 15-79: Room Editor Tool Bar - XY Routing Icon
The Room Design is now shown in X/Y Routing
727
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Open ‘X/Y Routing’ in the Room Editor
X/Y Routing Mode in Room Editor
Room Video Wall Tile Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing ‘Take’ controls
728
Filter box
Router sources grid
Fig. 15-80: X/Y Routing Mode in Room Editor
Sources Filter box
Router sources are listed in a grid below the representation of the video wall showing the tiles, which are the routing destinations. Routing ‘Take’ controls appear in the banner area.
The X/Y Routing mode provides you an XY routing panel.
Note: For full information on routing with an XY routing panel, refer to
Chapter 13, XY Panel Operation , on page 598.
Routings that are made will be reflected on the Room video wall itself.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Open ‘X/Y Routing’ in the Room Editor
X/Y Routing Mode Controls
• Select ‘Take’ action. Make route:
• When Take button is clicked, or when double-clicking on source.
• Immediately when source is selected.
• Click to Take destination-source selection.
• Click to Cancel destination-source selection.
Fig. 15-81: Routing Controls
• Select All
• Deselect all.
• Sort A to Z
• Sort Z to A
• Toggle wide button size
• Click to Release selected destination from Lock/Protect.
• Click to Protect selected destination.
• Click to Lock selected destination
Sources Filter box, to limit which sources are shown.
Fig. 15-82: Router Sources Grid Banner Tool Bar Controls
Note: When routing sources to the video wall, typically, such sources are consistently and logically named. (For example, ‘CAM 1’, ‘CAM 2’ etc.)
The filter feature of the X/Y Routing mode can then be used to easily list the source(s) required.
729
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure for ‘X/Y Routing’ to a Video Wall Tile Position
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Procedure for ‘X/Y Routing’ to a Video Wall Tile Position
The procedure broadly operates like an XY routing panel:
• select the destination (where the route is to be made to); and
• then select the source of the route to be made; and
• then there is an optional ‘Take’ step.
To route a source:
1 Select a tile position. (This is the destination of the route to be made.)
Note: Any other tile position that is fed by the same source as the selected tile position is also selected.
2 Select a router (video) source in the sources grid. (This is the source of the route to be made.)
With a destination selected and a source selected, a route is ready to be made. See
Selected tile-grid destination
Selected router source
730
Fig. 15-83: Ready to Make a Router
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Procedure for ‘X/Y Routing’ to a Video Wall Tile Position
3 Click the Take button.
The route is made from the selected source to:
a) the selected tile position (see Figure 15-84); and also to
b) any other tile Position on the video wall that is fed with the same source.
Routed Source shown on tile
Currently-routed source
Fig. 15-84: Routed Result
731
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Route a Source to Multiple Tile Positions
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Route a Source to Multiple Tile Positions
To route router sources to a video wall, in the Project window:
1 Select a tile position.
2 Select further positions with:
• SHIFT-select a range of tile positions; and/or
• CTRL-select to add positions to the selection.
3 Select a router (video) source in the sources grid.
4 Click Take .
The routes are made.
Route Multiple Sources to Multiple Tile Positions
To route router sources to a video wall, in the Project window:
1 Select a tile position.
2 Select further tile positions with:
• SHIFT-select a range of positions; and/or
• CTRL-select to add positions to the selection.
3 Select a router (video) source in the sources grid.
4 Select further sources with:
• SHIFT-select a range of sources; and/or
• CTRL-select to add sources to the selection.
5 Click Take .
The routes are made.
Routing with Dynamic Destination Assignment
If dynamic destination assignment is operating, routing is performed in the same way as
before. See Procedure for ‘X/Y Routing’ to a Video Wall Tile Position , on page 730, etc.
When using dynamic destinations, a live connection (through the MVCMS service) to an MV unit is required, otherwise the tiles will show up without any destinations assigned to them.
Quick Dial Source Routing on the X/Y Routing Screen
Dial Source routing speeds up the selection of a source for routing to a tile.
In X/Y Routing mode:
1 Select a tile on a monitor using the mouse.
Note: Navigation:
• To navigate between tiles on the selected monitor, use the left- and right-arrow cursor keys.
• To select a different monitor, use the mouse.
732
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
2 With a tile selected, start typing a source name.
A filtered list of sources pops up.
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Quick Dial Source Routing on the X/Y Routing Screen
Fig. 15-85: Pop-Up Filtered Sources List
Continue to type in the source name. While characters are entered, source names matching the entered characters are displayed in the pop-up list.
3 To pre-select a source to be routed and make the route (see Figure 15-86), either:
• Use the down- and up-arrow keys to highlight the required source in the filtered list (thus pre-selecting the source).
And then press the Enter key to route the pre-selected source to the selected tile.
or:
• Click on the required source in the filtered list to select it and make the route.
733
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Quick Dial Source Routing on the X/Y Routing Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Currently-routed source to tile
Pre-selected source
Fig. 15-86: Select Source
The route is made. See Figure 15-87.
734
Fig. 15-87: Pre-Selected Source is Routed to the Selected Tile
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Step 5b: Change Layouts in X/Y Routing Mode
Step 5b: Change Layouts in X/Y Routing Mode
X/Y Routing mode has a live connection to the multiviewer cluster (via the MVCMS service) and the stage area shows the video wall layout of the multiviewer devices.
The mode offers the facility to change Room Layouts
(see What is a Monitor Layout?
Monitor Layouts (see
In this section:
•
Select a Room Layout in X/Y Routing Mode
•
Select a Monitor Layout in X/Y Routing Mode
•
:
•
Select a New Current Video Wall Layout
•
X/Y Routing Mode Video Wall Layout vs Room Layout
•
Saving a New Video Wall Layout as a Room Layout
Note: The live selection of Room or Monitor Layouts is only possible in the
X/Y Routing screen of the Room Editor . This is not available in other
Room Editor modes.
Select a Room Layout in X/Y Routing Mode
If there is more than one Room Layout , then a different Room Layout may be selected in the X/Y Routing mode of the Room Editor . This will also change the layout on the physical video wall. Sources may then be routed to this layout, as required.
In X/Y Routing mode in the Room Editor , to select a Room Layout :
1 With no monitor selected, click on the Room Layout icon and select a different layout to show.
The Room Editor screen shows the selected layout and commands are sent to the live video monitor wall to change layouts. The selected Room Layout is then shown on the monitor wall.
Room Layout icon
Fig. 15-88: Select an Alternate Room Layout in X/Y Routing mode in Room Editor
735
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Select a Monitor Layout in X/Y Routing Mode
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: Tile positions in this newly-selected monitor’s layout require more routed sources
Fig. 15-89: Newly-Selected Room Layout
Select a Monitor Layout in X/Y Routing Mode
If there is more than one Monitor Layout for a monitor, then a different Monitor Layout may be selected in the X/Y Routing mode of the Room Editor . This will change the layout on the physical video wall also.
In X/Y Routing mode in the Room Editor , to select a new Monitor Layout :
1 Select a monitor in the X/Y Routing
screen stage area. (See Figure 15-90.)
Select a monitor in the stage area.
Monitor Layout icon
736
Fig. 15-90: Select Alternate Monitor Layout
Select a Monitor Layout.
2 Click on the Monitor Layout icon in the Room Editor tool bar and select the required Monitor Layout
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Layout Change in Dynamic Destination Assignment Mode
The Room Editor screen shows the selected layout and commands are sent to the live video monitor wall to change layouts. The selected Monitor Layout is then shown on
the monitor wall. (See Figure 15-91.)
Fig. 15-91: Selected Alternate Monitor Layout Shown
Layout Change in Dynamic Destination Assignment Mode
Layout changes are made in the same way when Dynamic Destination Assignment is active.
If a layout change results in not enough multiviewer destinations being available to meet the layout’s needs, then this is indicated in the X/Y Routing mode screen in GV Orbit Client and on the video wall with one or more 50%-transparent blue tiles in GV Orbit Client. See
Figure 15-92. The actual video wall will show a black tile area.
737
MV Cluster - Room Editor
Layout Change in Dynamic Destination Assignment Mode
A Monitor layout change
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide a) Selecting another Monitor Layout
738
• Blue coloration to tile indicates that the current overall on-screen layout requires more multiviewer destination than are currently available from the multiviewer.
• A pop-up message reinforces this, explaining that the number of destinations has been exceeded.
b) New Monitor Layout Shows there are not enough free multiviewer destinations
Fig. 15-92: New Layout and Not Enough Free Multiviewer Destinations
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - Room Editor
New Layouts
New Layouts
Room Layouts and Monitor Layouts can be selected when in X/Y Routing mode and the video wall changes accordingly. (See
Select a Room Layout in X/Y Routing Mode , on page 735, and
Select a Monitor Layout in X/Y Routing Mode , on page 736.)
A video wall layout can be adjusted ‘on the fly’ in the X/Y Routing mode of the Room
Editor .
Select a New Current Video Wall Layout
With a Room Layout selected and displayed:
1 Select an alternate Monitor Layout for a monitor, in order to change the on-screen video wall layout.
The resulting new overall video wall layout is shown.
X/Y Routing Mode Video Wall Layout vs Room Layout
The displayed video wall layout is a combination of Monitor Layouts which may, or may not, correspond to an already-saved Room Layout in the ‘Clustered Multiviewer’ project.
If the Monitor Layout combination:
• Does Correspond to a Room Layout :
GV Orbit recognizes this and automatically selects the corresponding Room Layout .
• Does NOT correspond to a Room Layout :
GV Orbit detects this and automatically creates a new, ‘ Untitled* ’ item in the Room
Layout
.
Room Layout icon Monitor Layout icon
New item in Room Layout drop-down menu, ‘ Untitled* ’
Fig. 15-93: ‘Untitled*’ Room Layout
Saving a New Video Wall Layout as a Room Layout
To save a ‘Untitled*’ video wall layout as a Room Layout, with the layout displayed in the stage area:
1 Click the Design Layout icon in the Room Editor to leave the X/Y Routing mode.
A Room Layout Changes dialog asks you if you want to save the layout as a new Room
739
MV Cluster - Room Editor
New Layouts
Layout .
Fig. 15-94: Room Layout Changes Dialog
2 Click Yes .
You are asked and which Room Layout name to use.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 15-95: New Room Layout Name Dialog
3 Enter a new name and click OK .
Note: If the X/Y routing mode screen is returned to in GV Orbit Client, then the X/Y Routing stage will reflect the current video wall layout of the multiviewer devices.
740
Introduction
Lite Professional
Enterprise
TSL tally configuration is integrated and centralized for a ‘Clustered MV’ project.
Configuration is done on a per Room basis and the whole video wall inherits the Tally configuration. This provides the basic Tally settings for the video wall’s graphical, on-screen widgets to use to display Tally status. (For example, a Tally Lamp, Label, or Shape.)
TSL tally protocols supported:
• TSL 3.1 - Basic industry tally standard protocol over UDP.
• TSL 5.0 - Advance industry tally protocol over UDP or TCP.
In GV Orbit Client, TSL tally configuration is carried out from the Room Editor ’s Destination
Assignment mode. Tally configuration includes:
• Selecting TSL protocol to use.
• Optionally customizing Tally names, Tally address level names, and on-screen Tally colors.
• Mapping of TSL addresses and video wall video tiles (multiviewer device logical inputs and their assigned router destinations).
When TSL tally configuration is done, ‘tally-indicating’ graphical widgets in video wall tiles can be configured. This then determines which TSL data packets are indicated by which widgets.
Note: When designing a video wall and using widgets to display Tally status, the Tally configuration provides the basic settings. It is still possible to change local settings on a video wall tile to modify widget behavior and/or appearance on a tile-by-tile basis in GV Orbit Client.
Tally Protocols
Up to four Tally addresses supported per multiviewer input (that is up to four address levels).
The TSL protocols are compared in the table below:
741
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Tally Configuration in Room Editor
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 16-1: Comparing TSL Protocols
Tallies
TSL 3.1
‘Tally 1’ to ‘Tally 4’
TSL Protocol
TSL 5.0
‘Left’, ‘Right’, and ‘Text’
Tally States
Number of Tallies per MV-8 Multiviewer
Video Wall Tile
Address Range
IP data packet protocol used
Two states: On, Off
16
0 to 126
UDP
Four states
12
0 to 65534
UDP or TCP
Tally Configuration in Room Editor
TSL Tally settings for a Room are configured in a Destination Configuration tab which is found in the Destination Assignment mode of the Room Editor .
Note: The Destination Assignments should be all completed in the Room
Editor before for the Tally settings can fully function and map to video wall tiles etc.
(For Destination Assignment
steps, see Chapter 15 Step 4a: Assign
Destinations to Tile Positions , on page 706.)
Open Destination Configuration Tab
1 Open the Room file in the Room Editor and select the Assign Destinations icon in the
Room Editor tool bar.
(Refer to Chapter 15, Step 4a: Assign Destinations to Tile Positions , on page 706 for full
instructions.)
The Room Design is shown in its Assign Destinations
742
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Tally Configuration in Room Editor
Selected Assign Destinations icon
Click on Configure Mapping icon
Room Editor tool bar
Fig. 16-1: Assign Destinations Mode in Room Editor
2 Click on the Configure Mapping icon in the Room Editor tool bar.
A Destination Configuration
tab is opened. See Figure 16-2.
Destination Configuration Tab
TSL button TSL Tally Levels Config columns
Fig. 16-2: Destination Configuration Tab - TSL Tally Levels Config Columns
743
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Assign TSL Tally Addresses to Multiviewer Inputs
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Following a Destination Assignment step in video wall design, the ‘Destinations’ column
is filled out and multiviewer inputs are mapped to video wall tiles. See Chapter 15, Step 4a:
Assign Destinations to Tile Positions , on page 706.
‘Tally’ features of the Destination Configuration tab are:
• TSL Tally Levels Config columns ‘L1’ to ‘L4’:
• Initially the columns are empty.
•
Assign TSL Tally Addresses to Multiviewer Inputs .
•
Customize TSL Tally Address Level Names by renaming columns, if required.
• TSL button in the tool bar. Use the TSL button to:
•
Select TSL 3.1 or 5.0 Tally Protocol
; and
•
Customize Tally Names and On-Screen Colors .
Assign TSL Tally Addresses to Multiviewer Inputs
Assign Addresses
TSL Tally addresses can be assigned for each multiviewer input. Up to four addresses may be assigned (that is up to four address ‘levels’ for a video wall tile).
The TSL Tally Level address mapping defaults to being ‘empty’. Assign TSL addresses to each multiviewer input. Up to four are allowed per input.
Ranges of TSL addresses can be automatically assigned and manually edited/entered as required.
Auto-Assignment
To automatically assign a range of addresses to TSL Tally Levels in the Destination
Configuration tab screen:
1 Select a multiviewer. (See Figure 16-3.)
To select a contiguous range of TSL addresses to fill out:
2 Click in the first TSL Level table cell of the range.
And SHIFT-click in the last cell of the range.
(Further cells may be added to the selection with CTRL-click/SHIFT-click.)
This selects the TSL addresses to be filled out. See Figure 16-3.
744
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select a multiviewer
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Assign Addresses
Auto-Assign TSL Addresses button
Select
CTRL-Select
Fig. 16-3: Destination Configuration Tab - TSL Tally Level Config Columns
3 Click on the Auto-Assign TSL Addresses button
and enter a start TSL address in the pop-up dialog. (See Figure 16-4.)
4 Click OK .
Selected range
745
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Assign Addresses
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Select
CTRL-Select
746
Selected range a) Enter start address to fill from.
Fig. 16-4: TSL Address Range Filled Out b) Filled out TSL addresses.
The selected TSL addresses cells are filled out from the entered start address.
This has quickly assigned some TSL addresses.
5 Repeat this to assign up to four addresses (columns ‘L1’ to ‘L4’) per multiviewer input, using the four columns.
Then:
6 Repeat for each multiviewer.
And finally:
7 Click Save File .
This has quickly assigned TSL addresses for each multiviewer input.
Note: Checking and Auto-Assigned TSL Tally Addresses:
The addresses added during auto-assignment are checked and an error message pops up to alert you that the address is already in use.
It is possible to manually enter addresses or to edit addresses, see
.
Manual Assignment
To assign addresses to TSL Tally Levels :
1 Select a multiviewer.
2 Click in a TSL Level column row item and enter a TSL address.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Customize TSL Tally Address Level Names
3 Press the Down-arrow key to go on to the next row in the column.
Enter another address. Etc.
4 Repeat for all multiviewer inputs.
Select multiviewer
Fig. 16-5: Destination Configuration Tab - TSL Tally Level Config Columns
5 Press Return when done to exit the address level column.
CAUTION Unlike auto-addressing, there is no check on entered addresses when manually editing the addresses.
Note: TSL addresses can be duplicated, if required, by using manual entry of
TSL addresses.
6
When four addresses (columns ‘L1’ to ‘L4’) have been assigned for each multiviewer, finally:
7 Click Save File .
This has assigned TSL addresses for each multiviewer input.
Customize TSL Tally Address Level Names
Fig. 16-6: Customized Tally Address Level Names
747
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Customize TSL Tally Address Level Names
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
TSL Tally address level names can be customized, which is useful when assigning Tallies to on-screen Tally indicators such as Tally Lamps or UMDs.
Procedure
To rename a Tally address Level across the whole Room :
1 Click on the ‘Tally Level’ column heading in the Destination Configuration tab.
A Header dialog is shown.
Click on ‘Tally Level’ column heading
Fig. 16-7: Customize Tally Address Level Name
2 Enter a new name for the address level and click OK .
The new address level name is used for the Room Design and appears in the column header and persists for all multiviewers used by the Room
748
Fig. 16-8: New Address Level Name Persists for Other Multiviewers in the Room
3 Click Save File .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
TSL Tally Configuration for a Room
TSL Tally Configuration for a Room
The TSL tally settings assigned here will be assigned to the video wall tiles for the Room and will be available to on-screen, graphical, tally-indicating widgets (such as Lamps,
Labels, Shapes, UMDs).
Configuration is done the Destination Configuration tab in the Room Editor .
Configuration items:
•
Select TSL 3.1 or 5.0 Tally Protocol
•
Customize Tally Names and On-Screen Colors
•
•
Select TSL 3.1 or 5.0 Tally Protocol
To select the TSL Tally protocol to be used in the Room Design :
1 Click on TSL icon in the Room Editor tool bar.
Fig. 16-9: TSL Icon
A TSL Configuration dialog is shown.
a) TSL 3.1 Dialog b) TSL 5.0 Dialog
Fig. 16-10: TSL Configuration Dialogs: a) TSL 3.1 Selected; b) TSL 5.0 Selected.
2 Select TSL 3.1
or TSL 5.0
.
3 Click Apply .
This has selected the TSL Tally protocol to be used in the Room .
749
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Customize Tally Names and On-Screen Colors
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Note: Dynamic selection of Tally protocol on MV-8 multiviewer devices:
The Tally protocol is usually selected once in a project and then does not change.
The dynamic selection of the Tally protocol in a project will be supported in MV-8 multiviewer software version v4 onwards.
CAUTION Typically the TSL Tally protocol is set once.
If, however, the setting is changed between protocols, it is recommended that all the Tally assignments that have been made are re-checked.
TSL Protocols
• TSL 3.1
There are four Tallies ( Tally 1 to Tally 4 ) and each has an associated Tally color.
There are colors for graphical on-screen Tally Lamp widgets and for Shape widgets.
• TSL 5.0
There are four Tally states ( State 1 to State 4 ) and each has an associated ‘Left-Tally’,
‘Right-Tally’, and ‘Tally Text’. And, in turn, each has associated on-screen colors.
The protocols are compared in
Customize Tally Names and On-Screen Colors
The names of each tally and the on-screen colors used can be customized in the TSL
Configuration dialog. A customized Tally name can help to identify it when assigning tallies to on-screen graphical widgets (Tally Lamps etc.) in the video wall design steps.
Customizations:
•
•
•
•
•
TSL 5.0 Tally Lamp State Color
•
TSL 5.0 Shape Fill State Color
•
Show TSL Configuration Dialog
To show the TSL Configuration dialog:
• Click on the TSL icon in the Room Editor tool bar.
The TSL Configuration dialog is shown. (See
750
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
TSL 3.1 Customizing
TSL 3.1 Customizing
TSL 3.1 Tally Name
In the TSL 3.1 TSL Configuration dialog:
1 Click on a Tally name.
2 Enter a new name and Click OK .
The new tally name is shown.
3 Click Apply .
Fig. 16-11: Customize TSL 3.1 Tally Name
751
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
TSL 3.1 Customizing
TSL 3.1 Tally Lamp Color
Three standard colors are available (
In the TSL 3.1 TSL Configuration dialog:
).
1 Click on a Lamp color.
2 Select a new color.
The new color is shown.
3 Click Apply .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 16-12: Customize TSL 3.1 Tally Lamp Color
752
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
TSL 3.1 Customizing
TSL 3.1 Shape Fill Color
For an on-screen shape, four standard colors are available ( ) to be used as the shape fill color. Alternatively, a custom color may be picked to allow custom colors to be used.
In the TSL 3.1 TSL Configuration dialog:
Preset colors
Select Color dialog
1 Click on a Shape color.
A small color selector menu pops up.
2 Select a new color:
Select a preset color, or select the Color Picker icon to show the Select Color dialog, then select a color and click OK .
The new color is shown.
3 Click Apply .
Fig. 16-13: Customize TSL 3.1 Tally Shape Fill Color
753
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
TSL 5.0 Customizing
TSL 5.0 Customizing
TSL 5.0 Tally Name
(The procedure for TSL 5.0 is similar to TSL 3.1 Tally Name , on page 751.)
In the TSL 5.0 TSL Configuration dialog:
1 Click on a Tally name (‘Left Tally’, or ‘Text Tally’, or ‘Right Tally’).
2 Enter a new name and Click OK .
The new name is shown.
3 Click Apply .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 16-14: Customized TSL 5.0 Tally Names
TSL 5.0 Tally Lamp State Color
(The procedure for TSL 5.0 is similar to TSL 3.1 Tally Lamp Color , on page 752.)
In the TSL 5.0 TSL Configuration dialog:
1 Click on a Lamp state color.
2 Select a new color.
The new color is shown.
3 Click Apply .
754
Fig. 16-15: Customizes TSL 5.0 Tally Lamp State Colors
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
TSL 5.0 Customizing
TSL 5.0 Shape Fill State Color
(The procedure for TSL 5.0 is similar to TSL 3.1 Shape Fill Color , on page 753.)
In the TSL 5.0 TSL Configuration dialog:
1 Click on a Shape state color.
2 Select a new color to be used for the shape’s fill color.
Or, if the color picker icon is selected, the Select Color dialog is shown.
Select a color and click OK .
The new color is shown.
3 Click Apply .
Fig. 16-16: Customized TSL 5.0 Tally Shape State Colors
TSL 5.0 Text Tally Font Color
(The procedure for TSL 5.0 is similar to TSL 3.1 Shape Fill Color , on page 753.)
In the TSL 5.0 TSL Configuration dialog:
1 Click on a Text Tally state color.
2 Select a new color.
Or, if the color picker icon is selected, the Select Color dialog is shown.
Select a color and click OK .
The new color is shown.
3 Click Apply .
Fig. 16-17: Customized TSL 5.0 Text Tally Font Colors
755
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Configuring On-Screen Widgets
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Configuring On-Screen Widgets
With each multiviewer input configured for TSL Tallies, graphical widgets on video tiles can be configured. The widget editing is done when editing a Custom Tile in the Tile Editor .
Note: Typically for a video wall, a few particular ‘template’ video tile designs are used throughout. In GV Orbit Client, you can design custom video tiles for use on video walls ( Custom Tiles ).
Open a Custom Tile in the Tile Editor
Open an Existing Custom Tile:
To open a Custom Tile in the Tile Editor :
Either:
• Expand the project in the Project window and in the ‘Tiles’ folder, double-click on the
Custom Tile name. The tile is opened in the editor.
Or:
• Open the video wall double-click on the Custom Tile . The tile is opened in the editor.
Create a New Custom Tile
New Empty Custom Tile
A Custom Tile may be created from scratch, if required:
• Expand the project in the Project window and right-click on the ‘Tiles’ folder and select
‘New’. Then select the tile type. A new tile is opened in the editor.
Quick Custom Tile
Alternatively, a new Custom Tile can be created quickly from an existing video auto-tile by double-clicking on a video tile to copy it and open it in the Tile Editor .
To quickly create a new Custom Tile :
1 Double-click on a video tile in the video wall.
The Create Custom Tile dialog is shown.
756
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Open a Custom Tile in the Tile Editor
Fig. 16-18: Create Custom Tile
2 Enter a name for the Custom Tile and click OK .
The selected tile is copied and opened in the Tile Editor
Custom Tile tab
Widget palette
Fig. 16-19: Custom Tile in Tile Editor
757
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
TSL Tally Configuring Widgets
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
TSL Tally Configuring Widgets
Certain graphical widgets can be used on video wall tiles to display Tally information. The
TSL Tally configuration of a widget comprises specifying what Tally data is to drive the widget. Widgets include:
•
•
•
Tally Lamp Widget
Open a Custom Tile in the Tile Editor .
If a Tally Lamp widget needs to be added, then:
1 Click on the Tally Lamp icon in the Widget Palette and drop on a Tally Lamp widget.
repeat for a second one if required. See Figure 16-20.
Drop widget onto tile stage area.
Click on Tally Lamp widget icon in the Widget palette, then drop a widget onto the
Tile stage area.
Fig. 16-20: Added Tally Lamp Widget(s)
Configure the widget tallies:
2 Right-click on a Tally Lamp widget and select ‘Tally Configuration’.
A Tally Configuration
dialog is shown, either for TSL 3.1 (see Figure 16-21a) or for TSL
758
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
TSL Tally Configuring Widgets a) TSL 3.1 Widget Tally Configuration b) TSL 3.1 Widget Tally Configuration
Fig. 16-21: Tally Lamp Widget Tally Configuration Dialogs: a) TSL 3.1; b) TSL 5.0
3 In the dialog, select the Tally Status and Address level, or Tally Position and Address level for the widget for TSL 3.1 or 5.0 respectively.
4 Click Apply .
This configures the TSL settings for the widget.
• Configure each Tally Lamp widget on the tile.
With the tallies up for the widget in the Room , the following will determine which TSL data packet controls the Tally Lamp’s color:
• the widget’s Tally Configuration setting (above);
• the video tile position on the video wall; and
• the TSL address mapping set up in the Destination Configuration tab.
Label Widget (Font Color)
A Label widget can have its font color controlled by TSL messages. The widget tally
configuration is done in a similar way to the Tally Lamp Widget
.
759
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Tally Border Video Tile Example
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 16-22: Label Widget
Shape Widget (Fill Color)
A Shape widget (for example, a Rectangle) can have its fill color controlled by TSL messages. The widget tally configuration is also done in a similar way to the
Tally Lamp widget
Label widget
Rectangle shape widget.
Fig. 16-23: Shape Widget
Tally Border Video Tile Example
This example forms a video tile with a customizable colored border which is bound to a TSL tally message.
Assumptions
• A Room has been created.
• Monitors have been arranged to form a video wall.
• Monitors have been assigned to multiviewer outputs.
• A layout has been designed for the video wall.
• Destinations have been assigned to multiviewer inputs and to video wall tiles
TSL address mapping has been done in the Destination Configuration tab in the
Destination Assignment mode of the Room Editor .
760
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Create a Starter Custom Tile
Create a Starter Custom Tile
A custom video tile can be created quickly to start with in GV Orbit Client:
1 Double-click on a video tile in the video wall.
The Create Custom Tile dialog is shown.
2 Enter a name for the Custom Tile and click OK .
The selected video tile is copied and opened in the Tile Editor .
Fig. 16-24: Starter Custom Tile
Tile Size:
3 Click off the Tile but in the Tile Editor
The Tile’s Width and Height are shown in the Properties box.
761
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Add a Border Tally
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Click off the Tile, but on the Tile Editor stage area.
Fig. 16-25: Tile Size in Properties
In the example in Figure 16-25, the
Custom Tile ’s dimensions are:
• width = 910 pixels
• height = 503 pixels.
Add a Border Tally
A border Tally may be added to the Custom Tile by:
• slightly resizing the Video widget and centering it on the Tile;
• adding a Rectangle shape widget;
• setting the shape to be the same size as the Tile itself;
• placing the shape behind the Video widget; and
• configuring the TSL settings for the Rectangle shape
(that is, which TSL data packets will drive the shape fill color).
Procedure Example
For this example, to add a 15 pixel wide TSL Tally border:
Resize and re-position Video widget:
1 Select the Video widget.
2 Change the Properties:
• ‘Dimensions > Position > X’ = 15.
• ‘Dimensions > Position > Y’ = 15.
• ‘Dimensions > Size > Width’ = 880. (880 = 910 - 2x15)
• ‘Dimensions > Size > Height’ = 473. (473= 503 - 2x15)
This reduces the widget size and centers the widget on the Tile, adding a 15 pixel
762
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide margin around the sides.
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Add a Border Tally
Video widget resized and centered.
Fig. 16-26: Video Widget Size/Position Properties
Add border shape:
3 Click on the Rectangle shape icon in the Widget Palette.
Click Rectangle shape widget icon
Fig. 16-27: Rectangle Shape Widget Icon in Widget Palette
4 Add a Rectangle shape widget to the tile.
5 Select the shape and change its position/size properties:
• ‘Dimensions > Position > X’ = 0.
• ‘Dimensions > Position > Y’ = 0.
• ‘Dimensions > Size > Width’ = 910. (910 is the Tile width.)
• ‘Dimensions > Size > Height’ = 503. (503 is the Tile height.)
• ‘Extended Style > Border > Border Thickness’ = 0.
6 Right-click on the Rectangle shape widget and select ‘Tally Configuration’.
7 Set up the widget’s Tally settings (so as to control the shape’s Fill color).
8 With the shape still selected, click the Move to Back icon in the main tool bar.
763
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Add a Border Tally
Click Move to Back icon
Fig. 16-28: Move Selected Object to Back
The Rectangle shape moves to be behind the Video widget.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
764
Rectangle shape widget is behind the Video widget
Fig. 16-29: Video Widget Size/Position Properties
9 Click Save File .
Add more Tally widgets:
If required, further tally-indicating widgets may be added:
10 Add two Tally Lamp s.
11 Right-click on each widget and set up the widget Tally settings.
12 Add a Label widget.
13 Right-click on the widget and set up the widget settings (to control the Label text’s font color).
14 Click Save File .
The Custom Tile has been prepared.
Deploy Tile
The tile may already be present on the video wall in the Room Design . In this case, the new
Custom Tile will be seen in the Room Editor . Otherwise, the tile may be added to the
Room ’s video wall in the Room Editor in its Design Layout
mode. (See Chapter 15, Step 3a:
Design Layout - Assign Tile Grid Layouts to a Video Wall , on page 688.)
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Add a Border Tally
Fig. 16-30: Deployed Custom Tile Example
765
MV Cluster - TSL Tally Configuration
Add a Border Tally
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
766
Introduction
Audio meters are implemented on video wall tiles with graphical Audio Bars widgets, which require configuring for the audio channels they will monitor.
Widgets are configured from the Tile Editor by selecting them and editing their properties in the Properties box. For an Audio Bars widget on a Custom Tile , its audio channel configuration may be set up quickly via a pop-up menu.
Note: Typically for a video wall, a few particular ‘template’ video tile designs are used throughout. In GV Orbit Client, you can design custom video tiles for use on video walls ( Custom Tiles ).
Audio Bars Widget Configuration
The Audio Bars widget may be set up by selecting the widget in the Tile Editor and modifying properties in the Properties
767
Audio Bars Configuration
Audio Bars Widget Audio Channels
Selected Audio Bars widget
Properties box
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 17-1: Audio Bars Widget Properties
The setting up of which audio channels are being monitored by the widget is done in a pop-up menu, see
Audio Bars Widget Audio Channels
.
Audio Bars Widget Audio Channels
An Audio Bars widget shows one or more bars of audio data from specified audio channels. This ‘bars’ configuration is set up in a dialog which is accessible from a right-click in the Tile Editor .
768
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Audio Bars Configuration
Open Audio Configuration Dialog
Open Audio Configuration Dialog
Note: Audio Configuration and MV-8 Multiviewer Software Version:
The Audio Configuration dialog feature will be supported in MV-8 multiviewer software version v4 onwards.
For an Audio Bars widget on a Custom Tile its audio bars configuration can be quickly set up:
1 Select the Audio Bars widget in the Tile Editor .
2 Right-click on the widget and select ‘Audio Configuration’ in the pop-up menu. (See
Right-click on selected Audio Bars Properties box
Fig. 17-2: Right-Click on Audio Bars Widget
The Audio Configuration dialog is shown.
769
Audio Bars Configuration
Open Audio Configuration Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The dialog is described in
Audio Configuration Dialog - PCM Audio Bars Configuration , on page 771.
3 To set up the audio bars configuration, see instructions in:
•
Audio Configuration Dialog - PCM Audio Bars Configuration , on page 771; or in
•
Audio Configuration Dialog - DolbyE Audio Bars Configuration , on page 773.
4 When the audio bar configuration is done, click Apply .
The Audio Bars widget on the Custom Tile now shows the number of audio bars set up.
770
Fig. 17-3: Example 6-Bar Audio Bars Widget
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Audio Bars Configuration
Audio Configuration Dialog - PCM Audio Bars Configuration
Fig. 17-4: Example Audio Monitoring with Audio Bars Widget
CAUTION Ballistics and MV-8 Series Multiviewer Devices:
For MV-8 Series multiviewers, each multiviewer device has a global audio data ballistics setting.
All audio metering data generated by the device uses this one global ballistics setting.
A device’s global ballistics setting is found:
• For a non-clustered multiviewer -
See the GV Orbit Client main menu
‘Multiviewer > Input Audio > Meter’ item
‘Meter Type’ setting.
• For a clustered multiviewer -
See the device’s control screen (RollCall template).
Audio Configuration Dialog - PCM Audio Bars Configuration
The dialog has a ‘PCM’ or a ‘DolbyE’ mode (see Figure 17-5 and Figure 17-6 respectively)
and permits the configuration of up to 8 audio bars in the Audio Bars widget.
771
Audio Bars Configuration
Audio Configuration Dialog - PCM Audio Bars Configuration
Audio Bar enable
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
PCM / DolbyE selection
(Mono) Audio channel selection for display on the audio bar
772
Fig. 17-5: Audio Bars Configuration Dialog PCM Selected)
Bar Configuration
To configure audio bars for monitoring PCM audio channels:
1 Select PCM in the Audio Configuration dialog.
2 Enable the number of audio bars required.
Note: These must be contiguous in the dialog, starting with ‘Bar 1’.
Tip: For example, to enable six bars:
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Audio Bars Configuration
Audio Configuration Dialog - DolbyE Audio Bars Configuration
• Simply enable ‘Bar 6’.
Bars 1 to 5 are enabled automatically.
Note: As bars are enabled, the (mono) audio channel selection increments automatically.
For each enabled bar:
3 Select a mono audio channel (if the automatically selected channel is not what is required). There are 32 mono audio channels to choose from.
4 Repeat the above for each enabled bar.
5 Click Apply .
The Audio Bars widget shows the new number of audio bars in the Tile Editor .
Audio Configuration Dialog - DolbyE Audio Bars Configuration
The dialog has a ‘PCM’ or a ‘DolbyE’ mode (see Figure 17-5 and Figure 17-6 respectively)
and permits the configuration of up to 8 audio bars in the Audio Bars widget.
773
Audio Bars Configuration
Audio Configuration Dialog - DolbyE Audio Bars Configuration
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Audio Bar enable
PCM /
Channel-pair selection
DolbyE selection
(Mono) Audio channel selection for display on the audio bar
774
Fig. 17-6: Audio Bars Configuration Dialog (DolbyE Selected)
Bar Configuration
To configure audio bars for monitoring DolbyE audio channels:
1 Select DolbyE in the Audio Configuration dialog.
2 Enable the number of audio bars required.
Note: These must be contiguous in the dialog, starting with ‘Bar 1’.
Tip: For example, to enable six bars:
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Audio Bars Configuration
Audio Configuration Dialog - DolbyE Audio Bars Configuration
• Simply enable ‘Bar 6’.
Bars 1 to 5 are enabled automatically.
Note: As bars are enabled, the (mono) audio channel selection increments automatically.
For each enabled bar:
3 Select a channel-pair to use (if the automatically selected channel-pair is not what is required). There are 16 channel-pairs to choose from.
4 Select a mono audio channel (if the automatically selected channel is not what is required). There are 8 audio channels to choose from (decoded from the DolbyE data in the selected channel-pair).
5 Repeat the above for each enabled bar.
6 Click Apply .
The Audio Bars widget shows the new number of audio bars in the Tile Editor .
775
Audio Bars Configuration
Audio Configuration Dialog - DolbyE Audio Bars Configuration
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
776
Introduction
GV Orbit is a dynamic system orchestrator tool. One of its many features is that it can configure, control and monitor signal routing in a GV Orbit IP routing system: It is the
GV Orbit Control application that handles routing. GV Orbit Client is used to enter and manage the configuration settings of IP endpoints of devices for the IP routing system. This
‘IP configuration’ uses the IP Configuration tool within GV Orbit Client.
The IP Configuration tool automatically discovers all GVOP-supporting devices in a
GV Orbit system which are on a GVOP domain, connected to the network and up-andrunning. The resulting list of discovered devices is presented to you. The tool allows you to configure IP settings for the devices ready for IP routing. Settings include:
• device name, device short name, and network host name;
• multicast group IP address settings;
• spigot names and port numbers; and
• IP flow enabling from spigots on a device etc.
GV Orbit Client provides the IP Configuration information to the GV Orbit system, and in particular it is automatically passed to the router controller application, GV Orbit Control.
The information is automatically used as the basis for IP device and spigot naming etc. for the routing topology that GV Orbit Control controls.
More than one IP routing system can be ‘IP-configured’ with GV Orbit Client in the same
GV Orbit project.
Note: The IP Configuration tool currently supports all endpoint devices that support GVOP, the GV Orchestration Protocol.
Spreadsheet Import
IP routing configuration information can be added manually into the IP Configuration tool or, more practically, it can be imported from a spreadsheet. The spreadsheet import/export facility provides a quick and convenient way of defining and saving IP endpoint settings, automating data entry and saving system settings.
Some validation of the data in the spreadsheet is performed automatically, checking for duplicate entries.
Certain IP addresses are reserved by GV Orbit Control and cannot be used. Refer to the
Release Notes for more information. See Related Documentation , on page 19.
IP routing devices in the system are either sources of or destinations for IP streams, or both.
Data validation is carried out at import and status reporting on the devices and their IP streams is provided in the IP Configuration tool.
777
IP Configuration
Manual Edits
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Manual Edits
IP routing configuration information can be edited manually in the IP Configuration tool.
Some validation of each new manual entry is performed automatically, checking for duplicate entries.
IP Configuration Tool
The IP Configuration tool in GV Orbit Client enables fast, easy and reliable configuration of
IP routing device parameters for use in a GV Orbit system. In this way, configurations are entered by you and then used by GV Orbit applications – for example by GV Orbit Control for the system routing.
Such parameters are editable in GV Orbit Client only.
What the IP Configuration Tool Does Do...
IP Configuration tool is used to:
• Assign device and spigot names.
• Configure all IP flows sourced by the devices.
• Assign (traditional) router port numbers to the spigots used by the flows. (Source spigots and destination spigots.)
• Set (traditional) router port numbers and names.
Once a source flow within a Grass Valley device has been configured with multicast parameters, it starts to send IP flow data to the IP network switch.
Note: GV Orbit Client talks to devices while carrying out its configuring and monitoring.
GV Orbit Client IP Configuration tool does do the following:
• Discovers devices of an IP network system which use the same GVOP domain.
• Enables the setting up of IP routing device parameters, including for A and B redundant network fabrics.
• Sets up ‘traditional’ router port assignments.
• Provides the IP configuration information to the GV Orbit system, and in particular to its router controller application, GV Orbit Control.
What the IP Configuration Tool Does Not Do...
GV Orbit Client IP Configuration tool does NOT do the following:
• Does not configure network settings etc. on the devices themselves (such as: device IP addresses or VLAN information). This must be done when setting up each device.
• Does not know about any IP network topology nor about physical networks.
IP Configuration Tool and IP Router Operation
Once the IP Configuration is made, the information is passed to the GV Orbit system and then routing can be done in the usual way.
778
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
GV Orbit Control
While the IP router is operating and continues to operate:
• GV Orbit Client may be run with the IP Configuration screen open.
• The GV Orbit project may be closed.
• GV Orbit Client may be closed.
• If the PC hosting the GV Orbit Client is running no other Grass Valley applications, then it too may be shut down (and disconnected from the network).
If GV Orbit Client is re-started and the GV Orbit project is re-opened, then GV Orbit Client will auto-discover the devices and gather all the information it needs. GV Orbit Client will present all of the IP Routing project screens as usual, listing discovered devices and with IP configuration details filled out.
GV Orbit Control
The GV Orbit Control part of a GV Orbit system uses information from GV Orbit Client: It automatically and dynamically generates Logical sources and destinations from the IP
Configuration information.
Note: Parameter values from the IP Configuration tool are use in GV Orbit
Control but are not editable in GV Orbit Control; they are shown ‘grayedout’ in GV Orbit Control screens.
For more information on GV Orbit Control, refer to the GV Orbit Control User Guide , see
Related Documentation , on page 19.
Recommend: Ensure GV Orbit Control is running in the GV Orbit system while the IP Configuration tool is being used and while any whole configuration IP end point records are deleted.
Devices that Support GVOP
Devices that support GVOP include:
• IQ-UCP - Universal Compute Processor,
• IQ-MIX - 3G/HD/SD-SDI Multi-channel IP Transceiver,
• IQ-AMD - Multi-channel MADI to IP Interface
• Audio Live - Audio Router for Multi-stream IP Audio Processing.
• IPVU - IP-to-HDMI Monitoring Gateway,
• MV-821 - Multiviewer.
More than One IP Configuration
It is possible to have more than one IP Configuration in a GV Orbit project.
More than one IP routing system can be ‘IP-configured’ in the same GV Orbit project by specifying a different GVOP domain and creating a GV Orbit IP Configuration (.net file) for each IP routing system.
779
IP Configuration
IP Routing Networks and the IP Configuration Tool
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Each IP Configuration must connect to different devices. An IP Configuration deals with devices that it can discover. Devices can be segregated by either:
• Devices being on separate IP networks.
(Requires two separate IP networks and GV Orbit Client’s host PC to have separate network connection to each IP network.)
• Devices being on separate GVOP Domains.
(This may use one IP network. It requires devices to be set up to be in one of two GVOP domains.)
Then create a new IP Configuration .net file for use with each other IP routing system. (See
Create a New IP Configuration .)
IP Routing Networks and the IP Configuration Tool
This section presents some aspects of IP routing systems which are encountered in the IP
Configuration tool screens.
IP Routing Redundancy - Fabric A and Fabric B
GV Orbit supports network redundancy. Two independent IP networks may be used for routing redundancy. These two media networks are referred to as ‘fabric A’ and ‘fabric B’.
Within a device, a source flow is split into identical source flows, A and B. These are sent from the same source spigot and onto different networks (fabrics A and B). The flows travel independently through their respective networks. Both flow A and flow B arrive at the destination spigot of the destination device. The original IP signal is then re-formed from the data packets from fabric A or fabric B.
Devices must connect to both fabrics and GV Orbit Client must also connect to both fabrics.
Device Control Networks
Devices typically have one or more media network connections (for example, A and B redundant) and possibly a control network connection.
Devices may be controlled either in-band or out-of-band:
• In-band - This means control is done over the media network(s).
• Out-of-band - This means there is a separate control network.
)
Note: It is possible for a device to be controllable but to have no connection to media network(s).
Switching at Destination
A traditional router switches source signals going to a destination. A Grass Valley IP routing system can do the same. In a Grass Valley IP routing system, switching is done at the destination spigot . This means that switching can be asynchronous to the underlying network fabric and the network system does not have to be media-aware.
780
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
In This Chapter ...
Switching is done from a current IP flow to a new IP flow in a ‘Break before Make’ or in a
‘Make before Break’ way:
• Break before Make (BbM): The current IP flow is dropped and then a connection is made to a new IP flow.
• Make before Break (MbB): While connection to a new IP flow is being made, extra connection bandwidth is momentarily required. The current IP flow is then dropped once the new connection is made.
Note: For each device, ‘Break before Make’ or ‘Make before Break’ is set up on a ‘per destination spigot’ basis as part of the set up of each device ; this is not set up in GV Orbit Client.
Grass Valley IP devices derive timing information from the IP network for switching between signals. For example, switching is done on video frame boundaries and a Grass
Valley device’s destination spigot will switch and can provide a continuous video signal input to the device:
• BbM : continuous signal achieved with “repeat current video frame”.
• MbB : video simply cuts seamlessly from the current to a new video signal.
In This Chapter ...
In the remaining part of this chapter, the steps required to get started with an IP
Configuration are outlined.
•
Open the IP Configuration Tool , on page 784.
•
IP Configuration Tool Screen , on page 788.
Importing data from a spreadsheet is described in:
•
Import Preview Dialog and Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan Dialog , on page 793; and
•
Getting Started with Spreadsheet Import , on page 808.
The ability to over-ride some import checking and keep duplicate port names (GV Orbit
Control mnemonics) is described in Allowing Duplicate Port Names on Import , on page 806.
Additionally, if a further IP Configuration
Create a New IP Configuration
A Control and Monitoring GV Orbit project (C&M project) has an existing default IP
Configuration (default.net) that may be used.
If more than one IP Configuration is required in a project, then one or more further, new IP
Configuration(s) can be created, as required, from the Project window in GV Orbit Client.
They are created as separate .net file(s) in the project.
A second IP configuration would need to be set up to look at a different set of devices, typically on a different GVOP domain.
To create a new IP Configuration file:
781
IP Configuration
Create a New IP Configuration
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
1 In the Project window, expand the item for the currently-open project.
User Guide
Fig. 18-1: New Network
2 Right-click on the ‘networks’ sub-folder item and select ‘New Network’.
The New Network File dialog is shown.
782
Fig. 18-2: New Network File Dialog
3 Enter a name for the new IP Configuration and click OK .
A new IP Configuration .net file is created in the Project window in the ‘networks’ sub-
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide folder and is opened in the main screen area.
IP Configuration
Create a New IP Configuration
New IP Configuration in the Project window and also open in GV Orbit Client
Fig. 18-3: New IP Configuration
Fig. 18-4: New IP Configuration Open in GV Orbit Client
4 Configure the IP Configuration by clicking on the Comms Setup button in the
Properties box. See instructions in IP Configuration Tool Comms Setup , on page 786.
Setup the IP Configuration up to look for devices on a different GVOP domain and/or on a different network.
783
IP Configuration
Open the IP Configuration Tool
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Open the IP Configuration Tool
Prerequisites
Before performing IP Configuration , the following are required:
• A GV Orbit system.
• Each device must be configured with basic settings (such as valid IP addresses and subnets, and on the same GVOP domain).
Note: Each device must be set up independently of GV Orbit Client via its usual control screen; it is set up as part of the configuration step for each device and also includes IP addresses for each of the device’s IP network ports. (Refer to the specific documentation for each device for this setting up.)
• Each device must be powered on and connected to all the network(s) (that is to one or more media networks, and/or to a control network).
• GV Orbit Client running on a client PC with a Control and Monitoring GV Orbit project opened.
• A list of required configuration settings - multicast IP addresses, device names, spigot names etc. in a spreadsheet format for importing.
Note: The default GVOP domain ID number is 101.
For a newly-created network, if there are any devices present on the default domain, then they will be shown in the ‘Devices’ tab.
Procedure
In a configuration and monitoring project (C&M project) that is already set up on a GV Orbit system, to open the IP Configuration tool:
1 View the Routing Workflow screen.
2 Click on the ‘IP Configuration and Spreadsheet Import’ icon. See Figure 18-5.
An IP Configuration tab is opened. For a new project, the default tab name is
‘default.net’. See Figure 18-6.
The IP Configuration tool requires setting up, see
IP Configuration Tool Comms Setup ,
784
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Procedure
Fig. 18-5: IP Configuration and Spreadsheet Import Icon in the Routing Workflow Screen
Project name in the Project window
IP Configuration name in
Project window and on main tab
Devices tab
IP Configuration tool editor screen main area
Properties box
Comms Setup button
Fig. 18-6: IP Configuration Editor Screen
785
IP Configuration
Procedure
IP Configuration Tool Comms Setup
To initially set up the IP Configuration tool:
1 Click the Comms Setup button.
The Comms Setup dialog is shown.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
786
Fig. 18-7: Comms Setup Dialog
2 In the Comms Setup dialog: a) IP Routing Domain - The default IP Routing GVOP Domain for a GV Orbit system is
‘101’ and should not need to be changed here if there is only one IP Configuration .
b) Routing System - The selected routing controller type should be ‘GV Orbit Control’
(‘GVOC’).
This selects to work with the router controller of the GV Orbit system.
c) GVOC Domain - The default GVOC Domain for a GV Orbit system is ‘105’ and should not need to be changed here.
d) IP interfaces - Select the client PC network IP interfaces for the IP Configuration tool to use.
This will depend on the network connections that the PC has.
For example, in order for the IP Configuration tool to discover all devices on a
GVOP Domain, the client PC may need connections to:
– both media network interfaces (A and B, for in-band control); and
– the system’s control network (for out-of-band control).
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Procedure
These PC interfaces need to be selected.
IMPORTANT Do not enable more than four network interfaces.
3 Click OK .
GV Orbit Client will discover IP End-points on devices and list them in the main screen
787
IP Configuration
IP Configuration Tool Screen
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 18-8: Listed Discovered Devices
In the main screen area:
4 Click on the Devices tab, if it is not already shown, to see the listed devices. See also
Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import , on page 75.
5 Verify that all devices are shown listed in the Devices tab.
The IP Configuration tool is ready.
IP Configuration Tool Screen
The IP Configuration tool comprises several tabbed screens and a Properties box.
For a description of each tab in the IP Configuration tool screen and the Properties box, refer to the Orbit for IP Routing user manual.
Tabs Properties box
Main Area
Fig. 18-9: IP Configuration Tool Screen
IP Configuration Tabs
The IP Configuration tool tabs are presented from left to right in the order in which they are used when configuring an IP routing network system: configuration of and information about devices, spigots, flows, and router ports; and status and log information.
Table 1: IP Configuration Tool Tabs
IP Configuration Tool Tab
Devices
Shows discovered devices.
Description
788
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Columns
Table 1: IP Configuration Tool Tabs
IP Configuration Tool Tab
Spigots
Connects spigots to router ports.
Description
Src Flows
Dst Flows
Assigns multicast groups to source flows.
Assigns destination flows to multicast IP streams.
Router Src Ports
Router Dst Ports
Summarizes the router source ports.
Summarizes the router destination ports.
Presents local link device information.
Routing Status
Bandwidth Status
Log
Graphical presentation of routing.
Graphical presentation of device bandwidth usage.
Shows log messages.
For a description of each tab in the IP Configuration tool screen and the Properties box, refer to the Orbit for IP Routing user manual.
Columns
Sort Columns
In tables in the tabs, click on column headings to toggle sorting of row entries alphabetically in ascending or descending order (that is, A-to-Z or Z-to-A).
789
IP Configuration
Columns
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Expand/Collapse Rows
Individual Row Items
Some table rows may be individually expanded and collapsed by clicking on the small
triangular icon at the left hand side of each row. See Figure 18-10.
a) Collapsed Row Item
Click the small triangle to expand the row item.
Click the small triangle to collapse the row item.
b) Expanded Row Item
Fig. 18-10: Expand/Collapse Individual Row Items
790
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Columns
All Row Items
To expand or collapse all rows, use the Expand All and Collapse All
• Click to collapse rows.
• Click to expand to one level.
• Click to expand to all levels.
a) Expand/Collapse Controls b) Collapsed c) Expanded to One Level d) Expanded to All Levels
Fig. 18-11: Expanding/Collapsing All Row Items
791
IP Configuration
Editable Cells
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Editable Cells
Many of the tabs in the IP Configuration tool have similar features. Several tabs permit manual editing of some table cells. Table cells which may be edited are shown with a
‘pencil’ edit icon when the cursor is hovering inside them. See Figure 18-12
.
Fig. 18-12: Editable Cell and Pencil Edit Icon
To edit an editable table cell:
1 Click in the cell.
2 Enter new text.
3 When new text has been entered:
Or:
• Press the Enter key to enter the new text.
• To abort changes, click outside the cell to keep the original text.
Automatic Entry Checking
When a cell value is changed, a check is automatically carried out, checking for duplicate
values and you are alerted. See Figure 18-13.
792
Fig. 18-13: Cell Text Entry Error
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog and Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan Dialog
Checking is done for uniqueness of:
• Device Name
• (Device) Short Name
• (Device) Host Name
• (Spigot) Port Name
• (Spigot) Short Name
• (Spigot) Port Number
Notes
The duplicates checking that is carried out is insensitive to case.
For example, the duplicate checking will warn you that MVinput is the same as MVINPUT .
A short name must not be more than 8 characters long.
Import Preview Dialog and Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan Dialog
This section describes the spreadsheet import options that there are for the IP
Configuration tool in GV Orbit Client and which are shown in the Import Preview dialog and the accompanying Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog:
In this section:
•
Viewing the Dialogs , on page 793
•
Spreadsheet Duplication Scan Dialog , on page 795
•
Import Data Validation - Duplicate Scan , on page 795
•
Resolving Duplicate Issues , on page 796
•
Before Allowing Duplicate Port Names in an Import , on page 797
•
Import Preview Dialog , on page 798
•
Import Preview Dialog - Spreadsheet Section , on page 798
•
Import Preview Dialog - Options Section , on page 804
•
Import Preview Dialog - Preview of Device Changes , on page 805
Viewing the Dialogs
To see the Import Preview dialog and the Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog:
1 In the Devices tab, click Import . See also
IP Configuration of End Point Devices and
Spreadsheet Import , on page 75.
2 Select the required spreadsheet and click Open .
The spreadsheet is opened and the resulting Import Preview dialog is shown. (See
Figure 18-14.) And, automatically:
• the spreadsheet contents are automatically analyzed;
• some basic checks are carried out; and
• the result of these checks is shown in a summary Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan
dialog, which pops up. See Figure 18-15.
793
IP Configuration
Viewing the Dialogs
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 18-14: Import Preview Dialog
794
Fig. 18-15: Spreadsheet Duplication Dialog
If the
Spreadsheet Duplication Scan Dialog shows that there are some issues when
importing, then these must be resolved in the spreadsheet before importing can be done.
3 Correct any problem(s) in the spreadsheet and re-import the spreadsheet.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Spreadsheet Duplication Scan Dialog
See
Import Data Validation - Duplicate Scan , on page 795 and
If the Spreadsheet Duplication Scan dialog shows no issues,
4 Close the Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog.
For a description of each of these dialogs, see:
•
Spreadsheet Duplication Scan Dialog , on page 795; and
•
Import Preview Dialog , on page 798.
Spreadsheet Duplication Scan Dialog
A Spreadsheet Duplication Scan dialog is shown after the start of a spreadsheet import after an automatic Duplicate Scan check is carried out.
Click View to see a list of the duplicate issues found.
Fig. 18-16: Spreadsheet Duplication Dialog
Import Data Validation - Duplicate Scan
A Duplicate Scan checks the imported IP Configuration data to ensure that the GV Orbit
Control application does not receive incorrect or conflicting IP configuration data. The following are checked:
• Duplicate IP addresses.
• Duplicate device names, short names and host names.
• Duplicate router source port numbers, port names and short names.
• Duplicate router destination ports numbers, port names and short names.
795
IP Configuration
Spreadsheet Duplication Scan Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
A short name must be unique and not be more than 8 characters long. Short names that are longer than 8 characters are truncated upon import and data validation, and then the truncated short names are checked to see if there is a duplicate with any other truncated short names. Any duplicates must be resolved before continuing. In a large network system, this check can help find typographical errors in the system set up.
The results of the checks are shown in the Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog.
Resolving Duplicate Issues
If the Spreadsheet Duplication Scan dialog shows that there are some issues when importing:
Inspect and correct each issue:
1 Click View beside the problem issue(s) in the dialog.
This lists the issues.
2 Select an issue item in the list.
More details about the issue are shown. See Figure 18-17.
Click View to see a list of the duplicate issues found.
Select an issue item to see details.
Fig. 18-17: Inspecting Duplication Scan Issues
3 Correct the problem(s) in the spreadsheet by eliminating duplicate values.
Do this for each issue.
Finally, once all issues are addressed:
4 Close the Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog and Cancel the Import Preview dialog.
This aborts the import.
796
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Spreadsheet Duplication Scan Dialog
5 Re-import the spreadsheet.
Note: The default behavior on importing new values from a spreadsheet is to not allow duplicate values. For user cases where duplicate Port Names, for some reason, are required, there is a mechanism for getting round this.
Before Allowing Duplicate Port Names in an Import
For Port Names, it is possible to override the checking and perform an import with duplicate Port Names, if required.
Before allowing duplicate Port Names when importing data:
1 Clear other issues that there might be from the duplicate scan.
This should leave only a duplicate ‘Port Name(s) alert’ in the Spreadsheet Duplicate
Scan dialog that results from known Port Name duplicates that you want to allow.
2 Close the Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog.
Then:
3 See
Allowing Duplicate Port Names on Import , on page 806.
IMPORTANT With
Allow Duplicate Port Names
selected in the Import
Preview dialog, duplicate Port Name values are allowed when importing. However, you should take care that such duplicate value entries will not impact their system.
797
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog
Import Preview Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Spreadsheet section, see
Import Preview Dialog - Spreadsheet Section , on page 798.
Import Options section, see
Import Preview Dialog - Options Section , on page 804.
Import Preview of Device Changes section, see
Import Preview Dialog - Preview of Device Changes , on page 805.
Click to Import
Fig. 18-18: Import Preview Dialog Anatomy
Import Preview Dialog - Spreadsheet Section
The Spreadsheet section of the Import Preview dialog contains:
• the facility to open the spreadsheet for editing; and
• a spreadsheet summary, which summarizes information present in the worksheets of the selected spreadsheet.
Any issues with or differences in the selected spreadsheet compared to the current settings in the IP Configuration tool are indicated in the dialog. This provides a useful means of checking:
1 if the selected spreadsheet is the correct one before importing;
2 if there are any issues with the spreadsheet; and
3 any difference the spreadsheet contains compared to the currently-open IP
Configuration of the open C&M project.
798
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog
The Spreadsheet
section of the dialog is shown in Figure 18-19 and it is described in
Selected spreadsheet file path and file name.
Click Open Spreadsheet to open the file in a spreadsheet editor (for example in
Microsoft Excel).
Spreadsheet Summary of selected file, see Table 2.
Explanation of ‘Spreadsheet Summary’ column headings. See Table 2.
Fig. 18-19: Import Preview Dialog - Spreadsheet Information
Table 2: Spreadsheet Summary - Column Headings
Column Heading
Sheet
Description
Name of a worksheet in the spreadsheet file.
Total Records
Changed
Unchanged
Offline
Number of row items in the worksheet.
Number of row items that are different to current values.
Number of row items that are the same as current values.
Number of row items that match to a device that is off-line.
799
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 2: Spreadsheet Summary - Column Headings (continued)
Column Heading Description
Inapplicable Number of row items that are inconsistent with the currently open GV Orbit project IP Configuration :
• For a spigot row item:
Spigot is set to the wrong mode, or it is a phantom.
Note: A phantom spigot has an entry in the routing system’s working port table but does not exist on the device.
• For a flow row item:
Parent spigot is the wrong mode or its parent device is not on-line.
For example, a Grass Valley IQMIX IP modular card may have been reconfigured to have a different number of inputs and outputs (or number of destinations and sources).
Unmatched Number of row items not matched to any device. This means that either:
• an item does not have a counterpart in the currently-open
C&M project IP Configuration ; or
• an item is not found in the open project.
For example:
• a device may be temporarily off-line; or
• on a live routing system, the current routes to/from destination/source spigots will differ from any “snapshot” captured in a spreadsheet.
Invalid Number of row items that are malformed. Malformed items have missing values in one or more required fields.
Additional Information Provides additional information about work sheets.
Example Spreadsheet Summary Issues:
The ‘Spreadsheet Summary’ in the Import Preview dialog can indicate several issues with the form and the content of a spreadsheet-to-be-imported compared to the currentlyopen IP Configuration . Some example spreadsheet issues are presented here.
Figure 18-20 shows an example ‘Spreadsheet Summary’. Each red item is caused by an issue
in the selected spreadsheet, shown in Figure 18-21 to Figure 18-26.
800
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
One
unmatched issue on the Device Names worksheet, see Figure 18-23a.
Two
unmatched issues for Source Ports, see Figure 18-23b.
Three
unmatched issues for Destination Ports, see Figure 18-23c.
Four
unmatched issues for Source Flows, see Figure 18-23d.
Five
‘inappropriate’ issues for Destination Ports, see Figure 18-23e.
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog
261 unmatched issues for Destination Ports
- because the currently open IP Configuration is for a live IP routing system and routes have been changed.
Six
‘invalid’ issues for Destination Ports, see Figure 18-23f.
Fig. 18-20: Example Spreadsheet Summary
New device row item
Fig. 18-21: Example Spreadsheet Issues - a) An Unmatched New Device.
801
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog
New source port rows
Fig. 18-22: Example Spreadsheet Issues - b) Two Unmatched New Source Ports.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
New destination port rows
Fig. 18-23: Example Spreadsheet Issues - c) Three Unmatched New Destination Ports.
802
New source flow rows
Fig. 18-24: Example Spreadsheet Issues - d) Four Unmatched New Source Flows.
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog
The spigot index used here for a Destination spigot index is actually the index for a
Source
spigot on the device.
Source spigot indexes
Fig. 18-25: Example Spreadsheet Issues - e) Five Inappropriate Destination Flow Row Items.
Row items are invalid - each does not have a GUID nor an IP Address entry.
Fig. 18-26: Example Spreadsheet Issues - f) Six Invalid Destination Flow Row Items.
803
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog
Import Preview Dialog - Options Section
Select the worksheets of the spreadsheet to import
Import Options Import Functions
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Fig. 18-27: Import Preview Dialog - Options Section
Import Options
Import unchanged records:
• Select - Import and apply all spreadsheet records when importing the spreadsheet.
(This forces an IP Configuration into a known state.)
• Deselect - Import and apply only changed records.
Allow Duplicate Port Names:
• Select - Allow duplicate port names to be imported.
• Deselect - Imports with duplicate port names are now allowed.
See
Allowing Duplicate Port Names on Import , on page 806.
IMPORTANT With
Allow Duplicate Port Names
selected in the
Import
Preview
dialog, duplicate Port Name values are allowed when importing. However, you should take care that such duplicate value entries will not impact their system.
Import Functions
Click on an item to perform a checking action:
Multicast Scan
Click to generate a full listing of the multicast groups comprising the IP flows in the IP
Configuration . The check results are shown in a dialog.
For more information, refer to the Orbit for IP Routing user manual.
804
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Import Preview Dialog
Subnet Scan
Click to check that device IP addresses are on specified network subnets. The check results are shown in a dialog.
For more information, refer to the Orbit for IP Routing user manual.
Duplicate Scan
Click to check for duplicate IP addresses, device names, port numbers/names etc. This check is automatically done before importing. The check results are shown in a dialog. See
Import Data Validation - Duplicate Scan , on page 795.
Import Preview Dialog - Preview of Device Changes
The Import Preview dialog indicates the nature of changes that would occur in the IP
Configuration if the spreadsheet were to be imported.
Full previewed list of changed settings items, see Table 3.
Click Deselect All to deselect all preview items.
Click Select All to select all preview items.
Fig. 18-28: Import Preview Dialog - Preview of Device Changes
Table 3: Preview of Device Changes - Column Headings
Import Preview
Column Headings
Description
(First column) Check box.
• Select - to select an item for importing.
• Deselect - to deselect an item for importing.
Device
Name
Name change
Device GUID.
Device name.
‘Yes’ - Device name has changed.
805
IP Configuration
Allowing Duplicate Port Names on Import
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Table 3: Preview of Device Changes - Column Headings (continued)
Import Preview
Column Headings
Description
Source Port changes ‘NN’ - number of source ports that have settings changes, where NN is an integer number.
Dest Port changes
Source Flow changes
‘NN’ - number of destination ports that have settings changes, where NN is an integer number.
‘NN’ - number of source flows that have settings changes, where NN is an integer number.
Dest Flow changes ‘NN’ - number of destination flows that have settings changes, where NN is an integer number.
Allowing Duplicate Port Names on Import
For Port Names, it is possible to override the checking and perform an import with duplicate Port Names, if required.
To allow duplicate Port Names when importing spreadsheet data:
1 First, clear other issues that there might be from the duplicate scan.
This should leave only a duplicate ‘Port Name(s) alert’ in the Spreadsheet Duplicate
Scan dialog that results from known Port Name duplicates that you want to allow.
2 Close the Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog.
Then, in the Import Preview dialog:
3 Select the Allow Duplicate Port Names option.
The Import
button should become ungrayed-out. See Figure 18-29.
806
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Allowing Duplicate Port Names on Import
4 Click Import to begin the import.
IMPORTANT With
Allow Duplicate Port Names
selected in the Import
Preview dialog, duplicate Port Name values are allowed when importing. However, you should take care that such duplicate value entries will not impact their system.
Fig. 18-29: Allowing Duplicate Port Names when Importing from a Spreadsheet
807
IP Configuration
Getting Started with Spreadsheet Import
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Getting Started with Spreadsheet Import
The IP Configuration spreadsheet can be created from scratch. However, when getting started, it is often easier to first export a spreadsheet from the IP Configuration tool in
GV Orbit Client . This ‘starting’ IP Configuration should have discovered all of the devices in the GV Orbit system. The resulting exported spreadsheet will then contain all of the discovered devices in the GV Orbit system.
The spreadsheet should be edited to add router port numbers, device and source port names, multicast address details etc. Finally, the spreadsheet is imported into the IP
Configuration tool of GV Orbit Client, and its information is validated and then is passed to the rest of the GV Orbit system.
This section describes:
•
Step 1: Exporting a Spreadsheet , on page 808.
•
Step 2: Editing a Spreadsheet , on page 810.
•
Step 3: Importing a Spreadsheet , on page 813.
See Appendix B, IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix , on page 823, for more
information on the spreadsheet.
Note: The ‘Export’ and ‘Import’ facility can be used to take a snapshot of settings and restore settings.
Step 1: Exporting a Spreadsheet
To export a spreadsheet which contains all discovered devices, in the Devices tab: See also
IP Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import , on page 75.
1 Ensure that the filter text field is empty (see Figure 18-30).
Filter text field
Listed devices
Export button
Fig. 18-30: Devices Tab - Export Button
2 Check that all devices are listed in the tab.
808
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
3 Click the Export button.
A small dialog window appears.
IP Configuration
Step 1: Exporting a Spreadsheet
Fig. 18-31: Export Dialog
4 Select ‘Include device GUIDs’.
5 Click Export .
6 Select a filename and location to save the spreadsheet in, and click Save ’
An exported spreadsheet is created and a confirmation dialog is shown which lists how many records have been saved:
Fig. 18-32: Export Dialog (Export Completed)
7 Click Close .
The blank settings of the new project have been exported to a spreadsheet file (extension
.xlsx).
809
IP Configuration
Step 2: Editing a Spreadsheet
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Spreadsheet Format
See Appendix B, IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix , on page 823 for more
information on the spreadsheet.
Fig. 18-33: IP Configuration Spreadsheet
Step 2: Editing a Spreadsheet
The worksheets in the spreadsheet file comprise:
• Device Names
• Source Ports
• Destination Ports
• Source Flows
• Destination Flows
Instructions on editing the spreadsheet to set up initial device information follow.
Worksheets must be edited to:
• set up friendly device names, short names and host names
(see
);
• set up an optional device descriptions (see
);
• set up user-defined traditional router port numbers and names
(see
Source Ports Worksheet and Destination Ports Worksheet
);
• set up all possible potential sources (source flows)
(see
); and
• clear any existing routes, if required
(see
Destination Flows Worksheet (Clear Routes)
.
810
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Device Names Worksheet
On the ‘Device Names’ worksheet, for each device:
1 Enter a friendly name in the Device Name column.
2 Enter a short, friendly device name in the Short Name column.
3 Enter a host name in the Host Name column.
4 Enter a description in the Description column.
IP Configuration
Step 2: Editing a Spreadsheet
Fig. 18-34: Enter Device Name
Source Ports Worksheet
On the ‘Source Ports’ worksheet, for each source port (device source spigot):
1 Enter the (traditional) router source port number in the Port Number column.
2 Enter the (traditional) router source port name in the Port Name column.
3 Enter a short source port name in the Short Name column.
Note: A Short Name must be unique and not be more than 8 characters long. Short names that are longer than 8 characters are truncated upon import and then are checked if there is a duplicate with other truncated short names.
Fig. 18-35: Enter Source Ports (Source Spigots) Details
Destination Ports Worksheet
On the ‘Destination Ports’ worksheet, for each source port (device source spigot):
811
IP Configuration
Step 2: Editing a Spreadsheet
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
1 Enter the (traditional) router destination port number in the Port Number column.
2 Enter the (traditional) router destination port name in the Port Name column.
3 Enter a short destination port name in the Short Name column.
Note: A Short Name must be unique and not be more than 8 characters long. Short names that are longer than 8 characters are truncated upon import and then are checked if there is a duplicate with other truncated short names.
Fig. 18-36: Enter Destination Port (Spigot) Details
Source Flows Worksheet
On the ‘Source Flows’ worksheet, configure each source flow, edit the following columns:
1 Flow Enabled - Enter ‘Y’ to enable the source flow.
2 Multicast Address - Enter a multicast group IP address.
3 Dst RTP Port - Enter an IP port number.
(To define which IP port a source flow should use at a destination spigot.)
4 Src RTP Port - Enter an IP port number.
(To define which IP port a source flow should use at its source spigot.)
812
Fig. 18-37: Enter Source Flow Details
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Step 3: Importing a Spreadsheet
Destination Flows Worksheet (Clear Routes)
For the initial setting up of the spreadsheet, all routes can be cleared with the spreadsheet.
On the ‘Destination Flows’ worksheet, configure each destination flow:
1 In the Flow Type column, enter ‘None’.
2 Delete all entries in the following columns:
• Flow Enabled ,
• Multicast Address ,
• Source Address ,
• Dst RTP Port ; and
• Src RTP Port columns.
This will stop flows to all destinations, by clearing all routes.
Fig. 18-38: Destination Flows Worksheet AFTER editing.
Save
Spreadsheet editing is now finished.
1 Save the spreadsheet file.
Step 3: Importing a Spreadsheet
The spreadsheet contains IP Configuration data. It is automatically validated when being imported into the GV Orbit Client. The data is used by the IP Configuration tool and automatically passed on to the GV Orbit Control application for use in its routing.
CAUTION
Importing a spreadsheet into the IP Configuration is a potentially disruptive operation.
This is because it may affect all existing devices and routes.
To try and prevent unintentional importing and disruption, GV Orbit Client alerts you to the risk of the operation and presents an overt, prompting authorization step to go through.
813
IP Configuration
Step 3: Importing a Spreadsheet
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
The importing is presented below in the following steps:
•
Step 3a: Import Preview , on page 814.
•
Step 3b: Clearing Any Import Issues , on page 816.
•
Step 3c: Import the Spreadsheet , on page 816.
Step 3a: Import Preview
To import the spreadsheet into the IP Configuration tool:
1 Select the Devices tab and click the Import
button. See also IP Configuration of End
Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import , on page 75.
Fig. 18-39: Devices Tab Import Button
2 Select the required spreadsheet file to import and click Open .
The spreadsheet is opened and its contents are initially read and compared to the current data values in the IP Configuration tool automatically. Some preliminary data checks are done, checking for the uniqueness of spreadsheet values.
Note: The importing operation is NOT done yet.
An Import Preview
dialog (see Figure 18-40) is then shown and if there are any issues
found from the data checks, then a Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog is also shown
(see Figure 18-41), which reports any issues found from the data checking.
Note: The preliminary data value checking that is carried out upon spreadsheet import is insensitive to case.For example, the duplicate checking will warn you that ‘MVinput’ is the same as ‘MVINPUT’.
If there are issues, then the Import button in the Import Preview dialog is grayed out, preventing imports. This will be un-grayed out when issues are cleared.
(See Import Preview Dialog and Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan Dialog , on page 793, for
814
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Step 3: Importing a Spreadsheet more information about the dialog.)
Note: For information on the import data validation, see
Dialog and Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan Dialog , on page 793 and
Data Validation - Duplicate Scan , on page 795.
‘Sheets to Import’ section, select all options for ‘Getting Going’ for the first time.
Fig. 18-40: Import Preview Dialog
Note: The Import button will be grayed out if there are any import issues (presented in the pop-up
Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog).
815
IP Configuration
Step 3: Importing a Spreadsheet
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Step 3b: Clearing Any Import Issues
Note: This dialog is shown before any importing of spreadsheet information, and it warns of any potential import issues that there are.
816
Fig. 18-41: Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan Dialog.
If there are any issues shown in the Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog, then:
1 Inspect each issue in the dialog.
2 Re-visit the spreadsheet and correct any issues.
(See Spreadsheet Duplication Scan Dialog
, on page 795, and Resolving Duplicate
Finally:
3 Close the Spreadsheet Duplicate Scan dialog and Cancel the Import Preview dialog.
This aborts the import.
4 Re-import the spreadsheet.
Note: The default behavior on importing new values from a spreadsheet is to not allow duplicate values. For user cases where duplicate Port Names are required for some reason, there is a mechanism for getting round this. See
Before Allowing Duplicate Port Names in an Import , on page 797.
Step 3c: Import the Spreadsheet
The Import button on the Import Preview dialog is:
• Grayed out when there are reported or unaccounted for import duplicate issues.
• Not grayed out when there are no issues or all issues are accounted for.
To import:
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration
Step 3: Importing a Spreadsheet
1 In the ‘Sheets to Import’ section of the Import Preview dialog, select the import options required.
When ‘Getting Going’ for the first time, select all options.
2 Click Import .
The importing of the spreadsheet information begins.
3 A High Risk Alert dialog is shown when importing a spreadsheet.
IMPORTANT
Importing is a potentially disruptive operation to any current IP routing being done by GV Orbit.
When ‘getting started’ for the first time, no routing should be currently happening, it is alright to continue.
.
a) High risk operation alert message b) Enter user project password c) Authorization successful, press ‘Next’
Fig. 18-42: HIGH RISK Alert and Authorization: a) HIGH RISK Alert; b) Enter User Password; c) Authorization Successful.
817
IP Configuration
Step 3: Importing a Spreadsheet
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
4 Follow the on-screen instructions on the HIGH RISK dialogs to authorize the importing.
To abort the importing process, click Cancel on the HIGH RISK dialog.
To continue, press Next on the dialog.
Entry of the user password is required.
after which, to begin importing, press Next in the dialog. (Pressing Cancel aborts.)
The importing proceeds.
5 When the importing is complete, an Import summary dialog shows a summary of what configuration settings have been restored.
818
Fig. 18-43: Import Summary
6 Click OK .
The configuration in the spreadsheet has been imported into the IP Configuration tool in
GV Orbit Client . The information is made available to GV Orbit Control for routing.
After import, in the IP Configuration tool:
• Devices will adopt the newly-set device names.
• Device ports will be mapped to the newly-defined router port numbers, with new port names.
• Device source spigots will be able to send out flows.
• Device destination spigots will be ready to receive flows.
• No flows will be routed.
CAUTION
Importing a spreadsheet into the IP Configuration is a potentially disruptive operation.
This is because it may affect all existing devices and routes.
To try and prevent unintentional importing and disruption, GV Orbit Client alerts you to the risk of the operation and presents an overt, prompting authorization step to go through.
Note: Only settings for on-line devices are initially compared and then imported.
A
GV Orbit C&M projects contain C&M project screens and XY Panel screens (see Chapter 13,
Routing Control - XY Routing Panel , on page 575) which use on-screen widgets and
‘behind-the-scenes’ GV Orbit Client Behaviours and Bindings.
Routing type Behaviours and Bindings may be used with on-screen Button widgets etc. on
XY Panel screens or soft control panels to synthesize a custom router control panel.
These Routing Behaviours and Bindings are listed in Table A-1 and Table A-2 respectively.
Note:
It is recommended that an XY panel screen created through the XY Wizard is used as the basis of a custom routing panel. This may be edited in GV Orbit and customized as required.
Routing Behaviours
BPX
Behavior
Table A-1: Routing Behaviours
Parameters
Name,
(RollCall) Address,
+...
Description
When triggered on an GV Orbit C&M project XY panel screen...
Source,
Destination
Routes a defined Source to a defined Destination.
(BPX, button per crosspoint)
Cancel Mode Cancels any selected Destination(s) and pre-selected
Source(s).
Provides access to information about a Destination, including its name, port number and the currently-routed Source.
Enables a button to act like a Destination selection button.
Destination Destination,
Level
Destination Button Index,
Destination,
Mode
Index Destination Level
Button
Dialpad Index,
Sources,
Clear,
Delete
Dialup Tally Sources
Enables a button to act like a Destination Level selection button.
Enables a button widget to act like a Dial Pad button.
Allows the currently active Dialup value to be displayed (on a panel screen).
819
Routing Behaviours/Bindings Appendix
Routing Bindings
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Filter
Behavior
Table A-1: Routing Behaviours (continued)
Name,
(RollCall) Address,
+...
Parameters Description
When triggered on an GV Orbit C&M project XY panel screen...
Sources Applies a filter to the router Sources or Destinations.
Load Panel
Page
Target Opens the GV Orbit Client Routing Panel in the client window or on a monitor display.
Switches between router panel pages
Page Index
Page Tally
Page Sources,
Page Offset
Page Sources,
Index
Page Sources
Switches to a specific page index,
Panel Lock
Protect -
Mode
Allows the current page value to be displayed (on a panel screen).
Toggles panel lock/unlock.
Protects a selected Destination.
Redo Button
Salvo
Source Button
-
Salvo
Re-makes a route, used to implement a Redo button.
(When placed on a panel schematic, enables Redo mode.)
Executes a salvo.
Selects a Source.
Index,
Source,
Mode
Index Enables a button to act like a Source Level selection button.
Source Level
Button
Take
Undo Button
Mode
Undo Requires Take,
Undo Timeout
Router Take: Makes a route, used to implement a Take button.
(When placed on a panel schematic, enables Take mode.)
Undoes a route, used to implement an Undo button.
(When placed on a panel schematic, enables Undo mode.)
Routing Bindings
820
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Routing Behaviours/Bindings Appendix
Routing Bindings
Binding
Table A-2: Routing Bindings
Parameters
Name,
+...
Binding binds a...
Panel Lock Source Behaviour,
Locked Caption,
Unlocked Caption
Description
...Widget to Panel Lock function.
Router Button ...Routing Behaviour to a Button.
Source Behaviour,
Normal Style,
Preset Style,
Routed Style
821
Routing Behaviours/Bindings Appendix
Routing Bindings
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
822
B
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Introduction
This appendix outlines the format of the IP Configuration spreadsheet used by GV Orbit
Client.
Certain IP addresses are reserved by GV Orbit Control and cannot be used. Refer to the Release
Notes for more information. See
Related Documentation , on page 19.
Note: It is recommended that an exported spreadsheet from your system is used as the basis for entering settings for your system.
All IP endpoint settings (device name, spigot and flow settings etc.) of an GV Orbit Client IP routing network configuration ( IP Configuration ) may be exported (saved) to a file or imported from a file. The file is a spreadsheet file and it may be created off-line from scratch; or an exported spreadsheet may be used and edited off-line (which is easier).
The exported file is in a spreadsheet format and can:
• be edited;
• provide a ‘template’ spreadsheet;
• be used during system set up;
• be the primary source of information;
• be the Orbit project backup mechanism.
Import and Export Buttons
Exporting or importing is done in the Devices tab of the IP Configuration tool in GV Orbit
Client. See also
IP Configuration of End Point Devices and Spreadsheet Import , on page 75.
• Clicking on the Export or on the Import buttons in the tab’s tool bar.
823
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Exported Spreadsheet File
Fig. B-1: Devices Tab - Import and Export Buttons
Exported Spreadsheet File
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
824
Fig. B-2: IP Configuration Spreadsheet
The exported file is in an MS Office spreadsheet format (file extension .xlsx).
There are five tabbed work sheets in the file:
•
•
Source Ports and Destination Ports Worksheets
•
Source Flows and Destination Flows Worksheets
Each worksheet contains two sorts of data columns:
• Key Field columns - these list parameters which define a Device , a Spigot or a Flow .
These fields simply report existing settings and should not be changed .
• Value Field columns - these hold user-defined values that may be changed in the spreadsheet .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Device Names Work Sheet
Thus, each worksheet row has Key Fields and Value Fields .
Device Names Work Sheet
Each row represents a Device . A Device is defined either by the device GUID or by the device IP address; the IP address can be either the primary (fabric A) or secondary (fabric B) address. If both the GUID and the IP address are present then the GUID is used to identify the device.
Key field columns Value Field columns
Each row represents a Device
Fig. B-3: Device Names Worksheet Example
In the Spreadsheet:
In the spreadsheet, the following fields are key value fields:
• Device Name (max 63 characters).
• Short Name (max 15 characters).
• Host Name (max 63 characters).
• Description (max 255 characters).
In the IP Configuration Tool:
In the IP Configuration tool, you can edit the following columns in the tool:
• Device Name .
• Short Name .
• Host Name .
• Description .
825
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Source Ports and Destination Ports Worksheets
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Source Ports and Destination Ports Worksheets
These two worksheets are similar. Each row represents a spigot on a device defined by the device GUID, or by the device IP address, or by the device name. On the device, a spigot is defined by a spigot number, Spigot Index .
If the GUID is present, it is used in preference to either the IP address or device name.
If the IP address is present, it is used in preference to the device name.
Key field columns Value field columns
Each row represents a Source Spigot
Fig. B-4: Source Ports Worksheet Example
Key field columns Value field columns
826
Each row represents a Destination Spigot
Fig. B-5: Destination Ports Worksheet Example
In the Spreadsheet:
In the spreadsheet, the following fields are key value fields:
• Port Number (integer).
• Port Name (max 63 characters).
• Short Name (max 9 characters, but 8 characters for an IPRA routing-controlled system).
In the IP Configuration Tool:
In the IP Configuration tool, you can edit the following columns in the tool:
• Port Name .
• Short Name .
• Port Number .
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Source Flows and Destination Flows Worksheets
Source Flows and Destination Flows Worksheets
These two worksheets are similar.
Each row represents an IP flow on a device defined by the device GUID, or by the device IP address, or by the device name. On the device, a spigot is defined by a spigot number,
Spigot Index .
If the GUID is present, it is used in preference to either the IP address or device name.
If the IP address is present, it is used in preference to the device name.
Note: Flow Index is for information only - created at Export and ignored during Import .
Key field columns
For information only
Each row represents a Source Flow
Value field columns
Fig. B-6: Source Flows Worksheet Example
827
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Source Flows and Destination Flows Worksheets
Key field columns
For information only
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Each row represents a Destination Flow
Value field columns
Fig. B-7: Destination Flows Worksheet Example
In the Spreadsheet:
In the spreadsheet, the following fields are key value fields.
• Flow Enabled .
• Multicast Address .
• Source Address .
• Dst RTP Port .
• Src RTP Port .
In the IP Configuration Tool:
In the IP Configuration tool, you can edit the following columns in each tab of the tool:
• Flow Enabled .
• Multicast Group Address .
• Source IP Address .
• Dest RTP Port .
• Source RTP Port .
828
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Example Spreadsheet
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Example Spreadsheet
Fig. B-8: Device Names Worksheet
Fig. B-9: Source Ports Worksheet
829
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Example Spreadsheet
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
830
Fig. B-10: Destination Ports Worksheet
Fig. B-11: Source Flows Worksheet
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Example Spreadsheet
Fig. B-12: Destination Flows Worksheet
831
IP Configuration Spreadsheet Appendix
Example Spreadsheet
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
832
C
NP0017
The following Network Device Advance Control (NDAC) NP0017 commands are supported.
General commands
CommandId Name
0x0000 300A Execute System Salvo
Handling
Triggers a salvo created in GV Orbit Control by referring to it by the
"external ID" of the salvo.
0x0000 310E Register For Data Changes Registers the client for changes to the labels within GV Orbit Control and notifies it with a '0x0000 310C Notify Mnemonic Change' when some labels are changed in GV Orbit Control.
Device-based support
Note: We recommend to northbound control systems to use Device-base commands as gaps are properly supported.
The following set of NP0017 device-based commands for support of crosspoints and labels have been implemented in the NDAC.
CommandId
0x0000 3000
0x0000 3002
0x0000 3004
0x0000 3006
0x0000 3008
Name
Take Source To
Destination
Lock, Protect and
Release Device
Handling
Performs a crosspoint change
User Id of command taken into account, when performing operation.
Apply LPR state on a specific input device and level, see “lock protect release level on device” command (0x00003002).
See also Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC
NP0016 / NP0017 Northbound Interfaces , on page 475.
Register for Changes to
Device
Registers the client for changes to the port and notifies it with a
'0x0000 300B Device Status Changed' when the crosspoint changes in GV Orbit Control.
Get Destination Status Returns the current crosspoint status.
Get Device LPR Status Returns the output's current lock/protect/release status.
If a user has an “external ID” value configured it is returned, otherwise 0 is returned.
833
Network Device Advance Control (NDAC) NP0017
Port-based support
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
CommandId
0x0000 3012
0x0000 3016
0x0000 3017
0x0000 3018
0x0000 3022
0x0000 302B
0x8000 300B
Name
Get Mnemonics
Get Contents For
Category
Device Output
Changed Response
Handling
Allows client to retrieve the mnemonics for 'all devices', 'levels',
'sources', 'destinations' and 'categories'.
Limited to 8 first characters of the “Short name” property.
Categories are not supported.
Device All Levels Take Performs a take between a source and destination on all the available levels.
Get Simple Device
Status
Provides the input connected to a destination device.
Returns all levels including sub-levels of composite levels.
Get Device Levels
Get Extended
Mnemonics
Returns the levels associated to a device.
• Returns all levels including sub-levels of composite levels.
• Returns the levels with the right device id.
Returns associated device mnemonics. Only types 1,2,3 and 4 are handled.
No limit on name length.
This returns no category information.
This returns no category information.
This is a response message sent back by clients after GV Orbit
Control sends out a 0x0000 300B.
GV Orbit Control simply ignores these messages.
Details about device id and level numbers
• The Device ID fields used in the device-based commands are 1-based values. Meaning that Source Device ID 1 in a command matches the logical source with external id 1 in
GV Orbit Control.
• The Virtual Level ID field used in the device-based commands are 1-based values.
Meaning that Virtual Level ID 1 in a command matches the logical level with ID 1 (SDI) in
GV Orbit Control.
Port-based support
GV Orbit Control supports the following set of NP0017 port-based commands in the NDAC.
CommandId
0x0000 3001
0x0000 3003
0x0000 3005
Name Handling
Take Input To Output Performs a crosspoint change
Lock, Protect and
Release Port
Register for Changes to Port
User Id of command taken into account, when performing operation.
Apply LPR state on a specific input port and level, supports NP0017
“lock protect release port” command (0x00003003).
See also
Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC
NP0016 / NP0017 Northbound Interfaces , on page 475.
Registers the client for changes to the port and notifies it with a
'0x0000 300C Physical Port Changed' when the crosspoint changes in
GV Orbit Control.
834
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Network Device Advance Control (NDAC) NP0017
User ID and Lock, Protect, and Release
CommandId
0x0000 3007
0x0000 3009
0x0000 3014
0x0000 3015
0x0000 3025
0x8000 300C
Name
Get Physical
Crosspoint Status
Get Physical LPR
Status
Get Physical Level
Dimensions
Get Mnemonic For
Ports
Get Extended
Mnemonics For Ports
Physical crosspoint status response.
Handling
Returns the current crosspoint status.
Returns the output's current lock/protect/release status.
If a user has an “external ID” value configured it is returned, otherwise 0 is returned.
Returns the logical level ids and size for the area being controlled.
Returns the first 8 characters of 'Short name' property for the requested input or output port.
Returns the full 'Short name' property for the requested input or output port. Not limited in length.
This is a response message sent back by clients after GV Orbit Control sends out a 0x0000 300C.
GV Orbit Control simply ignores these messages.
Details about port and level numbers
• The Input Port and Output Port fields used in the port-based commands are 0-based values. Meaning that Input Port 0 in a command matches the logical source with external id 1 in GV Orbit Control.
• The port numbers (external Id values) should be sequential in GV Orbit Control. That is, port-based commands do not work properly if there are gaps in the external IDs.
• The Physical Level ID field used in the port-based commands are 1-based values.
Meaning that Physical Level ID 1 in a command matches the logical level with ID 1 (SDI) in GV Orbit Control.
User ID and Lock, Protect, and Release
User ID is a concept found in some protocols such as NP0016 and NP0017. It allows a northbound controller to identify the user which is performing lock/protect or take operations. In turn GV Orbit Control, will try to match the provided user ID to one of its users by looking up the External Id parameter value and perform the operations internally using it.
See also
Setting a User ID for Lock, Protect, and Release with NDAC NP0016 / NP0017
Northbound Interfaces , on page 475.
NOTE: GVG NP and Probel SW-P-08 protocols do not have user ID concepts, so all their operations are performed as the GV Orbit Control admin user.
GV Orbit Control user external id configuration
NP0016 and NP0017 protocols provide the user ID for various operations. The user ID is defined as an unsigned integer value from 0 to 4294967295 but it's recommended to NOT use values beyond 2147483647 to avoid any conversion or any special handling of users ID in GV Orbit Control systems. If the recommendation cannot be applied, please contact
835
Network Device Advance Control (NDAC) NP0017
Troubleshooting
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Grass Valley support for further details on how to configure those values in GV Orbit
Control systems. See
Grass Valley Technical Support , on page 846.
User IDs used by Northbound Control Systems
NDAC Client iControl - NP0017 device based iControl - NP0017 port based iControl - NP0016
GV Orbit Routing service - NP0017 device based
Image Video - NP0017 device based
User ID
0
An iControl system property can be configured to change this.
0
61441 (0xF001)
0 or Control External Id parameter; see above.
0
Troubleshooting
For troubleshooting, GV Orbit Control has GV Orbit Control audit.logs
found on GV Orbit
Admin web interface under Log Files that show the user name and its external ID, the northbound interface (for example, NP0017), type of commands (Device-based, Portbased, etc.) and if the command was received from a panel. Refer to Log Files Task in the
GV Orbit Admin Guide . See Related Documentation , on page 7.
How to...
How to configure iControl or Kaleido to control GV Orbit Control using
NP0017 device-id-based driver
1 Add and configure a physical router: a Add the physical router in router manager or Xedit.
b Select the 'NVEP NV9000 - Device Takes (NP0017)' router protocol.
c Set the Connection type to: TCP/IP d Enter the GV Orbit Control controller IP address.
e Set the TCP/IP port to 9193 + 'external id'. For example: if the area 'external id' in
GV Orbit Control is '0' use port 9193, if area 'external id' in GV Orbit Control is '1' use port 9194.
f Add a physical level.
g Configure its size and enter any number in the 'Level or frame ID' field. Kaleido and iControl only do all 'level takes'.
The matrix size should be at least the 'amount of sources of the topology with the most sources' X 'amount of destinations of the topology with the most destinations' as shown in the GV Orbit Control Alias Editor of the area. If you intend to remove/add sources or destinations in GV Orbit Control you should make the router size bigger as 'NP0017 ID' aren't reused.
836
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
Network Device Advance Control (NDAC) NP0017
How to...
2 Create a logical router: a Set the size and add the logical level.
The logical level can be a subset of all the physical inputs or outputs in GV Orbit
Control. That way you can control only certain sources or destinations.
b Select the physical levels configured.
c Perform the auto-map of sources and destinations.
d Save.
3 Control GV Orbit Control using router matrix.
How to configure iTX to control GV Orbit Control using NP0017 device-idbased driver
• Create a router in iTX and select the 'NV9000' driver.
How to configure NV9000 to control GV Orbit Control using NP0017 device-id-based driver
• NV9000 doesn't support this mode of communication with a router controller.
How to configure iControl or Kaleido to control GV Orbit Control using
NP0017 port-based driver
1 Add and configure a physical router: a Add the physical router in router manager or Xedit.
b Select the 'NVEP NV9000 - Port Takes (NP0017)' router protocol.
c Set the Connection type to: TCP/IP d Enter the GV Orbit Control controller IP address.
e Set the TCP/IP port to 9193 + 'external id'. For example: if the area 'external id' in
GV Orbit Control is '0' use port 9193, if area 'external id' in GV Orbit Control is '1' use port 9194.
f Add a physical level.
g Configure its size and enter '1' in the 'Level or frame ID' field.
The matrix size should be the total amount of source and destination 'External IDs' within the GV Orbit Control Alias Editor of the area.
h Add other levels as needed.
2 Create a logical router: a Set the size and add the logical level.
The logical level can be a subset of all the physical inputs or outputs in GV Orbit
Control. That way you can control only certain sources or destinations.
b Select the physical levels configured.
c Perform the auto-map of sources and destinations.
d Save.
3 Control GV Orbit Control using router matrix.
837
Network Device Advance Control (NDAC) NP0017
How to...
GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
How to configure NV9000 to control GV Orbit Control using NP0017 port based driver
1 Configure the 'area id' in GV Orbit Control to '0'.
2 Access the SE-Utilities application.
3 Add a router: a Go to Configuration > Routers and click the 'Add router' button.
b Enter a name for the router.
c Select 'NV Control System Ethernet' as the protocol d Click next.
e Add a Physical Level and configure the level '#' value to match the GV Orbit Control logical level 'external Id' from within Area.
f Enter '0' for the 'Input Start' and 'Output Start'.
g Enter the number of GV Orbit Control inputs - 1 in 'Input End' h Enter the number of GV Orbit Control outputs - 1 in the 'Output End'
4 Add a level set: a Go to Configuration > Level Sets and click the 'add level set' button.
b Enter a name for the level set.
c Select a 'Virtual Level' value for 'display index' 1.
d Select a Physical level from the pull down.
5 Add devices: a Go to Configuration > Devices and click 'Add Device' button.
b Enter a mnemonic, select a level set and optionally enter a description.
c Click the 'Next' button.
d In the 'Device Level Detail' section enter the input or output numbers used by the
Device.
e Repeat to add more devices.
6 Apply the DB to the controller: a Go to System Management and select the NV9000 controller.
b Click the 'Write configuration to NV9000' button.
c Once the copying is done, click the 'Restart controller 1' button.
7 Control GV Orbit Control using SE-Utilities: a Go to System Management > NV9000 controller > Routers and select the router representing GV Orbit Control.
There is a bug in SE-Utilities when output 0 is used. It's status isn't displayed in the
'Connections' table. If you wish to view the status of output 0, you can change the
'Starting Output' value to 0 instead of 1, but you will loose the status of the last output. The 'Display Count' value cannot be higher than the last output number of the physical level, which is one less than the output count when using 0-based values.
b You can perform takes by using 0-based input and output values.
838
D
GV Orbit Control system’s northbound interface has the ability to control crosspoints through Sony LSM (NS-BUS router matrix protocol).
With this integration, logical sources/destinations from GV Orbit Control systems, including those created for NMOS devices, are now available northbound to be used by Sony panels and commands received through NS-BUS router matrix protocol are handled.
LSM does not allow the configuration of the TCP port to which it connects to on an NS-BUS router device and uses 9720 by default. Because of this limitation, only one area of GV Orbit
Control systems can be controlled. GV Orbit Control systems allow control of the area with the lowest external ID through the NS-BUS protocol.
When adding a GV Orbit Control system as an NS-BUS Device in the LSM configuration, the selected Protocol must be TCP and the Device Port Number value must be 8079. Device IP
Address1 field should be the Virtual IP address of the GV Orbit Control system. Device IP
Address2 field must be empty.
See
Configuring a Controller Group , on page 179 for the Virtual IP address of the GV Orbit
Control system.
839
Northbound Control through Sony LSM (NS-BUS Router Matrix protocol) GV Orbit Version 2.3.0
User Guide
840
3G Proxy
Alarm
Alarm Acknowledgment
Client
Client Domain
Cluster
Clustered Multiviewer
Project,
Clustered MV Project
Domain
Dynamic Destination
Assignment
Fabric
Fabric A & Fabric B
GV Orbit Client
Glossary of Terms
An ST-2110 video IP stream representing another video signal in a production system. The proxy has the same video and audio content as the signal it represents. The proxy’s video standard is ‘3G’.
An indication that a component or device or module or unit within a facility is not operating at normal established parameters.
An on-line, live action to notify other users that new alarms were raised in a facility. This is usually manually done by a user and is usually followed by actions to resolve cause of the alarms in question. Alarms in the system will flash when raised, or be in some alert state, until they are acknowledged.
Computer software that accesses services made available by a server. The server itself resides on a different piece of computer hardware. The client can be downloaded from the server on a local computer.
A GVOP Domain used by the GV Orbit Client to interact with devices and services in a GV Orbit system.
Multiple devices grouped or merged together to increase the capacity of inputs, outputs, or processing power.
A GV Orbit project type which defines one or more video walls served by a cluster of multiviewer devices.
A group of devices on a network that are administered as a unit with common rules and procedures.
A mode of operation of a Clustered Multiviewer project where video wall tiles are automatically assigned a router destination when a Room Layout changes, based on the needs of the currently-shown Room Layout.
Dynamic assignment can apply to all tiles, or a sub-set of tiles on the video wall.
A combination of hardware and software that forms a network.
Two identical network systems that form an IP media network with a redundant network topology.
Graphical client user application in a GV Orbit configuration, control and monitoring system. A user can run various projects in a client and can configure devices, control routing, and monitor systems. Graphical soft control and monitoring user panels can be designed and run. Graphical video walls can be designed for multiviewers.
841
Glossary
GV Orchestration Protocol,
GVOP
GVOP Domain
GVOP Domain ID
Head,
Head Display Output,
Multiviewer Output
Home Page
The main messaging protocol used in GV Orbit configuration, control and monitoring systems.
A GV Orbit system employs GVOP Domains to segregate internal communications. The various GV Orbit services, system devices, and GV
Orbit Client applications all communicate with one another; communications may be segregated by using GVOP Domains.
A GV Orbit system employs GVOP Domains specified with a Domain ID number (1 to 252).
A multiviewer output to be shown on a monitor display. The MV-821-IP multiviewer has up to 12 Head Display Outputs and offers these as signals on rear physical connectors and as full ST-2110 video IP streams.
First page (also known as ‘current home’ or ‘default home’) that is displayed by default when a site is opened, or by clicking a dedicated home button, in a site or panel. This page is usually set by you at configuration time.
Log Server Domain
Log Server Service
MapView
A GV Orbit Domain used by the Log Server Service to collect RollCallprotocol device logging data.
A GV Orbit service which collects and collates logging information from
RollCall-protocol devices for the GV Orbit system. The service typically provides logging data to the GV Orbit Monitoring Service.
A control and monitoring GV Orbit project (C&M project) that contains custom screens to enable you to control and monitor a system.
Media IP Network
Monitor Layout
A high-capacity network dedicated to carrying high bit rate media.
The grid of tiles on a monitor of a video wall and the tiles populated on the grid. This refers to video walls designed with the Room Editor tool in GV
Orbit Client.
‘Monitor Layout’ is analogous to ‘Wall Layout’ for video walls designed with the Wall Editor tool.
Monitor Wall,
Video Wall
Multiviewer
One or more monitor display screens arranged and configured to form one larger screen area.
A device that consolidates multiple video sources onto one or more head display outputs for ultimate display on monitor screens.
Multiviewer Input
Multiviewer Output
A video source routed into a multiviewer.
A multiviewer head display output. See ‘Head’.
Multiviewer Cluster,
MV Cluster
A cluster of multiviewer devices configured together and all acting together to serve one or more video walls. A cluster contains one or more
MV-8 Series multiviewer devices.
MV Cluster Manager Service A GV Orbit service which enables a user to configure a cluster of MV-8 series multiviewers as a single multiviewing system, rather than as separate, individual multiviewer devices.
MV-8 Series Multiviewer A Grass Valley multiviewer series which includes router-integrated devices
(for example, MV-831) and stand-alone devices (for example, MV-821-IP IP
842
Network Map
Network View
NP0017
PiP
Overall Alarm
Relay Service
Room
Room file,
.room file
Room Design
Room Editor
Room Layout
Routing Domain
Routing Service
Scaler
Spigot
Stream
GV Orbit
User Guide multiviewer). All MV-8 Series multiviewers share the same core multiviewer functionality.
A tree view representation of system devices and services.
A window that displays a network map. Various device operations can be carried out from this view, such as opening device configuration screens and device alarm history views.
An established Grass Valley dedicated router control protocol.
‘Picture-in-Picture’ and another word for a multiviewer video wall Tile.
A type of virtual alarm that indicates the overall condition of a device or service. It is based on the combined state of constituent alarms and is often generated automatically by a monitoring system.
A GV Orbit service which passes selected GVOP data between two GVOP
Domains. For example, to an MV-821 multiviewer Domain.
A video wall comprising one or more monitors - for example, in a production room of a broadcast facility or OB truck. A Room is served by a cluster of multiviewers. A ‘Room’ is designed in the ‘Room Editor’ tool.
A data file used by a GV Orbit Clustered MV project and which contains the definition of a Room video wall. This cannot be edited outside of GV Orbit
Client . The Room file is usually referred to as the Room.
A design for a Room, a video wall, including monitor arrangement, tile layouts, source and destination assignments. A ‘Room Design’ is stored in a ‘Room File’ in a ‘Clustered MV’ project.
An editing facility in GV Orbit Client enabling a video wall to be designed and edited in a GV Orbit Clustered MV project.
The grid of tiles on an entire video wall and the tiles populated on the grid.
This refers to video walls designed with the Room Editor tool in GV orbit
Client.
A GVOP Domain used by the ‘Routing Service’ for routing control messages in a GV Orbit system.
A GV Orbit service which provides a translation between dedicated routing protocols and the GV Orbit router controller for GV Orbit clients and other services. The service enables the state of all routes and routing levels to be saved as a snapshot. The service allows routes to be made from the GV Orbit
Client and source and destination names to be known by GV Orbit Client.
An image re-sizing ‘engine’. Several are found within a multiviewer. For example, the MV-8 Series of multiviewers contains 48 ‘Scalers’, one per multiviewer input.
A logical connector on an IP media network. A spigot which sources
(originates, transmits) an IP stream is a source spigot. One which receives an
IP stream is a destination spigot.
A flow of data, video, audio or metadata which arrives at or leaves a device through one of its ports.
843
Glossary
Tally
Tally Routing
Tile,
PiP
Tile Grid
Topology
Video Wall,
Monitor Wall
Wall,
Wall Editor
Wall Layout
Widget
A ‘Tally’ refers to a state of a production system. For example: “On Air”, “Iso”, or “Preview”.
The identity or label of the actual source that is routed to a destination
(routed source).
(Multiviewer video wall context:)
A rectangular area on a video wall screen, usually displaying video inputs and other supporting information.
For example, a tile (or PiP) may display a video picture with audio bars and other related label and status information, including Tally information.
Other information may be displayed in tiles. For example: time; images; or text.
The arrangement of tiles on a monitor of a video wall. A tile grid specifies the position of tiles. A tile grid is then populated with tiles of the required type/ configuration. The default is a video tile.
The logical or physical arrangement of the various devices within a broadcast facility.
One or more monitor display screens arranged and configured to form one larger screen area.
A ‘Wall’ is the name given to a monitor wall that has been designed in the
Wall Editor tool of GV Orbit Client (or Orbit Client). ‘
An editing facility in GV Orbit Client (and in Orbit Client) enabling a video wall to be designed and edited in a GV Orbit multiviewer project. The video wall is served by a single multiviewer.
The grid of tiles on a monitor of a video wall and the tiles populated on the grid. Typically, this refers to video walls designed with the Wall Editor tool.
A graphical element that displays information or let a user interact with various tasks of a control system.
844
GV Orbit
User Guide
845
Grass Valley Technical Support
For technical assistance, contact our international support center, at
1-800-547-8949 (US and Canada) or +1 530 478 4148.
To obtain a local phone number for the support center nearest you, please consult the
Contact Us section of Grass Valley’s website ( www.grassvalley.com
).
An on-line form for e-mail contact is also available from the website.
Corporate Head Office
Grass Valley
3499 Douglas-B.-Floreani
St-Laurent, Quebec H4S 2C6
Canada
Telephone: +1 514 333 1772
Fax: +1 514 333 9828 www.grassvalley.com
Download
Offentligt link opdateret
Det offentlige link til din chat er blevet opdateret. You may view and manage your chat links after registration here.
Dokument offentligt link
Annonce